TERP10 ERP Basic Process Integration

TERP10

ERP Business Process Integration based on R/3 Enterprise

THE BEST-RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP

 SAP AG© SAP AG 2004 2004

mySAP ERP – R/3 Enterprise, BW3.2, SEM3.5 2005/Q1 Material number: 50069275

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Copyright

Copyright 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.

 SAP AG 2004

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. Microsoft, Windows, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group. Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden. SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary. These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Prerequisites for Participants

Knowledge of business processes in enterprise planning and management Proficiency in navigation within SAP systems

 SAP AG 2004

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Target Audience

Participants
Solution architects, project managers, project team members, and solution consultants who want to gain a broad fundamental understanding of the processes, business interrelations, and integration of the individual business areas within the mySAP ERP solution.

Duration: 10 days

 SAP AG 2004

User notes These training materials are not a teach-yourself program. They complement the explanations provided by your course instructor. Space is provided on each page for you to note down additional information. There may not be sufficient time during the course to complete all the exercises. The exercises provide additional examples that are covered during the course. You can also work through these examples in your own time to increase your understanding of the topics.

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Course Overview

Contents:
Course Goals Course Objectives Course Content Course Overview Diagram Main Business Scenario

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

1-1
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Course Goals

This course will prepare you to: Explain how the fundamental business processes interact with mySAP ERP in the areas of Sales Order Management, Material and Production Planning, Procurement, Inventory Management, Project Management, Plant Maintenance, Human Capital Management, and Financial and Management Accounting. Understand the analytical & reporting functions in mySAP ERP, especially in the components SAP SEM and SAP BW

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

1-2
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Course Objectives

At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to: Describe enterprise resource planning based on mySAP ERP. Explain SAP NetWeaver as the technical platform of my SAP ERP. Describe the integration of the mySAP ERP core applications. Perform integrated processes in mySAP ERP.

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

1-3
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Course Content I
Preface Unit 1 Course Overview Unit 2 ERP Basics Unit 3 SAP NetWeaver Unit 4 Business Warehouse Unit 5 Sales Order Management Unit 6 Material Planning Unit 7 Manufacturing Execution Unit 8 Procurement Cycle Unit 9 Inventory and Warehouse Management

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

1-4
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Course Content II

Unit 10 Lifecycle Data Management Unit 11 Project Management Unit 12 Enterprise Asset Management Unit 13 Human Capital Management Unit 14 Financial Accounting Unit 15 Management Accounting Unit 16 Strategic Enterprise Management Exercises Solutions Appendices
 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

1-5
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Course Content III
Appendices Appendix A – Navigation Appendix B – Glossary Appendix C – Outlook to Business Suite Components Appendix D – Process Manufacturing Appendix E – Process Manufacturing - Exercises and Solutions Appendix F – Repetitive Manufacturing Appendix G – Repetitive Manufacturing - Exercises and Solutions Appendix H – Additional Procurement Functionality

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

1-6
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Course Overview Diagram
TERP10
Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

1-7
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Main Business Scenario

You are involved in the implementation of mySAP ERP components. Therefore, you need to understand the integrated logistics and financial processes in R/3 Enterprise, and the use of analytical components such as Business Warehouse and Strategic Enterprise Management.

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

1-8
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

ERP Basics

Contents:
mySAP ERP Positioning Organizational Levels Master Data Transactional Data Reporting (including BW)

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-1
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

ERP Basics: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Positioning of R/3 Enterprise towards mySAP ERP Describe the SAP R/3 Enterprise organizational levels Describe the function of SAP R/3 Enterprise Master Data Explain mySAP ERP reporting solutions

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-2
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

ERP Basics: Course Overview Diagram
TERP10
Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-3
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

ERP Basics: Business Scenario

Organizational levels and master data provide the framework that supports the business transactions. Reporting allows you to view master data, as well as the output of business transactions. As a project team member, it is important that you understand the fundamental concepts of organizational levels, master data, transaction data, and reporting.

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-4
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

ERP Basics: mySAP ERP Positioning Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: Understand the positioning of R/3 Enterprise towards mySAP ERP

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-5
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

A New Wave of Information Technology
Business Requirements

SAP R/2

SAP R/3
Adaptable business

mySAP ERP
Service-Oriented Architectures

Leverage
Integrated processes

Strategic Value

Replace
Centralized Computing

Client/Server Architecture

X

Efficiency & Control

Automation
Advancement in Technology
 SAP AG 2004

Enterprise Services Architecture (ESA) enables business innovation by leveraging existing IT assets, maximizing agility, and reducing Total Cost of Ownership (TCO). SAP Netweaver is the application and integration platform that best supports ESA using Web Services Technology. Starting from the 70‘s there have been major technology waves – from mainframe computing to client server architectures, and now from client server technology to service oriented architectures In the past such shifts in technology have caused a complete replacement of the underlying IT infrastructure, but with the shift from SAP R/3 to mySAP ERP that‘s no longer true SAP will protect and leverage the 200 billion $ investments already made in R/3 and will take an evolutionary approach for the next technology shift towards web services driven architectures

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-6
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Architecture of mySAP ERP
Focus in this course Application
mySAP ERP Edition 2004 Additional Components
Self-Service Procurement Internet Sales Self Services Strategic Enterprise M anagement … and more Composite Applications

mySAP ERP Edition 2003 Additional Components
Self Services Self-Service Procurement Internet Sales

SAP R/3
up to 4.6C

SAP R/3 Enterprise SAP R/3 Enterprise

Strategic Enterprise Management
… and more

Application SAP Basis

SAP R/3 Enterprise
SAP NetWeaver™ Composite Application Framework
PEOPLE INTEGRATION Multi Channel Access Portal Collaboration

SAP ECC 5.00
SAP NetWeaver™ ‘04 Composite Application Framework
PEOPLE INTEGRATION Multi Channel Access Portal Collaboration

SAP Web Application Server

Technology

Bus. Intelligence Know ledge Mgm t
Master Data Mgm t PROCESS INTEGRATION Integration Business Broker Process Mgmt APPLICATION PLATFORM J2EE ABAP DB and OS Abstraction

INFORMATION INTEGRATION

INFORMATION INTEGRATION Bus. Intelligence Know ledge Mgm t Master Data Mgm t PROCESS INTEGRATION Integration Business Broker Process Mgmt APPLICATION PLATFORM J2EE ABAP DB and OS Abstraction

Life Cycle Mgmt

Life Cycle Mgmt

 SAP AG 2004

This picture gives a good overview of the evolution of the ERP solutions from SAP. After the SAP R/1 and SAP R/2 products, SAP introduced SAP R/3 in 1992. Now there was a two layer architecture (SAP Basis and SAP Application). With mySAP ERP, which has been available since March 2003, SAP offered a bundle of components supporting ERP business processes. At this point, SAP R/3 Enterprise was one of those components. As you can see here, even from this point mySAP ERP was more than just SAP R/3 Enterprise plus SAP NetWeaver, since it offered many functional enhancements like Self Services, SAP SEM, and others. As mentioned in previous slides, the next steps include a tighter integration within mySAP ERP (especially with the SAP NetWeaver capabilities), enhancements in the area of usability and employee efficiency, and the reduction of TCO. The SAP ERP Central Component (ECC) represents the next step in this evolution. As you can see, the orange boxes represent the items that can be operated on an SAP ERP Central Component. And in the SAP NetWeaver area, you can see the dark blue frames that are technically integrated in the SAP ERP Central Component (Business Intelligence only on a project basis). Looking at the 2004 edition, it is clear that mySAP ERP is more than just SAP ERP Central Component plus SAP NetWeaver. Please note, that the value for the individual customer might come from one component of mySAP ERP – or the combination of several components inside mySAP ERP. When you explain the value to your customers, it is wise not to focus only on a single component. In this slide you can see the evolution of the SAP ERP solution. However, it is important to understand that this page mixes together two different views: the technical and the license view. We will come to this in the next slides in detail. But first, let’s view the benefit the customer already received with SAP R/3 Enterprise and how they are well-prepared for mySAP ERP, once they are on SAP R/3 Enterprise.
© SAP AG TERP10 2-7
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Since Release 4.6C, SAP R/3 consisted of two parts: SAP Basis (the technology platform) and the application. To come to a higher SAP R/3 Release, customers had to upgrade both the technology and the application. With SAP R/3 Enterprise, the latest version of SAP R/3, SAP was introducing a new part within SAP R/3, the SAP R/3 Enterprise Extensions. From that point, new functionality could be delivered in the SAP R/3 system by just upgrading the SAP R/3 Enterprise Extension layer. Even if upgrading requires some investment, the upgrade of this layer has been reduced, because the Enterprise Core is not touched by this upgrade. With mySAP ERP, a new mySAP solution was born. Although there are many other SAP components included in mySAP ERP, SAP R/3 Enterprise is also included in mySAP ERP. This explains why a customer who has implemented SAP R/3 Enterprise has nothing to do from a technical perspective when changing his license to mySAP ERP.

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-8
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

From R/3 to mySAP ERP
SAP R/3 customers need to be aware of the fact that their “Enterprise Application Base”, SAP R/3, needs to evolve into mySAP ERP to be ready for the future … There are factors that are leading SAP R/3 customers to consider modernization, consolidation, and rationalization of their ERP environment. Some situations to look out for:
They want to consolidate multiple SAP R/3 systems to reduce cost and optimize system landscape They have new reporting & analytics, regulatory, and transparency requirements They need to integrate multiple, diverse ERP and other systems Restructuring activities, mergers, and acquisitions require new target ERP landscapes Some want to go to the mySAP Business Suite, but the step is too large and they are looking for a next step Some simply want to extend the scope of their existing ERP functionality

… mySAP ERP provides a solution to these problems!
 SAP AG 2004

What is mySAP ERP today and what will it be tomorrow? On the previous slide, you can see the first stage of mySAP ERP. The first step was to offer a bundle of existing SAP components to cover today’s requirements in ERP software. This offered additional functionalities in all areas of ERP (compared with a SAP R/3 license). The next step, now, is to start tighter integration of the SAP components included in mySAP ERP. One focus is usability and employee efficiency. This means that SAP will develop new functionality in such a way that it utilizes the full SAP NetWeaver stack. That would allow, for example, Web applications to get accessed through the SAP Enterprise Portal. Even traditional functionality, which required the SAPGUI, can be re-developed in a way that makes it optionally available through the portal infrastructure via Web applications. Another focus is reducing TCO by simplifying the system landscape. A first step in this direction will be carried out in 2004. We will come back to this later, when we are talking about integrated SAP components. However, beside lowering TCO and enhancing usability and employee efficiency, a further goal is to offer new functionality in all areas of ERP, as this is beneficial to customers.

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-9
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

mySAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver
mySAP ERP is the successor ERP offering to SAP R/3. Functionality-wise mySAP ERP includes all the functionality of SAP R/3 Enterprise
Plus a large number of additional business processes Integrated and Personalized functionality

mySAP ERP
Analytics Financials Human Capital Management Operations Corporate Services SAP NetWeaver™
PEOPLE INTEGRATION Multi channel access Composite Application Framework Portal Collaboration

Technology-wise mySAP ERP is built on SAP NetWeaver … Self Services, Collaborative Folders and Collaborative Projects… … Strategic Enterprise Management, Manager Self Services… …Financial Supply Chain Management, Self-Service Procurement… …Self Services, Adobe Printing Forms… Some examples of functionality leveraging NetWeaver technologies
 SAP AG 2004

INFORMATION INTEGRATION Bus. Intelligence Knowledge Mgmt Master Data Mgmt PROCESS INTEGRATION Integration Broker Business Process M gmt

Life Cycle Mgmt

APPLICATION PLATFORM J2EE ABAP DB and OS Abstraction

mySAP ERP is powered by SAP NetWeaver. Let’s now have a look at how the solution is already making use of the capabilities of SAP NetWeaver. This slide gives some examples that answer this question. One very good example is the Self Services provided with mySAP ERP. They utilize the portal capabilities, make use of SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) through the Manager Self Services, and are technically based on the SAP Web Application Server. Other functionalities, like the Self-Service Procurement, utilize the Integration Broker (SAP Exchange Infrastructure).

© SAP AG

TERP10

2-10
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

All the components shown are shipped with mySAP ERP. © SAP AG TERP10 2-11 Visit: www. it will only be part of the shipment starting in July 2004 if the customer is part of the rampup. since one SAP component can offer different functions.mySAP ERP Bill of material SAP R/3 Enterprise (default until end of ramp-up of SAP ECC) SAP ERP Central Component (mass availability from April 2005 with end of ramp-up) SAP Strategic Enterprise Management SAP E-Recruitment SAP Learning Solution SAP Financial Supply Chain Management Employee Self-Services / Manager Self-Services SAP cProject Suite SAP Internet Sales Web Application Component SAP Business Warehouse (as part of SAP NetWeaver) SAP Enterprise Portal (as part of SAP NetWeaver) SAP Exchange Infrastructure (as part of SAP NetWeaver) SAP Supplier Relationship Management (Self-service procurement classic scenario only) Focus in this course  SAP AG 2004 Here you can find the bill of material for mySAP ERP.co. Since SAP ERP Central Component will reach its mass availability with the end of the SAP ramp-up process.sapeducation. It does not reflect the complete functionality of mySAP ERP.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . Please note that this bill of material represents the software a customer can install/upgrade.

sapeducation.and Asset Management mySAP SRM Sales Order Mgt. Business Solutions are part of mySAP ERP which before had to be licensed separately with the benefit to be pre – integrated due its development being continously based on our Netweaver platform. Manufacturing & Transportation mySAP CRM mySAP SCM SAP NetWeaver  SAP AG 2004 mySAP ERP is the solution suite within the mySAP Business Suite It is based on SAP´s listening to customers. It is ready to service operational.com . Quality.mySAP ERP is a solution within mySAP Business Suite mySAP Business Suite mySAP PLM Lifecycle Data-. Project-. user groups and further inputs from analysts and other thought leaders to better serve market demands of our customers and prospects. tactical and strategic needs of enterprise and beyond enterprises ensuring collabortion among partners. Let us have a closer look at the solution map you are all familiar with from a high level perspective : mySAP ERP 2004 going into ramp – up end of june / beginning of July 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-12 Visit: www. Internet Sales Purchase Order Requisitioning mySAP ERP Inventory & Warehouse Mgmt.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

co. Health & Travel Management Safety People Integration Mobile Business Information Integration Business Warehouse Quality Management Incentive and Commission Management Process Integration Exchange Infrastructure Asset Management Real Estate Management Application Platform PeopleCentric ERP * Collaborative Project Management * Internet Sales SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal Industry Retrofits * (*) coming new with mySAP ERP 2004  SAP AG 2004 The picture you see here represents the solution map of mySAP ERP. As you can see. This picture just shows the top-level of the mySAP ERP solution map. As with all other mySAP solutions. this slide also highlights several areas. Or the customer can implement Self-Service Procurement. Note: You must have a registered user id to access the map.mySAP ERP Solution Map 2004 Analytics Strategic Enterprise Management Corporate Governance * New General Ledger * E-Learning and E-Recruiting Manager and Employee Self Services Financial Supply Chain Management Self Services Analytics Financials Human Capital Management Operations: Value Generation Operations: Support Corporate Services Solution & Integration Platform Self-Service Procurement Strategic Enterprise Management Corporate Governance Employee Relationship Management Purchasing Financial Analytics Financial Accounting Employee Lifecycle Management Operations Analytics Management Accounting Workforce Analytics Financial Supply Chain Management Employee Transaction Workforce Deployment Management Distribution Sales Order Management Service Order Management Inventory Manufacturing Management Product Structure Project Management Management Environment.sapeducation. you can look at the solution map at the SAP Service Marketplace. or other functionalities. © SAP AG TERP10 2-13 Visit: www. where you can click on the different areas in the map to get more detail. These are the areas where mySAP ERP offers additional capabilities compared with SAP R/3 Enterprise.com/businessmaps --> CrossIndustry Maps --> Enterprise Resource Planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Internet Sales. As an example. To find out more. All these functions are not available to the SAP R/3 license customer. a mySAP ERP customer can use SAP NetWeaver capabilities by implementing the SAP Business Warehouse or the SAP Enterprise Portal. The map is available at http://service.sap. a solution map shows you the content provided by the specific solution.com .

react to competition. utilize the Integration Broker (SAP Exchange Infrastructure). …) and tactical levels (integrated BI and collaboration).sapeducation. organizations now have the flexibility to extend real-time operations beyond the enterprise to customers.and role-based portal environments enable easier system-wide access to one consolidated and consistent business process view which accelerates user adoption and improves collaboration © SAP AG TERP10 2-14 Visit: www. like the Self-Service Procurement.co. aiming at better integrating customers and partners – key to growth strategies across industries – calls for additional functionality like e-selling and procurement With mySAP ERP. mySAP ERP is powered by SAP NetWeaver. SAP R/3 SAP R/3 Scope Your Suppliers & Partners Your Organization Your Customers mySAP ERP Scope ADAPTABLE business processes supported by FLEXIBLE platform Improved PRODUCTIVITY and increased INSIGHT by Role-based Portal/User Interface  SAP AG 2004 So – what’s new with mySAP ERP ? First. Second . Other functionalities. Let’s have a look at how the solution is already making use of the capabilities of SAP NetWeaver. and are technically based on the SAP Web Application Server.Future scope of mySAP ERP vs. the adaptive extended enterprise requires every employee to have the information he/she needs to make timely and efficient decisions. partners and suppliers to speed change and fuel growth. Third. mySAP ERP’s intuitive Web. the value chain coverage.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . One good example is the Self Services provided with mySAP ERP. across industries – and mostly in mid-market – flexibility/adaptability have become have become key success factors (new products faster. make use of SAP BW (SAP Business Information Warehouse) through the Manager Self Services. They utilize the portal capabilities. …). SAP NetWeaver supports this requirement at the operational (RFID.

In addition. SAP tightly integrates corporate reporting. you benefit from improved productivity. as well as data locked away in legacy and non-SAP systems can be easily extended to the mySAP ERP environment to lower your operational costs further. in real time.THE ‘NEW NEWS’ MESSAGING Overarching Positioning Statement With mySAP ERP. and stay with you as your business grows and needs change in the future. With this improved efficiency. you’ll be well positioned to speed change. while planning for and better responding to the market and technology changes that impact your business performance and growth. and advanced flexibility and adaptability in accelerating business strategies. Advanced Flexibility and Adaptability to Lower Costs and Speed Change mySAP ERP. Open Web technology gives you the flexibility and agility you need to enable. powered by SAP NetWeaver™ technology. with mySAP ERP. Financials. Operations and Corporate Services built on powerful open technology.sapeducation. Basel II and IAS as well as global HR regulations. suppliers and partners. assure regulatory compliance and increase corporate trust. ensures easier system-wide access to one consolidated and consistent business process view which increases user adoption. Trust SAP As Your Partner for Long-Term Growth For new customers.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. As one example. providing the insight you need to proactively isolate potential areas of concern and exploit pockets of opportunity.com . you can manage IT costs more effectively by uniquely protecting and leveraging the investments you’ve already made in SAP R/3. Financials. This coupled with mySAP ERP’s intuitive Web. The result is the sound internal control and transparent financial environment you need to mitigate risk. you’re assured the right information. is uniquely qualified to leverage the best practices of more than 25 industries into your business. All of which means that mySAP ERP is the best choice for gaining tight operational control of all activities today. you empower everyone in your organization with the information they need to react and proactively respond to market changes quicker than their competitors. modify and deploy processes that automatically adapt and accelerate business strategies. People’s skills and training. With this complete and integrated suite of next generation analytics. SCM or PLM functionality as your business scenarios demand over time. The market leader with 30 years’ experience in companies of all sizes and in more countries than any other vendor. With mySAP ERP. SAP with its world class partner network. Unlike other vendors.co. lets you seamlessly integrate end-to-end processes into one scalable and adaptable industry solution with the option to incrementally add the right mix of CRM.and role-based portal environments. fully-integrated suite of Human Capital Management. SAP is the safest and most cost-effective choice in today’s increasingly complex global environment. Operations and Corporate Services functionality that can be quickly implemented to achieve a fast time to benefit with minimal disruption to your business. Improved Productivity for Greater Efficiency and Quicker Responsiveness Accelerate operations to the next level of efficiency by extending the reach of real time business processes to engage and connect more users within and beyond your enterprise—including customers. You can trust SAP to solve your complex business challenges today. increased insight. collaboration and productivity. And. © SAP AG TERP10 2-15 Visit: www. SAP offers the only complete. you can swiftly sense and respond to customer requirements in real time and strategically learn and adapt to market insights by extending processes beyond the enterprise to include your entire business ecosystem. analysis and compliance with your underlying business process and transaction systems into one complete system. Human Capital Management. mySAP ERP delivers the most comprehensive and efficient corporate governance functionality by enabling you to confidently comply with the unique requirements of multiple international standards—including Sarbanes-Oxley. as the cornerstone of mySAP Business Suite. as new business scenarios and technologies emerge. Increased Insight for More Assured Decision-Making Deepen your understanding of activities across your entire business network to improve decision-making.

com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.co.ERP Basics: mySAP ERP Positioning Topic Summary You are now able to: Understand the positioning of R/3 Enterprise towards mySAP ERP  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-16 Visit: www.

sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.ERP Basics: Organizational Levels Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. you will be able to: Describe the SAP Enterprise organizational levels  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-17 Visit: www.com .

A Company Code is a unit included in the balance sheet of a legally-independent enterprise and is the central organizational element of Financial Accounting.co. A Plant can manufacture product. In Inventory Management. plants. the Sales Organization is the central organizational element that controls the terms of sale to the customer.sapeducation. The Client represents the enterprise/headquarters group. storage locations. Organizational elements may be assigned to a single application (such as Sales Organization assigned to Sales and Distribution. Examples: The highest-level element of all organizational elements is the Client. They are used to represent the enterprise structure in terms of legal and/or business-related purposes. or provide a service. and profit centers. material stocks can be differentiated within one plant according to Storage Location. Plant is the central organizational unit. Division is usually used to represent product line. or to several applications (such as Plant assigned to Materials Management and Production Planning).Organizational Structure – Terminology SAP Enterprise Client Subsidiary Company Company Code Plant Factory Sales Organization Department Warehouses Division Business Area Sales Organization Division Storage Locations  SAP AG 2004 Organizational Elements: A company’s enterprise structure is mapped to SAP applications using organizational elements. In the context of Production Planning. Organizational elements include legal company entities. © SAP AG TERP10 2-18 Visit: www.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. sales offices. In the context of Sales and Distribution. distribute product.

the separate enterprise areas can be integrated and the structure of the whole enterprise represented in the SAP System. the legal and organizational structure of an enterprise can be presented in different views.co. © SAP AG TERP10 2-19 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . Flexible organizational elements in the SAP System enable more complex enterprise structures to be represented. tracked. By linking the organizational elements. All of the enterprise data in an SAP System implementation is split into at least the client area. The client can be an enterprise group with several subsidiaries. bear in mind that they define the structure for how data is to be entered. If there are many organizational elements. This links are defined in Customizing. and usually into lower level organizational structures as well.sapeducation.Organizational Structure – Levels Client Company Code 1000 Company Code 3000 Controlling Area 2000 Plant 1000 Plant 1100 Plant 1200 Storage Location 0001 Storage Location 0002 Storage Location 0003  SAP AG 2004 The highest-level element of all organizational elements is the client. When defining the organizational elements. and extracted from the SAP system.

sapeducation.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .ERP Basics: Organizational LevelsTopic Summary You are now able to: Describe the SAP Enterprise organizational levels  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-20 Visit: www.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: Describe the function of Master Data  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-21 Visit: www.ERP Basics: Master Data – Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.co.sapeducation.com .

materials.Master Data – Customer Master General Data (cross-enterprise) Master Data (Customer Master Data) Financial Accounting Data (only relevant for company code) Sales Data (only salesrelevant data)  SAP AG 2004 Master Data: Data which is used long-term in the SAP System for several business processes. A customer master contains key information that defines the business relationship between a company and its customer.co. The customer account number is assigned on this level. The master data is used to support execution of key business processes such as customer requests.The customer master is organized into three views which are each located at a different organizational level: General Data (Client). Master data is created centrally and can be used by all applications and all authorized users. and vendors. That means the same customer has an explicit accounts receivable number in all company codes from a financial view. Data on the client level can be used by all company codes. deliveries.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Examples of master data in SAP include customers. Master data also has an organizational aspect as the information is organized into views which are assigned to organizational elements. invoices. © SAP AG TERP10 2-22 Visit: www.sapeducation. and payments. and Sales Data (Sales Area).com . Financial Accounting Data (Company Code).

Transactions Company Code Sales Organization Distribution Channel Division Plant Storage Location Customer Master Material Master Ordering Party 1xxx Item 10 20 Material Quantity HD-1300 P-103 1 2 Sales Document  SAP AG 2004 Transactions: Application programs which execute business processes in the SAP System such as creating a customer order. applicable organizational elements must be assigned. Document: A data record that is generated when a transaction is carried out. such as the price per unit of quantity. the material master record stores information. When performing each transaction. or approving a leave request.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and stock per storage location that is processed during order entry. you must take transport agreements. relevant data for the activity from the master record of the business partner is simply copied. To avoid re-entering this information each time for every activity related to these business partners. Assignments to the enterprise structure in the document are generated in addition to the information stored for the customer and material. with business partners into consideration. The document generated by the transaction contains all relevant pre-defined information from the master data and organizational elements. This concept is valid for processing data for each master record included in the activity.com . © SAP AG TERP10 2-23 Visit: www. delivery and payment conditions. and so on. A document is generated for each transaction carried out in the SAP System. When creating an order for a customer. posting an incoming payment. In the same way.sapeducation.co.

co.ERP Basics: Master Data – Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the function of Master Data  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-24 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.com .

sapeducation.ERP Basics: Reporting Solutions – Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. you will be able to: Explain ERP analytical & reporting solutions  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-25 Visit: www.co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

the Logistics Information System (LIS) updates relevant information.com . © SAP AG TERP10 2-26 Visit: www. The aggregation leads to an improvement of the response times and of the quality of the resulting reports.sapeducation.co. Data can be aggregated on a qualitative as well as on a quantitative basis: quantitative reduction by aggregating on period level qualitative reduction by selecting specific key figures You can then use the tools in the Sales Information System (SIS) to analyze this aggregated information. You can also update information from other systems in the LIS.Data Warehouse Concepts OLAP Analysis tools Online Analytical Processing DATA WAREHOUSE Aggregated information OLTP External data Materials management Sales and distribution Production planning Financial accounting Online Transaction Processing Integrated application modules  SAP AG 2004 While you are using the transactions in the Logistics applications. The LIS aggregates and stores this information in the data warehouse.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

and characteristics. queries.com . OLAP technology permits multi-dimensional analyses according to various business perspectives. and maintain all data procurement processes. Business Content includes other preconfigured objects such as InfoCubes. monitor. SAP BW enables Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) for staging information from large amounts of operative and historical data. © SAP AG TERP10 2-27 Visit: www.co. Administrator Workbench (AWB) functions allow you to control. divided into roles. As well as roles. Business Content provides targeted information to companies. The Business Explorer (BEx) component provides users with extensive analysis options. and the Internet.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. online services. key figures.Distinction: Operative/Informative Environments Customers Operative Environment Business Processes Products Business Strategy Orders OLTP OLAP Extraction Informative Environment Knowledge Transformation (Homogenization Cleansing) Data Warehouse  SAP AG 2004 SAP BW enables the analysis of data from operative SAP applications as well as all other business applications and external data sources such as databases. These objects facilitate the implementation of SAP BW. which is preconfigured by Business Content for core areas and processes. The BW server. This helps your employees to carry out their tasks. allows you to examine the relationships in every area within your company.

(2) multi-dimensional (OLAP) analysis. in the Internet or Intranet (Web Application Design).0 00 .co.0 00 . and Analysis include (1) query design using the BEx Analyzer. and (5) wizard-help. (2) role-based staging of information.0 00 . (3) basis for creating analytical applications. Query.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.00 EUR 30. Web Application Design encompasses a wide spectrum of interactive Web-based Business Intelligence scenarios that you can modify to suit your requirements using standard Web technology. (3) personalization.00 EUR 10. (3) geographical analysis. Web Application Design includes (1) interactive analytical content. and personal digital assistants). (4) ad-hoc reporting.0 00 .00 EUR 20. (4) creation of iViews for a portal.SAP BWs Three Layer Architecture Reporting 35. © SAP AG TERP10 2-28 Visit: www.00 EUR 25. Portal Integration includes (1) single point of entry. (4) publication of iViews.00 EUR 15. and (5) integration of unstructured data.00 EUR EUR Becke r Ber i n l Baye r VW Da imler Auftra gse inga ng Bex Analyzer (MS Excel) Web Application OLAP Processor Mobile Intelligence BW Server Metadata Repository InfoProvider Master Data Transaction Data Administrator Workbench Staging Engine Data Sources SAP R/3 SAP BW Non-SAP File Provider XML mySAP Business Suite Database  SAP AG 2004 BEx is the SAP BW component that provides flexible reporting and analysis tools that you can use for strategic analysis and supporting the decision-making process in your company. BEx allows a wide spectrum of users to access information in SAP BW. Reporting. Employees with access authorization can analyze historical and current data at differing levels of detail and from different perspectives.sapeducation.0 00 .com .00 EUR 5. WAP-enabled mobile telephones. This can be done in Enterprise Portal from an iView that you can call alongside the applications where you extract the data. (2) information cockpits and dashboards. Web Application Design allows you to implement generic OLAP navigation in Web applications and in Business Intelligence cockpits for both simple and highly-individual scenarios.0 00 . Highly individual scenarios with customerdefined user interface elements can be realized using standard markup languages (HTML) for example. and (5) alerts.0 00 . or using a mobile device (for example.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.ERP Basics: Reporting Solutions – Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain ERP reporting solutions  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-29 Visit: www.co.com .

ERP Basics: Unit Summary You are now able to: Describe the SAP R/3 Enterprise organizational levels Describe the function of Master Data Explain ERP analytical & reporting solutions  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-30 Visit: www.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.com .

SAP NetWeaver Contents: Basics of NetWeaver  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 3-1 Visit: www.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation.

sapeducation.SAP NetWeaver: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.com . you will be able to: Describe the components of NetWeaver Explain how NetWeaver supports the business processes Describe the strategic advantage of NetWeaver  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 3-2 Visit: www.

co.SAP NetWeaver: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 3-3 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation.

SAP NetWeaver works with your existing IT infrastructure to enable and manage change. As a project team member.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 3-4 Visit: www. you need an overview of SAP NetWeaver.sapeducation.SAP NetWeaver: Business Scenario As a comprehensive integration and application platform.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

sapeducation.co. you will be able to: Describe the components of NetWeaver Explain how NetWeaver supports the business processes Describe the strategic advantage of NetWeaver  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 3-5 Visit: www.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.SAP NetWeaver: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

SAP Business One is a completely new product that can be easily linked to existing SAP landscapes by XML. Even the smallest companies can use this software profitably. MDM) Information Integration (SAP BW) Process Integration (XI) Process Integration (SAP XI) Application SAP Business One Web AS) Platform (SAP  SAP AG 2004 SAP NetWeaver is the technical foundation on which almost all SAP solutions are currently based. SAP Business One contains functions important for running your business. and (4) application platform. such as financial accounting. customer management.SAP NetWeaver Integration SAP xApps SAP Customer Service Network mySAP Business Suite mySAP PLM mySAP SCM mySAP SRM Industry Solutions mySAP Financials mySAP HR mySAP CRM mySAP ERP SAP BI Corporate Services Operations SAP Enterprise Portal SAP R/3 Enterprise SAP NetWeaver NetWeaver SAP Application Platform (SAP Web AS) People Integration (SAP EP) People Integration (Portal) Information Integration (BW. SAP NetWeaver provides core functions for the infrastructure of your business solutions in four subcomponents including (1) people integration. The software is programmed in C++ and can be installed under various Microsoft Windows operating systems. in particular SAP Business One.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Not all SAP solutions are based on SAP NetWeaver.co.sapeducation. SAP Cross Applications – (SAP xAPPS) SAP Enterprise Portal – (SAP EP) SAP Business Intelligence (SAP BI) SAP Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI) SAP Web Application Server (SAP Web AS) © SAP AG TERP10 3-6 Visit: www. (2) information integration. (3) process integration. and warehouse management. purchasing.

com .SAP NetWeaver: Integration of People Integration of people.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.NET and J2EE interoperability … IBM Web Sphere SAP NetWeaver™ People Integration Multi-Channel Access Composite Application Framework Portal Collaboration Life Cycle Management The technological foundation for SAP customers and partners Solutions with lower total cost of ownership (TCO) The Enterprise Services Architecture (ESA) increases the flexibility and extendibility of business processes Information Integration Business Intelligence Knowledge Manage ment Microsoft . © SAP AG TERP10 3-7 Visit: www.co.sapeducation. The functions of the SAP Enterprise Portal are of key importance here.NET Master Data Manage ment Process Integration Integration Broker Business Process Manage ment … Application Platform J2EE ABAP DB and OS Abstraction DB and OS Abstraction  SAP AG 2004 People integration ensures that your employees have the information and functions that they require to perform their work as quickly and efficiently as possible. information and processes Across technological and organizational boundaries Full .

the Application Platform has Java 2 Enterprise Edition (J2EE) and Advanced Business Application Programming (ABAP) runtime environments and therefore supports Web applications and Web services in an open development environment.sapeducation. scalable. © SAP AG TERP10 3-8 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Ascential) High quality business data Information Integration Business Intelligence Knowledge Manage ment Master Data Management Consistent storage of master data Master Data Manage ment SAP Exchange Infrastructure Proxy generation and mapping tools Integration Directory with content Enterprise and vendor potential of SAP Process Integration Integration Broker Business Process Manage ment Application Platform J2EE ABAP DB and OS Abstraction DB and OS Abstraction SAP Web Application Server Tested.SAP NetWeaver: Application Server SAP Mobile Infrastructure Closely linked to and integrated with SAP business applications SAP Enterprise Portal Optimized aggregation of information Roles Knowledge Management & Collaboration Composite Application Framework SAP NetWeaver™ People Integration Multi-Channel Access Portal Collaboration Life Cycle Management SAP Business Information Warehouse Closely integrated with SAP Open architecture (Crystal.com . and powerful platform Modernization of existing IT infrastructures and leveraged investments  SAP AG 2004 With SAP Web Application Server.co.

standardsbased connectivity (XML. Business Process Mgmt Interoperability with MS Biztalk Server Technical. strategic integration and application platform that allows you to reduce the Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) of your SAP landscape. © SAP AG TERP10 3-9 Visit: www. SAP NetWeaver helps you to bring together and organize people. xApps are the new class of integrated standard software.NET MS Office Integration MS Exchange Integration Integration of MS Content Management Server Integration of SQL Server Analysis Services Integration with IBM Content Manager Information Integration Knowledge Management Business Intelligence Master Data Management Interoperability with WebSphere Business Integration Process Integration Integration Broker.SAP NetWeaver: Application Platform IBM WebSphere Portal Development Kit for WebSphere Integration of Lotus Sametime SAP NetWeaver People Integration Multi-Channel Access Portal Collaboration Microsoft . Web Services) Eclipse Based Java IDE Application Platform J2EE ABAP DB and OS Abstraction Visual Studio . xApps extend existing (heterogeneous) IT landscapes with new business processes.NET and IBM WebSphere.co. SAP xApps (SAP Cross Applications) allow you to integrate existing applications with each other by accessing existing datasets and functions using open interfaces.NET integration Technical. information. At the same time.NET Portal Development Kit for . All SAP solutions will be based on SAP NetWeaver in the future.com . Web Services)  SAP AG 2004 SAP Net Weaver is an extensive. and business processes across ystem and organization boundaries. known as xApps. SAP NetWeaver therefore provides the technical foundation for an Enterprise Service Architecture.NET Smart Client on . standardsbased-connectivity (XML. This means that you can implement new applications based on an existing infrastructure.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. it supports cross-application software.sapeducation. Different software interfaces ensure full interoperability of applications that are running on Microsoft .

This is achieved by using XML data packages and workflow scenarios. and SAP APO use SAP Web AS  SAP AG 2004 The Information Integration level provides access to all structured and unstructured information in your company. Structured information generally means SAP data or data from SAP systems. and Master Data Management also provide functions for central data storage. a component of the SAP Enterprise Portal. Knowledge Management.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The core component here is the SAP Business Information Warehouse which provides data from many different systems for evaluation.SAP NetWeaver: System Integration R/3 CRM SAP R/3 Enterprise SAP CRM 4. the data could very well have its own structure. © SAP AG TERP10 3-10 Visit: www. SAP CRM.com .0 Application Functions Basis Functions SAP Web AS SAP Web AS Many SAP software components. This does not mean structureless.sapeducation. Process integration ensures that business processes run across system boundaries in a heterogeneous system landscape.co. among other things. such as SAP R/3 Enterprise. SAP BW. All other information is described as unstructured. The SAP Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI) plays a central role here. but not a SAP-specific structure.

Together with the database.com . UNIX) Operating system and database independence Convenient development environment Support for various protocols (such as HTTP. tested runtime environment for ABAP and Java programs High scalability External Systems (SAP. SAP Web AS forms the Application Platform of SAP NetWeaver. the SAP J2EE Engine.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. SAP Web Application Server also has a runtime environment for J2EE-based Java programs. SAP DB) In addition to the traditional runtime environment for ABAP programs. browser) Application Level JAVA (J2EE) ABAP Support for various operating systems (such as Microsoft Windows.SAP NetWeaver: Architecture SAP Web Application Server offers: Multi-level architecture Reliable.co. RFC) Highest security standards for the execution of complex business processes  SAP AG 2004 Database Level Support for various databases (such as DB2. © SAP AG TERP10 3-11 Visit: www. Non-SAP) Presentation Level Support for various user interfaces (SAP GUI.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. A framework for executing complex business processes that meets the highest security standards. Support for open techniucal standards such as: HTTP. X. Unicode. HTTPS. A reliable and user-friendly development environment. SMTP. SSO. HTML. evolved over more than 10 years. SOAP. Support for various operting systems and database systems. and WML.com . XML.sapeducation.co.SAP NetWeaver: Database System SOAP/XML Browser Internet Communication Manager SAP Web AS RFC External Systems. WebDAV. SSL. SAP Web Application Server offers: A reliable and thoroughly tested runtime environment.509. High scalability inherited from SAP Basis. © SAP AG TERP10 3-12 Visit: www. SAP GUI SAP GUI DIAG SAP J2EE Engine fast RFC HTTP(S) SMTP ABAP Operating System Windows Linux Unix OS/400 OS/390 DB Server Database System SAP DB Informix MS SQL Server Oracle DB2 (“DB4”. “DB6”)  SAP AG 2004 SAP Web Application Server is the logical result of further development of the SAP Application Server Technology (formerly known as SAP Basis with particular attention being paid to Web-based applications.

SAP Master Data Management aligns master data management with SAP NetWeaver. training. all based on open technology and standards.SAP NetWeaver: Openness Openness and Extendibility Entirely based on open technologies and standards Immediate Integration Allows complete integration of people. SAP Enterprise Portal provides key capabilities such as Portal Infrastructure.sapeducation. information. Knowledge Management and Collaboration. Business Intelligence Information Broadcasting enables information broadcasting with SAP BW. however.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. SAP NetWeaver consists of the following technical scenarios: SAP Business Information Warehouse is a robust and scalable data warehouse. SAP Exchange Infrastructure adds business value because SAP XI can be used as single point to channel information exchange between various systems. SAP Mobile Infrastructure is a technology solution for NetWeaver on which mySAP Mobile Business applications are based. SAP Enterprise Portal serves as the single point of entry for the end user to access the complete business intelligence information portfolio. you can also make applications mobile that are not SAP-based. which make SAP NetWeaver a powerful integration and application platform. As one of the building blocks of NetWeaver. SAP NetWeaver Development Environment is used to develop both ABAP and JAVA applications.com . SAP Knowledge Warehouse delivers the technical infrastructure you need to setup and manage your own enterprise-specific knowledge base in the areas of documentation.co. and manuals. and business processes in companies Lower Total Cost of Ownership Leverages existing IT investments by integrating different systems Clear Roadmap SAP NetWeaver is the technological foundation of all future SAP solutions  SAP AG 2004 In summary. © SAP AG TERP10 3-13 Visit: www. With SAP MI. The reporting and analysis tools with BW offer a quick and easy way to gain access to the information you need.

com .co.SAP NetWeaver: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the components of NetWeaver Explain how NetWeaver supports the business processes Describe the strategic advantage of NetWeaver  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 3-14 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.SAP NetWeaver: Unit Summary You are now able to: Describe the components of NetWeaver Explain how NetWeaver supports the business processes Describe the strategic advantage of NetWeaver  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 3-15 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .© SAP AG TERP10 3-16 Visit: www.sapeducation.co.

com .Business Warehouse Contents: Business Information Warehouse Reporting in Business Warehouse  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-1 Visit: www.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

you will be able to: Explain the basic concepts and architecture of SAP Business Information Warehouse Explain how SAP Business Information Warehouse reporting and analysis tools support the different business processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-2 Visit: www.com .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Business Warehouse: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.sapeducation.

sapeducation.co.com .Business Warehouse: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-3 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .Business Warehouse: Business Scenario Your company has identified a need for users to access and receive reports from one integrated Business source.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-4 Visit: www.co.sapeducation.

sapeducation.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Business Warehouse: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. you will be able to: Explain the basic concepts and architecture of SAP Business Information Warehouse  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-5 Visit: www.com .

© SAP AG TERP10 4-6 Visit: www. Electrical Goods. schema. Recipients of information can use these reporting and analysis functions to analyze the data for deviations and significant facts.co. (2) overcome this heterogeneity on different levels (system. a data warehouse is used to carry out data analysis. In the Planning and Campaign Management areas. and Household Goods departments in the years 2000 and 2001 in New York and Washington DC? In brief.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The following issues might arise when using a data warehouse in Sales Order Managmenet: (1) checking ranges of goods in order to identify slow moving items and big sellers (2) analyzing regional locations to investigate the profitability of different branches (3) investigating the effectiveness of market analyses (4) evaluating customer surveys and complaints (5) analyzing warehouse stock levels A concrete query might be: What were the sales volumes for the Cosmetics. and predefined reports. freely definable queries.com .Business Warehouse: Data Warehouse System Reporting Data Warehouse Loading Processes Source System 1 Source System 2 Source System 3 Heterogeneous Source System Environment  SAP AG 2004 The information is staged in various forms including personalized reports. and data).sapeducation. a data warehouse can (1) pool data from different. and (3) stage data in the form required by the user. mostly heterogeneous sources.

(4) fast and costeffective installation. (3) sophisticated business reporting methods for self-service analysis at all levels.co. Purchasing. and the storage of historical information (time-dependent master data). Finance. and Human Resources departments. This places considerable demands on data staging from the underlying data sources.56 EUR 22.314. and (9) analysis of data over a specific period of time.234. Sales and Distribution.sapeducation. They require an up-to-date and comprehensive picture of each individual business area and of the business as a whole. (6) data staging from heterogeneous environment. The information must be stored in a homogeneous and consistent form at a central location where it can be called up.00 EUR 34. (8) data access independent of the source system. What is needed here is an economic and comprehensive preparation of the data that is required by the data warehouse. The system must be able to cope with the information needs of the various user groups. Therefore. single-point of access to all company information.98 EUR 33. modern data warehouses require a separate database that an independent application environment can use to provide the required services objectively.36 EUR Data Warehouse Foils Noble metal Steel Noble Gas Source System 3 Database  SAP AG 2004 Decision-makers urgently need reliable information from Production. (7) release of source systems and IT organization.Business Warehouse: What We Expect From BW Source System 1 Product line Source System 2 Net Sales 23. © SAP AG TERP10 4-7 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.234. (5) a high performance environment.com .324. The following demands are made on a data warehouse: (1) standardized structuring and presentation of all company information. (2) an easy-to-use. Efficient analysis techniques with powerful multi-dimensional visualization are indispensable on the presentation side of the data warehouse. The demands made on the source systems are not so high.

allows you to examine the relationships in every area of your company. Having implemented SAP BW and its metadata repository (description of data). (3) OLAP engine and tools. online services. The realization of SAP BW aimed for the following: (1) data warehousing system with optimized data structures for reporting and analysis. which is preconfigured by Business Content for core areas and processes. SAP has opted for a separate data-warehousing solution that handles reporting activities as an autonomous business component. and the Internet. (5) automated data warehouse management. With these goals in mind. © SAP AG TERP10 4-8 Visit: www.sapeducation. (2) separate system.com .Business Information Warehouse Business Content SAP R/3 Source Systems OLAP Engine Automated Warehouse Standardized Structures Non-SAP SAP BW XML Business Explorer Database Database  SAP AG 2004 The SAP BW allows you to analyze data from operational SAP R/3 applications or any other business application. The system (data storage. (4) comprehensive data-warehousing architectural base.co. SAP R/3 systems can be configured as source systems. even providing a separate server with its own database and SAP system: SAP Business Information Warehouse. and (6) preconfiguration using SAP global business know-how. loading and reporting). You can also extract and analyze data from external sources such as databases. and provide data for all SAP Business Content.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the customer has the clear advantage of being able to use the entire SAP know-how built up over the many years of experience in developing business software solutions. All of the requirements and objectives mentioned so far have been met in the conception and architecture of SAP BW.

costs. time characteristics. Characteristics describe the affiliation of key figures.sapeducation.co. If a characteristic (for example. net sales. © SAP AG TERP10 4-9 Visit: www. request ID). and technical characteristics (for example. Key figures are all data fields that are used to store values or quantities (sales volumes.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . sales volumes. Margin I Sales Overhead R & D Overhead . the first characteristic becomes an attribute of the second A data record (posting record) is a combination of characteristics and key figures Company 1000  SAP AG 2004 Product line Foils Product 310000 … Net Sales 1.Business Warehouse: Terminology Assignment using the AWB InfoObjects Characteristics Division Segment Product Product line Segment Business Unit Company Key Figures Net Sales variable COGS Contrib... zip code) is assigned to another characteristic (for example.000 EUR InfoObject Business analysis-objects (companies. and so on) are called InfoObjects in SAP BW. These InfoObjects can be divided into characteristics and key figures. and so on). Characteristics can be further divided into units. sold-to party).

. you create a new folder or use an existing one.. .... InfoCubes are stored in structures in the SAP BW system.. actual costs.com . as well as several surrounding dimension tables that store the links to the characteristics. incoming orders.... If you want to store an InfoCube.. materials. © SAP AG TERP10 4-10 Visit: www. Each fact table can contain a maximum of 233 key figures. and so on).... Berlin 11 3 24 3 .. Texts DIM 1 DIM 2 Becker Inc.. customers.co....sapeducation.Business Warehouse: Terminology (Continued) Info Cube with Transaction Data (Key Figures) Master Data for 'Sold-To Party' Attribute 3 Fact Table Sales 24 Revenue . Each InfoCube has one fact table and a maximum of 16 dimension tables. They include a fact table that contains the InfoCube key figures......... as well as hierarchies and texts of a characteristic. This is similar to the method used when storing data on your PC: These folders are called InfoAreas in SAP BW.. Each individual InfoCube should contain a self-contained dataset.. Key figures and characteristics are InfoObjects.. the person responsible for a cost center).... since queries refer primarily to one InfoCube..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.. A dimension can contain up to 248 freely available characteristics. Master data in the BW system consists of attributes of a characteristic (for example... An InfoCube consists of several database tables that are linked according to the star schema..... They contain key figures (sales volumes.. Keys Simplified depiction of the star schema with links to master data  SAP AG 2004 Hierarchies 3 Father Nodes Child Nodes InfoCube The central data containers that form the basis for reports and analyses in SAP BW are called InfoCubes... Short Text Long Text 11 5 . and so on) and a link to the characteristics (master data of the SAP BW system such as cost centers...

the type of data procurement has no influence on reporting. and (4) MultiProviders. divided into data targets that contain physical data. (3) VirtualInfoCubes.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. InfoProviders are objects or views that are relevant to reporting. control.sapeducation. The previous figure gives an overview of SAP BW reportable objects. InfoProviders deliver data that can be analyzed using a query. (2) RemoteCubes. It is normally used to resolve and consolidate datasets. and administrate SAP BW. and InfoProviders that only contain logical views. There are two types of data stores. Operational Data Store (ODS) An ODS. From the BEx view. and (3) InfoObjects. However. stores data at the basic level (document level). The type of data procurement differs depending on the InfoProvider used.com . AWB functions are used to configure. Logical views of physical data stores include (1) InfoSets. The way in which the data is modeled is inconsequential to the BEx toolset.Business Warehouse: Terminology (Continued) Physical Data Stores Key Figures Characteristics Virtual Info Cubes Logical views of physical data stores include: InfoSet Queries Texts Attributes Hierarchies Source System Basis Cube Remote Cubes Multi Providers ODS Reporting Business Explorer  SAP AG 2004 InfoProvider InfoProvider is the super-ordinate term for an object that you can use to create reports in Business Explorer (BEx). a data store.co. Physical stores include (1) BasicCubes. InfoProviders include various database metaobjects that deliver data for query definitions. only InfoProviders are accessed. © SAP AG TERP10 4-11 Visit: www. These datasets are often from various data sources and/or source systems Administrator Workbench (AWB) Administrator Workbench (AWB) is a workplace for SAP BW administrators. (2) ODS Objects.

co. monitor. and the Internet.sapeducation. The Business Explorer (BEx) component provides users with extensive analysis options. OLAP technology permits multi-dimensional analyses according to various business perspectives. AWB functions allow you to control. © SAP AG TERP10 4-12 Visit: www. As well as roles. and maintain all data procurement processes. This helps your employees to carry out their tasks. allows you to examine the relationships in every area within your company.Business Warehouse: Architecture Portal Integration Business Explorer Administrator Workbench Metadata Repository Master Data OLAP Info Cube ODS SAP BW Staging Engine SAP Systems Non-SAP Systems  SAP AG 2004 SAP BW enables the analysis of data from operative SAP applications as well as all other business applications and external data sources such as databases. key figures. and characteristics. These objects facilitate the implementation of SAP BW. The BW server. SAP BW enables Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) for staging information from large amounts of operative and historical data. Business Content includes other preconfigured objects such as InfoCubes. online services. divided into roles. queries.com . Business Content provides targeted information to companies. which is preconfigured by Business Content for core areas and processes.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Business Warehouse: Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain the basic concepts and architecture of SAP Business Information Warehouse  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-13 Visit: www.com .co.sapeducation.

Business Warehouse: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.com .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. you will be able to: Explain how SAP Business Information Warehouse reporting and analysis tools support the different business processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-14 Visit: www.

000 0 EU .000 0 EU . and (5) wizard-help. (4) ad-hoc reporting. Web Application Design allows you to implement generic OLAP navigation in Web applications and in Business Intelligence cockpits for both simple and highly-individual scenarios.000 0 EU .56 EUR 22. and (5) integration of unstructured data.0 R 3 0.0 R 1 0. Reporting. (2) multi-dimensional (OLAP) analysis. and Analysis include (1) query design using the BEx Analyzer.co. (4) creation of iViews for a portal.324. (3) personalization.314. and personal digital assistants). Query.36 EUR Portal Integration  SAP AG 2004 BEx is the SAP BW component that provides flexible reporting and analysis tools that you can use for strategic analysis and supporting the decision-making process in your company.00 EUR 34.0 R 1 5.0 R 5.000 0 EU .sapeducation.000 0 EU . Web Application Design encompasses a wide spectrum of interactive Web-based Business Intelligence scenarios that you can modify to suit your requirements using standard Web technology. Web Application Design includes (1) interactive analytical content.234.000 0 EU . (3) geographical analysis.com .0 R 2 0. (4) publication of iViews. (2) information cockpits and dashboards.EU R Be cker Berlin Bayer VW D aimler Auftra gseinga ng Web Application Formatted Reporting Mobile intelligence Product line Foils Noble metal Steel Noble Gas Net Sales 23. and (5) alerts.000 0 EU . in the Internet or Intranet (Web Application Design). Highly individual scenarios with customerdefined user interface elements can be realized using standard markup languages (HTML) for example.Business Warehouse: Reporting Logical and Physical InfoProviders in BW OLAP Business Explorer BEx Analyzer (Microsoft Excel or MS Internet Explorer) 3 5. Portal Integration includes (1) single point of entry. or using a mobile device (for example.0 R . This can be done in Enterprise Portal from an iView that you can call alongside the applications where you extract the data.0 R 2 5. WAP-enabled mobile telephones.98 EUR 33. (3) basis for creating analytical applications. Employees with access authorization can analyze historical and current data at differing levels of detail and from different perspectives. (2) role-based staging of information. BEx allows a wide spectrum of users to access information in SAP BW. © SAP AG TERP10 4-15 Visit: www.234.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

basic users only use the analytical functions of the system on a very small scale. This is because the basic users usually carry out predefined queries with fixed datasets.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Business Warehouse: Different User Types in SAP BW high Query Developers 10% Experienced Users 20% Occasional Users 70%  SAP AG 2004 New studies have shown that up to 70 percent of all OLAP system users are basic users. SAP catered to these various user needs when developing the Business Information Warehouse. However. most of SAP users need a simple user interface. Compared to the advanced users and query developers. Therefore.co. the experienced users and query developers who design and carry out information analyses on several levels must be able to use a comprehensive and effective range of tools for their analyzing options. © SAP AG TERP10 analytical needs low 4-16 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .

0 R 2 5.000 0 EU .324.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 4-17 Visit: www.000 0 EU .234.98 EUR 33.EU R Be cker Berlin Bayer VW D aimler Web Application Portal Integration Mobile Intelligence Product line Foils Noble metal Steel Noble Gas Net Sales 23.56 EUR 22.0 R 2 0.0 R .000 0 EU .000 0 EU .0 R 3 0.co.com .000 0 EU .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.0 R 5.000 0 EU .000 0 EU .0 R 1 0.0 R Auftra gseinga ng 1 5.314.BEx Analyzer BEx Analyzer (MS Excel and MS Internet Explorer) 3 5.00 EUR 34.234.36 EUR Business Explorer InfoProvider in BW OLAP  SAP AG 2004 The BEx Anlayzer is the analysis and reporting tool of the Business Explorer that is embedded in Microsoft Excel.

Business Warehouse: SAP BEx: Choose Query 1. Roles. Favorites. You can then change or execute the query.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. which means that it offers different choices depending on the type of object selected.5 including CR add-ons for SAP).com . You have various options for calling up the Query Designer: From the BEx Analyzer open dialog box. InfoAreas. the SAP BEx: Choose Query dialog box is called before the Query Designer opens. you have the option of creating a new query or of finding and selecting an existing query. Workbooks Queries Saved Views Exceptions 3. With Crystal Reports (Crystal Reports >=8. 2. Object Type: Dialog Box Available: (1) Workbooks: History. The Open Dialog Box . (2) Queries: History. you determine the way in which data from the chosen InfoProvider is evaluated. Favorites.co. This dialog box is context sensitive. Using the Web Application Designer (see the BEx Web Application Designer unit). InfoAreas. Favorites. © SAP AG TERP10 4-18 Visit: www.If you choose to access the Query Designer from the BEx Analyzer. Roles. Roles. InfoAreas Within the relevant dialog box. you can evaluate a dataset from an InfoProvider according to various characteristics and key figures. Create new query SAP BEx: Choose Query History Favorites Roles InfoAreas Delta Training Role Sales and Distribution Role Purchasing Training TERP10 Reporting Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Description/Technical Name OK Cancel  SAP AG 2004 Using the SAP BW reporting functions. (3) Stored Query Views: History. and (4) Exceptions: History. you define a query for your chosen InfoProvider in the BEx Query Designer. As a separate program using Start → Programs → Business Explorer → Query Designer. By selecting and combining the InfoObjects in a query.sapeducation. To do this.

com ....co. Crystal Reports. You can save the query in your favorites or in a role. or Reporting Agent settings... once you have saved your query definition. Query Where-Used List Exception Table Display Condition Check Query Context Menu New Query Delete Query Query Properties Change Query (Global Definition) Help Exit Query Save Query Define Cells Display <-> Change Technical Name  SAP AG 2004 The figure gives an overview of the BEx Query Designer functions that you can call from the Query Designer toolbar. The functions are described within the context of query definition: Quit and Use Query: With this function. Exit Query: Choose Exit Query if you want to leave the Query Designer. Favorites. You can choose from queries in your History. Web templates. You can only delete the query if it is not being used in workbooks. The BEx Open dialog box appears and you can select the InfoProvider here that contains the data that you want to evaluate in the query. Save Query As.Business Warehouse: Functions of the BEx Query Designer (1) Quit and Use Query Open Query Display Query on the Web Save Query As.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail..: You use this function to save a query under a new technical name. Open Query: This function takes you directly to the BEx Open dialog box. © SAP AG TERP10 4-19 Visit: www. you can display the query with a default template on the Web. Save Query: You use this function to save a modified query under its current name.. Delete Query: You use this function to delete the query. Roles. or from the InfoAreas. If the query does not yet have a technical name. the system automatically offers the function Save Query As. Your entries are not saved.sapeducation. New Query: Choose this function if you want to create a query. you leave the Query Designer and use the query you have defined. Display Query on the Web: Using this function.

Note: For each characteristic. and are highlighted in color in the executed query. Define Cells: This function is only available for queries with two structures. You can define formulas and selection conditions for cells explicitly. for example. Query Where-Used List Exception Table Display Condition Check Query Context Menu New Query Delete Query Query Properties Change Query (Global Definition) Help Exit Query Save Query Define Cells Display <-> Change Technical Name  SAP AG 2004 Exception: You use this function to define exceptions for a query. For more information.com . zero display and key date of the query. numeric display.sapeducation.co. you can give limit conditions to the key figure values in order to determine. you control the values of cells that appear at the intersections of structural components. Note: Exceptions are deviations from normal key figure values. all sales revenues above or below a specified threshold value. you can change or create exceptions. © SAP AG TERP10 4-20 Visit: www..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. display options. In this way. Query Properties: Choose this function if you want to change the description of the query or define the settings for the result position. This function enables you to access individual cells in queries or to assign special values to these.. The chosen characteristics are displayed in the query with restricted key figures. as defined by you. Using the small arrow next to the conditions symbol. Using the small arrow next to the exceptions symbol.Business Warehouse: Functions of the BEx Query Designer (2) Quit and Use Query Open Query Display Query on the Web Save Query As. see the Exceptions and Conditions unit. Condition: You use this function to define conditions for a query. you can change or create conditions.

You can only have queries with two structures in the multi-dimensional display.. Display <-> Change: Using this function. you can check a new or saved query for errors before you save it. They are not suitable for OLAP reporting. © SAP AG TERP10 4-21 Visit: www. Technical Name: Using this function.Business Warehouse: Functions of the BEx Query Designer (3) Quit and Use Query Open Query Display Query on the Web Save Query As. Help: This function takes you to the SAP BW online documentation. Web templates. This function is only available for queries with one structure. Query Where-Used List Exception Table Display Condition Check Query Context Menu New Query Delete Query Query Properties Change Query (Global Definition) Help Exit Query Save Query Define Cells Display <-> Change Technical Name  SAP AG 2004 Check Query: Using this function.com . you can show/hide the technical names of the query components. by activating or deactivating the Table Display mode in the query definition when defining a query.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Query Where-Used List: Using this function. you can switch between the display and change modes. or Reporting Agent settings) the query is used. Table Display: You can create a query for tabular reporting.sapeducation.co. Change Query (Global Definition): You choose this function if you are in the Local Query Definition and want to switch to the Global Definition.. you can find out in which objects (Workbooks. as well as for Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) reporting. for use with a touch screen). ContextMenu: This function enables you to display the current context menu without using the right mouse button (for example. Crystal Reports.

key figures. . You can then integrate these characteristics into the results through navigation steps. 3. even in combination with characteristics.co. 4. structures) display in the directory tree in the left screen area of the Query Designer. for example.com .You transfer those characteristics into the free characteristics area that do not display in the initial view of the results when you execute the query in the BEx Analyzer or on the Web. By expanding the key figure node in the InfoProvider tree. and 6. To create a query. These characteristics are only used as global filters on the InfoCube data. Rows .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Free Characteristics . The Query Designer is divided into six subareas: 1. In this example. you can display a list of all the key figures of the InfoProvider. select the required InfoProvider. You can also use free characteristics for selecting filter values in the report.sapeducation.  SAP AG 2004 To define a new query. It is possible to use a filter a key figure.Directory tree of the selected InfoProvider Once you have selected the required InfoProvider. 2. In the New Query: Select InfoProvider dialog box. Organization Sales area Value Type Time Unit Data Package … Filter 1. Free Characteristics Columns 4. Rows 3.Business Warehouse: Creating a Query Query Designer: New Query TERP10 Customer Cube Structure Key Figure Dimensions Technical Charact. all available objects (dimensions. 5. © SAP AG TERP10 4-22 Visit: www. the Query Designer displays as shown in the graphic. you can expand or collapse the InfoProvider directories by choosing the plus or minus symbol. Filter .You define the rows of your report in this area. 5. 6. Columns . Once you have selected the InfoProvider. Preview (displayed in gray on the screen) This area gives a preview of the query results area. you can see the directory tree for the InfoProvider InfoCube Customer Cube T_SDDEMO2.The characteristics displayed in the filter appear neither in the drilldown nor as free characteristics in the query analysis.You define the columns of your report in this area. start the Query Designer and choose New Query. 2.

co. the query definition displays.2004 Find 17.12. margin schema GRX## Description Technical Name Only Queries from InfoProvider Created or Changed No User-Specific Restriction By Me By User No Time Restriction Time Interval From Last 7 Days 17. If necessary.01. Choose Find .2005 Cancel  SAP AG 2004 In order to find a query for which you already know a part of the description or other information. the query result displays as an Analyzer report.sapeducation. If you are using the search function from the Query Designer. In the Search for Queries dialog box.Business Warehouse: Finding a Query Search for Queries Search String Search in TERP10 contri.com . choose Find. you can restrict the search to additional criteria.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 4-23 Visit: www. If you are in the BEx Analyzer and have called the search function from the Choose Query dialog box. enter the technical name or description of the query.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. It is often necessary to restrict (filter) characteristics to specific characteristic values in your reports. Restrict value range 5. There are two ways of restricting characteristics: 1.Business Warehouse: Filtering Data in the Query Definition Selection for Material Selection Fixed Values Description Casing Spiral Casing Blank Flat Washer Runner 100777004 Value Range Variables 1. Call the context menu for the characteristic and choose Restrict. and Filter areas of the Query Designer. © SAP AG TERP10 4-24 Visit: www. If you want to remove the restriction. You can select single or multiple characteristic values. Select single values or a value range Between 2. The right screen area contains the characteristic values that you want to use to restrict the characteristic.. if you are interested in the sales volume of a particular branch of a worldwide corporate group. Using the Input field in the lower left area of the selection dialog box. By selecting a characteristic from the InfoProvider of the characteristic (in the tree structure in the left part of the screen) and doubleclicking on the Values icon. For example. dialog box appears. The fixed values selected appear in the directory tree under Values. Transfer selected values The figure shows the selection dialog box for the Material characteristic. Select highlighted values using Drag&Drop or using the arrow 4. 2. Select multiple values using CTRL and left mouse button 100 OK Cancel 3.com . the selection menu for fixed values displays. Free characteristics. but the InfoProvider contains the sales volume for the entire organization. so that only the key figure for this branch appear in the report. The Selection for . You can select single values or values from a value area. highlight the relevant value in the left screen area. To select a characteristic value. Search by technical name or description  SAP AG 2004 6.co.. You can use Drag&Drop to include these in your query definition. You can then use Drag&Drop to move the highlighted values into the right screen area. you can restrict the query definition to the relevant branch. Alternatively.sapeducation. you can transfer the selected values using the arrow. You can find all of the characteristic values available for the chosen characteristic in the left screen area. You can restrict (filter) the characteristic values of a characteristic in the Rows. The found values are then automatically highlighted. you can find specific characteristic values by entering their description or technical name. Columns. You can also restrict a characteristic that you have already included in the definition. simply reverse the procedure.

drag the selected objects of the InfoProvider tree to the appropriate subarea.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. ex.Query Designer: New Query Billing Key Figure No. Customer Organization Company Division Product Product line Segment Sales Area Document Classification Time Unit Data Package Filter Free Characteristics Columns Key Figures Sales Volume (Net Value) Drag & Drop Rows Company Sales Volume (Net) EUR Company A Company B  SAP AG 2004 Using Drag & Drop.co. Rows.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 4-25 Visit: www. Document Items Invoiced Quantity Sales Volume Net Sales Dimensions Technical Charact. Columns or Free Characteristics in the right-hand screen area of the screen.com .

If no key date has been defined. last changed by. Note: For MultiProviders.01. These text elements are referred to as the header information of the query.. the system date is taken as the key date..03.).co. 02. Display text elements . (2) Last Changed by: User who last changed the query definition.. This can be evaluated for reporting. Filters.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. InfoProvider. etc. Filter Values. Exceptions: Depending on the current query definition. Conditions. additional text elements (variables. (5) Key Date: Contains the date for which the time-dependent master data is selected. 02.03.02 . (6) Changed At: Date and time at which the query definition was last changed. (9) Last Refreshed: Data and time at which the query data was last refreshed. filter values. the current InfoPackages are determined from the individual BasicCubes and from there. You can move or delete individual text elements by moving or deleting the corresponding cells using Microsoft Excel menu functions. © SAP AG TERP10 4-26 Visit: www. You create a key date either in the query definition (in Query Properties) or provide the value using a variable.02 Schumacher 2005 1 1 1 3 SAP Bus n ss Exp oe r i e l r  SAP AG 2004 You have the option of displaying different text elements as additional information in a query (for example the author. Explanation of the Text Elements: (1) Author: User who defined the query... All GeneralFiltersVariables Text elements Customer Material Division Customer A B Prod-line X Y X Z 2004 2 3 1 2 2005 1 1 1 3 Customer Material Division Author Last Changed by InfoProvider Query Technical Name Key Date Changed at Status of Data Current User Cust. (8) Current User: User who currently has the query open or who has inserted it into a workbook. (10) Variables. (3) InfoProvider: InfoProvider whose data is evaluated in the query. You can either display all or individual (General. (4) Query Technical Name: Technical name that you entered when you saved the query. The text elements are displayed between the filter cells and the results area.. the one with the oldest date is referred to for the status of the data. and exceptions) may also display.. This is the time when you displayed the text elements (the system has to refresh the query in order to display the text elements). Variables) text elements. ChooseLayout and Display Text Elements. A B PL X Y X Z 2004 2 3 1 2 SCHMITT SCHULZ T_SDC03 TEST 01. Navigation steps are not recorded as changes to the definition.sapeducation.com ..02 . (7) Status of Data: Time at which the data from the last request was posted to the InfoProvider.Business Warehouse: Including Text Elements in BEx Analyzer Reports Layout . conditions.

000.75 EUR  SAP AG 2004 To publish the query on the Web.co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.41 EUR 770. © SAP AG TERP10 4-27 Visit: www.33 EUR 98. if required.443. The query displays in a standard Web template. save it and choose Display Query on the Web .698.sapeducation.Web Query First Query Product line Key Figures Product line Noble metal Noble gas Foils Net sales 878. You can change the standard Web template.

co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.com .Business Warehouse: Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain how SAP Business Information Warehouse reporting and analysis tools support the different business processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-28 Visit: www.

Business Warehouse: Unit Summary You are now able to: Explain the basic concepts and architecture of SAP Business Information Warehouse Explain how SAP Business Information Warehouse reporting and analysis tools support the different business processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 4-29 Visit: www.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.sapeducation.

co.sapeducation.Business Warehouse: Exercises Unit: Business Warehouse Topic: Create a Query Report At the conclusion of this exercise. Create a new query using the Customer Cube TERP10 in the InfoProvider Customer Training TERP10 You can use the predefined structure “contribution margin schema” or manually create a row structure. you will be able to: • Create a BEx query report In order to evaluate the data from an InfoProvider. 1-1 You are interested in finding out the net sales and operating profit of your customers for product lines in 2004 and 2005. You have been given the task of creating these query definitions. you require queries that are tailored to your individual requirements. You want to enable the users of your report to select by specific product lines. © SAP AG TERP10 4-30 Visit: www.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

The Query is named TERP10_A01.com . Margin II Sales Overhead R&D Overhead Admin Overhead Operating Profit Fiscal Year 2004 Fiscal Year 2005 Overall Results 1-1 Save the query in your favorites folder with the name: Description: GRX## TERP10 Customer Query 1 Technical name: TERP10_X## (X= Participant Group A.sapeducation. C or D. ## is your participant number within the group.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Net sales Variable COGS Contr. © SAP AG TERP10 4-31 Visit: www. B. For example: You log on to SEM System with User: SEMA-01.co.) Execute the query and view the results. If the Internet Explorer is installed on your workstation and default language is set to English you can run the query in the web using the icon in the explorer bar. Margin I Fixed COGS Contr.Key Figures.

co.1-2 What are the net sales in 2004 and 2005? -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-3 Which Product line has a better performance record in 2004 and 2005? -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-4 What are the fixed COGS for each product line? ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-5 Which product line’s operating profit decreased between fiscal years 2004 and 2005? -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-6 In which product line does the R&D Overhead increase between 2004 and 2005? -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-7 In which product line does the contribution margin II decrease between fiscal years 2004 and 2005? ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ © SAP AG TERP10 4-32 Visit: www.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

You have been given the task of creating these query definitions.co. 1-1 You are interested in finding out the net sales and operating profit of your customers for product lines in 2004 and 2005. Create a new query using the Customer Cube TERP10 in the InfoProvider Customer Training TERP10 You can use the predefined structure “contribution margin schema” or manually create a row structure.Business Warehouse: Solutions Unit: Business Warehouse Topic: Create a Query Report At the conclusion of this exercise. © SAP AG TERP10 4-33 Visit: www.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You want to enable the users of your report to select by specific product lines. you will be able to: • Create a BEx query report In order to evaluate the data from an InfoProvider.sapeducation. you require queries that are tailored to your individual requirements.

com . In that window. Select the InfoCube Customer Training TERP10 and click the OK button. Margin I Fixed COGS Contr. © SAP AG TERP10 4-34 Visit: www. Net sales Variable COGS Contr.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You select your InfoProvider by clicking on the InfoAreas Icon.sapeducation.Key Figures. from the BEx toolbar.co. choose SAP Menu → Business Information Warehouse → Business Explorer → Business Explorer Analyzer. (Choose local BW System as RFC Destination) Microsoft Excel will be launched in a separate window. Open the InfoArea Training/ TERP. In the next frame choose the NEW icon and select your InfoProvider. choose Open → Queries. Margin II Sales Overhead R&D Overhead Admin Overhead Operating Profit Fiscal Year 2004 Fiscal Year 2005 Overall Results To open the BEx Analyzer.

Click on Fiscal Year in the columns section. From the Time dimension. into the Columns using Drag&Drop. Now transfer the fiscal year from the Time dimension. © SAP AG TERP10 4-35 Visit: www. Press OK and return to the query designer.com .From the Structure Folder you can transfer the contribution margin schema into the ROWS using Drag&Drop.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. then restrict the fiscal year using the context menu (right mouse button-> RESTRICT) and select 2004 and 2005 into the Selection.sapeducation. transfer the Fiscal Year variant into the Filter into using Drag&Drop.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.Now the query should look like this: © SAP AG TERP10 4-36 Visit: www.co.com .

The Query is named TERP10_A01. and then close the report results without saving them. C or D. Save the query in your Favorites folder using the diskette icon: Description: GRX## TERP10 Customer Query 1 Technical name: TERP10_X## (X= Participant Group A.970. ## is your participant number within the group. For example: You log on to SEM System with User: SEMA-01. icon in the View the results. 1-3 What are the net sales in 2004 and 2005? Net Sales in 2004 Net Sales in 2005 $ 220.sapeducation. B.940. under the Dimensions Folder.00 © SAP AG TERP10 4-37 Visit: www.000. Leave the BEx Analyzer open for the next exercise step.From the Organization Folder.000.co. The Product Line is in the Organization Dimension.00 $ 227.) Choose save Execute the query as a report in the BEx Analyzer by choosing Quit and Use Query.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. If the Internet Explorer is installed on your workstation and default language is set to English you can run the query in the web using the explorer bar. transfer the Product Line into the Free Characteristics using Drag&Drop.com .

499. product line A has the better performance record.000. 1-5 What are the fixed COGS for each product line? fixed COGS 2004 PL: Foils fixed COGS 2004 PL: Foils fixed COGS 2005 PL: A fixed COGS 2005 PL: A $ 250.co. In the query designer you assigned the characteristic product line to the frame “Free characteristics”.800.00 1-6 Which product line’s operating profit decreased between fiscal years 2004 and 2005? Operating profit 2004 Foils Operating profit 2005 Foils Operating profit 2004 A Operating profit 2005 A $ 125.200.00 $ 60. Therefore. The results by product line Foils and product line A appear.400.00 $ 75.345.00 $ 35. you have to breakdown the total values by product line.000.com . To breakdown the contribution margin schema by product line.sapeducation.000.00 Product line Foils’ operating profit decreased between fiscal years 2004 and 2005 © SAP AG TERP10 4-38 Visit: www.00 $ 68. so that you can drill down to the total values.00 $ 260.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.1-4 Which Product line has a better performance record in 2004 and 2005? To answer this question. select in the header Product Line and choose drilldown by context menu.534.600.340.000. The net sales and operating profit is higher for Product line A then for product line Foils.00 $ 35.

000.000. 1-7 In which product line does the contribution margin II decrease between fiscal years 2004 and 2005? Contribution margin II 2004 Foils Contribution margin II 2005 Foils Contribution margin II 2004 A Contribution margin II 2005 A $ 460.040.00 $ 139.00 $ 390.sapeducation. product line A did not have any movement between 2004 and 2005.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.000.1-6 In which product line does the R&D Overhead increase between 2004 and 2005? The R&D overhead did not increase in either product line.00 between 2004 and 2005. © SAP AG TERP10 4-39 Visit: www.000.00 $ 132.co.000. Product line Foils reported a decrease of $ 5.000.00 The contribution margin II decreased in product line Foils and increased in product line A between 2004 and 2005. Whereas.com .

com . Fill in the blank to complete the sentence The central data containers that form the basis for reports and analyses in SAP BW are called _________. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence _________ is the super-ordinate term for an object that you can use to create reports in Business Explorer (BEx). Fill in the blank to complete the sentence 4. sales volumes.Business Warehouse: Test Your Knowledge 1. and so on) are called __________ in SAP BW. The Query Designer is divided into six subareas. 2. Determine whether this statement is true or false.co. © SAP AG TERP10 4-40 Visit: www. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 5. There are four ways of restricting characteristics.sapeducation. Business analysis-objects (product line. 3. net sales.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Determine whether this statement is true or false. 4. 2. customers. InfoProviders are objects or views that are relevant to reporting.Business Warehouse: Answers 1. incoming orders. There are four ways of restricting characteristics.com . You can also restrict a characteristic that you have already included in the definition. © SAP AG TERP10 4-41 Visit: www.co. Rows 4. They contain key figures (sales volumes. materials. and technical characteristics.sapeducation. Free Characteristics 5. The Query Designer is divided into six subareas. and so on) and a link to the characteristics (master data of the SAP BW system such as cost centers. 3. Filter 6. By selecting a characteristic from the InfoProvider 2. True: 1. net sales. The central data containers that form the basis for reports and analyses in SAP BW are called InfoCubes. actual costs. These InfoObjects can be divided into characteristics and key figures. Directory tree of the selected InfoProvider. Characteristics can be further divided into units. Preview 5. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 2.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and so on). and so on) are called InfoObjects in SAP BW. InfoProvider is the super-ordinate term for an object that you can use to create reports in Business Explorer (BEx). False There are two ways of restricting characteristics: 1. Columns 3. Business analysis-objects (product line. time characteristics. sales volumes.

com .co.sapeducation.Sales Order Management Contents: Organizational Units and Master Data Order to Cash Business Process Reporting and Analysis Tools  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-1 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Sales Order Management: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. you will be able to: List the organizational units and master data that are critical to the Sales Order Management process Perform the order to cash business process Identify key integration points with other mySAP ERP processes Identify the reporting and analysis tools used in Sales Order Management process  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-2 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.com .co.

com .co.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Sales Order Management: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-3 Visit: www.

In some cases.com .sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. As a project team member.co. a customer places an order for material or services.Sales Order Management: Business Scenario In your enterprise. the ordered material may not be available to satisfy the customer’s requested delivery date. you need to test the functionality of the order to cash process.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-4 Visit: www. This order is delivered and then invoiced to the customer.

Organizational Units and Master Data: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation. you will be able to: List the organizational units that are critical to the Sales Order Management process List the master data elements that are critical to the Sales Order Management process  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-5 Visit: www.co.

or shipping point. You can represent your enterprise structure using organizational units based on your business processes. are used in Sales and Distribution and in other modules. division. such as sales organization. © SAP AG TERP10 5-6 Visit: www. distribution channel. such as company code or plant. The Sales and Distribution module uses some organizational units that can only represent sales and distribution processes.co.sapeducation. Other organizational units.Organizational Units in Sales Order Management Company code Sales Area R/3 Division Document Sales Organization Distribution Channel Plant Storage Location Shipping Point  SAP AG 2004 Organizational units represent the structure of an enterprise organization. This is not a complete list of all organizational units relevant for the sales and distribution processes.com . Organizational units represent the legal and organizational views of an enterprise.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

This includes entry of all accountable transactions and the creation of all proofs for a legally required individual account closing. such as the balance sheets and the profit and loss statement.com . a complete independent accounting unit can be represented as the smallest organizational unit in external accounting.co. you create: balance sheets required by law profit and loss statements  SAP AG 2004 For a company code. © SAP AG TERP10 5-7 Visit: www.Organizational Units: Company Code Company code Legal entity and independent accounting unit At company code level.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Examples of a company code are: a company within a corporate group or a subsidiary.

Organizational Units: Sales Organization Sales organization Responsible for: distributing goods and services negotiating sales conditions product liability and rights of recourse  SAP AG 2004 The sales organization is an organizational unit in Logistics which groups the enterprise according to the requirements of sales and distribution. © SAP AG TERP10 5-8 Visit: www. The sales organization is also used to take. If you use the Sales and Distribution module. that is. A sales organization is uniquely assigned to a company code. In the sales statistics. Therefore. a regional. You maintain own master data for a sales organization. All items in a sales and distribution document. national or international subdivision of the market into account. belong to a sales organization.co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the sales organization is the highest summation level.sapeducation. it is also liable for the sold products and responsible for the customers' rights of recourse. A sales organization is responsible for distributing goods and services. an outbound delivery or a billing document. for example. More than one sales organization can be assigned to a company code. all items of an order. you need at least one sales organization.

com . retail trade. it is used to: Define responsibilities.  SAP AG 2004 A distribution channel is a means through which salable materials or services reach the customer. © SAP AG TERP10 5-9 Visit: www.Organizational Units: Distribution Channel Sales organization Distribution Channel 1 Distribution Channel 2 Is a means through which sales materials reach the customer Represents your strategies to distribute goods and/or services to your customer For example: wholesale trade. internet trade.. Several distribution channels can be assigned to a sales organization.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. For example. you need at least one distribution channel.co.. . Achieve flexible pricing and Differentiate sales statistics.sapeducation. If you use the Sales and Distribution module.

com . If you use the Sales and Distribution module. A sales organization can have several divisions assigned to it. You can also conduct statistical analysis by division. restrict price agreements with a customer to a certain division. Therefore.sapeducation.. A division can. you can. for example. you will need at least one division. services.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 5-10 Visit: www.  SAP AG 2004 A division is used to group materials and services.co.Organizational Units: Division Sales organization Division 1 Division 2 Represents a product line For example: motorcycles. represent a product group. . for which it is responsible. for example.. spare parts. The system uses the division to determine the sales areas a material or a service is assigned to.

Sales Area Sales Organization Distribution Channel Division 2 Motorcycles 1 Frankfurt 2 Berlin 2 Retail trade 5 Internet 1 Wholesale trade 3 Computers 3 Computers 2 Motorcycles 1 Pumps Sales Areas 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 5 3 2 1 2 2 1 1  SAP AG 2004 A sales area is a combination of the sales organization. This relationship is created by assigning the sales organization.sapeducation. Each sales and distribution document is assigned to exactly one sales area. © SAP AG TERP10 5-11 Visit: www. distribution channel. prices. the system accesses various master data. and discounts. During the processing of sales and distribution documents. Use fields on the master data screen. it simplifies updating master data. material master data. This master data includes.com . It defines the distribution channel a sales organization uses to sell products from a certain division. according to the sales area. Note: A simple organizational structure can be better than a complex one. This assignment cannot be changed. For example. Do not define complex organizational structures in order to have detailed reporting options. customer master data.co. the system carries out several checks concerning the validity of certain entries according to the sales area. In addition.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example. A sales area can belong to only one company code. and division.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.sapeducation.com .Sales and Distribution Structures of IDES AG Company IDES AG Sales Office Sales and Distribution Frankfurt Sales and Distribution Berlin Distribution channel Reseller Service Chain stores Industry Consumer Product line Motor cycles Services Food Paint  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-12 Visit: www.

The plant is essential for determining the shipping point. From a materials management point of view. represent a production facility or simply a grouping of locations (storage locations) in physical proximity. In production.1 © SAP AG TERP10 5-13 Visit: www. for example. a plant is.Organizational Units: Plant and Storage Location 1 2 2 1 2 2 (Delivering) Plant Plant 1 Storage location Plant 2 Plant 3  SAP AG 2004 The plant is a location where material stock is kept. an office). a location where material stock is kept. the plant has a central function: You have to create at least one plant in order to be able to use the Sales and Distribution module. The relevant stocks are kept here. above all. If you sell a service. A plant can. In sales and distribution.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. a plant represents the location from which materials and services are distributed and corresponds to a distribution center. a plant can represent a manufacturing facility. Plant and storage location are organizational units that can be used by all logistic areas.sapeducation. Materials management is primarily concerned with the material flow. A plant must be uniquely assigned to a company code.co. a plant can represent the location services are rendered from (that is. The assignment between sales organizations and plants does not have to be unique. In sales and distribution.com .

A shipping point is a physical place and should be near the delivering plant. a group of employees responsible (only) for organizing urgent deliveries.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. More than one shipping point can be assigned to a plant. This can also be appropriate for plants in physical proximity.sapeducation. a mail depot. Each outbound delivery is processed by one shipping point. © SAP AG TERP10 5-14 Visit: www. The shipping point can be a loading ramp.Organizational Unit: Shipping Point Plant 1 Plant 2 Shipping point 1 Shipping point 1 Shipping point 2  SAP AG 2004 Shipping is an integrated module of sales and distribution processing.co. The shipping point is the highest-level organizational unit of shipping that controls your shipping activities. You assign a shipping point at plant level. It can also be. You can also assign several shipping points to a plant.com . or a rail depot. for example.

Control tables: You can create and maintain these tables in Customizing. EDI. This could be. order confirmations using EDI. such as mail.com . or invoices by fax.Master Data Control tables Order Customer master data Sold-to party 2300 Ship-to party 788 Customer master data Material master data Item Material Quantity 10 1400-100 20 1400-200 30 1400-410 10 20 15 Output master data Condition master data Customer-material Info record Control tables  SAP AG 2004 Several sources of data can be copied into a sales order or into another sales and distribution document. © SAP AG TERP10 5-15 Visit: www. depending on the table settings. a material price or a customer discount). or fax. Output is information that is sent to the customer using various media. Examples include the printout of a quotation or an order confirmation. a quotation can serve as a data source for a sales order. if necessary. The default values of several data can be controlled in the sales and distribution documents. Most of them are default values that you can overwrite in the sales and distribution document. These sources of data include.sapeducation.co. for example: Customer master data Material master data Condition master data (You create and maintain this master data in the sales and distribution master data for automatic pricing. for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. For example. One sales document can serve as a source of data for another sales document.

Customer Master Customer master data Sales Area Data Relevant for sales and distribution Valid for: Sales Organization Distribution Channel Division General Data Relevant for sales and distribution and accounting Valid for: all organizational units Company Code Data Relevant for accounting Valid for: Company Code  SAP AG 2004 The customer master groups data into categories: general data. © SAP AG TERP10 5-16 Visit: www. It is valid for all organizational units within a client.co. distribution channel. It is stored centrally (clientspecific). invoices. deliveries. The company code data is relevant for accounting. It is valid for the respective company code.sapeducation.com . and company code data. sales area data. The sales area data is relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid for the respective sales area (sales organization. The general data is relevant for sales and distribution and for accounting. and customer payments. in order to avoid data redundancy. division).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The customer master includes all data necessary for processing orders.

warehouse management.. This is valid for various organizational units. sales and distribution data.. Basic data is relevant for all areas. Relevant for engineering. materials planning. and so on. accounting. It is valid for the respective delivering plant. It is valid for all organizational units within a client. accounting. The sales: plant data is also relevant for sales and distribution. purchasing data. © SAP AG TERP10 5-17 Visit: www. … Sales: Sales Org Relevant for sales and distribution Valid for: Sales organization Distribution channel Sales: General/ Plant Data Relevant for sales and distribution Valid for: Delivering plant  SAP AG 2004 The material master is grouped into several views: Basic data. It is valid for the respective sales organization and the distribution channel.Material Master Material master data Basic Data 1 Relevant for all areas Valid for all organizational units Purchasing Relevant for materials management Valid for: Plant Other .com .co. various further data for engineering/design.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. costing. Sales: sales organization data is relevant for sales and distribution. There is additional data for several other areas.

or delivery) You can use the customer-material information record to maintain the following data: Cross-reference from your customer's material number to your material number and the customer's material description.sapeducation.com . these default values are preferred to the values from the customer or the material master when processing a document (order. specifying if the customer accepts partial deliveries. If a customer-material info exists for a customer and a material.co. © SAP AG TERP10 5-18 Visit: www. Specific shipping information for this customer and material (such as delivery tolerances. or the default delivering plant).Customer.Material Information Record Customer Master Material Master Customer-material Info record Customer Sales Organization Distribution Channel Material Description 2300 1000 12 Customer-specific data: Customer-material description S3000H front light R1700 rear light 1440-100 Headlight Deluxe 1400-200 Rear Light + additional data  SAP AG 2004 You can use the customer-material information to record data for a combination of certain customers and materials.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

order confirmations using EDI. EDI. Output can be sent for various sales and distribution documents (order. mail. for example: printer. or by using a standard program (RSNAST00) that is run regularly.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. medium Time Language Output determination Sales Order Output type: Transm. you define the transmission medium. and the partner function for an output type. Transmission media include. order confirmation. billing document) In the output master data. telex. or fax.com . for example: sold-to party. the time.Output Output Master Data Output type: Partner function Trans. © SAP AG TERP10 5-19 Visit: www. and bill-to party. delivery. fax. medium: Partner function: Time: Language: Order confirmation Print output AG 2300 immediately when saving DE Print Order Confirmation 6177 Motomarkt Heidelberg Customer number 2300 We will deliver: Item Material Quantity Value 1 S3000 10 650 2 R1700 10 300 Total 950  SAP AG 2004 Output is information that is sent to the customer using various media. Output types include. or invoices by fax. The layout of an output is defined by a form in SAPscript. Partner functions include. ship-to party. such as mail. output determination takes place using the condition technique. EDI. invoice.co. The form is assigned to an output type. Times at which output is sent include: immediately when saving. Examples include: the printout of a quotation or an order confirmation. As with pricing. for example: quotation.

surcharges and discounts. for example. freights. In Customizing. pricing group customer/material cust. freights or taxes can be dependent.com .sapeducation. pricing group Other Taxes Value-added tax Jurisdictional taxes Other  SAP AG 2004 The condition master data includes prices.co. surcharges and discounts. maintain a material price customer-specifically or define a discount to be dependent on the customer and the material pricing group. © SAP AG TERP10 5-20 Visit: www. (You can define conditions to be dependent on any document fields)./mat. pricing group pricing group/ mat.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you can control the data on which prices. Frequently occurring cases have already been set in the standard system. and taxes. You can. You can define condition master data (condition records) to be dependent on various data.Condition Master Condition master data Prices Material price Price list Customer-specific Other Freights Freight Incoterms 1+ 2 Other Surcharges/ Discounts customer material pricing group mat.

com .Organizational Units and Master Data: Topic Summary You are now able to: List the organizational units that are critical to the Sales Order Management process List the master data elements that are critical to the Customer Order Management process  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-21 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.co.

you will be able to: Execute the order to cash business process within mySAP ERP Define key integration points with other mySAP ERP processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-22 Visit: www.co.sapeducation.Order to Cash Business Process: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

Order to Cash Business Process: Overview Pre-Sales Activities Sales Order Processing Inventory Sourcing Shipping Payment Billing  SAP AG 2004 Effective sales order processing connects all activity to customer demand in a series of integrated processes. The steps in a sales process are then reproduced by electronic documents that are linked to each other. In the billing process. and. you create a sales document. As part of sales order processing. the system determines the supplier of the goods. and. you organize and perform the delivery of goods. The customer order management process begins with establishing and maintaining customer relationships. The Customer Order Management cycle can begin with Pre-Sales Activities. you check open items and post incoming payments. © SAP AG TERP10 5-23 Visit: www. For example.com . Is the supplier from one of your delivering plants. which one? As part of shipping processing. if so. in response to a customer inquiry . which one? Is the supplier a third-party vendor. if so.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. based on data that you have stored in the system. you create and send a quotation.co. As part of handling payments. and ends with invoicing for delivery of goods or service provided to the customer. The application component Sales and Distribution makes this sales order processing possible.sapeducation. Posting the customer incoming payments is part of the application component Financial Accounting. During procurement. you create the invoice and transfer all the necessary data into Accounting.

internet campaigns. © SAP AG TERP10 5-24 Visit: www. Possible sequences of such campaigns can be a non-binding customer inquiry or a request for a quotation. you can refer to this data. can trigger sales processes. for example. for example by Tracking lost sales Recording pre-sales data to help negotiate large contracts Selling goods and services to large organizations that require documentation of the entire process. Use this pre-sales information to plan and evaluate your marketing and sales strategies and as a basis for establishing long term business relationships with your customers. Inquiries and quotations help you to determine important sales-related data and can be saved as documents.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. fax etc.Pre-Sales Activities Establishing and maintaining customer relationships Pre-Sales activities may include: Creating and tracking customer contacts Mailing campaigns Answering customer questions received by e-mail. Inquiries Quotations  SAP AG 2004 Specific marketing measures.co. If the customer then places an order. trade fair sales activities or telephone campaigns.sapeducation.com . direct mailing campaigns.

com .co. As a result. The sales component thus automatically proposes data from master records and control tables that you previously stored. © SAP AG TERP10 5-25 Visit: www. The sales order contains all information to process the customer's request during sales order processing.sapeducation. possible input errors occuring during sales order processing and entering of redundant data is avoided.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Standard orders normally contain: Customer and material information Pricing conditions for each item Delivery dates and quantities Shipping information Billing information  SAP AG 2004 A sales order is an electronic document that records your customer's request for goods or services. You can enter a sales order with many items on a single screen.Sales Order Processing The employees in your department Customer Service take orders in writing and over the phone. Sales orders can also be created via the internet or through messages received from business partners.

A sales order can refer to a business transaction that already exists in the system. For example.com . A quotation can also result in several sales orders. one or more inquiries and quotations can be reference documents. This allows you to group all the quotations for one customer.Creating an Order Quotation 1 Cust. In this case. 2 Open items? Quotation still valid? Order 1 OR 6732 Order confirmation Order 3 OR 7191 Order 2 OR 6911  SAP AG 2004 A sales document is created in a sales area. the SAP System copies the relevant data to the sales order. 1 Quotation 2 Cust. 1 Quotation 3 Cust. © SAP AG TERP10 5-26 Visit: www.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

This includes. The views are grouped into overview. for example when the quantity ordered is to be delivered in several partial deliveries at different times. A new sales document is entered on an overview screen. Examples include material item. the data can be displayed and processed in different views.com .sapeducation. Data is distributed on these levels as follows: Sales document header The data in the document header is valid for the entire document. header and item screens. free-of-charge item or text item. The item can have several schedule lines. data about the material and quantities ordered. Sales document items Each item in the sales document contains its own data. service item. © SAP AG TERP10 5-27 Visit: www. They belong uniquely to an item. Each sales document can have several items. This includes. for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Item schedule lines Schedule lines contain delivery quantities and delivery dates. while individual items can be controlled differently.Sales Document Structure Header Item 1 Schedule line 1 Standard order Sold-to party Ship-to party Item 10 1 Material 1400-100 01 Nov 2387 4876 Quantity 20 PC 20 PC Item 2 Schedule line 1 Schedule line 2 20 1 2 1400-200 01 Nov 01 Jan 50 PC 20 PC 30 PC  SAP AG 2004 A sales document is grouped into three levels: header. To process the sales documents efficiently. item and schedule line. for example. Every item that has a subsequent outbound delivery in the sales and distribution process must have at least a schedule line. customer-related data.co.

com .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. for example: Be from available stock Be guaranteed by replenishment Trigger make-to-order production Initiate the outbound delivery using external suppliers (third-party business transaction) Organize the outbound delivery from another warehouse (stock transfer). This includes products that are: inhouse-produced or / and externally-produced  SAP AG 2004 The way in which a material is obtained for a sales order can depend on the type of material and on the sales transaction. The procurement can. © SAP AG TERP10 5-28 Visit: www.Inventory Sourcing In this process step. you can: check the availability of the ordered goods and publish the demand in materials planning Materials planning organizes and monitors the actual procurement process.

There are also various tables in Customizing.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 5-29 Visit: www.co. the scope of check for determining available quantity. you can access the Available to Promise (ATP) quantities. which and/or what type of availability check should be carried out for this material during order processing. From the availability control screen. and the other plants that may have the material available.Availability Check in the Sales Order Standard order Item Material Quantity 10 1400-310 10 Material Master Material: 1400-310 Availability check: 02 Control tables An availability check occurs during sales order processing if: The material requires an inventory check The availability check is set in Customizing for this transaction  SAP AG 2004 On the Sales and Distribution tab page in the material master you can: enter in Gen./Plant in the availability check field. on which the availability check is also dependent.com .

sapeducation. The incompletion log functions are available in the sales order and in the delivery. In Customizing. © SAP AG TERP10 5-30 Visit: www. Terms of payment Item 10 20 Material 1400-100 1400-200 Qty 10 10 Weight 12 KG Incompletion log Item: Missing data PO number Terms of payment Weight W: Please enter purchase order number Call: a) automatically when saving b) via menu bar  SAP AG 2004 Each sales and distribution document contains data required for the document and for further processing. you can decide which fields should be part of the incompletion log.com .co. The system determines which fields are displayed in the incompletion log when the user does not fill them during sales order processing.Incompletion Log Sales order Sold-to party 2300 Purchase order no. You can also call it by choosing Edit -> Incompletion log. The incompletion log will be displayed a) automatically when you save your entries.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.The customer works with the R/3 System and wants to establish an additional distribution channel on the Internet.sapeducation.The only additional software required is a J2EE-Server.Enhanced functionality in comparison with the Internet Sales R/3 Edition (e.com .co.It is possible to run the CRM without a SAP R/3 in the back end. Advantages of the two solutions: Internet Sales R/3 Edition: . Marketing integration) .Internet Sales with or without CRM Internet Sales R/3 Edition Product Catalog FI Customer Master SD SAP R/3 Mobile Sales CRM Internet Sales CRM/EBP Web shop profile Product Catalog Customer Master Sales (Order) LES Call center  SAP AG 2004 Internet Sales R/3 Edition and CRM Internet Sales are SAP’s Web Shop solutions for selling products on the Internet. .Integral component of the SAP CRM system . © SAP AG TERP10 5-31 Visit: www. This channel can be set up very quickly with the Internet Sales R/3 Edition. CRM Internet Sales .g.

freight. Pricing: When you create an order or an order template. Shopping Basket: Net price.sapeducation. gross price.Shopping Process Virtual Shopping Basket Pricing Customer Registration Secure Payment Transactions Document Status Product Search. catalog prices are used.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and tax are identified separately Customer Registration: The customer registration is only possible in the B2C scenario Document Status: The system reports the successful arrival of the purchase order and the purchase order number under which customers can track the status of the purchase order © SAP AG TERP10 5-32 Visit: www. Configuration: This function allows your customers to configure products using the Internet Pricing and Configurator (IPC) and to order them as they have been configured.co.com . Configuration Product Catalog  SAP AG 2004 Product Catalog: The Web catalog contains precisely one product catalog. Catalog prices can be list prices or prices calculated by the IPC.

supports and monitors numerous sub processes for shipping processing such as (Optional) picking and confirming (transfer requests). Creating a transfer order includes copying data from the delivery document to the transfer order for processing within the warehouse. (Optional) planning and monitoring of transport (shipment document) and Posting the goods issue (goods issue documents). onto the delivery document. Creating a delivery document includes copying information from the sales order.co. The delivery document controls. The posting of the goods issue can bring about a change based on a quantity basis as well as on a value basis in change stock.sapeducation. (Optional) Packing. such as the materials and quantities. within your warehouse. The transfer order is essential for controlling the movement of goods within your warehouse. There is a source location and a destination location for every transfer order.com . The transfer order is based on a simple principle: where you are taking goods from and to. Changes based on a quantity basis are made on the relevant balance sheet accounts and stock change accounts in financial accounting.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 5-33 Visit: www.Shipping Shipping processing supports: Creating outbound deliveries Picking (by creating transfer orders) Packing Posting the goods issue  SAP AG 2004 Shipping processing in Sales and Distribution begins when you create the delivery document.

the orders must all have the same characteristics that are essential for the shipping process.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can create one or several outbound deliveries from the order. 1 Order 3 Cust. You can also combine items from several orders into one outbound delivery.Creating an Outbound Delivery Order 1 Cust. © SAP AG TERP10 5-34 Visit: www.com . The SAP System copies the relevant data from the order to the outbound delivery. for example: shipping point Due date Ship-to address The SAP System can create deliveries either on-line or as a background job to be executed during off-peak hours. 1 Order 2 Cust. To combine them successfully. 2 Shipping point? Delivery date? Ship-to party? Delivery 1 DEL 80006732 Delivery note Delivery 2 DEL 80006834 Delivery 3 DEL 80007322  SAP AG 2004 You can create an outbound delivery in a shipping point for orders that are due for delivery.co.

Delivery document item Each item in the sales document contains its own data.Structure of Delivery Document Header Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 10 20 30 Delivery Ship-to party 4876 Material 1400-100 1400-200 1400-300 Quantity 20 PC 30 PC 10 PC  SAP AG 2004 A delivery document is grouped into two levels: header and item. free-of-charge item or text item. The delivery document does not contain schedule lines. This includes. Each sales document can have several items. for example. data for the ship-to party and schedules for shipping processing.sapeducation. header and item screens. the data can be read and processed in different views. Examples include material item.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.The items can be controlled differently. The views are grouped into overview. © SAP AG TERP10 5-35 Visit: www. The data is distributed across these levels as follows: Delivery document header The data for the document header is valid for the entire document. Each schedule line in the sales document can become an item in the delivery document.co. quantities and weights as well as stock information. To process delivery documents efficiently. This includes data about the material.com .

© SAP AG TERP10 5-36 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 1400-100 20 1400-200 12 Pick quantity TO Picked quantity 20  SAP AG 2004 You can control an item in an outbound delivery so that picking is required. which correspond to the delivery quantities. 10 1400-100 20 20 20 1400-200 12 12 Delivery quantity Transfer order Item Material 10 Pick quant. The items in the transfer requests contain the materials and the quantites to be picked. Picking is carried out by creating transfer requests with which you trigger and survey warehouse movements.com . Picking confirmation can either be automatic or can be carried out in a spearate processing step.co.Picking in Shipping Processing shipping point Warehouse (number) Delivery Item Material Delivery Pick quantity quant. At the same time the delivery quantites are transferred into the outbound delivery as picking quantities.sapeducation. You can print the pick list for use in the warehouse from the transfer request.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The functionality used here is basically the same as for loading in the delivery.sapeducation. Shipping units from the delivery are copied and can no longer be changed.g. items which were not already packed in the delivery. Unlike packing in the delivery.com .. packing in the shipment can be carried out for several deliveries. © SAP AG TERP10 5-37 Visit: www. trucks).co.Loading and Packing Shipments  SAP AG 2004 At the time of shipment. Packed items are assigned to the required means of transport (e. can be packed in shipping units using shipping materials.

the system automatically: Updates the quantities in inventory management and delivery requirements in materials planning Updates the value change in the balance sheet accounts for inventory accounting (the postings from the relevant accounting document are based on the cost of the material) Generates additional documents for accounting.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example. for controlling Generates the billing due list Updates the status in all relevant sales documents © SAP AG TERP10 5-38 Visit: www.sapeducation.co.Post Goods Issue Delivery Supply and demand Goods issue Valuated stock Accounting document M1 UNI Delivery Material M1 Sales price Cost 100 PC 25 UNI 12 UNI Quotation Sales order Billing due list Billing Document date 10 Jun 80002673 12 Jun 80002697 17 Jun 80002763 CO documents  SAP AG 2004 When you post goods issue.

the R/3 system carries out a debit posting on the customer receivables account and a credit posting on the revenue account.Billing Billing supports: Creating invoices for products and services Creating credit and debit memos Cancelling previously posted billing documents Automatically transferring billing document data to accounting  SAP AG 2004 When you create a billing document. During this process. Delivery items as well as order items (for example services)can be references for the billing document. The billing document serves as a data source for financial accounting (FI) to help you to monitor and process customer payments.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. © SAP AG TERP10 5-39 Visit: www.com .sapeducation. the G/L accounts will normally be updated automatically. data is copied from the sales order and the delivery document to the billing document. The billing document serves several important functions: It is the sales and distribution document that helps you to generate invoices. When you create a billing document.

com .sapeducation. doc. The SAP System can combine deliveries into a billing document. for example: Payer Billing date Destination country The SAP System can create invoices either online or as a background job to be executed during offpeak hours. doc. 1 Delivery 2 Cust. You can group invoices using selection criteria.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. such as customer.Creating a Billing Document Delivery 1 Cust. billing date and destination country. provided these deliveries share some essential billing characteristics. doc. 2 F2 90006834 Bill. 3 F2 90006913  SAP AG 2004 You can create an invoice for one delivery or sales order. 1 Delivery 3 Cust. 2 Payer? Billing date? Destination country? Bill. © SAP AG TERP10 5-40 Visit: www. 1 F2 90003733 Invoice Bill.

sapeducation.co. This includes. The views are grouped into overview. the data can be read and processed in different views. The data is distributed as follows: Billing document header The data for the document header is valid for the entire document. To process billing documents efficiently. for example.com . Billing document items Each item in the sales document contains its own data. Each billing document can have several items. Payer Item Material 1400-100 1400-200 1400-300 3761 Invoiced Quantity 20 PC 30 PC 10 PC Item 3 20 30  SAP AG 2004 A billing document includes two levels: header and item. © SAP AG TERP10 5-41 Visit: www. details about the material.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Billing Document Structure Header Item 1 Item 2 10 Billing doc. billing quantities and net values for the items. for example. data about the payer and billing date. header and item screens. This includes.

co. analysis Sales order Delivery  SAP AG 2004 When you save the billing document. Credit manag. the R/3 system carries out a debit posting on the customer receivables account and a credit posting on the revenue account. In accounting. The accounting document contains all the completed postings in financial accounting that refer back to pricing in SD. is updated the sales statistics in the sales information system are updated the customer credit account is updated © SAP AG TERP10 5-42 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 90006834 Accounting document 10006834 Sales Info System Profit. When you save the billing document. for example. the following also occurs: the status in all related sales. profitability analysis. market segment analysis (CO-PA) or consolidation (FI-LC).sapeducation. account Bill.com .doc. When the billing document is posted. the receivable on the customer account or the obtained net sales and taxes on the relevant G/L accounts. further documents for accounting can be automatically generated by the system. for example. delivery and billing documents.Effects of Billing Document Cust. for the components Controlling (CO). the system automatically generates all the required documents for accounting.

the relevant G/L accounts will be updated automatically. During this process.co.sapeducation.com . Payment supports: Posting payments against invoices Reviewing differences  SAP AG 2004 When you post an incoming payment. the R/3 system carries out a debit posting to the cash account and a credit memo to the customer receivables account.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 5-43 Visit: www.Payment Payment is a process that is part of the application module Financial Accounting.

From this list. © SAP AG TERP10 5-44 Visit: www. and you can answer customer questions quickly and reliably. WMS transfer order 482 . This provides an overview of the development of your sales processes at any time.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Invoice 90005371 … Accounting document 100001276  SAP AG 2004 The documents in a sales process are linked to each other using the document flow.. All preceding and succeeding documents are displayed. depending on the document you call the list from.. you can display the relevant documents or call up status overviews for the documents. This enables you to access the history and current status of your sales processes at any time.com . GD goods issue: delvy 4900001537 . Delivery 80002832 . Accounting document Document Standard order 6839 ..Document Flow in the SAP System Standard order Outbound delivery Billing doc. You can display the document flow as a list of linked documents.

sapeducation. Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 2 Schedule line 1 Schedule line 2 Item 3  SAP AG 2004 The document flow is updated on the document header and document line level. Only sales documents contain schedule lines.com . Billing doc.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Therefore delivery documents and billing documents do not need schedule lines. © SAP AG TERP10 5-45 Visit: www. Since each schedule line contains its own delivery date.co.Document Flow at Item Level Sales order Sales order Item 1 Schedule line 1 Delivery Delivery Item 1 Item 2 Billing doc. each deliverable schedule line becomes an item in a delivery document.

Sales and Distribution: Integration Financial Accounting Profitability Analysis Materials Management Warehouse Management Picking Removal from stock location Post Goods Issue Billing Sales Orders Stock Reservation Stock removal Availability check Sales Information System Data Sales and Distribution Project Systems Make to Order Production Planning  SAP AG 2004 Sales and Distribution integrates with a variety of other modules. Order entry personnel use this information to advise customers about prices and delivery dates before they confirm an order. inventory quantities must be reduced and the general ledger must be updated appropriately. your company typically enters customer orders which contain customer and product information. your company schedules and organizes customer orders for optimal delivery. Sales and Distribution integrates with Production Planning so that the product is made to satisfy the customer order requirement. Following order entry. by means of Posting Goods Issue. Your company manages customer orders from initial request for product to the receipt and posting of customer payment as part of the Customer Order Management cycle. as well as delivery schedules. Product is picked in the Warehouse Management module (noting any discrepancies from the ordered quantity) and print the shipping documents. Here Sales and Distribution. © SAP AG TERP10 5-46 Visit: www. Here Sales and Distribution integrates with Materials Management for availability checking. After you deliver the product. To begin the cycle. Delivery and billing processing both integrate with Project Systems. For make to order product. integrates with Materials Management and Financial Accounting and possibly Controlling.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. The Financial Accounting periodically reviews the customer’s open items and posts the incoming payments when received. When the delivery is released to the customer (truck leaves the dock). an invoice must be generated and the transaction posted to the general ledger.com .sapeducation.

sapeducation.co.Order to Cash Business Process: Topic Summary You are now able to: Execute the order to cash business process within mySAP ERP Define key integration points with other mySAP ERP processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-47 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

sapeducation.co.com . you will be able to: Discuss the reporting and analysis tools used in the Sales Order Management process  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-48 Visit: www.Reporting and Analysis Tools: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

sapeducation.co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Reporting and Analysis on the Processes in Sales Order Management Contents: Information sources in Sales Order Management List/worklist Lists and reports Online lists and online reporting Worklists Document flow Sales Information System Information structures Standard analyses Flexible analyses  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-49 Visit: www.

sapeducation. picking.com . You can structure and enhance the information library as you require.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. SIS contains standard analyses as well as flexible analyses to help you evaluate statistical data. The Logistics Information Library allows you to integrate standard and flexible analyses as well as your own reports. © SAP AG TERP10 5-50 Visit: www. and billing. SAP provides list functions to create worklists in sales.Sources of Sales Order Information Info library Standard analyses Flexible analyses ABAP query lists & reports SIS Info structure Master and document data  SAP AG 2004 The Sales Information System (SIS) belongs to Sales and Distribution. If the standard reports do not fulfill your requirements. delivery.co. you can use ABAP queries to extract information from the database into a report. With SIS. you can compress data from sales documents to obtain information which will help you make strategic business decisions.

a material. for example. date. or customer). – for a customer or a material – with a specific status Backorders Open quotations allow you to review and change documents Delivery list Billing due list Worklists display work that needs to be processed allow you to organize tasks into efficient work units  SAP AG 2004 Lists fall into two categories. © SAP AG TERP10 5-51 Visit: www. delivery.com . organizational element. You select the tasks according to your area of responsibility and to various selection criteria (such as.Worklists allow you to select certain tasks in sales and distribution for processing.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. sales.co. or a combination of both.Other online lists display documents with a certain status that requires action from someone (for instance. or billing documents for a customer. all documents blocked for delivery).Lists and Reports Online lists provide data from documents display documents. Worklists: .Online lists display. Online lists: .sapeducation. . for example.

etc) for each document © SAP AG TERP10 5-52 Visit: www.Example: List of Sales Orders Sold-to party: C1 Sold-to party: C1 Sales order 1241 Sales order 1549 Sales order 1600 Functions: Sort Find Sum . delivery status. sort and sum up functions adding or deleting additional fields (columns) From the list.co.com .Document status  SAP AG 2004 Enter the information you want to use to restrict the options on the selection screen. you can also: display or change a sales order and return to the list display status information (overall status. You can edit the list further by using filter. The system then displays a list of the relevant documents.Other field .sapeducation.Change document .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

The following information systems are available in Logistics: SIS Sales Information System PURCHIS Purchasing Information System INVCO Inventory Controlling TIS Transportation Information System SFIS Shop Floor Information System QMIS Quality Management Information System PMIS Plant Maintenance Information System © SAP AG TERP10 5-53 Visit: www.co.com .Logistics Information System LIS SIS PURCHIS INVCO QMIS PMIS TIS SFIS 1988 ---------------1994 ---------------- SD QM MM PUR PM MM IM PP WM  SAP AG 2004 A series of application-specific information systems are available in LIS which have a standardized interface and similar basic functionality.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

Key figures are performance measures. This data is constantly collected and updated by the system. sales volume. and materials.co. Information structures contain three basic types of information: Characteristics are criteria which you specify to collect data on a certain subject.How Information Structures are Organized Sxxx Time unit 398 157 005 Characteristics Key figures Week Sales organization April April 11 11 Fr Sa Su Customer Mo Tu We Th Incoming orders Sales volume Number of order items Delivery … quantity  SAP AG 2004 The Sales Information System is based on information structures. A period unit is also a criterion used in information structures. Incoming order. for example. These are special statistic tables which contain transactional data from the different applications. for example.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 5-54 Visit: www.sapeducation. and returns. In SD. are critical in SD. for a day. customers. They provide important business information specific to a characteristic. sales offices. You can collect data for a particular period. a month. you normally require sales information on sales organizations. or a posting period. a week.

.Information Structures in Sales Order Management Time unit Characteristics Sxx . information structures for Credit Management.. © SAP AG TERP10 5-55 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. . Material SOrg. There are also information structures available in the standard system for internal use: for example. Alternatively.. S001 Customer Cust. or for processing contracts.sapeducation.com . DCh … Time unit Incoming orders Sales volume Return … 398 157 005 Key figures S002 Sales office S003 Sales organization S004 Material S005 Shipping point Sxxx . . S501 own info structure . S999 own info structure S066/67 Credit limit S060 Rebate S009/14 Sales support Sxxx . You can use the standard analyses to evaluate data without having to make additional settings in Customizing. Rebate Processing.  SAP AG 2004 There are several standard information structures for Sales and Distribution available (for example. S001 to S006). . you can create your own information structures in Customizing using the name range S501 to S999. Sales Support. .

000 30. In addition.: 1000 Sales org. value amount Drill-down to view period 1000 100. Each analysis can be saved.com .000 40.000 20. 60. You can then graphically display this data.000 90. In the first step. ABC analyses.000 . master data or document information. . © SAP AG TERP10 5-56 Visit: www.000 50.000 Brown Inc.  SAP AG 2004 Standard analyses provide extensive functions to create sophisticated presentations and analyses for the data.Standard Analyses Additional information Material master Customer master Documents Drill-down to view customer Customer analyses Sales Order Invoiced Org. The analysis is based on the information structures.: 1000 Customer: Smith Inc. This data is displayed in an initial list. You can use a wide range of tools to analyze the selected data and present the results.1998 35.sapeducation. for example. you select the required data scope according to the characteristics and the period of the info structure. .000 Functions ABC analysis Classification Dual classification Planned/actual comparison Cumulative frequency curve Correlation Feb. and other tools for comparison. 40.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can call up the standard transactions directly from the current analysis to display.000 Sales org. time series. Month PO Invoiced value amount Customer PO Invoiced value amount Smith Inc. correlation. A variety of drill-down features are available in the lists.1998 25.000 Mar. These include cumulative frequency curves.co. Top N evaluations. the results of the analyses can be printed downloaded as a file to your local PC downloaded into a spreadsheet program sent to one or more employees using the SAP R/3 Office component.

The resulting list provides a variety of possibilities for interactive online processing.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.000 $ 40.com .000 $ 65.000 $ 40. of order items 66 24 18 8 42 2 40 Order value No.000 $ 60.000 $ 90. This procedure enables you to combine characteristics and key figures from different information sturctures in one list use your own formulas to calculate new key figures from existing ones choose between a variety of layouts.co. The relevant program will then be generated in the background.000 $ 110. of order items April 1996 Order value $ 240.000 $ 50.000 Key figures Pick-up technique March 1996 No. Laser printer Personal computer $ 200.Flexible Analyses 398 157 005 Characteristics Customer Material Month Order value Total Smith Inc. Printer 6512 Computer H217 Miller Inc.000 $ 50.000 $ 114.000 $ 60.000 $ 75.000 $ 100. © SAP AG TERP10 5-57 Visit: www.000 No.sapeducation. of order items 75 26 16 10 49 4 45  SAP AG 2004 Flexible analyses in the LIS allow you to determine the way in which data should be combined in an individual report procurement You define the form and the contents of the required list via the menu.

co.Reporting and Analysis Tools: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the reporting and analysis tools in the SAP System Use list processing to locate transaction information and organize tasks Analyze Sales Order information using the tools available in the Sales Information System (SIS) Define the components of information structures  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-58 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.com .

com .co.Sales Order Management: Unit Summary You are now able to: List the organizational units and master data that are critical to the Sales Order Management process Perform the order to cash business process Identify key integration points with other mySAP ERP processes Identify the reporting and analysis tools used in Sales Order Management process  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-59 Visit: www.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

© SAP AG TERP10 5-60 Visit: www. create a customer discount.co. The material master record stores all the data required to define and manage a material. 1-1-2 Verify that the language key is the language of the course. As new products are developed. you need to update the customer master record for customer T-S50B##. and create a material master record. if necessary. and change it. You need to verify the language and change the payment terms. As new customers are identified.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. they must be entered into the system as well. 1-1-1 Change customer T-S50B## in sales area 1000 / 12 / 00. if you are assigned to Group 01 and the data indicates input AB##. Your customer may negotiate special pricing or discounts with you. For example.com . In all exercises. These special deals are maintained in the R/3 system as ‘conditions’. 1-1 Due to changes with an existing customer. 1-1-4 Save the master record. the new customer information must be entered into the system. The customer master record stores all customer information necessary to fulfill the order cycle.sapeducation. you will update and create a customer master record. you need to be able to update the existing customer master record to reflect the changes. you would enter AB01. 1-1-3 Change the payment terms of the customer to ZB00. To validate the master data configuration has been defined according to your business requirements. you will be able to: • Change the payment terms in the customer master record for an existing customer • Create a customer master record • Create a material master record As your relationship with existing customers changes.Sales Order Management: Exercises Unit: Sales Order Management Topic: Organizational and Master Data At the conclusion of this exercise. ## represents your group number.

e.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Maintain the fields based on the customer data sheet found below. Save when prompted.co. Customer Data Sheet Address Name Search term Street Postal Code (Zip Code in US) City Country Transportation Zone Language Accounting Management Reconciliation account Sales Shipping Billing Document Partner Functions Customer group Shipping conditions (Shp. You may choose the value for any required fields that are not specified on the sheet. 51. distribution channel 12 and division 00.) Delivery plant Payment terms Tax classific. 1-2-1 Create a complete sold-to customer master record for your new customer 123## using company code 1000.1-2 A new international customer calls the customer service department wanting to place an order.Cond. Create a new sold-to customer master record using the data specified below so an order can be processed. In the interest of time. © SAP AG TERP10 5-61 Visit: www. 52…70) 1000 ZB01 0 (tax exempt) 1-2-2 Save the customer master record. Proceed to the next screen by choosing the Enter icon.com . No Entries Required At your discretion TERP-## At your discretion 70563 Stuttgart DE 0000000001 Language of the course 140000 02 ## + 50 (i. The system will display many screens associated with the creation of a sold-to customer record. you will only be entering critical data. sales organization 1000.sapeducation. Review each screen and enter data as needed.

select the Create Views Selected indicatory. Data 1 and 2 Sales: General / Plant data MRP 1 and 2 Accounting 1 and 2 To ensure that all the views will be created.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.1-3 Display the customer record (123##) you just created and answer the following questions. you can use T-AS1## as a reference material. In order to facilitate the entry of the material master record.com . 1-5-1 Create material M##. sales organization 1000. © SAP AG TERP10 5-62 Visit: www. using industry sector M and material type HAWATrading Goods.sapeducation. You enter the material master for plant 1000. 1-5-2 Create the following views for your material master record: • • • • • Basic data 1 and 2 Sales: Sales Org. It is a headlight. __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ 1-5 A new product is being offered to your customers.co. and distribution channel 12. Use the ‘copy from’ feature to create by referencing the material located in the previous exercise. similar to the existing material T-AS1##. 1-3-1 What is the definition of Customer Group? How did you locate this information? _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ 1-4 What is the definition of sales organization? Use the glossary to verify your answer.

Data 1 tab. navigate to the conditions screen and maintain a price (rate) 60 EUR per unit. New material: • • • • • • • • Plant 1000 Storage location 0001 Sales organization 1000 Distribution channel 12 Plant 1000 Storage location 0001 Sales organization 1000 Distribution channel 12 Existing material: 1-5-4 Make the following changes to the fields on the Basic Data 1 tab. Enter 44 EUR in the standard price to indicate the standard cost for this product. what value has been maintained in that field? How did that field get populated? _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ 1-6-2 What is the definition of loading group (LoadingGrp) field on the Sales:General / Plant Data view? _____________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 5-63 Visit: www. 1-5-6 Advance to the Accounting 1 tab. • • Insert “## “ before the existing material description in your language Change the old material number to TERP-## 1-5-5 Advance to the Sales Org.1-5-3 Enter the organizational elements for your new material on the left side of the window. 1-5-7 Display remaining views.co. 1-6-1 Has a default delivering plant been maintained? If so. 1-6 Display the Sales: Sales Org Data 1 and Sales: General / Plant Data views for the material master record you just created (M##) for plant 1000. and the organizational elements for the existing material on the right side of the window. Answer the following questions.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12.com .sapeducation. Save the material master record when prompted to do so. From this tab.

The accounting department periodically reviews the customer’s open items and posts the incoming payments when received. Sales orders contain customer and product information. an invoice must be generated and the transaction posted to the general ledger. © SAP AG TERP10 5-64 Visit: www.com . warehousing personnel will pick the products for the order (noting any discrepancies from the ordered quantity) and print the shipping documents. Following order entry. They also use this information to answer customer questions. When the delivery is released to the customer (truck leaves the dock). As a project team member. After the products are shipped to the customer. inventory quantities must be reduced and the general ledger must be updated appropriately.Unit: Sales Order Management Topic: Order to Cash Business Process At the conclusion of this exercise.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: • Create a standard order • Create a delivery for the sales order • Pick the product by processing a transfer order for the delivery • Post goods issue for the delivery • Create an invoice • Post customer payment • Display document flow throughout the COM cycle A customer places an order for materials.co.sapeducation. Customer service representatives use this information to advise customers about prices and delivery dates before they confirm an order. it is your responsibility to understand the customer order management cycle and key Sales and Distribution functions that support it. as well as delivery schedules.

Order number: ____________________ 2-2 Display the sales order you just created and answer the following questions. 2-2-1 What are the terms of payment for the entire sales order? _____________________________________________________________ 2-2-2 From which master data record was the terms of payment copied? ( ) customer master ( ) pricing conditions ( ) material master ( ) vendor master 2-2-3 Did the customer qualify for any discounts? If so.2-1 One of your customers calls to place an order for motorcycle headlights and taillights.1 Requested Delivery Date: 1 week from today Material T-AS1## T-AS2## Quantity 24 36 2-1-2 Save the order and record the order number. Distribution Channel 12.co.sapeducation.com . 2-1-1 Create a standard order (OR) using Sales Organization 1000. and Division 00 for customer T-S50B## based on this purchase order: Purchase Order Customer: T-S50B## Purchase Order Number: ## . which ones? _____________________________________________________________ 2-2-4 Which plant is the second line item being shipped from? _____________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 5-65 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Create a standard sales order based on the information provided below.

2-7-1 Create a transfer order for warehouse (whse number) 010. 2-7-2 Save the transfer order and record the document number.2-3 What are the 3 components (or levels) of a sales document? What type of data is found on each? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ 2-4 Once the order has been completed and the delivery date is near. Specify a selection date of one week from today. In Lean WM. 2-8-1 What is the pick quantity for the first line item? Can it be edited? _____________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 5-66 Visit: www. 2-4-1 Create a delivery in shipping point Z0## for the order created previously. Order overall processing status: ____________________ Delivery overall processing status: ____________________ 2-7 The next step in the delivery process is picking. a transfer order is processed to facilitate the picking process. Process it in the foreground and have the system transfer the pick quantity back to the delivery document (adopt pick.co. Transfer order: ____________________ 2-8 Access the delivery document in display mode and answer the following question.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Delivery number: ____________________ 2-5 Access the delivery you just created in change mode and answer the following questions. Create a transfer order.sapeducation. 2-4-2 Save the document and record the delivery number. quantity = 1). 2-5-1 What is the delivery quantity for the first line item? Delivery quantity: ____________________ 2-5-2 What is the pick quantity for the first line item? Can this value be edited? _____________________________________________________________ 2-6 View document flow for the delivery and record the overall processing status of the order and the delivery. the delivery process can begin. plant 1000 and the delivery you created previously.com . Create a delivery document to initiate shipping activities.

Change the delivery document and execute the process. 2-10-2 What message did you receive after the posting was processed? _____________________________________________________________ 2-11 View document flow for the delivery and answer the following questions.co.sapeducation. the ‘post goods issue’ process takes place. Answer the following question.2-9 View document flow and record the overall processing status of the delivery document and the transfer order.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . 2-10-1 Change the delivery document and post goods issue. 2-11-1 What is the overall processing status of the delivery document? Delivery overall processing status: ____________________ 2-11-2 Why does this overall processing status make sense? _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ 2-11-3 What entry was added to document flow to record the ‘post goods issue’? _____________________________________________________________ 2-12 Can the delivery quantities in the delivery document be changed after the post goods issue process occurs? Why or why not? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ 2-13 Can the plant associated with the first line item in the sales order be changed after the delivery has been created? Why or why not? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 5-67 Visit: www. Delivery overall processing status: ____________________ WMS transfer order overall processing status: ____________________ 2-10 Once picking is complete and the product has left the plant.

billing and accounting documents? Delivery overall processing status: ____________________ Invoice overall processing status: ____________________ Accounting document overall processing status: ____________________ 2-15-2 What two entries were added to document flow when this transaction was saved? _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ 2-16 Can the payment terms for the billing document be changed? Why or why not? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ 2-17 Can the pricing of the first line item of the sales order be changed at this point in the process? Why or why not? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ 2-18 How is the structure of a billing document different than the structure of a sales order? __________________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 5-68 Visit: www. 2-14-3 Save the invoice and record the document number: Billing document: ____________________ 2-15 View document flow and answer the following questions. Net value: ____________________ Go to the header pricing screen and view the ‘Total’ line within the conditions list. 2-15-1 What is the overall processing status of the delivery. Create a billing document for your delivery and record the net value of the invoice. 2-14-1 Create a billing document for your delivery document. 2-14-2 Record the net value and the total value of the invoice.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. In the next line add then Net value and total value.com . This will include the value of the line items and any taxes that the customer is responsible for.2-14 Products that are physically shipped to customers are ‘eligible for billing’ after goods issue has been posted.

co.sapeducation. 2-19-1 Post the total value of the invoice (identified previously) to company code 1000 to bank account 113100.com . Specify the customer number T-S50B## in the open item selection – account field. They would like to order 50 motorcycle helmets. 2-19-2 Save the payment transaction and record the accounting document number. Today is the document date. Post the payment to the customer’s A/R account. In what plant can the quantity be confirmed on the requested delivery date? _____________________________________________________________ 2-21-4 Your customer decides to wait until the product can be shipped from their preferred plant. 2-20-1 What is the overall processing status of the accounting document? Accounting document status: ____________________ 2-20-2 Was another entry added to document flow to reflect the receipt of payment against the invoice? Why or why not? _____________________________________________________________ 2-21 Your customer is so delighted with the shipment of headlights and taillights. ATP quantity: ____________________ SimReq-Rec/reqd quantity: ____________________ SimReq-Cum. ATP quantity: ____________________ 2-21-3 Check the inventory situation in all other plants.2-19 The customer has submitted payment for the invoice you just processed. © SAP AG TERP10 5-69 Visit: www. 2-21-1 Create an order for customer T-S50B## for 50 T-AS5##. Stock-cum.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You will not perform any further processing with this order. that they would like to order additional products. What screen is displayed? _____________________________________________________________ 2-21-2 Review the ATP (available to promise) quantities for this product located in plant 1000 by displaying the Availability Overview screen. Accounting document: ____________________ 2-20 View document flow for the sales order and answer the following questions. What date will the product be delivered to the customer? _____________________________________________________________ 2-21-5 Save the order. with a delivery date of today. to be delivered today. Choose the complete delivery option.

3-1-2 Choose the display variant order item.Unit: Sales Order Management Topic: Reporting and Analysis Tools At the conclusion of this exercise.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You may also use lists to answer basic customer questions. 3-1-3 Sort the list in ascending order based on material numbers. In addition. © SAP AG TERP10 5-70 Visit: www. you will be able to: • Generate a list of all sales orders for a customer using list processing tools • Execute a standard analysis in SIS In order to ensure that all phases of customer order management are efficient and effective. plant and shipping point at the end of the list.sapeducation. your management often requests sales analysis reports to analyze buying patterns and review the amount of business with each customer. To verify that the reporting and analysis tools meet your requirements. you require instant access to lists and online reporting for customer service. shipping and accounting activities. you will run various online reports using online lists and the sales information system 3-1 The sales and distribution departments require reporting and analysis for the current SD processes on a monthly basis at document level. 3-1-6 Optimize the column width. 3-1-5 Total the Net Value field for your customer.co. 3-1-4 Include the information on order quantity. 3-1-7 Exit the report. 3-1-1 Process a report listing all of the orders for your customer T-S50B##.com .

3-2-1 Execute a customer analysis within SIS for sales organization 1000. create a report variant. .com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and remove the credit memo key figure.co. 3-2-7 Drill-down into more detail for your top customer. Drill-down until the statistics are displayed by period.3-2 You’ve been asked to review the customer sales history for your sales organization by performing a standard customer analysis in the Sales information system. 3-2-3 Display the top 10 customers based on invoiced sales. Create a list of your top 10 customers according to invoiced sales then display that information graphically for the top customer. Since you are going to frequently run this report. 3-2-6 Add the key figures invoiced quantity and open order quantity to your report. The period you are interested in is January of the previous year to the current month / year. 3-2-2 Create a report variant. 3-2-4 Display both the customer name and number by changing how the characteristic is displayed.sapeducation. 3-2-5 Change the column width of the characteristic to 35. 3-2-8 Display the statistic invoiced sales graphically for this customer. © SAP AG TERP10 5-71 Visit: www.

sapeducation. You may choose the value for any required fields that are not specified on the sheet. On the Address tab.com . Company. verify that the language key is the language of the course. ## represents your group number. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data →Business Partner → Customer →Change →Complete Enter Customer Number and Sales Area Organizational Data. sales organization 1000. Select the Continue icon. Select the Continue icon. © SAP AG TERP10 5-72 Visit: www. 1-2-1 Create a complete sold-to customer master record for your new customer 123## using company code 1000. and change it. 1-1-1 Change customer T-S50B## in sales area 1000 / 12 / 00. Select Sales Area Data button Select Billing document tab and change the Terms of Payment to ZB00. Choose Save icon. Maintain the fields based on the customer data sheet found below. 1-2 A new international customer calls the customer service department wanting to place an order. For example. distribution channel 12 and division 00. 1-1 Due to changes with an existing customer. 1-1-2 Verify that the language key is the language of the course. you would enter AB01. If not. 1-1-4 Save the master record. Create a new sold-to customer master record using the data specified below so an order can be processed. 1-1-3 Change the payment terms of the customer to ZB00. if necessary.Sales Order Management: Solutions Unit: : Sales Order Management Topic: Organizational and Master Data In all exercises. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partner →Customer →Create →Complete Use Account Group 0001 (Sold-to Party) Enter Customer Number. make the necessary change.co. if you are assigned to Group 01 and the data indicates input AB##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you need to update the customer master record for customer T-S50B##. You need to verify the language and change the payment terms. and Sales Area Organizational Data.

) Delivery plant Payment terms Tax classific.The system will display many screens associated with the creation of a sold-to customer record.co. Customer Data Sheet General Data: Address Name Search term Street Postal Code (Zip Code in US) City Country Transportation Zone Language Control Data Payment Transactions Marketing Unloading Points Export Data Contact Persons Company Code Data: Accounting Management Payment Transactions Correspondence Insurance Sales Area Data Sales Shipping Billing Document Partner Functions Customer group Shipping conditions (Shp. Review each screen and enter data as needed. No Entries Required 02 ## + 50 (i.com . In the interest of time.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.e. Proceed to the next screen by choosing the Enter icon. 52…70) 1000 ZB01 0 (tax exempt) Reconciliation account No Entries Required No Entries Required No Entries Required 140000 No Entries Required No Entries Required No Entries Required No Entries Required No Entries Required No Entries Required At your discretion TERP10-## At your discretion 70563 Stuttgart DE 0000000001 Language of the course 1-2-2 Save the customer master record. Save when prompted.Cond. you will only be entering critical data. © SAP AG TERP10 5-73 Visit: www. 51.sapeducation.

In order to facilitate the entry of the material master record. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Products → Material → Other material → Create On the Create Material (Initial Screen) enter the following data: Field Material Industry Sector Material Type Copy From Enter Data entry M## Mechanical Engineering HAWA – Trading Goods T-AS1## © SAP AG TERP10 5-74 Visit: www. Billing Documents tab 1-3-1 What is the definition of Customer Group? How did you locate this information? Customer Group identifies a particular group of customers for the purpose of pricing or generating statistics. you can use T-AS1## as a reference material. It is a headlight. 1-5 A new product is being offered to your customers. Select Sales Area Data pushbutton. similar to the existing material T-AS1##.com .sapeducation. and Sales Area Organizational Data. You enter the material master for plant 1000.co. Select the Continue icon. Company. 1-5-1 Create material M##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Logistics →Sales and Distribution → Master Data →Business Partner → Customer →Display → Complete Enter Customer Number.1-3 Display the customer record (123##) you just created and answer the following questions. using industry sector M and material type HAWA – Trading Goods. It is responsible for selling goods and services. Use the ‘copy from’ feature to create by referencing the material located in the previous exercise. sales organization 1000. Sales organization is the highest level organizational element in SD. The definition can be found by placing the cursor on the field and choosing the F1 function key or pressing the Help icon. and distribution channel 12. or the definition can be found in the glossary. 1-4 What is the definition of sales organization? Use the glossary to verify your answer.

Choose Enter icon 1-5-3 Enter the organizational elements for your new material on the left side of the window. and the organizational elements for the existing material on the right side of the window.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. select the Create Views Selected indicatory. navigate to the conditions screen and maintain a price (rate) 60 EUR per unit. Select the Back icon.co.1-5-2 Select the following views for your material master record: • • • • • Basic data 1 and 2 Sales: Sales Org. 1) 2) 3) Insert “## “ before the existing material description in your language Change the old material number to TERP10-## Change the division to 00 1-5-5 Advance to the Sales: sales org. New material: • • • • • • • • Plant 1000 Storage location 0001 Sales organization 1000 Distribution channel 12 Plant 1000 Storage location 0001 Sales organization 1000 Distribution channel 12 Existing material: Choose Enter icon 1-5-4 Make the following changes to the fields on the Basic Data 1 tab. Enter 60 in the Amount field. From this tab. Choose the Conditions button Enter 1 in the Scale quantity field. 1 tab. Select the Sales: sales org. © SAP AG TERP10 5-75 Visit: www. 1 tab.com .sapeducation. Data 1 and 2 Sales: General / Plant data MRP 1 and 2 Accounting 1 and 2 To ensure that all the views will be created.

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Products → Material → Other material → Display → [enter material number] → Choose ‘Enter’ icon → Select views → Choose the Enter icon → [enter organizational elements] → Choose the Enter icon 1-6-1 Has a default delivering plant been maintained? If so. Select the Accounting 1 tab. In the Standard Price field. sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12. © SAP AG TERP10 5-76 Visit: www. Save the material master record when prompted to do so. It is used with other fields to determine a shipping point. Choose the Enter icon until prompted to save. Answer the following questions. This field was copied from the reference material. Enter 44 in the standard price to indicate the standard cost for this product.sapeducation.com . 1-6 Display the Sales: Sales Org Data 1 and Sales: General / Plant Data views for the material master record you just created (M##) for plant 1000.co. what value has been maintained in that field? How did that field get populated? Yes. 1-6-2 What is the definition of loading group (LoadingGrp) field on the Sales:General / Plant Data view? The loading group is a grouping of materials that share the same loading requirements.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.1-5-6 Advance to the Accounting 1 tab. enter 44 1-5-7 Display remaining views. delivering plant 1000 has been maintained.

Create a standard sales order based on the information provided below.sapeducation.com . Distribution Channel 12. enter the following data: Field Order Type Sales Organization Distribution Channel Division Enter Value OR 1000 12 00 © SAP AG TERP10 5-77 Visit: www.1 Requested Delivery Date: 1 week from today Material T-AS1## T-AS2## Quantity 24 36 Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen. and Division 00 for customer T-S50B## based on this purchase order: Purchase Order Customer: T-S50B## Purchase Order Number: ## . 2-1-1 Create a standard order (OR) using Sales Organization 1000.co.Unit: : Sales Order Management Topic: Order to Cash Business Process 2-1 One of your customers calls to place an order for motorcycle headlights and taillights.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

due net 2-2-2 From which master data record was the terms of payment copied? (X) customer master ( ) pricing conditions ( ) material master ( ) vendor master 2-2-3 Did the customer qualify for any discounts? If so. item pricing Schedule line – delivery dates and quantities © SAP AG TERP10 5-78 Visit: www. material number. Terms of payment: ZB00 Pay immediately. The Plant field is located on the Sales tab for each line item. 2-1-2 Save the order and record the order number. i. which ones? Goto → Header → Conditions The customer did not qualify for any discounts.e. enter on two separate lines. 2-2-4 Which plant is the second line item being shipped from? Select the Back icon. i.com . 2-3 What are the 3 components (or levels) of a sales document? What type of data is found on each? Header – data that applies to the entire document. sold-to party. the material numbers and quantities listed above.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen enter the following data: Field Sold-to Party Ship-To Party PO Number Requested Delivery Date Value T-S50B## T-S50B## ##.1 1 week from today In the line item section of the order. PO number Line item – data that applies to the material being ordered. Plant: 1000 Exit the order.e.sapeducation.co. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display → [order number defaults] → Choose the Enter icon 2-2-1 What are the terms of payment for the entire sales order? Field located on Sales tab. After all values have been entered → Choose Save icon Order number: ____________________ 2-2 Display the sales order you just created and answer the following questions.

2-4-1 Create a delivery in shipping point Z0## for the order created previously. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Picking → Create Transfer Order → Single Document → [enter required data] Choose the Enter icon 2-7-2 Save the transfer order and record the document number. 2-7-1 Create a transfer order for warehouse (whse number) 010. the delivery process can begin. 2-7 The next step in the delivery process is picking. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document → With Reference to Sales Order→ [enter required data] Enter 2-4-2 Save the document and record the delivery number. quantity = 1). In Lean WM. Choose the Save icon Delivery number: ____________________ 2-5 Access the delivery you just created in change mode and answer the following questions. Choose the Save icon © SAP AG TERP10 5-79 Visit: www. select Enter. The field cannot be edited.com .sapeducation. Specify a selection date of one week from today. Process it in the foreground and have the system transfer the pick quantity back to the delivery document (adopt pick. 2-6 View document flow for the delivery and record the overall processing status of the order and the delivery. 2-5-1 What is the delivery quantity for the first line item? Select Picking Tab Delivery quantity is 24 (value copied from the order) 2-5-2 What is the pick quantity for the first line item? Can this value be edited? Pick quantity is 0. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document Your delivery document number defaults.co. plant 1000 and the delivery you created previously. Create a transfer order. Environment → Document flow Order overall processing status: Completed Delivery overall processing status: Open Exit the delivery document.2-4 Once the order has been completed and the delivery date is near. Create a delivery document to initiate shipping activities.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. a transfer order is processed to facilitate the picking process.

2-11 View document flow for the delivery and answer the following questions. The delivery will not be completed until invoiced. 2-10-1 Change the delivery document and post goods issue. the product has been shipped.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-11-1 What is the overall processing status of the delivery document? Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Display → Environment → Document flow Delivery overall processing status: Being processed 2-11-2 Why does this overall processing status make sense? The invoice has not been created yet. select Enter. 2-11-3 What entry was added to document flow to record the ‘post goods issue’? GD: Goods issue: delvy 49xxxxxx 2-12 Can the delivery quantities in the delivery document be changed after the post goods issue process occurs? Why or why not? No the quantities cannot be changed. the ‘post goods issue’ process takes place. © SAP AG TERP10 5-80 Visit: www.2-8 Access the delivery document in change mode and answer the following question.com .co. Change the delivery document and execute the process. Pick quantity is now the same as the delivery quantity.sapeducation. so the fields can no longer be changed. Once the post goods issue has happened. Answer the following question. Environment → Document flow Delivery overall processing status: Being processed WMS transfer order overall processing status: Completed 2-10 Once picking is complete and the product has left the plant. 2-8-1 What is the pick quantity for the first line item? Can it be edited? Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation→ Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document Your delivery document number defaults. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document → [enter delivery number] → Choose the Post goods issue button 2-10-2 What message did you receive after the posting was processed? ‘Delivery 8xxxxxxx has been saved’ message displays. 2-9 View document flow and record the overall processing status of the delivery document and the transfer order. It can be edited.

Goto → Header → Pricing conditions header Net value: 2. 2-14 Products that are physically shipped to customers are ‘eligible for billing’ after goods issue has been posted. 2-15-1 What is the overall processing status of the delivery. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create Your delivery document number defaults.2-13 Can the plant associated with the first line item in the sales order be changed after the delivery has been created? Why or why not? No the plant cannot be changed. 2-15 View document flow and answer the following questions. select Enter. 2-14-3 Save the invoice and record the document number: Select the Save icon. billing and accounting documents? Environment → Display document flow Delivery overall processing status: Completed Invoice overall processing status: Completed Accounting document overall processing status: Not cleared 2-15-2 What two entries were added to document flow when this transaction was saved? The Invoice and Accounting document entries were added to document flow © SAP AG TERP10 5-81 Visit: www. Exit.923. select the Execute icon. Once a delivery has been created. 2-14-2 Record the net value of the invoice.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Create a billing document for your delivery and record the net value of the invoice. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing document → Change Your billing document number defaults.co.20 EUR Go to the header pricing screen and view the ‘Total’ line within the conditions list. This will include the value of the line items and any taxes that the customer is responsible for.520 EUR Total Value: 2.com . 2-14-1 Create a billing document for your delivery document.sapeducation. key delivery related fields become display only.

com . Once the billing document is saved. Post the payment to the customer’s A/R account. © SAP AG TERP10 5-82 Visit: www. Today is the document date. Once an invoice has been created. enter the following data: Field Document Date Bank Data: Account Bank Data : Amount Open Item Section :Account Value Today 113100 Total Value from exercise 2-14-2 T-S50B## Enter In the lower right section of the screen.2-16 Can the payment terms for the billing document be changed? Why or why not? Select the Back Arrow to return to the previous screen Goto → Header → Header No the payment terms cannot be changed. Exit the billing document without saving. pricing cannot be changed. 2-18 How is the structure of a billing document different than the structure of a sales order? A sales order has a header. while a billing document only has a header and line items. 2-19 The customer has submitted payment for the invoice you just processed. 2-17 Can the pricing of the first line item of the sales order be changed at this point in the process? Why or why not? Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change → [enter order number] → Choose ‘Enter’ icon Select a line item. 2-19-1 Post the total value of the invoice (identified previously) to company code 1000 to bank account 113100. line items and schedule lines.co. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Document entry → Incoming payment On the Post Incoming Payments: Header Data screen. then Goto → Item → Conditions No. Choose the Save icon. 2-19-2 Save the payment transaction and record the accounting document number.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. that information is passed to accounting and is used in accounts receivable. Specify the customer number T-S50B## in the open item selection – account field.sapeducation. the Not assigned field should equal zero. key billing related fields can no longer be edited.

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display → Environment → Display Document flow 2-20-1 What is the overall processing status of the accounting document? Accounting document status: Cleared 2-20-2 Was another entry added to document flow to reflect the receipt of payment against the invoice? Why or why not? No.co. 2-21 Your customer is so delighted with the shipment of headlights and taillights. there is no new entry in document flow. The status of the original posting was updated.2-20 View document flow for the sales order and answer the following questions. with a delivery date of today.2 Today T-AS5## 50 Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. They would like to order 50 motorcycle helmets. that they would like to order additional products. but since the incoming payment transaction was initiated in accounting (and not with reference to a SD document) the document number is not visible in document flow.nr Value T-S50B## T-S50B## ##. to be delivered today.sapeducation. 2-21-1 Create an order for customer T-S50B## for 50 T-AS5##. enter the following data: Field Order Type Sales Organization Distribution Channel Division Enter Value OR 1000 12 00 On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen enter the following data: Field Sold-to Party Ship-To Party PO Number Requested Delivery Date Material Order Quantity Enter.com . © SAP AG TERP10 5-83 Visit: www. What screen is displayed? Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen.

2-21-2 Review the ATP (available to promise) quantities for this product located in plant 1000 by displaying the Availability Overview screen. What date will the product be delivered to the customer? Choose Complete Dlv button To view when the product will be delivered to your customer: Select the line item.co.com .sapeducation. 2-21-5 Save the order.The Availability Control screen is displayed after you choose Enter. Plant 1400 can commit quantity to meet the requested delivery date. 2-21-4 Your customer decides to wait until the product can be shipped from their preferred plant. Choose the Schedule lines for item button and view the delivery date field. 2-21-3 Check the inventory situation in all other plants.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Select the Check plant button. Choose the Select all button to select both plants. In what plant can the quantity be confirmed on the requested delivery date? Select the Other plants button. ATP quantity: ____________________ After recording the information. Select Back to return to the Standard Order: Availability Control screen. ATP quantity: ____________________ SimReq-Rec/reqd quantity: ____________________ SimReq-Cum. Select the ATP quantities button. You will not perform any further processing with this order. Choose the Save icon © SAP AG TERP10 5-84 Visit: www. Stock-cum. Choose the complete delivery option. select the Back icon.

It is likely that a sales area the customer does not do business with defaulted. Select the relevant entries in the right table choose Show selected fields then Transfer. 3-1-1 Process a report listing all of the orders for your customer T-S50B##.co. Select Enter. If the message “Please check the entries. Mark the Net Value column and choose Add up values icon.com . Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Information System → Orders → List of Sales Orders On the List of Sales Orders screen enter your customer number – TS50B##. 3-1-2 Choose the display variant order item. No work list selected. 3-1-4 Include the information on order quantity. Choose Settings Columns Optimize width. 3-1-5 Total the Net Value field for your customer. Settings Layouts Choose Select Layout 1SAP Order item 3-1-3 Sort the sales documents in descending order based on material. 3-1-7 Exit the report.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. delete the distribution channel and division – only run the report for sales organization 1000. Mark the Material column and choose Sort in ascending order icon. Choose the Current icon. If that is the case. © SAP AG TERP10 5-85 Visit: www.Unit: Sales Order Management Topic: Reporting and Analysis Tools 3-1 The sales and distribution departments require reporting and analysis for the current SD processes on a monthly basis at document level.sapeducation. 3-1-6 Optimize the column width.” displays check the organizational data (choose Organizational data button to view). plant and shipping point at the end of the list.

and remove the credit memo key figure. Since you are going to frequently run this report. Do not process the report.sapeducation.’ Icon → Choose ‘Enter’ icon 3-2-4 Display both the customer name and number by changing how the characteristic is displayed. Select Invoiced Sales key figure → Choose ‘Top N…. The period you are interested in is January of the previous year to the current month / year. select the Save icon. 3-2-1 Execute a customer analysis within Sales Information System for sales organization 1000. Settings → Characteristic Display → Key and description 3-2-5 Change the column width of the characteristic to 35. 3-2-2 Create a report variant TERP10-## with a description Group## Report Variant. 3-2-6 Add the key figures invoiced quantity and open order quantity to your report. Remain on the selection screen for the next exercise. On the Customer Analysis: Selection screen.co. create a report variant.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 3-2-3 Display the top 10 customers based on invoiced sales. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales Information System → Standard analyses → Customer On the Customer Analysis: Selection screen. Edit → Choose key figures → Select Credit memo key figure → Choose Do not choose icon → Select Incoming orders qty and Open orders qty key figures → Select the Choose icon → Select the Enter icon Value 1000 January of Previous Year Current Month and Year © SAP AG TERP10 5-86 Visit: www.com . Settings → Column width → Characteristic → [Change column width to 35] → Choose the Enter icon. Enter the Variant name and description. Select the Save icon. enter the following information: Field Sales Organization Month From Month To Delete any values in the other fields.3-2 You’ve been asked to review the customer sales history for your sales organization by performing a standard customer analysis in the Sales information system. Create a list of your top 10 customers according to invoiced sales then display that information graphically for the top customer. Select the Execute icon to process the report.

Double-click to drill-down to next level until period displays 3-2-8 Display the statistic invoiced sales graphically for this customer. Do not save the report.co.com . © SAP AG TERP10 5-87 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Exit the report. Choose ‘Graphics’ icon → Deselect all key figures except Invoiced Sales → Choose the Enter icon Exit the graph.3-2-7 Drill-down into more detail for your top customer. Drill-down until the statistics are displayed by period.

What tool allows you to quickly view the status of a document? ____________________________________________________________ 3.com .Sales Order Management: Test Your Knowledge 1.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. How do you know that payment has been received from the customer for a particular invoice? __ 6. What are the 3 components or levels of a sales document? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ 4. What does the scope of availability check determine? ____________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 5-88 Visit: www. What are the six business processes within the Sales Order Management cycle? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ 2. What term is used to define prices and discounts? ____________________________________________________________ 5.

billing and payment 2. What term is used to define prices and discounts? Answer: Conditions 5. and schedule line 4. What does the scope of availability check determine? Answer: The scope of check determines the types of current stock as well as inward and outward movements of inventory that are included in the availability check. line item. inventory sourcing.com . What are the six business processes within the Sales Order Management cycle? Answer: Pre-sales. delivery.Sales Order Management: Answers 1. sales. What tool allows you to quickly view the status of a document? Answer: Document flow 3.sapeducation. What are the 3 components or levels of a sales document? Answer: Header.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 5-89 Visit: www. How do you know that payment has been received from the customer for a particular invoice? Answer: The overall processing status of the accounting document changes to ‘Cleared’ 6.co.

Material Planning Contents: Organizational Levels and Master Data Material Planning  SAP AG 2004 Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.co.com Visit: www.nr .

co.sapeducation.com Visit: www. you will be able to: Identify the organizational levels and master data use by material planning.nr . Explain the difference between Material Requirements Planning and Consumption Based Planning Identify the integration points with Materials Management and Sales Order Management  SAP AG 2004 Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Material Planning: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.

com .co.Material Planning: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 1-1 Visit: www.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Marketing creates sales forecasts for products or product groups.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 2-1 Visit: www.sapeducation. The output of material planning is the input of manufacturing execution. Material Planners.co. As a project team member.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. then create a material plan based upon these sales plans. you need to understand the material planning process.Material Planning: Business Scenario In your enterprise.

sapeducation.co. you will be able to: Describe the organizational levels used in Material Planning List the master data used by Material Planning  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 3-1 Visit: www.Organizational Levels and Master Data: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Plant – an organizational element within a company. You can design your company structure based on your business processes. Company code – represents an independent accounting unit. Plants can have multiple storage locations. A plant produces goods. Storage location – an organizational element within a plant. © SAP AG TERP10 4-1 Visit: www.sapeducation.com . renders services. The manufacturing planning and execution process uses the following organizational elements: Client – all manufacturing organizational elements exist within a client. required by law. A storage location identifies the general area in the plant where material is stored.Organizational Levels in Material Planning The Material Planning process uses the following organizational levels: Client Company Code Plant Storage location  SAP AG 2004 Organizational Levels are structures that represent the legal and/or organizational views of an enterprise. are created at the company code level. or makes goods available for distribution. A plant can be a manufacturing facility or a warehouse distribution center. Balance sheets and Profit & Loss Statements.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Material Planning Master Data Master data used by Material Planning includes: Material Master Bill of Material (BOM) Routings Purchasing Documents  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 5-1 Visit: www.sapeducation.co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

The Material Requirments Planning (MRP) and Execution (Work Scheduling) views must be maintained for manufacturing.sapeducation. materials planning. inventory management.Material Master: Primary Views Basic Data Purchasing MRP Sales Stocks in plant/ storage location Account Work scheduling Quality management Financial Accounting Storage Material Master Forecasting Warehouse management Classification  SAP AG 2004 The material master represents the central source for releasing material-specific data. © SAP AG TERP10 6-1 Visit: www. invoice verification. Quality Management.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and Classification data is used by various manufacturing planning and execution processes. and so on. Forecasting. It is used by all of the SAP Logistics components. such as purchasing. The stored data can be used by all areas.com . Accounting. Purchasing. Basic Data.co.

the product description.co. the unit of measure and conversion factors for alternative units of measure. for example. and Accounting views are specific to the plant. The MRP (Production Planning). This includes. the material group. © SAP AG TERP10 7-1 Visit: www. time Tolerance data Plant 1000 Plant 2000 Plant 3000 Accounting Price control Prices Plant 2000 Plant 3000 Plant 1000 Plant 2000 Plant 3000  SAP AG 2004 Basic data in the material master is applicable to the entire company and is stored at the client level.sapeducation. material number. Work Scheduling (Production Execution).com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Material Master Record: Data Structure Basic data Material Description Unit of measure MRP Procurement type MRP controller Lot size key Plant 1000 Work Scheduling Lot size times In-house prod.

The in-house production time or rather the planned delivery time specifies how long procurement will last. control of the Available to Promise (ATP) check takes place on the basis of the availability check group. The procurement type controls how a material is to be procured (in-house production or external procurement). The MRP type specifies how a material should be planned (MRP. In a production version. no planning)..co.. routing and BOM can be selected in particular. time 8 days Safety stock 20 pc Production versions 0001 Normal production How should I plan material requirements? How much needs to be procured? Will the material be produced inhouse or procured externally? Do I need to plan a safety stock? How should I plan? How does the ATP Check take place? What production procedure should I use?  SAP AG 2004 The fundamental settings for Material Planning can be found in Material Planning views 1 to 4 of the material master.Material Master Settings for Material Planning Material master PUMP MRP 1 MRP type Lot size Procurement type . © SAP AG TERP10 8-1 Visit: www. consumption-based planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . The lot-sizing procedure determines the lot size of each of the procurement proposals.sapeducation. MRP 4 MRP EX E Strategy group Availability check group 40 02 In-house prod. Moreover. A safety stock can be set. The behavior of planned independent requirements is controlled by the strategy group. A production procedure can be defined by a production version.

operating supplies 3. Materials with similar basic attributes are grouped together by material type. Raw materials 3.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can create additional company-specific material types in Customizing.sapeducation. This means you can manage your materials according to their business requirements. Operating supplies  SAP AG 2004 4. raw materials 2. It determines. Semi-finished products Examples of material types 1.Material Type 1. finished products 2. for example: The screens that appear in the material master record The department-specific data that can be maintained How the material number assignment is carried out The procurement types that are allowed (in-house production or external procurement) The general ledger accounts that are updated Material type definitions are controlled through customizing. © SAP AG TERP10 9-1 Visit: www. The material type attached to a product identifies the business processes and functions allowed.com .co. semi-finished products 4. Finished products The material type is the most important value assigned to a material.

multilevel production is described using the single-level BOMs of the finished product and those of the assemblies and where required. procurement and for product costing. that are to be included in the production of a material. A BOM consists of a BOM header and the BOM items. BOMs are used in Material Requirements Planning. Bills of material are single-level.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In this way.com . A BOM can also contain documents or text items in addition to stock items that are required for the finished product. An item of a BOM can itself also contain components.sapeducation. using the BOMs of the assemblies of the assemblies and so on. production. © SAP AG TERP10 10-1 Visit: www. The base qauntity in the BOM header specifies to which amount of the finished product the item quantities refer.Bills of Material (BOM) Pump P-100 0010 0020 BOM PUMP Material Plant Usage Base quantity Item 0010 0020 0040 0030 0040 0050 100-100 100-200 100-300 100-400 100-130 Casing Fly wheel Hollow shaft Electronic turbo-drive Hexagon head screw P-100 1000 Pump 1 Production 1 pc 0030 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 8 pc Bills of material are single-level Items of a bill of material can themselves contain a further bill of material  SAP AG 2004 The BOM contains the assemblies or components.

© SAP AG TERP10 11-1 Visit: www. for example). In contrast. for example) and finally. The item category specifies what kind of item you are dealing with: Stock items are executed in the warehouse and are used in production. which consist of multiple alternative BOMs. Components necessary for the production of the finished product are entered as items of the BOM.co.sapeducation. which then only refer to the respective item.com . document items contain a supplementary document that describes production (a kind of design and construction diagram). Stock item Non-stock item Variable-size Item Document item  SAP AG 2004 The settings that apply for the whole BOM can be found in the BOM header. The different alternative BOMs can then be valid for each of the different lot-size areas. Individual items themselves can also bear a multitude of further settings.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. BOM usage determines the business applications for which a BOM can be used. Variable-size items contain variable-size data (a steel sheet with a certain surface area. The status of the BOM controls whether the BOM is active for particular applications (MRP. Multiple BOMs. non-stock items are directly assigned to a manufacturing order (and not via the warehouse). for example. can also exist in addition to simple BOMs.Bills of Material Structure BOM Structure BOM PUMP Material Plant Usage Base Quantity P-100 1000 1 1 pc Header Status Description Validity Lot size area Item 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 100-100 100-200 100-300 100-400 100-130 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 8 pc Items Item category Descriptions Quantities Control data for example.

com . A single-level bill of material describes an assembly by means of components and their quantities. © SAP AG TERP10 12-1 Visit: www. A multi-level BOM structure is exploded automatically by MRP and Product Cost Planning. The Pump is comprised of components which are themselves comprised of components identifying Pump as having a multi-level bill of material.sapeducation.Multi-Level Bill of Material Structure Pump Single-Level BOM Pump Casing Shaft Drive Wheel Shaft Slug Seal Slug Drive Wheel Single-Level BOM Slug Shaft Single-Level BOM Casing Single-Level BOM  SAP AG 2004 All bills of material are created and maintained as single-level bills.co. It can also be exploded as a master data evaluation. The picture above shows 4 single-level bills of material.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co. For example.sapeducation.com . A stock item must have a material master. A non-stock item. © SAP AG TERP10 13-1 Visit: www. the item category controls whether a material number is required. on the other hand. optional or not allowed for the component. does not require that a material master record exist. The item category influences the processing of the component.BOM Item Categories Stock Item Non-Stock Item Variable-Size Item Text Item Document Item Class Item Intra Material  SAP AG 2004 You must assign an item category to every component when you add or change components in a bill of material. It can also be stored in a material group.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Alongside the standard values.co. mySAP ERP routings can be transferred to SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (APO) in the form of production process models (PPMs). to which these time elements can refer. 15 min.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the corresponding operations. the routing also contains the time elements that are relevant for scheduling operations. per 1 pc.com . Therefore you need to make sure that each operation in the routing can contain its own base quantity. center 1310 1320 Times 1906 1904 1905 1000 Description 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 1310 1320 1906 1904 1905 Staging according to pick list Press flywheel in casing Paint casing Mount shaft in casing Final assembly pump 5 min. per 1 pc. fixed 10 min. 10 min. Moreover. 20 min. A routing can contain parallel or alternative sequences in addition to the standard sequence. An SAP R/3 routing can be defined using the routing group and the group counter. © SAP AG TERP10 14-1 Visit: www. their sequence and the work centers in which these operations are to be executed. that is. the routing contains reference to the material whose production it describes. per 1 pc. per 1 pc.  SAP AG 2004 Routings contain the steps that are necessary for production.Routings Production of Pump P-100 Routing PUMP Material P-100 Pump 50000222 01 Work center Work center Work center Work center Work center Task list group Group counter Pump (standard process) Plant Work Operatn.sapeducation.

Routing and Bill of Material Component Assignment in Routing Material master PUMP Production version 0001 Routing Op.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. B Mat. In addition to BOM components. production resources/tools can also be assigned in the routing.sapeducation. PUMP Mat. 10 Op. 10 Op. BOM components that are not explicitly assigned are considered as being assigned to the first operation. BOM components can be assigned to a certain operation. 20 Op. A Mat. Component assignment is dealt with in the routing. The procurement of these components is then planned at the beginning of the particular operation. A Mat. but that are necessary for production. C Component assignment in routing  SAP AG 2004 Time Production is described via a routing and a BOM.com . 30 Mat. © SAP AG TERP10 15-1 Visit: www. B Mat. such as a measuring instrument or a support. 20 Op.co. 30 BOM Mat. Production resources/tools are operating facilities that are not location-bound. C Procurement and consumption of components occur at the beginning of the processes to which they are assigned Manufacturing order PUMP Op. For this reason.

.Purchasing Info Records Info record 5300000816 Vendor: Material: PurchOrg: 1234 A21 1000 Vendor 1234 Material A21 Planned deliv. You can define the following information in info records: Current and future prices and conditions (for example. freight and discounts) Delivery Data (for example.sapeducation.. planned delivery time and overdelivery and underdelivery tolerances) Vendor data (for example. time: 4 days .co. contact person) and vendor-specific data about the material (such as the vendor subrange to which the material belongs. description of material at vendor) Number of the last purchase order Texts © SAP AG TERP10 16-1 Visit: www. Conditions Price/UoM Freight Discount 6 EUR/CS 2% 4% Last purchase order 4500006398  SAP AG 2004 The purchasing info record provides the option of storing information about a vendor and a material as the master data at purchasing organization and plant level.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

Organizational Levels and Master Data: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the organizational levels used in Material Planning List the master data used by Material Planning  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 17-1 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.com .sapeducation.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: Explain the importance of planning strategies on business processes Explain the difference between Materials Requirements Planning and Consumption Based Planning procedures Describe and perform the steps in the Material Planning process Identify the integration points with Materials Management and Sales Order Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 18-1 Visit: www.co.com .sapeducation.Material Planning: Topic objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

develop production plans and perform feasibility studies. A sales plan could be developed. We use a planning table in SOP to help us perform these functions. We can use SOP to help us forecast future sales. If necessary. The feasibility of the production plan could be checked at a rough-cut level against key resources.sapeducation. We could use built-in forecasting tools to project future sales. © SAP AG TERP10 19-1 Visit: www. It resembles a spreadsheet. from information in the Sales and Distribution module. we can change the plan.Sales and Operations Planning SOP provides a method for: Sales planning Production planning Feasibility estimates Stock Sales Plan Master Plan Capacity estimate Q U A N T I T Y May June July ••• TIME  SAP AG 2004 Sales and operations planning (SOP) is a planning and forecasting module within the logistics area. A production plan could be developed based on the sales plan.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.com . for example.

This is used when a sales plan or a production plan at a higher level is "disaggregated" to a lower level. © SAP AG TERP10 20-1 Visit: www. For example. The lowest product group in the hierarchy must have materials as its members.com . Product groups require a proportion factor. A product group can be thought of as a product family. A product group may have other product groups as its members. product group 1 has product group A and product group B as its members.sapeducation. A proportion factor could be zero. The sum of the proportion factors at one planning level is usually 100%. It groups together products with similar planning characteristics.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Planning Levels in Standard SOP Product group 1 Rotary pumps Planning at product group level Disaggregation 60% 40% Product group A Low-speed rotary pumps Product group B High-performance rotary pumps 50% 30% 20% 75% 25% Material P-101 Material P-102 Material P-103 Material P-200 Material P-300 Planning at material level  SAP AG 2004 Standard SOP uses product groups to help in the planning process.co.

A planning table exists for all members of the product group hierarchy. the production plan.sapeducation. weeks or months.co. according to target day's supply or target stock level  SAP AG 2004 The SOP planning table is where we develop our sales and production plans. a production plan can be created based on the sales plan. the target stock level. The standard SOP planning table has a row for the sales plan. We also may define other time periods that correspond. for example. A production plan can be created several ways: Synchronously to sales (Equal to sales plan) Target stock level Target days supply Inventory to Zero (reduces inventory on-hand to zero balance and then plans equal to sales plan) Manual entry © SAP AG TERP10 21-1 Visit: www. The time periods in the planning table could be days. the stock level (system calculated).com . the days' supply (system calculated) and the target days' supply.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. to accounting periods or sales periods. A sales plan can created several ways: By transferring data from the sales information system (SIS) By transferring data from the controlling / profitability analysis module (CO/PA) By using history to forecast future sales By transferring data from another product group By manual entry Once a sales plan is developed. or a combination.Planning Using the Standard Planning Table Create Rough-Cut Plan Product group Plant Version Sales Production Stock level Target stock Day's supply Target day's supply PUMPS 1000 A00 Active version M 01 100 100 M 02 110 110 M 03 130 150 20 20 2 Planning in multiple versions possible M 04 140 132 12 12 1 M 05 140 128 Forecasts can be transferred Production plan can be created synchronous to sales.

and develop production plans at that level. or an inactive version. Now we would develop production plans at this level. Only one version is considered active. which is the default version A00. Another option is to disaggregate the sales plan of product group 1. and disaggregate them to the materials. The plan that is sent to demand management is used in planning the material requirements.com . We can transfer planning data of all members of a single level product group (such as product group A) to demand management.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. to demand management. planned independent requirements exist in demand management. we must disaggregate. We may transfer the active version. We could.sapeducation. Yet another option is to simply disaggregate the sales plans of all the product groups down to the materials. We can have different planning scenarios for each product group structure. © SAP AG TERP10 22-1 Visit: www. We could also transfer planning data for one material (such as T-F101) to demand management. disaggregate the production plan of product group 1.Disaggregation and Transfer to Demand Management Planning data at product group level Disaggregation 50% Planning data at material level 30% 20% Product group A Low-speed rotary pumps Demand Planning data Material P-101 Material P-102 Transfer Material P-103 Planned independent requirements (at material-plant level) in demand management Operative planning data  SAP AG 2004 Creating a sales plan or a production plan at one level of the product structure hierarchy does not automatically create lower level plans. It would become the sales plan for product groups A and B. Many options exist when disaggregating.co. for example. After this. To do this. because each plan is saved with a version number and a description.

it is possible. Sales orders Sales Demand program Material Requirements Planning Coverage of requirements through In-house production External procurement  SAP AG 2004 Demand Management pertains to the administration of so-called independent requirements. In make-to-stock production. without having to wait for concrete sales orders. together with planned independent requirements. and on the other hand. © SAP AG TERP10 23-1 Visit: www. Consumption is also possible with planned independent requirements. for which procurement is then specifically triggered (make-to-order production).com . you want to initiate the procurement of the materials concerned. if they affect requirements. to debit one's own production resources as evenly as possible. Planned independent requirements are warehouse requirements that can be derived from a forecast of the future requirement situation. reqmts. through foresighted planning. Customer requirements can be received directly in Material Requirements Planning. The way in which independent requirements behave in Material Requirements Planning (for example.sapeducation. This is desired when customer-specific planning takes place.co.Demand Management Planned independent requirements and sales orders Warehouse requirements Forecast Customer requirements Plnd. or. independently of their defined requirements type. Using such a procedure. Sales orders can serve as exclusive requirements sources. indep. delivery times can be shortened on the one hand. if they consume other requirements) can be determined by their requirement type or their planning strategy. they can create the total demand. Sales orders (customer independent requirements) are created by sales and distribution.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

the demand plan is released as a planned independent requirement.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. consume the current sales orders. In addition.The Demand Planning Process Aggregated historical data Future demand forecast Update Release Sales orders Planned independent requirements Consumption possible  SAP AG 2004 The slide shows the Demand Planning cycle: Past sales order quantities form a basis for the forecasting of future demands.co. © SAP AG TERP10 24-1 Visit: www.com . market intelligence or one-off events (such as trade fairs) can be included in the forecast.sapeducation. for example. As a result of the forecast. Planned independent requirements form a basis for procurement and production planning and can.

and what quantity? From which plant or DC should the customer receive supplies? Forecast Planned ind.  SAP AG 2004 Sales orders are created in Sales and Distribution (SAP R/3 SD). Planned consumptions are thus forecast. for example).2003 M 4. if concrete requirements subsequently exist (in the form of sales orders or dependent requirements. They portray an order made by a customer.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. whereby a certain quantity of a product is required by a predetermined date.2003 M 2.com . Sales orders represent a requirement in the supplying plant.sapeducation.. 12. reqmnts Plant 1000 Planning table Plant 1000 What quantities of the product should be produced? New York M 1. these can be met from the warehouse.2003 M 3. Ideally. Procurement takes place as a result of this planning and forecast. © SAP AG TERP10 25-1 Visit: www. on what date..co.Sales Orders and Planned Independent Requirements Customer K1000 Sales Sales order Sold-to party K1000 Supplying plant 2500 Becker Berlin DC Rotterdam DC 2500 Material P-100 10 pc 20. 2002 What product does the customer require.2003 Material P-100 100 pc 110 pc 110 pc 120 pc . Make-to-stock planning is realized in a DC or a production plant via planned independent requirements.

Moreover. Sales-order based production does not deal with planning in its actual sense. © SAP AG TERP10 26-1 Visit: www.co. assemblies to stock using make-tostock  SAP AG 2004 A multitude of posibilities are available for planning for production with the help of planned independent requirements. these can be met by warehouse stock. Make-to-order production is often used in connection with subassembly planning for components. rather a product is procured for an existing sales order. The different mode of action of planned independent requirements is controlled by the so-called planning strategy. Make-to-stock production can also be executed for assemblies.sapeducation. and where necessary. it is possible to realize as consistent a production process as possible. In this case. the finished products themselves are not produced to stock.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. to keep delivery times as short as possible. production usually takes place. in make-tostock production.Planning Strategies Make-to-stock production Production due to make-to-stock planning. without sales orders already having to be present for the material concerned. If strategies are used for make-to-stock production. If sales orders are then received. as it is only final assembly that has to be executed since the assemblies already exist. A sales order for a finished product can then usually be fulfilled quickly. so that shorter delivery times can be realized. independent of current demand.com . requirements covered by warehouse stock Subassembly planning Make-to-stock production for assemblies Make-to-Order production Finished products to individual customer stock using make-to-order production. rather the necessary assemblies are procured.

for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. using planned independent requirements that arise from the forecast of sales expected in the future.co.Make-to-Stock Production Planning takes place by means of planned independent requirements Sales orders are covered by make-to-stock inventory. that is to be used in different finished products. has to be procured before the demands (sales orders) for these finished products exist. Fluctuations in demand and sales are smoothed by warehouse stock. when an assembly. sales orders are usually fulfilled by warehouse stock. in situations where demand and sales fluctuate but where production may be kept at full capacity. Planning can also take place at assembly level. sales orders can affect requirements. According to the choice of strategy. consume planned independent requirements. for example.com . or have no effect on planned independent requirements. Make-to-stock production strategies are used. This makes sense. production or procurement is planned. In make-to-stock production. © SAP AG TERP10 27-1 Visit: www. Requirements strategy for make-to-stock production Make-to-stock production Planning with final assembly Planning at assembly level R/3 10 40 70  SAP AG 2004 Using make-to-stock production strategies.sapeducation.

If customer requirements exceed planned independent requirements. Planning at finished product level using plnd. Sales orders affect requirements and consume planned independent requirements. a flexible or fast reaction to customer demand is prominent. Consumption of planning by sales orders Planning Consumption Sales Order Finished Product Production  SAP AG 2004 In planning with final assembly. The consumption of planned independent requirements by customer requirements depends on the settings defined for the consumption mode and the consumption periods.sapeducation. ind. © SAP AG TERP10 28-1 Visit: www.Planning with Final Assembly R/3 Strat. 2. The procurement and production of all components and assemblies including their final assembly is triggered by planned independent requirements before sales orders arrive. 40 1. (Sales orders thus affect requirements).com . whereby as smooth as possible a production process is also simultaneously strived for. the system automatically creates a planned order for the unplanned quantity in the next MRP run.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Incoming sales orders consume these planned independent requirements. reqs. You can check availability from a sales order using the ATP logic. You plan the planned independent requirements for the finished product in demand management.

© SAP AG TERP10 29-1 Visit: www. If no values for either consumption mode or consumption period have been entered. only requirements on the same day are consumed). Backward consumption only 20 20 40 60 Example: Time Bwd per. Time  SAP AG 2004 The consumption mode determines the direction on the time axis in which the arriving sales orders are to consume the planned independent requirements. Mode 1 Customer Reqs. Time Fwd per. 60 pieces are produced for the sales order and 20 pieces are produced (anonymously) to stock. Mode 2/4 Bwd per.com .co. Forward consumption only Mode 3 Forward consumption period Backward/forward consumption 1 2 Within the given period of time. then the system uses the default setting with backward consumption for 999 days (Note: If a consumption mode has been entered and the consumption period is left blank.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the sales order consumes planned independent requirements that lie after the customer requirement. In backward consumption (consumption mode 1).Consumption Planned ind. Fwd per. reqmts. In forward consumption (consumption mode 3). Backward consumption per. You can combine backward and forward consumption provided that you take the consumption periods into account (consumption mode 2 or 4). You can define the consumption mode and the consumption periods either in the material master or for each MRP group. the sales order consumes planned independent requirements that lie before the customer requirement.

planning without final assembly is also possible.Production Based on Sales Orders Sales orders are planned on a customer-specific basis Planning is possible Requirements strategy for production based on sales orders Make-to-stock production Planning without final assembly Planning with planning material R/3 20 50 60  SAP AG 2004 When working with the strategies for make-to-order production. the sales order is the pegged requirement.co. In addition to classic make-to-order production.sapeducation. Moreover.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 30-1 Visit: www.com . different strategies for assembly processing exist.

only dependent requirements. problems and then execute MRP for the remaining product levels.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Master Production Scheduling (MPS) MPS creates planned orders for top-level items to satisfy independent requirements from Demand Management. SAP provides a variety of functions to support master production scheduling. MPS is an optional step in the planning process. The MPS run results in planned orders for the master schedule items and dependent requirements for the level directly below the MPS items. © SAP AG TERP10 31-1 Visit: www.com . etc.  SAP AG 2004 Fly wheel Support The purpose of Master Production Scheduling (MPS) and Material Requirements Planning (MRP) is to guarantee material availability on a two step planning process. The general idea is to schedule these products first resolving any capacity.sapeducation.co. including a graphical planning table and a whole series of evaluation reports. Independent Requirement Planned order for the pump creates dependent requirements for all components Pump Spiral casing There are no planned orders at this level. Master scheduled items (MPS items) are usually materials that greatly influence company profits or dominate the production procedure.

those with low values. Planning of a material can be MRP or consumption-based... Consumption-Based Planning VB Reorder-Point Planning VV Forecast-Based Planning . or in other words. R1 Time-Phased Planning Based on consumption in the past  SAP AG 2004 The basic planning type is defined per material using the MRP type.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Consumption-based planning is characterized by its simplicity and is mainly used for "B and C parts".sapeducation. Material requirements planning takes current and future sales as its reference point and is executed for the whole BOM structure.. that is entered in the MRP 1 view of the material master. Consumption-based planning is based on consumption values in the past and uses forecast or statistical procedures to determine future requirements.. © SAP AG TERP10 32-1 Visit: www. The planned requirements quantity (in the form of planned independent requirements or sales orders) triggers requirements calculation.. A material can also be excluded from MRP using the corresponding MRP type.MRP Procedures How should I plan material requirements in SAP R/3? Material master MRP1 MRP Type .. PD Material Requirements Planning Based on independent requirements Further control via requirements strategies (MRP3) .com .

During the planning run. You control the planning using a manually entered reorder point (for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example.sapeducation. the net requirements calculation is triggered when stock levels fall below a reorder point or by forecast requirements calculated from past consumption data.com . Consumption-based planning procedures use past consumption data (historical data) to calculate future requirements with the help of the material forecast or static planning procedures.Consumption-Based Planning Using reorder point planning as an example Stock Lot Size Reorder stock Safety stock Reorder point Delivery time-spot Time Replenishment lead time  SAP AG 2004 Manual reorder point planning is a typical process in consumption-based planning. It is characterized by its simplicity. Real-time inventory management is also necessary. whether there are less than 50 pieces in stock). This means that the net requirements calculation is not triggered by an independent or a dependent requirement. If schedule lines are created directly by the planning run. 50 pieces).co. If that is the case. the system checks only whether stock has fallen below this reorder point or not (that is. for materials procured externally. © SAP AG TERP10 33-1 Visit: www. Consumption-based planning procedures have no reference to the master plan. Instead. the system triggers procurement to the amount of the lot size (a fixed lot size of 500 pieces for example). the administrative work for this sort of planning is minimal. Reorder point planning is appropriate only for materials with demand that stays relatively consistent.

When planning is complete.Material Requirements Planning: Results MRP Material A Planned order In-house production External procurement Directly possible for externally procured materials only Convert Production order Process order Purchase requisition Schedule lines Purchase order  SAP AG 2004 If MRP discovers shortage quantities. When planning is complete. In the case of in-house production.co.com . procurement proposals are generated: purchase requisitions and planned orders are internal planning elements which can be changed. planned orders can be converted into purchase requisitions and. at a later date. the system creates planned orders for the planning of production quantities.sapeducation. rescheduled or deleted at any time. © SAP AG TERP10 34-1 Visit: www. the system creates either a planned order. You control this using the creation indicator for schedule lines in the initial screen of the planning run. If a scheduling agreement exists for a material and is relevant to MRP in the source list.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You control whether the system immediately creates purchase requisitions or firstly creates planned orders for externally procured materials in the initial screen of the planning run using the "creation" indicator for purchase requisitions. then you can also create schedule lines directly in MRP. or directly creates a purchase requisition. or a schedule line for a pre-existing scheduling agreement for planning the external purchase order quantity. the purchase requisitions can be converted into purchase orders. plannned orders can be converted into production orders. In the case of external procurement.

whereas multilevel individual planning takes place over all BOM levels of this material.  SAP AG 2004 MRP can be executed as total planning for all materials or as individual planning.co.Multilevel Material Requirements Planning Single-item. MRP Component 1 .req. In multilevel planning. Dependent requirements depend on respective planned orders. In single-level planning it is only the header material that is planned.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. single-level planning Planned Order Dep. Dep. MRP Assembly 1 MRP Assembly 2 Planned order Dep. Ind Req Single-item. Materials (assemblies) are needed to realize these planned orders.com . The task of individual planning is to plan a material separately (for example. interactively). Secondary requirements that arise from the planning of a finished product's BOM components. Plan. the dependent requirements are transferred to order reservations.. that arise from the explosion of a material's BOM.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 35-1 Visit: www.req. multilevel planning MRP Finished Product Sales Order. are set via secondary requirements. If a planned order is converted into a production order.req.. Purch. requis. dependent requirements are thus also planned.

MRP reacts to material shortages by creating new procurement proposals. a material shortage exists. that is set in the material master. that is. fixed purchase requisitions and planned orders. The suggested procurement quantity results from the lot-sizing procedure.co. © SAP AG TERP10 36-1 Visit: www. for example Material shortage Reqmts (Sales orders.. secondary requirements. by creating purchase requisitions or planned orders. stock and fixed receipts that currently exist (purchase orders. If the quantity available for planning is lower than zero. independently of their procurement type.sapeducation.. reservations.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. planned independent requirements. a net requirements calculation is also executed in the planning run to determine whether a material shortage exists for a certain material. production orders.) are compared with the safety stock and requirements. and so on) Firmed planned orders Firmed purchase requisitions Stock Supply  SAP AG 2004 Safety stock Demand In MRP. The result of this comparison is the quantity available for planning. In addition.Net Requirements Calculation in Material Requirements Planning Procurement proposal lot-size Firmed receipts Within the rescheduling horizon Purchase orders.com .

Assuming the dependent requirements date is the availability date.Mutilevel Backward Scheduling Reqmts date Finished product Finished product Assembly 1 Assembly 2 Component 1 Today Planned order Purchase requisition Time  SAP AG 2004 MRP uses backward scheduling . for example) Procurement proposals are created for the finished product and dependent requirements for the components are calculated via the BOM explosion.co.com . The dependent requirements date arises from the start date of the planned order that caused the requirements. MRP reacts to the requirements needed for the finished product (a sales order.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the system determines the basic order dates of the components by means of backward scheduling using in-house production time or planned delivery time.the system calculates the necessary start dates based on a predefined end date. © SAP AG TERP10 37-1 Visit: www.sapeducation.

It is thus possible to execute a total planning run for several plants and/or MRP areas. Interactive planning of a material is also possible.MRP Run Planning Total planning Online As background job Ind.com . You can execute a single-item planning run either for a specific material only (single level) or for all BOM levels (multi level). You can use this. planning Single-level Ind.sapeducation. From the MRP menu. A user exit enables you to limit the total planning run specifically to those materials which fulfill freely definable criteria. Total planning for a plant encompasses all materials relevant to MRP for this plant and includes the BOM explosion for materials with BOMs. planning Multilevel Ind. to select all the materials belonging to a particular MRP controller.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In order to execute the total planning run as a background job.co. planning Interactive Planning of a material's BOM Planning of a material Interactive single-level planning Planning of all materials of one or several plants  SAP AG 2004 You can carry out the planning run on two levels: as total planning for a plant or for an individual material. © SAP AG TERP10 38-1 Visit: www. A total planning run can be executed online or as a background job. you can execute total planning "Online" or "As background job". for example. you select a report variant limiting it to the corresponding plant and plan the job.

which is used to plan these materials only . contain the delivery and total lead times for the material. In single-item planning. the consistency of the data cannot be guaranteed.enables you to carry out the planning run in short time intervals. new sales orders. Due to its short run-time.co. so that you can always work with the current planning result. The materials are planned within this horizon only.Scope of the Planning Run Processing key NEUPL Regenerative planning Planning of all MRP-relevant materials Processing key NETCH Net change for total horizon Planning all materials which have undergone a change relevant to the planning run Processing key NETPL Net change for planning horizon Planning all materials for which MRP-relevant changes have been made in the planning horizon Planning within the planning horizon only  SAP AG 2004 During regenerative planning. it usually makes sense (especially when you are using many materials) to only carry out MRP for those materials that have undergone MRP-relevant changes (through goods issues. The planning horizon should at least span the time period in which sales orders are received. During net change planning in the planning horizon. due to technical errors. net change planning . changes to the BOM struscture. You specify the type of planning run via the "processing key" field in the initial screen for planning. In a working plant. furthermore. you also have the option of using the key NEUPL. You set the planning horizon in Customizing for MRP as a plant or MRP group parameter.com . for example). you are only able to differentiate whether "net change planning" (NETCH) or "net change planning in the planning horizon" (NETPL) is to be performed. with which all materials in the planning file are planned. This is practical when carrying out the planning run for the first time and on rare occasions when. © SAP AG TERP10 39-1 Visit: www. the system plans all materials of a plant. In total planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. The system plans only those materials that have been subject to an MRP-change within the planning horizon. and. the system only takes changes within the planning horizon into account.

The materials that are assigned to this MRP group are then planned accordingly in the total planning run.com . It is also possible to have the system generate MRP lists only when certain exception messages have appeared for a material (the exception messages that should trigger an MRP list to be generated can be defined in the Customizing IMG activity "Define and group exception messages"). You can also set the creation indicator for purchase requisitions.co.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 40-1 Visit: www. You can determine further whether the planning run is to generate MRP lists. requisition Purchase Requsition Purchase Requisition for the opening period Planned Orders Schedule lines No Schedule lines Schedule lines in the opening period Schedule lines always only for exception messages never Adjust data New BOM and routing Delete planning data Create MRP list Planning mode 1 2 3  SAP AG 2004 The following control parameters for MRP are required for the planning run: Processing key: You define the planning type as regenerative planning or net change planning over the whole period or restricted to the planning horizon. schedule lines and MRP lists in the MRP group. You can determine whether or in which period purchase requisitions and schedule lines are required as the result of the planning run. The planning mode defines whether the existing planning data should simply be adjusted. whether BOMs and routings should also be re-exploded or whether the planning should be started from the very beginning again. The indicators "Create purchase requisition" and "Schedule lines" are only relevant for materals that are procured externally.Control Parameters for MRP NEUPL NETCH NETPL 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Processing key MRP Group Create purch.

. over a customer exit (see Customizing.. requisitions Production orders Purchase orders . The basic structure of both lists is the same: Links are in the form of a tree for the worklist of the MRP controller. You can control whether or not an MRP list is generated during the planning run. Current Elements Material tree MRP elements Planning run MRP list  SAP AG 2004 The current stock / requirements list contains up-to-date information on the current status of stocks.com . "Customer-Exit: Program additional columns") © SAP AG TERP10 41-1 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can display additional data in the header details. Plant stock/ Storage location stock Sales orders Plnd.co. requirements . This can be done as soon as the current stock / requirements list is called up or. You are able to view any changes immediately.sapeducation..Stock/Requirements List and MRP List General structure Variable header Current stock/reqmts. ind. User-specific settings enable you to adapt the lists to personal requirements .these apply to both lists (see the corresponding Customizing documentation in the evaluations for MRP "Configure MRP list / stock/requirements list").list Planned orders Purch.. requirements and receipts. the elements are re-read from the database using the "Refresh" function. Above the list is the header with the material number. which can then be accessed using a function key. The list itself contains the individual MRP elements and the corresponding available quantities. upon displaying the current stock / requirements list. The MRP list depicts the result of the latest planning run and is therefore static: Changes that are made after the planning run cannot be seen. You can display additional data.

req.12.sapeducation. For the ultimate execution of production.. in the form of dependent requirements.2002 Dep. that is. the planned order is converted into a production order. a production order (PP) or a process order (PP-PI). they contain. Moreover.2002 10 pc Casing .  SAP AG 2004 Planned orders are used to plan the in-house production of a material. © SAP AG TERP10 42-1 Visit: www..2002 End 17.. Planned orders already contain the basic dates within which production should take place. Capacity Requirements Planning can be executed based on planned orders.com .12.Planned Orders and Production Orders The material "Pump" is produced in plant 1000 (procurement type: in-house production) Planned Order Material P-100 Plant 1000 10 pc Order quantity Start 10. Convert 1000 10 pc Production Order Plant 1000 Material P-100 Plant Order quantity Start 0010 0020 10..co. the component requirements for the components that are needed for production. 10 pc Casing .2002 AR-RES End 0030 0040 17.12.12.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co.2002 08. Planning is also directly possible with scheduling agreement releases. In purchasing. 12. purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders.2002 Purchase requisition Plant Source of Supply 1000 Supplier 10. Berlin 10.B.sapeducation. they have to be converted into purchase requisitions.12. © SAP AG TERP10 43-1 Visit: www. 12.12. No later than this step should a source of supply (a supplier) assigned to purchase orders . planning of procurement can take place by means of planned orders or purchase requisitions. 2002 Plant 1000 Material 100-130 80 pc Convert Purchase order Plant Source of Supply 1000 L1000 C. 2002 Material 100-130 80 pc  SAP AG 2004 For externally procured materials.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. If planned orders are created at first.com .E.Purchase Requisitions and Purchase Orders The material "screw" is bought for plant 1000 (procurement type: external procurement) Planned order Material 100-130 Plant 1000 80 pc Order quantity 01.

Summary of Planning Process and Levels Planning Steps CO/PA OK? Planning Levels Region 1 Region 2 Profitability analysis Revenue plans Sales plans (quantities) SOP OK? Sales and Operations Planning Sales plan Production plan Product group MPS OK? Master Production Scheduling Demand program Adjusted master plan Product 1 Product 2 MRP OK? Material Requirements Planning Dependent requirements Planned production Procurement plan Assembly 1 Part 1 Assembly 2 Part 2  SAP AG 2004 Each step in the production planning process corresponds to a different material planning level.nr Feedback/Replanning 44-1 . Each planning level provides input to the next level. © SAP AG TERP10 Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com Visit: www.sapeducation.co.

sapeducation.com .co.Material Planning: Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain the importance of planning strategies on business processes Explain the difference between Materials Requirements Planning and Consumption Based Planning procedures Describe and perform the steps in the Material Planning process Identify the integration points with Materials Management and Sales Order Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 45-1 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Material Planning: Unit Objectives You are now able to: Identify the organizational levels and master data use by material planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . Explain the difference between Material Requirements Planning and Consumption Based Planning Identify the integration points with Materials Management and Sales Order Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 46-1 Visit: www.sapeducation.co.

Work scheduling. © SAP AG TERP10 47-1 Visit: www. Choose Select view(s) then select MRP 2. 1-1 First.co. Description Base unit of measure Net weight Unit of weight 1-1-2 What is the material type? __________ 1-2 Display other views of R-F1##. Fill in the table below with the values you see on the Basic Data 1 tab. This screen did not appear when you only wanted to see basic data. 1-2-1 The system asks you to enter organizational level data before proceeding. display the basic data view of material R-F1##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . Why does it appear now? ______________________________________________________ Enter Plant 1000. you will be able to: • Describe the organizational levels and views of the material master • Display the material master • Display a single-level bill of material • Display a multi-level bill of material Material master records contain default information about a company’s products.Exercises Unit: Material Planning Topic: Master Data At the conclusion of this exercise. Select Basic Data 1 in the dialog box. 1-1-1 Enter the material number. Accounting 1 in the dialog box. Bills of materials define a product’s structure. you need to understand the structure and function of material master records and bills of materials. As a project team member.sapeducation.

In the SAP menu open the “Bill of Material” folder. What bill of material categories does the system allow? ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 1-5 Display the material BOM for R-F1## in Plant 1000. to strategy group 40 Planning with final assembly. © SAP AG TERP10 47-2 Visit: www.1-2-2 MRP 2 view. 2007? __________ 1-5-5 Does a bill of material exist for this component? __________ 1-6 Display the material BOM for component R-B1##. What value is assigned to the production scheduler field? __________ What is the total lot size dependent in-house processing time? __________(days) per __________(PC) 1-2-4 Accounting 1 view. What value is assigned to the procurement type field? __________________ Access field level help for the procurement type field.co. What are the possible entries for procurement type? __________ 1-2-3 Work scheduling view. What value is assigned to the price control field? __________ What is the moving price? __________ What is the standard price? __________ What is the currency of these prices? __________ Exit the material master record. 1-5-1 What is the component number of item 0010? ________________________________________________ 1-5-2 What is the component quantity and unit of measure? __________ 1-5-3 Is this component a stock item? __________ 1-5-4 Will this component be valid in the bill on January 1. in the MRP3 view.sapeducation. What is the meaning of procurement type? ______________________________________________________ Close the help window. BOM usage 1 (production). 1-3 Change the strategy group.nr 1-4 ____________________ ____________________ Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 1-6-1 What is the valid from date of this bill of material? __________ 1-6-2 What is the base quantity and unit of measure of this bill of material? ______________________________________________________ 1-6-3 Exit the BOM.com . of R-F1## and R-F2##.

co. plant 1000.1-7 Display a multi-level BOM explosion report for pump R-F1##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. This will be useful as a reference in future exercises.com . component quantities and units of measure of the multi-level pump bill of material in the boxes below. Write the component numbers. Use BOM application PP01.sapeducation. 1-7-1 How many single level BOMs are in this structure? __________ © SAP AG TERP10 47-3 Visit: www.

co. To determine if sales orders consume the forecast.sapeducation. You will use the Sales and Operations Planning module to enter the forecast. which is one of the pumps in the pump product group. MRP creates the manufacturing plan.Unit: Material Planning Topic: Material Planning Process At the conclusion of these exercises.com . © SAP AG TERP10 47-4 Visit: www. You will then re-run MRP to see if it adjusts the plan. you will then run MRP. for the pump. After transferring the planned independent requirements to Demand Management. In this scenario you will do planning using the make-to-stock strategy Planning with Final Assembly. you will be able to: • Create a product group • Create a sales plan • Create a production plan • Perform a single-item. multi-level MRP run for our pump. • Review the results of the plan • Enter a customer order for our pump. you will enter a customer order. Then you will create a production plan for R-F1##. In this planning strategy sales orders entered consume the forecast. • Confirm that consumption process takes place Marketing has supplied you with their six-month sales forecast for the pump product group.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Product Group GR## All Pumps Material R-F1## Pump Material R-F2## Pump 2-1-1 Create the product group GR## for the pumps. The overall planning structure is detailed in the diagram below. enter the material numbers R-F1## and R-F2## in the Member number field. Plans for this product group are reviewed by middle management. The pumps planned are products R-F1## and R-F2##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. modified as appropriate and then disaggregated to demand programs for the individual pumps.2-1 The pumps are planned using sales and operations planning.com . and plant number 1000 in the Plant field.sapeducation. Enter the following data on the Create Product Group: Initial screen Field Product Group Description Plant Base Unit Members Enter On the Create Product Group: Maintain Members (Materials) screen. © SAP AG TERP10 47-5 Visit: www. Assign a proportion factor of 60% to R-F1## and 40% to R-F2##. Management plans all pumps overall as one product group. Save Data entry GR## Group ## Pumps 1000 PC Select the “Materials” radio button.co.

enter the following information into the sales row of the planning table: Month Month + 2 Month + 3 Month + 4 Month + 5 Month + 6 Month +7 Sales value 200 150 100 150 200 175 2-2-4 Due to uncertainty of market demand. © SAP AG TERP10 47-6 Visit: www. if this is September.. management wants to maintain a service level of 3 days inventory supply. 2-2-1 On the Create Plan: Initial Screen. Starting with the second month into the future (i. Enter 2-2-5 Create the production plan for product group GR## based on the sales plan and desired target inventory level. the second month into the future is November). 2-2-3 Create a sales plan.co. To indicate this in your plan.2-2 Create a sales and production plan for Product Group Gr##.sapeducation. 2-2-2 On the dialog box that appears that results. Save 2-3 Disaggregate the production plan for the product group and transfer the product plans for R-F1## and R-F2## to Demand Management for use in detailed production planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. enter product group GR## and plant 1000. enter 7## in the version number and “Version 7##” in the version description.com . and then select the enter icon to get to the Create Rough-Cut Plan screen. then choose the enter icon.e. enter 3 into the Target days’ supply field for each month of the plan beginning with the second month in the future.

2-3-3 By deselecting the Invisible Transfer indicator the disaggregation results are presented on another screen allowing the planner to modify the results before saving them manually to demand management. plant 1000. Save the results for R-F2##. or PG members as a proportion of PG From Date Invisible Transfer Active Indicator Value GR## 1000 7## Selected Today’s date Not selected Selected 2-3-2 Execute the transfer by clicking on the Transfer Now icon.co. Are the planned independent requirements covered by planned orders? © SAP AG TERP10 47-7 Visit: www. 2-3-4 Display the Stock Requirements list for R-F1##. Plan for mat.sapeducation. Examine the results.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . The results for R-F2## are displayed.2-3-1 Enter the following data on the Transfer Planning Data to Demand Management screen: Field Product Group Plant Version Prod. Review the results for R-F1## and then Save.

2-6 Compare the stock / requirements list to the MRP list.2-4 Run MRP for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000.co.sapeducation. plant 1000.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-6-1 Do differences exist between the two lists? __________ 2-6-2 Why? ________________________________________ 2-7 Display the stock / requirements list for R-B1##. plant 1000. Delivery Schedules Create MRP list Planning mode Scheduling Also Plan Unchanged Components Display results before they are saved Display material list Simulation mode NETCH 2 3 1 1 1 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect 2-4-1 How many materials were planned? __________ 2-4-2 Were planned orders and dependent requirements created? __________ 2-5 Display the MRP list for R-F1##. Use the following data: Processing key Create purchase req. 2-5-1 Are all the independent requirements covered by planned orders? __________ 2-5-2 What is the number of the first planned order? 2-5-3 Select the Expand header details icon to see further planning information for this material. Examine the results.com . What planned order created the first dependent requirement in the list? Is it the same planned order from exercise 2-5-2? _______________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 47-8 Visit: www.

co. On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen. 2-9-1 What consumption mode is assigned to this item? __________ 2-9-2 What is the backward consumption period? __________ 2-9-3 What is the forward consumption period? __________ © SAP AG TERP10 47-9 Visit: www.2-8 You want to determine if sales orders consume demand. deliv. enter the order information: Sold-to party Ship-to party PO number Req. therefore. enter a sales order for your pump. R-F1##.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . use the following data: Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division OR 1000 10 00 On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen. date Material Order quantity 1000 1000 PO-## Day 15 of Month+2 R-F1## 50 What is the sales order number? __________ 2-9 Display the MRP 3 view of the material master for R-F1## in plant 1000.

co.com . Copy the values from the first five MRP elements of the list (after the Stock line) to the table below. Use the same parameters from exercise 2-4. 2-12-1 Has the plan changed? __________ 2-12-2 How? ________________________________________________ 2-12 © SAP AG TERP10 47-10 Visit: www. Compare the MRP list (or the stock / requirements list) of R-F1## in plant 1000 to the values you recorded in exercise 2-10. Date MRP element Recpt / req’d qty Available quantity 0 Today Stock Did consumption take place correctly? __________ 2-11 Run MRP again.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.2-10 Display the stock / requirements list for R-F1## in plant 1000.sapeducation. for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000.

© SAP AG TERP10 48-1 Visit: www. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current 1-1-1 Enter the material number. Accounting 1 in the dialog box.co. display the basic data view of material R-F1##. you must enter a Plant.Solutions Unit: Material Planning Topic: Master Data 1-1 First. Select Basic Data 1 in the dialog box. therefore. Why does it appear now? These views are Plant specific. Enter plant 1000. 1-2 Display other views of R-F1##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Work scheduling.com . 1-2-1 The system asks you to enter organizational level data before proceeding. Choose Select view(s) then select MRP 2. Fill in the table below with the values you see on the Basic Data 1 tab. This screen did not appear when you only wanted to see basic data.sapeducation. Description Base unit of measure Net weight Unit of weight Pump PC (piece(s)) 250 KG 1-1-2 What is the material type? Finished Product The material type is displayed in the Title Bar on the screen Select the Back icon to go back to the Initial screen.

for example 524. Close the help window.com . What value is assigned to the price control field? S (Standard price) What is the moving price? Varies.co.sapeducation.09 days Processing time 20. for example 535.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.58 per 1 piece What is the currency of these prices? EUR Exit the material master © SAP AG TERP10 48-2 Visit: www. What value is assigned to the production scheduler field? 0## What is the total lot size dependent in-house processing time? Setup time .02 per 1 piece What is the standard price? Varies.24 days Interoperation 3. blank. What value is assigned to the procurement type field? E (In-house production) Access field level help for the procurement type field. access possible entries (F4).9 day Base Quantity 100 pc Total 24. What is the meaning of procurement type? With your cursor placed on the procurement type field. What are the possible entries for procurement type? With your cursor placed on the procurement type field. E. The indicator that defines how the material is procured. access field level help (F1).23 days per 100 pc **results may vary 1-2-4 Accounting 1 view. X. 1-2-3 Work scheduling view. F.1-2-2 MRP 2 view.

Save the material master record. Material BOM Equipment BOM Order BOM Document structure Functional location BOM WBS BOM 1-5 Display the material BOM for R-F1## in Plant 1000.1-3 Change the strategy group in the MRP3 view. to strategy group 40 Planning with final assembly. 9999) 1-5-5 Does a bill of material exist for this component? Yes . Enter plant 1000.co. Choose Select view(s) then select MRP 3 in the dialog box.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In the strategy group field maintain a value of 40 (planning with final assembly). Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material→ Bill of Material→ Material BOM → Display 1-5-1 What is the component number of item 0010? R-B1## 1-5-2 What is the component quantity and unit of measure? 1 PC 1-5-3 Is this component a stock item? Yes . BOM usage 1 (Production).ICt (Item category) value is L (stock item) 1-5-4 Will this component be valid in the bill on January 1. 1-4 In the SAP menu open the “Bill of Material” folder. 2007? Yes (Valid until December 31.com . Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Change→ Immediately Material R-F1##. of R-F1## and R-F2##. Perform the same steps for R-F2##. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Bill of Material What bill of material categories does the system allow? You should see the bill of material categories the system allows in the form of menu folders.sapeducation.Asm (Assembly) indicator is checked © SAP AG TERP10 48-3 Visit: www.

sapeducation.1-6 Display the material BOM for component R-B1##. 1-6-1 What is the valid from date of this bill of material? 03/07/2002 1-6-2 What is the base quantity and unit of measure of this bill of material? 1 PC 1-6-3 Exit the BOM. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Reporting → BOM Explosion → Material BOM → Multilevel BOM On the Explode BOM: Multi-Level BOM: Initial Screen enter the following data: Field Material Plant BOM Application Select Execute. This will be useful as a reference in future exercises. Choose Header icon. Use BOM application PP01. © SAP AG TERP10 48-4 Visit: www. Data entry R-F1## 1000 PP01 Write the component numbers.com .co. component quantities and units of measure of the multi-level pump bill of material in the boxes below. plant 1000. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material→ Bill of Material→ Material BOM → Display Or you could double-click on the assembly indicator check mark on the material item overview screen of R-F1## and select Continue. 1-7 Display a multi-level BOM explosion report for pump R-F1##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

© SAP AG TERP10 48-5 Visit: www.co.1-7-1 How many single level BOMs are in this structure? Five R-F1## 1 PC R-B1## 1 PC R-B2## 1 PC R-B3## 1 PC R-B4## 1 PC R-F1## DRW 000 R-T0## 1 PC R-T4## 1 PC R-T5## 1 PC R-T1## 1 PC R-T2## 1 PC R-T3## 8 PC Note: Component R-F1## DRW 000 00 referenced on level 1 is a document (ICt –Item Category = D) not a material. Exit the report.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

and plant number 1000 in the Plnt field. Assign a proportion factor of 60% to R-F1## and 40% to R-F2##. The pumps planned are products R-F1## and R-F2##.Unit: Material Planning Topic: Material Planning Process 2-1 The pumps are planned using sales and operations planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Save Data entry GR## Group ## Pumps 1000 PC Select the “Materials” radio button. Product Group GR## All Pumps Material R-F1## Pump Material R-F2## Pump 2-1-2 Create the product group GR## for the pumps. modified as appropriate and then disaggregated to demand programs for the individual pumps.com . enter the material numbers R-F1## and R-F2## in the Member number field. © SAP AG TERP10 48-6 Visit: www.sapeducation.co. The overall planning structure is detailed in the diagram below. Management plans all pumps overall as one product group. Plans for this product group are reviewed by middle management. Logistics → Production → SOP → Product Group → Create Enter the following data on the Create Product Group: Initial screen: Field Product Group Description Plant Base Unit Members Enter On the Create Product Group: Maintain Members (Materials) screen.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and then select the enter icon to get to the Create Rough-Cut Plan screen. Starting with the second month into the future (i. management wants to maintain a service level of 3 days inventory supply. Edit → Create productn plan → Target days’ supply Save 2-3 Disaggregate the production plan for the product group and transfer the product plans for R-F1## and R-F2## to Demand Management for use in detailed production planning. if this is September.e. enter the following information into the sales row of the planning table: Month Month + 2 Month + 3 Month + 4 Month + 5 Month + 6 Month + 7 Sales value 200 150 100 150 200 175 2-2-5 Due to uncertainty of market demand.sapeducation.co. the second month into the future is November). enter product group GR## and plant 1000. Logistics → Production → SOP → Planning → For Product Group → Create 2-2-1 On the Create Plan: Initial Screen. enter 3 into the Target days’ supply field for each month of the plan beginning with the second month in the future. Enter 2-2-5 Create the production plan for product group GR## based on the sales plan and desired target inventory level. To indicate this in your plan.2-2 Create a sales and production plan for Product Group Gr##. then choose the enter icon.. enter 7## in the version number and “Version 7##” in the version description.com . 2-2-3 Create a sales plan. Logistics → Production → SOP → Disaggregation → Transfer Product Group to Planning © SAP AG TERP10 48-7 Visit: www. 2-2-2 On the dialog box that appears.

In reviewing the result of the transfer you will notice the 60% of the product groups production plan has been assigned to product R-F1## and 40% to R-F2##.co. 2-3-3 By deselecting the Invisible Transfer indicator the disaggregation results are presented on another screen allowing the planner to modify the results before saving them manually to demand management. Examine the results. © SAP AG TERP10 48-8 Visit: www. or PG members as a proportion of PG From Date Invisible Transfer Active Indicator Value GR## 1000 7## Selected Today’s date Not selected Selected 2-3-2 Execute the transfer by clicking on the Transfer Now button. Review the results for R-F1## and then Save. 2-3-4 Display the Stock Requirements List for R-F1##. Plan for mat. Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/ Requirements List Are the planned independent requirements covered by planned orders? No – because MRP has not been run. Save the results for R-F2##.com . plant 1000.2-3-1 Enter the following data on the Transfer Planning Data to Demand Management screen: Field Product Group Plant Version Prod.sapeducation. The results for R-F2## are displayed. You will get a warning message “Planning Version to be Transferred is not the active version” Select enter to clear the warning message and proceed with the data disaggregation and transfer.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

2-4 Run MRP for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000. Examine the results. When MRP is finished. 2-4-1 How many materials were planned? 10 2-4-2 Were planned orders and dependent requirements created? Yes Exit the results 2-5 Display the MRP list for R-F1##.co. © SAP AG TERP10 48-9 Visit: www. Multi-Level Planning Use the following data: Processing key Create purchase req.com . Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → MRP List 2-5-1 Are all the independent requirements covered by planned orders? Yes 2-5-2 What is the number of the first planned order? Varies for example 31354 2-5-3 Select the Expand header details icon to the left of the material in the header to view further planning information for this material.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Delivery Schedules Create MRP list Planning mode Scheduling Also Plan Unchanged Components Display results before they are saved Display material list Simulation mode NETCH 2 3 1 1 1 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect Choose Enter and confirm your input parameters.sapeducation. a results screen should appear. plant 1000. Logistics → Production → MRP → Planning →Single-Item. then choose Enter again to start MRP.

co. Yes. enter a sales order for your pump. select the Details of element icon. R-F1##. What planned order created the first dependent requirement in the list? Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List On the left hand side of the first dependent requirement.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. therefore. On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen.2-6 Compare the stock / requirements list to the MRP list.sapeducation. 2-8 You want to determine if sales orders consume demand. Exit the MRP list 2-7 Display the stock / requirements list for R-B1##. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create. plant 1000. use the following data: Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Enter OR 1000 10 00 © SAP AG TERP10 48-10 Visit: www. it is the same planned order from exercise 2-5-2. From the MRP list select Goto → Stock/requirements list comparison 2-6-1 Do differences exist between the two lists? No 2-6-2 Why? No planning or execution activity has taken place on this material since the MRP run.

2-9 Display the MRP 3 view of the material master for R-F1## in plant 1000. for example 5431 Look at the bottom of the screen for the sales order number. date Material Order quantity Enter If an information message appears concerning the invoice date choose Enter to acknowledge it. enter the order information: Sold-to party Ship-to party PO number Req.co. button. If the Standard Order: Availability Control screen appears.On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current 2-9-1 What consumption mode is assigned to this item? 2 (Backward / forward consumption) 2-9-2 What is the backward consumption period? 30 (workdays) 2-9-3 What is the forward consumption period? 30 (workdays) Exit the material master record. 1000 1000 PO-## Day 15 of Month+2 R-F1## 50 © SAP AG TERP10 48-11 Visit: www. Exit the screen.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation. deliv. Save. select the Fix qty/date indicator and then select the Complete dlv. What is the sales order number? Varies.

2-11 Run MRP again.2-10 Display the stock / requirements list for R-F1## in plant 1000. The MRP list Planned Independent Requirements are 50 units higher than the stock requirements list due to the consumption by the sales order. for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000. consumption took place correctly.sapeducation.com . Copy the values from the first five MRP elements of the list (after the Stock line) to the table below. Keep in mind the MRP list shows values as of the last planning run executed (static planning picture) while the stock requirements list presents the current planning situation. (The planned independent requirement was reduced by 50 pieces). Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/ Requirements List Date (Example) Today July 1 July 1 July 15 Aug 3 Aug 3 MRP element (Example) Stock Planned order 31920 Independent requirement Sales order 5431 Planned order 31921 Independent requirement Recpt / req’d qty 136* 86 –(*) 50 86 * 86 – (*) Available quantity 0 136* 50* 0 86* 0 (*) Varies depending on SOP plan Did consumption take place correctly? Compare the stock requirements list to the MRP list From the Stock Requirements list select Goto → MRP list comparison. Use the same parameters from exercise 2-4.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 48-12 Visit: www. Exit the Stock Requirements List. Yes.co.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .2-12 Compare the MRP list (or the stock / requirements list) of R-F1## in plant 1000 to the values you recorded in exercise 2-10.sapeducation. 2-12-1 Has the plan changed? Yes 2-12-2 How? The first planned order’s quantity was reduced by 50 to cover the planned independent requirement.co. was created to cover the sales order. with a quantity of 50. © SAP AG TERP10 48-13 Visit: www. A new planned order.

Description Base unit of measure Net weight Unit of weight 1-1-2 1-2 What is the material type? __________ Display other views of R-F1##. Fill in the table below with the values you see on the Basic Data 1 tab. Choose Select view(s) then select MRP 2. you need to understand the structure and function of material master records and bills of materials. Why does it appear now? ______________________________________________________ Enter Plant 1000. This screen did not appear when you only wanted to see basic data. © SAP AG TERP10 49-1 Visit: www. As a project team member. 1-2-1 The system asks you to enter organizational level data before proceeding. Bills of materials define a product’s structure. 1-1 First.sapeducation.com . display the basic data view of material R-F1##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Material Planning: Exercises Unit: Material Planning Topic: Master Data At the conclusion of this exercise. Accounting 1 in the dialog box. 1-1-1 Enter the material number. Select Basic Data 1 in the dialog box.co. Work scheduling. you will be able to: • Describe the organizational levels and views of the material master • Display the material master • Display a single-level bill of material • Display a multi-level bill of material Material master records contain default information about a company’s products.

What are the possible entries for procurement type? __________ 1-2-3 Work scheduling view.1-2-2 MRP 2 view. What value is assigned to the production scheduler field? __________ What is the total lot size dependent in-house processing time? __________(days) per __________(PC) 1-2-4 Accounting 1 view. 1-3 Change the strategy group. 2007? __________ 1-5-5 Does a bill of material exist for this component? __________ ____________________ ____________________ 1-4 © SAP AG TERP10 49-2 Visit: www. of R-F1## and R-F2##.sapeducation. What value is assigned to the price control field? __________ What is the moving price? __________ What is the standard price? __________ What is the currency of these prices? __________ Exit the material master record. in the MRP3 view.com .co. What value is assigned to the procurement type field? __________________ Access field level help for the procurement type field. 1-5-1 What is the component number of item 0010? ________________________________________________ 1-5-2 What is the component quantity and unit of measure? __________ 1-5-3 Is this component a stock item? __________ 1-5-4 Will this component be valid in the bill on January 1. to strategy group 40 Planning with final assembly. In the SAP menu open the “Bill of Material” folder. What bill of material categories does the system allow? ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 1-5 Display the material BOM for R-F1## in Plant 1000.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. What is the meaning of procurement type? ______________________________________________________ Close the help window. BOM usage 1 (production).

1-6-1 What is the valid from date of this bill of material? __________ 1-6-2 What is the base quantity and unit of measure of this bill of material? ______________________________________________________ 1-6-3 Exit the BOM.com . Use BOM application PP01.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Write the component numbers. 1-7 Display a multi-level BOM explosion report for pump R-F1##.co.sapeducation. 1-7-1 How many single level BOMs are in this structure? __________ © SAP AG TERP10 49-3 Visit: www.1-6 Display the material BOM for component R-B1##. This will be useful as a reference in future exercises. component quantities and units of measure of the multi-level pump bill of material in the boxes below. plant 1000.

which is one of the pumps in the pump product group. After transferring the planned independent requirements to Demand Management. To determine if sales orders consume the forecast. you will then run MRP. You will then re-run MRP to see if it adjusts the plan. multi-level MRP run for our pump. You will use the Sales and Operations Planning module to enter the forecast. for the pump.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. MRP creates the manufacturing plan. Then you will create a production plan for R-F1##. In this scenario you will do planning using the make-to-stock strategy Planning with Final Assembly.sapeducation.co.com . you will be able to: • Create a product group • Create a sales plan • Create a production plan • Perform a single-item. © SAP AG TERP10 49-4 Visit: www. • Confirm that consumption process takes place Marketing has supplied you with their six-month sales forecast for the pump product group. • Review the results of the plan • Enter a customer order for our pump.Unit: Material Planning Topic: Material Planning Process At the conclusion of these exercises. In this planning strategy sales orders entered consume the forecast. you will enter a customer order.

Management plans all pumps overall as one product group.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. enter the material numbers R-F1## and R-F2## in the Member number field. Plans for this product group are reviewed by middle management. The pumps planned are products R-F1## and R-F2##. The overall planning structure is detailed in the diagram below. Enter the following data on the Create Product Group: Initial screen Field Product Group Description Plant Base Unit Members Enter On the Create Product Group: Maintain Members (Materials) screen. © SAP AG TERP10 49-5 Visit: www. modified as appropriate and then disaggregated to demand programs for the individual pumps.com .2-1 The pumps are planned using sales and operations planning. Save Data entry GR## Group ## Pumps 1000 PC Select the “Materials” radio button.co. Product Group GR## All Pumps Material R-F1## Pump Material R-F2## Pump 2-1-3 Create the product group GR## for the pumps. Assign a proportion factor of 60% to R-F1## and 40% to R-F2##. and plant number 1000 in the Plant field.

enter the following information into the sales row of the planning table: Month Month + 2 Month + 3 Month + 4 Month + 5 Month + 6 Month +7 Sales value 200 150 100 150 200 175 2-2-6 Due to uncertainty of market demand.. and then select the enter icon to get to the Create Rough-Cut Plan screen.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-2-1 On the Create Plan: Initial Screen. Enter 2-2-5 Create the production plan for product group GR## based on the sales plan and desired target inventory level. 2-2-3 Create a sales plan.sapeducation. enter 3 into the Target days’ supply field for each month of the plan beginning with the second month in the future.e. © SAP AG TERP10 49-6 Visit: www. if this is September. 2-2-2 On the dialog box that appears that results. To indicate this in your plan. Starting with the second month into the future (i. then choose the enter icon.2-2 Create a sales and production plan for Product Group Gr##.co. enter 7## in the version number and “Version 7##” in the version description. management wants to maintain a service level of 3 days inventory supply. enter product group GR## and plant 1000. Save 2-3 Disaggregate the production plan for the product group and transfer the product plans for R-F1## and R-F2## to Demand Management for use in detailed production planning.com . the second month into the future is November).

Review the results for R-F1## and then Save. The results for R-F2## are displayed.2-3-1 Enter the following data on the Transfer Planning Data to Demand Management screen: Field Product Group Plant Version Prod.co. or PG members as a proportion of PG From Date Invisible Transfer Active Indicator Value GR## 1000 7## Selected Today’s date Not selected Selected 2-3-4 Execute the transfer by clicking on the Transfer Now button.com . Examine the results. 2-3-4 Display the Stock Requirements list for R-F1##. Save the results for R-F2##. plant 1000. Plan for mat.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Are the planned independent requirements covered by planned orders? © SAP AG TERP10 49-7 Visit: www.sapeducation. 2-3-5 By deselecting the Invisible Transfer indicator the disaggregation results are presented on another screen allowing the planner to modify the results before saving them manually to demand management.

Use the following data: Processing key Create purchase req. 2-6 Compare the stock / requirements list to the MRP list. plant 1000.sapeducation.co.com . 2-5-1 Are all the independent requirements covered by planned orders? __________ 2-5-2 What is the number of the first planned order? 2-5-3 Select the Expand header details icon to see further planning information for this material.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Delivery Schedules Create MRP list Planning mode Scheduling Also Plan Unchanged Components Display results before they are saved Display material list Simulation mode NETCH 2 3 1 1 1 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect 2-4-1 How many materials were planned? __________ 2-4-2 Were planned orders and dependent requirements created? __________ 2-5 Display the MRP list for R-F1##. plant 1000. 2-6-1 Do differences exist between the two lists? __________ 2-6-2 Why? ________________________________________ 2-7 Display the stock / requirements list for R-B1##. What planned order created the first dependent requirement in the list? Is it the same planned order from exercise 2-5-2? _______________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 49-8 Visit: www. Examine the results.2-4 Run MRP for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000.

On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen. use the following data: Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division OR 1000 10 00 On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen. Use the same parameters from exercise 2-4. therefore.2-8 You want to determine if sales orders consume demand.co.com . 2-12-1 Has the plan changed? __________ 2-12-2 How? ________________________________________________ 2-12 © SAP AG TERP10 49-9 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-9-1 What consumption mode is assigned to this item? __________ 2-9-2 What is the backward consumption period? __________ 2-9-3 What is the forward consumption period? __________ 2-10 Display the stock / requirements list for R-F1## in plant 1000. enter a sales order for your pump. Compare the MRP list (or the stock / requirements list) of R-F1## in plant 1000 to the values you recorded in exercise 2-10. Did consumption take place correctly? __________ 2-11 Run MRP again.sapeducation. enter the order information: Sold-to party Ship-to party PO number Req. R-F1##. for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000. deliv. date Material Order quantity 1000 1000 PO-## Day 15 of Month+3 R-F1## 50 What is the sales order number? __________ 2-9 Display the MRP 3 view of the material master for R-F1## in plant 1000.

therefore. This screen did not appear when you only wanted to see basic data. Work scheduling. Choose Select view(s) then select MRP 2. display the basic data view of material R-F1##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Accounting 1 in the dialog box. 1-2 Display other views of R-F1##.com .sapeducation. Fill in the table below with the values you see on the Basic Data 1 tab. you must enter a Plant. Select Basic Data 1 in the dialog box. Enter plant 1000. 1-2-1 The system asks you to enter organizational level data before proceeding. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current 1-1-1 Enter the material number.Material Planning: Solutions Unit: Material Planning Topic: Master Data 1-1 First. Why does it appear now? These views are Plant specific. © SAP AG TERP10 50-1 Visit: www. Description Base unit of measure Net weight Unit of weight Pump PC (piece(s)) 250 KG 1-1-2 What is the material type? Finished Product The material type is displayed in the Title Bar on the screen Select the Back icon to go back to the Initial screen.

blank.02 per 1 piece What is the standard price? Varies. for example 535.1-2-2 MRP 2 view.24 days Interoperation 3.co. access field level help (F1). What value is assigned to the price control field? S (Standard price) What is the moving price? Varies. X.58 per 1 piece What is the currency of these prices? EUR Exit the material master © SAP AG TERP10 50-2 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. What value is assigned to the production scheduler field? 0## What is the total lot size dependent in-house processing time? Setup time . Close the help window.9 day Base Quantity 100 pc Total 24. 1-2-3 Work scheduling view. E.com . for example 524. What is the meaning of procurement type? With your cursor placed on the procurement type field. F.sapeducation. What are the possible entries for procurement type? With your cursor placed on the procurement type field.09 days Processing time 20.23 days per 100 pc **results may vary 1-2-4 Accounting 1 view. The indicator that defines how the material is procured. access possible entries (F4). What value is assigned to the procurement type field? E (In-house production) Access field level help for the procurement type field.

1-4 In the SAP menu open the “Bill of Material” folder.Asm (Assembly) indicator is checked © SAP AG TERP10 50-3 Visit: www. to strategy group 40 Planning with final assembly.1-3 Change the strategy group in the MRP3 view.sapeducation. of R-F1## and R-F2##. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material→ Bill of Material→ Material BOM → Display 1-5-1 What is the component number of item 0010? R-B1## 1-5-2 What is the component quantity and unit of measure? 1 PC 1-5-3 Is this component a stock item? Yes .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . 9999) 1-5-5 Does a bill of material exist for this component? Yes . BOM usage 1 (Production). Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Bill of Material What bill of material categories does the system allow? You should see the bill of material categories the system allows in the form of menu folders. Choose Select view(s) then select MRP 3 in the dialog box. Material BOM Equipment BOM Order BOM Document structure Functional location BOM WBS BOM 1-5 Display the material BOM for R-F1## in Plant 1000. 2007? Yes (Valid until December 31.ICt (Item category) value is L (stock item) 1-5-4 Will this component be valid in the bill on January 1. Save the material master record. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Change→ Immediately Material R-F1##. Enter plant 1000. In the strategy group field maintain a value of 40 (planning with final assembly).

© SAP AG TERP10 50-4 Visit: www.com . Choose Header icon.1-6 Display the material BOM for component R-B1##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. plant 1000. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material→ Bill of Material→ Material BOM → Display Or you could double-click on the assembly indicator check mark on the material item overview screen of R-F1## and select Continue. 1-7 Display a multi-level BOM explosion report for pump R-F1##. Use BOM application PP01.co. component quantities and units of measure of the multi-level pump bill of material in the boxes below. Data entry R-F1## 1000 PP01 Write the component numbers. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Reporting → BOM Explosion → Material BOM → Multilevel BOM On the Explode BOM: Multi-Level BOM: Initial Screen enter the following data: Field Material Plant BOM Application Select Execute. This will be useful as a reference in future exercises. 1-6-1 What is the valid from date of this bill of material? 03/07/2002 1-6-2 What is the base quantity and unit of measure of this bill of material? 1 PC 1-6-3 Exit the BOM.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.1-7-1 How many single level BOMs are in this structure? Five R-F1## 1 PC R-B1## 1 PC R-B2## 1 PC R-B3## 1 PC R-B4## 1 PC R-F1## DRW 000 R-T0## 1 PC R-T4## 1 PC R-T5## 1 PC R-T1## 1 PC R-T2## 1 PC R-T3## 8 PC Note: Component R-F1## DRW 000 00 referenced on level 1 is a document (ICt –Item Category = D) not a material. © SAP AG TERP10 50-5 Visit: www.com .co.sapeducation. Exit the report.

Product Group GR## All Pumps Material R-F1## Pump Material R-F2## Pump 2-1-4 Create the product group GR## for the pumps.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and plant number 1000 in the Plnt field. The pumps planned are products R-F1## and R-F2##. Management plans all pumps overall as one product group.com . The overall planning structure is detailed in the diagram below. enter the material numbers R-F1## and R-F2## in the Member number field. © SAP AG TERP10 50-6 Visit: www. Plans for this product group are reviewed by middle management.Unit: Material Planning Topic: Material Planning Process 2-1 The pumps are planned using sales and operations planning.sapeducation.co. Save Data entry GR## Group ## Pumps 1000 PC Select the “Materials” radio button. Logistics → Production → SOP → Product Group → Create Enter the following data on the Create Product Group: Initial screen: Field Product Group Description Plant Base Unit Members Enter On the Create Product Group: Maintain Members (Materials) screen. modified as appropriate and then disaggregated to demand programs for the individual pumps. Assign a proportion factor of 60% to R-F1## and 40% to R-F2##.

com . enter product group GR## and plant 1000..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. 2-2-3 Create a sales plan. Enter 2-2-5 Create the production plan for product group GR## based on the sales plan and desired target inventory level. Edit → Create productn plan → Target days’ supply Save 2-3 Disaggregate the production plan for the product group and transfer the product plans for R-F1## and R-F2## to Demand Management for use in detailed production planning. Starting with the second month into the future (i.sapeducation. Logistics → Production → SOP → Planning → For Product Group → Create 2-2-1 On the Create Plan: Initial Screen. management wants to maintain a service level of 3 days inventory supply. 2-2-2 On the dialog box that appears. and then select the enter icon to get to the Create Rough-Cut Plan screen. then choose the enter icon. if this is September. enter 3 into the Target days’ supply field for each month of the plan beginning with the second month in the future.2-2 Create a sales and production plan for Product Group Gr##.e. the second month into the future is November). enter 7## in the version number and “Version 7##” in the version description. To indicate this in your plan. Logistics → Production → SOP → Disaggregation → Transfer Product Group to Planning © SAP AG TERP10 50-7 Visit: www. enter the following information into the sales row of the planning table: Month Month + 2 Month + 3 Month + 4 Month + 5 Month + 6 Month + 7 Sales value 200 150 100 150 200 175 2-2-7 Due to uncertainty of market demand.

or PG members as a proportion of PG From Date Invisible Transfer Active Indicator Value GR## 1000 7## Selected Today’s date Not selected Selected 2-3-4 Execute the transfer by clicking on the Transfer Now button. Review the results for R-F1## and then Save.co. Plan for mat. You will get a warning message “Planning Version to be Transferred is not the active version” Select enter to clear the warning message and proceed with the data disaggregation and transfer. plant 1000. © SAP AG TERP10 50-8 Visit: www.sapeducation. 2-3-4 Display the Stock Requirements List for R-F1##.2-3-1 Enter the following data on the Transfer Planning Data to Demand Management screen: Field Product Group Plant Version Prod.com . The results for R-F2## are displayed. Examine the results. Save the results for R-F2##. In reviewing the result of the transfer you will notice the 60% of the product groups production plan has been assigned to product R-F1## and 40% to RF2##. Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/ Requirements List Are the planned independent requirements covered by planned orders? No – because MRP has not been run. 2-3-5 By deselecting the Invisible Transfer indicator the disaggregation results are presented on another screen allowing the planner to modify the results before saving them manually to demand management.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

then choose Enter again to start MRP.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.2-5 Run MRP for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000. Multi-Level Planning Use the following data: Processing key Create purchase req. When MRP is finished. Logistics → Production → MRP → Planning →Single-Item. plant 1000. Examine the results. a results screen should appear. 2-4-1 How many materials were planned? 10 2-4-2 Were planned orders and dependent requirements created? Yes Exit the results 2-5 Display the MRP list for R-F1##.co.com . Delivery Schedules Create MRP list Planning mode Scheduling Also Plan Unchanged Components Display results before they are saved Display material list Simulation mode NETCH 2 3 1 1 1 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect Choose Enter and confirm your input parameters. Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → MRP List 2-5-1 Are all the independent requirements covered by planned orders? Yes 2-5-2 What is the number of the first planned order? Varies for example 31354 2-5-3 Select the Expand header details icon to the left of the material in the header to view further planning information for this material. © SAP AG TERP10 50-9 Visit: www.

What planned order created the first dependent requirement in the list? Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List On the left hand side of the first dependent requirement. therefore.2-6 Compare the stock / requirements list to the MRP list. enter the order information: Sold-to party Ship-to party PO number Req. enter a sales order for your pump. select the Details of element icon.co. R-F1##. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create. deliv. plant 1000. it is the same planned order from exercise 2-5-2. From the MRP list select Goto → Stock/requirements list comparison 2-6-1 Do differences exist between the two lists? No 2-6-2 Why? No planning or execution activity has taken place on this material since the MRP run. date Material Order quantity 1000 1000 PO-## Day 15 of Month+3 R-F1## 50 TERP10 50-10 Visit: www. Yes. On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen.nr OR 1000 10 00 © SAP AG Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. use the following data: Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Enter On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen. Exit the MRP list 2-7 Display the stock / requirements list for R-B1##.com . 2-8 You want to determine if sales orders consume demand.sapeducation.

Exit the screen.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current 2-9-1 What consumption mode is assigned to this item? 2 (Backward / forward consumption) 2-9-2 What is the backward consumption period? 30 (workdays) 2-9-3 What is the forward consumption period? 30 (workdays) Exit the material master record. What is the sales order number? Varies. 2-10 Display the stock / requirements list for R-F1## in plant 1000. The MRP list Planned Independent Requirements are 50 units higher than the stock requirements list due to the consumption by the sales order. select the Fix qty/date indicator and then select the Complete dlv. Keep in mind the MRP list shows values as of the last planning run executed (static planning picture) while the stock requirements list presents the current planning situation. for example 10197 Look at the bottom of the screen for the sales order number. Exit the Stock Requirements List. for month + 3 was reduced by 50 pieces).Enter If an information message appears concerning the invoice date choose Enter to acknowledge it. button. consumption took place correctly. Save. 2-9 Display the MRP 3 view of the material master for R-F1## in plant 1000. Yes. (The planned independent requirement.com . Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/ Requirements List Did consumption take place correctly? Compare the stock requirements list to the MRP list From the Stock Requirements list select Goto → MRP list comparison. © SAP AG TERP10 50-11 Visit: www.co. If the Standard Order: Availability Control screen appears.

2-12 © SAP AG TERP10 50-12 Visit: www. Use the same parameters from exercise 2-4.sapeducation. for month + 3.co.2-11 Run MRP again. for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000.com . was reduced by 50 to cover the planned independent requirement.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. with a quantity of 50. 2-12-1 Has the plan changed? Yes 2-12-2 How? The first planned order’s quantity. was created to cover the sales order. A new planned order. Compare the MRP list (or the stock / requirements list) of R-F1## in plant 1000 to the values you recorded in exercise 2-10.

The consumption mode defines how the customer order is assigned to the planned independent requirement. What is the difference between a regenerative MRP run and a net change MRP run? © SAP AG TERP10 51-1 Visit: www. Determine whether this statement is true or false. _________________________________________________________ 4. List the four modes in which consumption can be carried out. Determine whether this statement is true or false.Material Planning: Test Your Knowledge 1. What are the options for executing a MRP run? _________________________________________________________ 6. A product group helps in the planning process by grouping products with 3. The consumption-based planning procedures are generally only based on the previous consumptions of the material 2. the quantity of a planned order is determined by the cost of the material.sapeducation. What is the difference between the make-to-stock planning strategy 10 and the planning with final assembly strategy 40? 7.com . 5. 8. During a MRP run. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Basic data in the material master is applicable to the entire company and is stored at the plant level.

The consumption-based planning procedures are generally only based on the previous consumptions of the material Answer: True As opposed to MRP. This continues until the entire quantity is consumed. If the quantity cannot be completely covered by the planned independent requirement. If the quantity cannot be completely covered by the planned independent requirement. then the remainder is assigned to the next one further in the future. List the four modes in which consumption can be carried out. and Forward/Backward consumption Backward consumption The customer requirement consumes the planned independent requirement that lies closest to it in the past. and reservations. then backward consumption logic is used. External requirements such as sales orders. are generally not relevant to planning. 11. Forward consumption The customer requirement consumes the planned independent requirement that lies closest to it in the future. Backward/Forward consumption. A product group helps in the planning process by grouping products with Answer: similar characteristics The product group groups together products with similar characteristics. then forward consumption logic is used. or the forward consumption period is reached. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Forward/Backward consumption Forward consumption logic is used first. Answer: Backward consumption. The consumption mode defines how the customer order is assigned to the planned independent requirement.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence. consumption-based planning procedures are only based on material consumption. Forward consumption. If the quantity cannot be consumed. If the quantity cannot be consumed. 10. planned independent requirements.Material Planning: Answers 9. This continues until the entire quantity is consumed. then the remainder is assigned to the next one further in the past.com . or the backward consumption period is reached. Backward/Forward consumption Backward consumption logic is used first.co.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 52-1 Visit: www.

sapeducation. 13. the unit of measure. Answer: False Basic data in the material master is applicable to the entire company.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 16. 15. Basic data in the material master is applicable to the entire company and is stored at the plant level. or interactive) Total planning online Total planning in the background 14. What is the difference between the make-to-stock planning strategy 10 and the planning with final assembly strategy 40? Answer: In make-to-stock planning strategy 10. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Basic data includes the material number. What is the difference between a regenerative MRP run and a net change MRP run? Answer: In a regenerative planning run. all materials are planned. During a MRP run. Answer: False The quantity of a planned order is determined by the lot size key defined in the material master record. Determine whether this statement is true or false. © SAP AG TERP10 52-2 Visit: www. What are the options for executing a MRP run? Answer: Single-item planning (single-level. the quantity of a planned order is determined by the cost of the material. whereas in a net change planning run. planning is based upon the greater of planned independent requirements or sales orders. only those materials that have undergone a change relevant to MRP are planned. but is stored at the client level. multi-level.12. Sales orders are ignored. and conversion factors for alternative units of measure. however. In planning with final assembly strategy 40.com . planning is based only upon planned independent requirements. the material group.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .Manufacturing Execution Contents: Organizational Levels Master Data Manufacturing Execution  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 7-1 Visit: www.co.sapeducation.

co. Controlling. Financial Accounting.Manufacturing Execution: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. repetitive.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: Describe the different manufacturing processes of discrete.com . and Sales and Distribution Review production performance using information systems and cost management reports  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 7-2 Visit: www.sapeducation. and process manufacturing Identify the organizational levels used by manufacturing execution Understand the master data used by manufacturing execution Perform manufacturing execution activities Identify the integration points with Materials Management.

co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Manufacturing Execution: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 7-3 Visit: www.sapeducation.

com . Marketing creates sales forecasts for products or product groups.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 7-4 Visit: www. As a project team member.sapeducation. Material Planners. you need to understand the manufacturing execution process.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. then create a material plan based upon these sales plans. Manufacturing produces the finished products and subassemblies based upon the manufacturing plan.Manufacturing Execution: Business Scenario In your enterprise. The output of manufacturing planning is the input of manufacturing execution.co.

com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. you will be able to: Describe the organizational levels used in the Manufacturing Execution List the master data used by Manufacturing Execution  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 7-5 Visit: www.co.Organizational Levels and Master Data: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

© SAP AG TERP10 7-6 Visit: www.com .sapeducation. a manufacturing company has various requirements with regard to shop floor control. Lot Lot Lot Order-controlled production with production order Work center Process manufacturing Order-controlled production with process order Resource Repetitive manufacturing Period and quantity-oriented production Not order-related Production line  SAP AG 2004 Depending on the manufacturing process. product complexity.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. For this reason.mySAP ERP Operations: Manufacturing – Production Types (1) Make-to-order prod. stability of production and further criteria. mySAP ERP Operations supports a variety of production types.

mySAP ERP Operations: Manufacturing – Production Types (2) Project-oriented production Production lot 07/15 Sales order 08/20 Project-oriented production with production lots Kanban l ful full l ful Replenishment-controlled using stock transfer.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. in-house production via self-controlled control cycle em pty Kanban  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 7-7 Visit: www.com .sapeducation. external procurement.

Company code .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Balance sheets and Profit & Loss Statements.an organizational element within a company.represents an independent accounting unit. © SAP AG TERP10 7-8 Visit: www. A plant produces goods.co.sapeducation. A storage location identifies the general area in the plant where material is stored. You can design your company structure based on your business processes. A plant can be a manufacturing facility or a warehouse distribution center. required by law. Plants can have multiple storage locations. Plant .com . are created at the company code level. or makes goods available for distribution. Storage location – an organizational element within a plant. The manufacturing planning and execution process uses the following organizational elements: Client – all manufacturing organizational elements exist within a client.Organizational Levels in Manufacturing The SAP manufacturing execution business process uses the following organizational levels: Client Company Code Plant Storage location  SAP AG 2004 Organizational Elements are structures that represent the legal and/or organizational views of an enterprise. renders services.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.E).sapeducation. Work centers or resources are assigned in the routing of the operations. formulas. rate routings. Task lists can be routings. control key. misc.) PRTs  SAP AG 2004 The material to be produced must have the procurement type in-house production (X.com . or master recipes. Production resources/tools are assigned in the routing of the operations. A special selection procedure chooses the valid BOM. The BOMs are single-level BOMs. equipment. document.co. standard values.Master Data for Manufacturing Execution (1) Material Master data for material (product and components) BOM BOM Material or order BOM Master data for work center/resource (standard value key. © SAP AG TERP10 7-9 Visit: www. available capacity. activity types) Work Center/Resource Task Lists Task List Operations. trigger points Master data for PRT (material.

Master Data for Manufacturing Execution (2) Production Version Master data for production versions (task lists and BOMs) Batch Unique specifications for a Material  SAP AG 2004 Production versions contain data relevant to all manufacturing environments.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.co.com . © SAP AG TERP10 7-10 Visit: www. A batch is a quantity of material produced during a given production run.

Quality Management. such as purchasing. Basic Data.com . and so on. Purchasing. Accounting. inventory management. The MRP (Planning) and Work Scheduling (Execution) views must be maintained for manufacturing.co. The stored data can be used by all areas. Forecasting. invoice verification. It is used by all of the SAP Logistics components.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 7-11 Visit: www. and Classification data is used by various manufacturing planning and execution processes.Material Master: Primary Views Basic Data St Purchasing t MRP Stocks in plant/ storage location Financial Accounting Sales A B Work scheduling Material Master Quality management Storage Forecasting Warehouse management Classification  SAP AG 2004 The material master represents the central source for releasing material-specific data. materials planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

In this way. multilevel production is described using the single-level BOMs of the finished product and those of the assemblies and where required. An item of a BOM can itself also contain components. that are to be included in the production of a material. Bills of material are single-level. A BOM can also contain documents or text items in addition to stock items that are required for the finished product. production. SAP BOMs can be transferred to SAP APO in the form of production process models (PPMs). using the BOMs of the assemblies of the assemblies and so on.co. The base qauntity in the BOM header specifies to which amount of the finished product the item quantities refer. procurement and for product costing. BOMs are used in Material Requirements Planning. A BOM consists of a BOM header and the BOM items.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 7-12 Visit: www.Bills of Material (BOM) Pump P-100 0010 0020 BOM PUMP Material Plant Usage Base quantity Item 0030 0010 0020 0040 0030 0040 0050 100-100 100-200 100-300 100-400 100-130 Casing Fly wheel Hollow shaft Electronic turbo-drive Hexagon head screw P-100 1000 Pump 1 Production 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 8 pc Bills of material are single-level Items of a bill of material can themselves contain a further bill of material  SAP AG 2004 The BOM contains the assemblies or components.com .sapeducation.

for example. which consist of multiple alternative BOMs. for example) and finally. Variable-size items contain variable-size data (a steel sheet with a certain surface area. document items contain a supplementary document that describes production (a kind of design and construction diagram). for example). The item category specifies what kind of item you are dealing with: Stock items are executed in the warehouse and are used in production. The different alternative BOMs can then be valid for each of the different lot-size areas. Components necessary for the production of the finished product are entered as items of the BOM. Individual items themselves can also bear a multitude of further settings. The status of the BOM controls whether the BOM is active for particular applications (MRP. © SAP AG TERP10 7-13 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In contrast.co.Bills of Material Structure BOM Structure BOM PUMP Material Plant Usage Base Quantity P-100 1000 1 1 pc Header Status Description Validity Lot size area Item 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 100-100 100-200 100-300 100-400 100-130 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 1 pc 8 pc Items Item category Descriptions Quantities Control data for example. can also exist in addition to simple BOMs. BOM usage determines the business applications for which a BOM can be used.com . which then only refer to the respective item. Multiple BOMs. non-stock items are directly assigned to a manufacturing order (and not via the warehouse). Stock item Non-stock item Variable-size Item Document item  SAP AG 2004 The settings that apply for the whole BOM can be found in the BOM header.sapeducation.

execution times. the available capacity of exactly one of several possible resource capacities is defined as the basis for scheduling. In order to calculate the execution of an operation during process order scheduling. master recipe. by assigning activity types assigned to this cost center.com . Standard values are used in costing. When you maintain the operations in the routing. equipment task list. to the resource. scheduling. To calculate costs. rate routing. master recipes or production/process orders to be executed at this resource. A standard value is a planned value used to carry out an operation. you also specify the task list types (such as routing. The graphic above shows some of the most important resource data. © SAP AG TERP10 7-14 Visit: www. Available capacities of resources are the basis for scheduling process orders.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. such as the execution time. master recipe or production/process order. you define a person or group of persons responsible for the maintenance of the master data of this resource.sapeducation. You can enter default values for the operation to be executed at a resource.Work Center (Resource) Data Basic data Name and description Person responsible Task list usage General Basic data data Standard value key Capacities Available capacity Formula key Default values Control key Standard text key Wage data Scheduling Scheduling basis Formula key Cost center Cost center Activity types Formula key HR assignment People Positions Qualifications  SAP AG 2004 Resource-related data is maintained on several screens. They are also required for capacity requirements planning and shop floor control. rate routings. and capacity requirements. execution times. and capacity requirements planning in order to calculate costs. rate routing. On the Basic Data screen. or inspection plans) in which the resource can be used and whether the resource can be used in orders. a suitable formula key is entered in the corresponding screens. a resource is assigned standard values for operations in routings. and capacity requirements of phases carried out at a resource. By entering a standard value key. the system copies or references this information. By defining the task list usage. By assigning a cost center to a resource. You can define the specific output of a resource. you link the resource to cost accounting and can now carry out product and order costing.

per 1 pc. per 1 pc. Therefore you need to make sure that each operation in the routing can contain its own base quantity.sapeducation. Alongside the standard values. fixed 10 min. per 1 pc. 15 min. the routing also contains the time elements that are relevant for scheduling operations. that is. per 1 pc.co. 10 min.com . A routing can contain parallel or alternative sequences in addition to the standard sequence. Moreover. SAP R/3 routings can be transferred to SAP APO in the form of production process models (PPMs).Routings Production of Pump P-100 Routing PUMP Material P-100 Pump 50000222 01 Work center Work center Work center Work center Work center Task list group Group counter Pump (standard process) Plant Work Operatn. their sequence and the work centers in which these operations are to be executed. to which these time elements can refer.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 7-15 Visit: www. 20 min. An SAP R/3 routing can be defined using the routing group and the group counter.  SAP AG 2004 Routings contain the steps that are necessary for production. center 1310 1320 Times 1906 1904 1905 1000 Description 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 1310 1320 1906 1904 1905 Staging according to pick list Press flywheel in casing Paint casing Mount shaft in casing Final assembly pump 5 min. the routing contains reference to the material whose production it describes. the corresponding operations.

co. 001 5 min. © SAP AG TERP10 7-16 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. tear down may not be necessary). processing and tear down of an operation are each described using a corresponding formula. Setup 15 min.Routings and Work Centers Scheduling via Routing and Work Center Routing PUMP Operation 30 Paint Casing Work center 1906 Scheduling basis Standard value Setup Cap. machine time. 002 Operation standard values implemented in the scheduling formulas of the work center result in: Fixed time elements (independent of lot size) Variable time elements (dependent on lot size) Machine HR Variable1 Schedul. Tear down . If several capacities are stored in a work center.. personnel time). 1.  SAP AG 2004 A work center is assigned to an operation. Processing 3.. the scheduling basis is used to determine which of these capacities is relevant for scheduling. the work center specifies which time elements (standard values) can be taken into consideration during planning (for example.sapeducation. The steps for which a formula is stored are executed (for example. setup time.com . The scheduling formulas stored in the work center define the duration from the allowed time elements in the routing. formula 2. Using its standard value key. Setup.

10 Op. B Mat.com . 20 Op. Component assignment is dealt with in the routing. B Mat. such as a measuring instrument or a support.sapeducation. production resources/tools can also be assigned in the routing. The procurement of these components is then planned at the beginning of the particular operation. A Mat. In addition to BOM components. BOM components that are not explicitly assigned are considered as being assigned to the first operation. © SAP AG TERP10 7-17 Visit: www. C Component assignment in routing  SAP AG 2004 Time Production is described via a routing and a BOM. For this reason.co.Routings and Bills of Material Component Assignment in Routing Material master PUMP Production version 0001 Routing Op. A Mat.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 20 Op. 30 Mat. but that are necessary for production. BOM components can be assigned to a certain operation. 30 BOM Mat. PUMP Mat. C Procurement and consumption of components occur at the beginning of the processes to which they are assigned Manufacturing order PUMP Op. Production resources/tools are operating facilities that are not location-bound. 10 Op.

The fields "BOM alternative" and "BOM usage" define which BOM is to be used in manufacturing. Usually. This following data is included in a production version: The fields "Valid from" and Valid to" define the period of validity of the production version. the system only displays the capacity requirements for this work center. To be able to carry out capacity planning. this production line must exist in the routing. define the area of validity for this version. rate-based and rough-cut planning. © SAP AG TERP10 7-18 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. The field. The creation of a production version is mandatory for repetitive manufactured products. Production versions are optional for discrete and process manufactured products. In repetitive manufacturing (in the planning table). The values entered are used for scheduling and capacity planning. The "To location" is the proposed receiving storage location. The task list fields for detailed.com .sapeducation.Production Versions Material master record Production version 1 Production version 2 Routing Receiving storage location (assembly) Proposed issue storage location (components) Describes the production procedure  SAP AG 2004 The production version contains data relevant to all manufacturing environments. you enter a group and a group counter in the rate-based planning fields. The fields "From lot size" and "To lot size". "production line" defines the work center (production line) for assigning production quantities in the repetitive planning table.

9 pH 35 .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. A quantity of a material produced during a specific production run. In general.(-14 o)C Batch C1 For process order 60114 Specifications: Acidity: Total solids: Freezing point : 7 pH 36% -18oC Batch C2 For process order 60225 Specifications: Acidity: Total solids: Freezing point : 9 pH 38% -19oC Batch B3 For process order 60438 Specifications: Acidity: Total solids: Freezing point: 8 pH 34% -17oC  SAP AG 2004 In the SAP System. batch master records always depend on their corresponding material master records. A batch master record is usually created by the system in the background for certain business operations (such as goods receipt). In contrast. Batches are created for a material. a batch master record contains data that uniquely identifies a batch and characterizes it as a non-reproducible unit. If a material is to be produced and managed in batches.com .co. which therefore represents a non-reproducible.45 % (-18o) . homogeneous unit with unique specifications. the data of a material master is valid for all batches assigned to it.sapeducation. Material Vanilla ice cream x Batch mgmt reqmt Values: Acidity: Total solids: Freezing point: 7 . Users can also create batch master records directly in master data maintenance. © SAP AG TERP10 7-19 Visit: www. the batch management requirement indicator must be set in the material master record.Material and Batch Batch Partial quantity of a material that is managed separately from other quantities of the same material in stock. The characteristic batch specifications are assigned using characteristics from the classification system in the material master and are inherited by the corresponding batch master records.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.Master Data: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the organizational levels used in the Manufacturing Execution List the master data used by Manufacturing Execution  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 7-20 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .

process inventory transactions. © SAP AG TERP10 7-21 Visit: www. you will be able to: Describe the basic steps used in producing a product with production orders Create a production order.co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Financial Accounting. and report production confirmations Describe the process of order settlement Identify the integration points with Materials Management. and Sales and Distribution Review production performance using information systems and cost management reports Note: See the Appendix for examples of Repetitive (Orderless) or Process Order Production Execution  SAP AG 2004 This topic covers the basics of manufacturing products using production orders.sapeducation. Controlling.Manufacturing Execution – Discrete: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

Application Areas for Production Orders Typical industries Machinery. These production types are mostly dependent on the product stability.com . engineering. automobile. product complexity and production process used. Production orders can be used in a number of production types. wood products.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 7-22 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. electronics. consumer goods. construction. aerospace PRODUCT COMPLEXITY Special design Make-toorder Assembly/ assemble from catalog Periodoriented Production by lot size Mass production PRODUCT STABILITY  SAP AG 2004 Production orders are used in a variety of industries.co.

communication. Production order management controls the whole process of in-house production of products and is integrated in the functions of capacity requirements planning. reqmts Sales Sales orders Stock B A C D E MRP Costing Planned orders Production orders Order execution Delivery to stock Order settlement Archiving Make-to-order prod. Integration with QM  SAP AG 2004 Inventory mgmt Integration with PDC Production order management is a central part of a complex process chain starting with an independent requirement (planned or customer requirement) and ending with the goods issue of a finished product.co. © SAP AG TERP10 Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. text processing. classification.com Visit: www. and graphics. Furthermore there are links or interfaces to quality management as well as external systems. Production order management uses the following system elements: ALE. costing and inventory management. Customizing.sapeducation. factory calendar. workflow.Application-Wide Processes Material forecast Demand program Plnd ind.nr Capacity Requirements Planning 7-23 .

variance calculation. A number of settings available in Customizing allow you to successfully perform each step in order processing.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. WIP determination.sapeducation. Many of these activities can run automatically or in the background so that manual processing of orders is minimized.com .co. © SAP AG TERP10 7-24 Visit: www. (1) These functions can be automated. and settlement are generally periodic work for Cost Object Controlling.Production Order Processing Archiving/ deleting Order settlement 15 Variance calculation Goods receipt (1) WIP determination Confirmation (1) 10 Upload from PCD system 9 Material withdrawal posting (1) 8 13 12 14 Order header Operations Material components Production Tools Costs •Plan •Target •Actual 100 20 50 Order request 16 1 2 3 4 Availability checks (1) Machine reservation Order release (1) Download to PDC system Order print (1) Material staging Order creation 5 6 7 11  SAP AG 2004 The production order goes through a number of individual activities. which are usually processed in the background.

production resources/tools and trigger points to the operation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. type Material components ● Material number ● Quantity ● Requirements date PRTs ● PRT number ● PRT category ● Number of PRTs Trigger points ● Functions Confirmations ● Quantities ● Times Capacity splits ● Individual machine ● Individual person Order-related COC  SAP AG 2004 The order structure represented can be enhanced by certain elements. At least one operation is required. Costs are determined at operation level. number ● Doc. the system creates one automatically. Suboperations are permitted within an operation. If necessary. You have the choice of whether to assign material components. You can link production orders to documents in the Document Management System (DMS) © SAP AG TERP10 7-25 Visit: www.Elements of a Production Order Order header ● Order number ● Plant ● Production scheduler Operation sequences ● Standard sequence ● Other sequences Operations ● Work center ● Control key ● Standard values Settlement rule ● Settlement profile ● Settlement receiver Costs ● Planned ● Actual Document link ● Doc.sapeducation. You can make a selection from several alternative sequences.com . submitted at order header level and a settlement rule is created for the orders only for order-related COC.co. You can create several (parallel) operation sequences.

You can enter data manually. the BOM is not reread. the components of the BOM are assigned to the first operation.com . When a planned order is converted.Order Creation Options Create without routing and BOM Order Create with routing and BOM Plan Order Material BOM Create with routing Plan Order Create with planned order Planned order Order Plan  SAP AG 2004 Operations.co.sapeducation. If not otherwise specified in the routing. © SAP AG TERP10 7-26 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. material components and PRTs are usually taken from the routing and the BOM.

a status is set accordingly. and so on). A function is also available for the mass release of operations or orders (see the section "Mass Processing"). Reservation Availability check (Material. You can release an individual operation. a whole order or several orders together.Order Release Functions Order header Operations Material components Production Tools Costs •Plan •Target •Actual 100 20 50 Order creation Scheduling.sapeducation. material withdrawal. © SAP AG TERP10 7-27 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . Capacity. Production orders are managed via status. Machine. PRT) Order release Print document Material withdrawals Processing Confirmation Goods receipts Settlement  SAP AG 2004 The order release is the basis for the processes that follow the production order (printing order documents. When an order is released. An availability check can be executed automatically.co.

Capacity.com . PRT) Order header Operations Material components Production Tools Costs •Plan •Target •Actual 100 20 50 1 Req.sapeducation..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. capacity.Availability Checks (Material. Check instructions control the availability check.) Goods receipt Time 1 Time 2 Order creation Change Release Processing Confirmation  SAP AG 2004 Production orders can be checked individually or with mass processing at different times. manually or automatically..co. FKAP. quantity/date Warehouse 1 Warehouse 2 Checking control for production orders Inspection results Confirmed quantity or capacity Missing part record (index) Status FMAT. . Inspection results Assignment of confirmed quantity (Partial quantities can be confirmed) Material shortage status Missing part record © SAP AG TERP10 7-28 Visit: www. FFHM (missing part.

. .com . When you display the material document.Production Order: Goods Issue Posting Reservation Stock quantity Consumption stat. This can take place manually or automatically. © SAP AG TERP10 7-29 Visit: www. Goods issue slip Material document Acctg document Cost acctg document  SAP AG 2004 The goods issue posting (GI) is executed for a consumption of a material component for a production order. to which each posting refers.. The GI posting is controlled via a movement type (261).. The cost accounting documents serve various cost analysis purposes. Storage location-related update of stock and consumption fields Reduction of reservations (for planned withdrawal) Determination of actual costs (evaluation) and update of order Generation of material documents.. Point of consumption: Order Cost center G/L accounts Goods Issue G/L accounts: Stock account Consumption acc. you can branch to the other documents.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The accounting document describes the goods movement from the financial accounting point of view.sapeducation. A goods issue document can be printed. . The following functions are executed when a goods issue is posted. accounting documents and cost accounting documents The material document describes the goods movement from the materials management (stock) point of view.

Confirmation Procedures Order-related confirmations Operation-related confirmations Confirmations for production order Time ticket /confirmation slip confirmation Time event confirmation Collective/quick entry Start setup Finish setup Start processing Finish processing Milestone confirmation Progress confirmation  SAP AG 2004 There are different confirmation procedures.sapeducation. the two main types are operation-related and order-related confirmations. Each procedure realizes different requirements that a company may have. one or more procedure may be used. Depending on the application. For the most part.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 7-30 Visit: www.co.

co. Update of the delivered quantity in an order Evaluation of the receipt Credit to order Update of plant activity The GR posting is controlled via a movement type (101).sapeducation. The accounting document describes the goods movement from the financial accounting point of view.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. A goods receipt document can be printed.Production Order: Goods Receipt Posting Reservation Stock quantity Consumption stat. requirement G/L accounts Goods receipt slip Goods Receipt G/L accounts: Stock account Consumption acc. you can branch to the other documents. The cost accounting documents serve various cost analysis purposes.. This can take place manually or automatically. . . When you display the material document. Trans. to which each posting refers.. Messages Material document Acctg document Cost acctg document  SAP AG 2004 The goods receipt posting (GR) realizes the stock receipt of a product produced using a production order.. © SAP AG TERP10 7-31 Visit: www.. Generation of material documents. The following functions are executed when a goods receipt is posted. accounting documents and cost accounting documents The material document describes the goods movement from the materials management (stock) point of view.com .

Information Systems for Order Management
Info. systems
Order information system

Basis
(1)
Orders Order structure and operations Missing part record (index record) CO object of order

Multi-level order overview for sales orders

(1)

Missing parts - information system

(1)

Controlling reports

Business Information Warehouse mySAP BI (BW) Production information system PPIS as part of R/3 LIS (logistics controlling system)

BW InfoCubes

R/3 LIS Library

 SAP AG 2004

There are several information systems for production orders. They differ in the way they use the order database (directly or indirectly) as well as in their results. Systems marked with (1) are profile-controlled. You set up the profiles in Customizing under Production Control -> Information Systems. If the systems are used for list creation in individual production orders, you can control the profile for each order type in the order type-dependent parameters (T399X). From the systems mentioned above, you can display capacity evaluations, batch where-used lists, and other lists.

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-32
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Cost Debit/Credit (Order-Related COC)
Order debit
Material costs Production costs External activity Process costs Overhead costs (material) M E V X G

Production order
1000 100-100 1421 4230 1310 External processing 300900 Surcharge, raw material 12,000 25,000 8,000 12,000 8,500

Material withdrawal

Processing

Confirmation

Goods receipt

Order settlement

Archiving/ deleting

Credit production order WE valuation control
Material stock account (quantity * standard/price it. valuation variant) Plant activity account (quantity * price it. valuation variant)

Settlement profile
Settlement receiver Distribution rule Settlement parameter Settlement account (acc. to allocation structure) Plant activity account Difference account

Actual costs at time of settlement
 SAP AG 2004

The manner in which a production order is credited and debited depends on the variant of cost object controlling (COC) selected in Controlling. Both order-related and product-related execution is possible. Order settlement credits the order. Settlement is usually periodic. It is controlled via a settlement profile. It makes sense to use order-related COC for the following: Flexible production environment Flexible product range Cost management of individual production lots If cost controlling is required for each order High setup costs Manufacture of co-products For in-house production of materials, it is generally best to use standard price control. For more information about cost object controlling, see the courses AC510 or AC515.

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-33
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Period-End Closing: Settlement
Production Order
Period Accounting
Revenues – Sales deductions – Total costs incl. Variances +/-Stock - WIP Changes = Profit in period

Cost-of-Sales Accounting

Material:- Pump COCO PC Quantity produced: 10 pcs.
Actual Costs Actual Costs 2,400,Stock Change -2,000,Variances 400,-

Revenues – Sales deductions – Cost of goods manufactured (1st and 2nd contribution margin) – Variances = Profit in period

BY COMPANY

BY PROFIT CENTER

SETTLEMENT

BY COMPANY

BY PROFIT SEGMENT

Postings to Financial & Management Accounting
 SAP AG 2004

Settlement makes a Financial Posting only for the work-in-process balance. Settlement makes a Financial and CO posting for the variances. The order/cost collector controlling object is debited/credited for the variance to bring its balance to zero (if appropriate).

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-34
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Manufacturing Execution: Topic Summary

You are now able to: Describe the basic steps used in producing a product with production orders Create a production order, process inventory transactions, and report production confirmations Describe the process of order settlement Identify the integration points with Materials Management, Financial Accounting, Controlling, and Sales and Distribution Review production performance using information systems and cost management reports

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-35
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Manufacturing Execution: Unit Summary

You are now able to: Describe the different manufacturing processes of discrete, repetitive, and process manufacturing Identify the organizational levels used by manufacturing execution Understand the master data used by manufacturing execution Perform manufacturing execution activities Identify the integration points with Materials Management, Financial Accounting, Controlling, and Sales and Distribution Review production performance using information systems and cost management reports

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-36
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Manufacturing Execution: Exercises
Unit: Manufacturing Execution Topic: Organizational Levels and Master Data
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Display a work center • Display a routing • Assign a material component to an operation within a routing The individual operations to manufacture a pump take place in many work centers. You will examine the master data of one of these work centers. You will also view the listing of individual operations within a routing. Because material components may be needed throughout the manufacturing process, you will assign a material to an operation. 1-1 Display the basic data view of work center R-M## in Plant 1000. 1-1-1 What are the five work center tabs that are displayed? ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 1-1-2 Review the information on the Basic data tab. What is the standard value key at this work center? ________________________________ 1-1-3 What are the standard value parameters associated with the standard value key? ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 1-2 ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

Go to the Costing tab. To which cost center is this work center allocated? _____________________________

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-37
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

1-3

Select the Capacities tab. What is the capacity category and description assigned to this work center? (Note: more than one capacity category can be assigned to a work center). ____________________ 1-3-1 What factory calendar ID is assigned to this work center (for this capacity category)? ____________________________________ 1-3-2 What time does this work center start work each workday, and what time does it finish work (for this capacity category)? ____________________ ____________________

1-4

Change the routing for material R-F1##, plant 1000. 1-4-1 What is the status of this routing? __________ 1-4-2 What are the group and the group counter? __________ __________ 1-4-3 For what lot size range is this routing valid? __________ to __________

1-5

Go to the sequence overview screen. 1-5-1 What sequence(s) are listed? __________

1-6

Select the standard sequence line then go to the operation overview screen by selecting the appropriate icon. Fill in the table below with the values you see on the screen. This will be useful as a reference in future exercises. Operation Work Center Description

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-38
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

1-7

Select the first operation and find: 1-7-1 What is the base quantity and operation unit of measure of this operation? ______________________________________________________ 1-7-2 What is the standard value and unit of measure for the amount of labor required to make the base quantity? ______________________________________ 1-7-3 Note the work center where this operation is performed. Is the list of standard value parameters displayed on this screen the same as those you noted in exercise 1-1-3? __________

1-8

Go to the component allocation – general screen. Components are assumed to be allocated to the first operation. However, we can allocate them to any operation. 1-8-1 What is the first component on the item overview list? __________ 1-8-2 Select the line of the first component, then select the New assignment button and allocate the component to operation 20 (of sequence 0). 1-8-3 Does the operation number appear in the Operation column? 1-8-4 Why might we want to allocate a component to an operation other than the first operation? _______________________________________________________ 1-8-5 Save your routing

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-39
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit: Manufacturing Execution Topic: Manufacturing Execution Using Production Orders
At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Convert a planned order to a production order • Perform material issues and receipts • Confirm labor • Process reports using the Order Information Systems Your company uses material requirements planning to create a manufacturing plan. As the production manager, MRP controller or production scheduler, you therefore create a large number of production orders based on planned orders generated by the automatic material requirements planning run. In this exercise, you will convert planned orders into production orders and familiarize yourself with the order structure. You will also release the order, enter goods issue transactions, and perform order confirmations. To be able to analyze the manufacturing data you will run reports using the Order Information Systems.

If you did not complete the Material Planning exercises from Unit 6, then you must complete exercises 2-1 and 2-2. If you did complete the Material Planning exercises from Unit 6, then begin with exercise 2-3.

Please Note:

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-40
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

2-1

Create the following planned independent requirements for R-F1##, plant 1000.

Month Month + 2 Month + 3 Month + 4 Month + 5 Month + 6 Month + 7

Requirement Value 50 150 100 150 200 175

2-2

Run MRP for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000. Use the following data: Processing key Create purchase req. Delivery Schedules Create MRP list Planning mode Scheduling Also Plan Unchanged Components Display results before they are saved Display material list Simulation mode NETCH 2 3 1 1 1 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect

2-3

From the stock / requirements list of material R-F1## Plant 1000,, convert the planned order with a quantity of 50 into a production order. View the production order for R-F1##. 2-4-1 What is the production order number? ______________ 2-4-2 What is the production order total quantity? __________ 2-4-3 What is the first system status displayed? ____________

2-4

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-41
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

2-5

View the components of the production order. 2-5-1 What is the reservation number of the first component? __________ _____ 2-5-2 What movement type is allowed? __________ 2-5-3 Can we issue this component to this production order now? __________

2-6

View the operations of the order. 2-6-1 What is the standard labor value for operation 10? 2-6-2 Is this the same value that was defined in the routing? Refer to exercise 1-72. 2-6-3 How much labor time is required to complete operation 10? __________

2-7

View the order’s settlement rule. 2-7-1 What is the settlement receiver?

2-8

Release the production order. 2-8-1 What is the first system status displayed? __________ 2-8-2 Can we issue the components to this production order now? __________

2-9

Issue components to the production order. Over issue the first component, R-B1##, Casing by one unit. 2-10-1 Is the movement type the same as the one in exercise 2-5-2? __________

2-10 2-11

Perform an order confirmation for the full order quantity. Display the production order 2-11-1 What is the put in stock quantity? __________ 2-11-2 What is the confirmed finish date? __________ 2-11-3 Was component R-B1## completely issued? __________ 2-11-4 Was operation 10 confirmed for all 50 pieces? __________

2-12

View the order costs. Do the planned raw materials quantities match the actual raw materials quantities? Why or Why not? _____________________________________________________

2-13

Run a report that lists all of the production orders for materials R-F100 to R-F120 in Plant 1000. Within the report, remove the fields Entered by and Last changed by. Include the fields Material number and Order quantity. Finally, add a grand total of the order quantities. After making these modifications, you would also like to save the report layout.

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-42
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Manufacturing Execution: Solutions
Unit: Manufacturing Execution Topic: Organizational Levels and Master Data

1-1

Display the basic data view of work center R-M## in Plant 1000. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Work Centers → Work Center → Display Enter Plant 1000 and work center R-M##. 1-1-1 What are the five work center tabs that are displayed? Basic data Capacities Costing Default values Scheduling

1-1-2 Review the information on the Basic data tab. What is the standard value key at this work center? SAP2 1-1-3 What are the standard value parameters associated with the standard value key? Setup Labor Standard value 2 1-2 Machine Standard value 1 Standard value 3

Go to the Costing tab. To which cost center is this work center allocated? 4230 (Assembly pumps)

1-3

Select the Capacities tab. What is the capacity category and description assigned to this work center? (Note: more than one capacity category can be assigned to a work center). 002 Labor 1-3-1 What factory calendar ID is assigned to this work center (for this capacity category)? Select the Capacity header icon at the bottom of the screen (or double click on the Capacity category field). 01 (Factory calendar Germany standard)

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-43
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

1-3-2 What time does this work center start work each workday, and what time does it finish work (for this capacity category)? Start 07:00:00; Finish 15:00:00 Select the Exit icon to leave the Work Center. 1-4 Change the routing for material R-F1##, plant 1000. Logistics → Production → Master Data→Routings → Routings → Standard Routings → Change Enter material R-F1## and plant 1000. Select the Header icon (the Hat icon). 1-4-1 What is the status of this routing? Status = 4 (Released (general)) 1-4-2 What are the group and the group counter? Varies…for example 50000792 / 1 1-4-3 For what lot size range is this routing valid? 1 to 99,999,999 PC 1-5 Go to the sequence overview screen. Choose the Sequence overview icon. 1-5-1 What sequence(s) are listed? Standard Sequence 1-6 Select the standard sequence line then go to the operation overview screen by selecting the appropriate icon. Fill in the table below with the values you see on the screen. This will be useful as a reference in future exercises.

Operation 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070

Work Center R-R## R-V## R-L## R-E## R-E## R-F## R-P##

Description Material Staging Press fly wheel in casing Paint Casing Insert hollow shaft in casing Insert control electronics Final assembly of pump Deliver to stock

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-44
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

1-7

Select the first operation and find: Details → Operation 1-7-1 What is the base quantity and operation unit of measure of this operation? 1 PC 1-7-2 What is the standard value and unit of measure for the amount of labor required to make the base quantity? 10 MIN (per 1 PC) 1-7-3 Note the work center where this operation is performed. Is the list of standard value parameters displayed on this screen the same as those you noted in exercise 1-1-3 ? Yes

1-8

Go to the component allocation – general screen. Components are assumed to be allocated to the first operation. However, we can allocate them to any operation. Choose Comp Alloc icon. 1-8-1 What is the first component on the item overview list? R-B1## 1-8-2 Select the line of the first component, then select the New assignment button and allocate the component to operation 20 (of sequence 0). 1-8-3 Does the operation number appear in the Operation column? Yes 1-8-4 Why might we want to allocate a component to an operation other than the first operation? The component may be needed at an operation other than the first for scheduling, backflushing, etc. 1-8-5 Save your routing Select the Save icon.

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-45
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit: Material Planning Topic: Material Planning Process

Please Note:

If you did not complete the Material Planning exercises from Unit 6, then you must complete exercises 2-1 and 2-2. If you did complete the Material Planning exercises from Unit 6, then begin with exercise 2-3.

2-1

Create the following planned independent requirements for R-F1##, plant 1000. Logistics → Production → Production Planning→ Demand Management → Planned Independent Requirements → Create Enter the following data on the Create Planned Independent Requirements: Initial Screen Field Material Plant Version From / To Enter On the Plnd ind.reqmts Create: Planning Table screen, enter the following data: Data entry R-F1## 1000 00 Accept the default dates

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-46
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Month Month + 2 Month + 3 Month + 4 Month + 5 Month + 6 Month + 7 Save 2-2

Requirement Value 50 150 100 150 200 175

Run MRP for the complete bill of material for pump R-F1## in plant 1000. Logistics → Production → MRP → Planning →Single-Item, Multi-Level Planning Use the following data: Processing key Create purchase req. Delivery Schedules Create MRP list Planning mode Scheduling Also Plan Unchanged Components Display results before they are saved Display material list Simulation mode NETCH 2 3 1 1 1 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect

Choose Enter and confirm your input parameters, then choose Enter again to start MRP. When MRP is finished, a results screen should appear. Exit the MRP results screen. 2-3 From the stock / requirements list of material R-F1##, Plant 1000, convert the planned order with a quantity of 50 into a production order. Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List Double click on the planned order with a quantity of 50 in the list. Select the Convert Planned Order to Production Order icon. The system will display the production order header. Save.
© SAP AG TERP10 7-47
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

2-4

View the production order for R-F1##. First, select the Refresh icon on the stock / requirements list display. The planned order has become a production order. (Note: because the system processes some tasks asynchronously, this may take a few moments). Double-click on the production order line, and then select the Change Element icon. 2-4-1 What is the production order number? Varies, for example 60002045 2-4-2 What is the production order total quantity? 50 pieces 2-4-3 What is the first system status displayed? CRTD (Created)

2-5

View the components of the production order. Select the Component overview icon from the “Production order Change: Header screen”. Select the first component, and then select the Component Detail icon on the bottom of the screen. Review the General data tab and answer the following questions. 2-5-1 What is the reservation number of the first component? Varies, for example 20734 2-5-2 What movement type is allowed? 261 (GI for order) 2-5-3 Can we issue this component to this production order now? Look for the Movement allowed box by scrolling down to the bottom of the General data tab. No (The Movement allowed box is not selected)

2-6

View the operations of the order. Select the Operation Overview icon. 2-6-1 What is the standard labor value for operation 10? Select operation 10, then Operation details icon at bottom of the screen. Select the StandardVals tab. 10 Min 2-6-2 Is this the same value that was defined in the routing? Refer to exercise 1-72. Yes. When a production order is created the default data from a product’s routing is copied to the order. 2-6-3 How much labor time is required to complete operation 10? Select the Qty/Activities tab. 8.333 hours (50 pieces times 10 minutes per piece divided by 60 minutes)

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-48
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

2-7

View the order’s settlement rule. Select the Order Header icon then Header →Settlement Rule 2-7-1 What is the settlement receiver? R-F1## Select the Back icon to exit the Settlement Rule. Remain in the production order.

2-8

Release the production order. Functions → Release (or the Release icon). 2-8-1 What is the first system status displayed? REL (Released) 2-8-2 Can we issue the components to this production order now? Yes Save the production order. Exit the Stock Requirements List.

2-9

Issue components to the production order. Over issue the first component by one unit. Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management→ Goods Movement → Goods Issue (MIGO) In the Transaction field, which is the first dropdown box, select Goods Issue. In the Reference field, which is the second dropdown box, select Order. In the third field, enter your production order number from exercise 2-4-1. Enter Select the Close Detail Data button to collapse the detail data section. Verify the movement type in the upper right hand corner of the screen. 2-9-1 Is the movement type the same as the one in exercise 2-5-2? Yes Change the quantity of the first component, R-B1##, Casing to 51. Select the OK indicator for all the components. Select the Save or Post icon.

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-49
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

2-10

Perform an order confirmation for the full order quantity. Logistics → Production → Production Control → Confirmation → Enter → For Order Enter the production order number. This is a final confirmation for the full order quantity. You are confirming the full order quantity. Select the Final conf. icon. Yield to confirm = 50 Select Save. Note the message at the bottom of the screen. A goods movement transaction occurred. This was the goods receipt of the finished pump into stock. The goods receipt took place because this action was specified in the routing.

2-11

Display the production order. Logistics → Production → Production Control → Order → Display Enter the production order number, choose Enter, and then answer the following questions: 2-11-1 What is the delivered quantity? 50 Pieces 2-11-2 What is the confirmed finish date? Today’s date 2-11-3 Was component R-B1## completely issued? From the component overview screen, select component R-B1##, then the Component detail icon Yes (Withdrawal quantity = 51 pieces) 2-11-4 Was operation 10 confirmed for all 50 pieces? __________ From the operation overview screen select operation 10, then the Operation details icon, then the Qty / activities tab Yes (Confirmed yield = 50 pieces)

2-12

View the order costs. Goto → Costs → Analysis. Do the planned raw materials quantities match the actual raw materials quantities? Why or Why not? No, the actual raw material quantity for the Casing is greater by 1 piece. This is because an additional Casing was issued to the production order. Exit the production order.

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-50
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

2-13

Run a report that lists all of the production orders for materials R-F100 to R-F120 in Plant 1000. Within the report, remove the fields Entered by and Last changed by. Include the fields Material number and Order quantity. Finally, add a grand total of the order quantities. After making these modifications, you would also like to save the report layout. Logistics → Production → Production control → Information System → Order Information System On the Production Order Information System screen, enter the following data: Field List Profile Material From Material To Production Plant Select the Execute icon. To add and delete fields, select the Layout Settings icon and then Change Layout. In the Change Layout dialog box, under Columns, select Entered by and Last changed by fields. To select both fields at the same time, hold down the Ctrl key. Select the Hide selected fields button. Under Column Set, select the Material Number and Order quantity (GMEIN) fields. Select the Show selected fields button. Select Enter. Within the report drag the Material Number field to the right of Material Description. To add a grand total, first sort the report by order number. Select the Order column, and then select the Sort in ascend. ord icon. Then select the Total order quantity column, by clicking on the column header, and select the Aggregation icon. To save the report layout, select the Layout Settings icon and then Save Layout. Data entry Order Headers Standard Profile R-F100 R-F120 1000

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-51
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Enter the following data: Field Save Layout Name User Specific Exit the report. Rerun the report using the same selection criteria. Within the report, select the Layout Settings icon and then Select Layout. Select your layout. Exit the report. Data entry TERP10-## Group ## Layout Selected

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-52
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Manufacturing Execution: Test Your Knowledge
1. Determine whether this statement is true or false. The structure of a routing contains operations to be performed.

2.

Why does a production order need to be released?

3.

What do the elements of a production order define? _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________

4.

Determine whether this statement is true or false. Standard operating times for an operation are defined in the work center.

5.

Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence. ______________ is when the actual costs incurred for the order are settled to one or more receivers.

6.

Determine whether this statement is true or false. Order confirmation is used for entering activities carried out within your company for an order.

© SAP AG

TERP10

7-53
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

8.sapeducation. Answer: Order Settlement is when the actual costs incurred for the order are settled to one or more receivers. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence. Standard operating times for an operation are defined in the work center. Why does a production order need to be released? Answer: Order release is necessary so that subsequent processes. Answer: False Standard operating times are defined in the routing. component withdrawal. 9. on which work center production occurs. and how much is produced. labor. 12. are maintained within the routing. such as setup time. The work center. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 11. controls what parameters. Answer: True Order confirmations are used for entering activities carried out within your company for an order. and order confirmations may occur.Manufacturing Execution: Answers 7.co. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Order confirmations are used for entering activities carried out within your company for an order. ______________ is when the actual costs incurred for the order are settled to one or more receivers. however. and the costs involved in production.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. such as printing the shop floor documents. The structure of a routing contains operations to be performed. Determine whether this statement is true or false.com . when. Answer: True Operations to be performed are contained in the routing. © SAP AG TERP10 7-54 Visit: www. 10. What do the elements of a production order define? Answer: The elements of a production order define what.

com .sapeducation.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Procurement Cycle Contents: Organization levels and master data Procurement cycle Reporting  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-1 Visit: www.

com .sapeducation.co.Procurement Cycle: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-2 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

com .Procurement Cycle: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. purchase orders.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. and vendor payment Identify the integration points with Financials. and Project Systems Identify the reporting and analysis tools used in Procurement  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-3 Visit: www.sapeducation. you will be able to: Identify the organizational levels and master data that support the procurement process Perform the procurement cycle for stock and consumable materials including purchase requisitions. goods receipt. Plant Maintenance. Production Planning. invoice receipt.

you will identify the steps in the SAP Procurement cycle. Accounts Payable personnel enter the vendor’s invoice which creates a vendor open item.co. This open item is then closed during payment processing.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Procurement Cycle: Business Scenario In your enterprise employees purchase both stock and non-stock materials. Vendors deliver the materials to your plant locations. Warehouse personnel receive the material using good receipts transactions. As a project team member.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-4 Visit: www.com .sapeducation.

com .Organization Levels and Master Data: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. you will be able to: Identify the organizational levels and master data that support the Procurement Cycle  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-5 Visit: www.sapeducation.

key for a buyer or a group of buyers.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.units that allow the differentiation of material stocks within a plant Purchasing organization . The Procurement process uses the following organizational elements: Company code . who is/are responsible for certain purchasing activities. Pricing conditions are set at the purchasing organization level.an organizational element within a company. or makes goods available for distribution.represents an independent accounting unit. renders services. required by law. Balance sheets and Profit & Loss Statements. This cannot be assigned to a purchasing organization. You can design your company structure based on your business processes. are created at the company code level.Organizational Elements in Procurement Client Company code Plant Storage location Purchasing organization/ purchasing group  SAP AG 2004 Organizational Elements are structures that represent the legal and/or organizational views of an enterprise. A plant can be a manufacturing facility or a warehouse distribution center Storage location .unit structured to negotiate the general conditions of purchase for one or more plants or companies. © SAP AG TERP10 8-6 Visit: www.com . Plant .sapeducation. Purchasing group . A plant produces goods.co.

and storage location.com . 0003  SAP AG 2004 The client is uniquely defined in the system by a three-digit alphanumeric key. A unique four-digit alphanumeric key in the client defines the organizational levels company code. loc. Stor. loc. 0002 Stor. For example. 0002 Stor. a plant is always assigned to one company code.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 002 0001 Stor.Organizational Levels in Inventory Management Client 400 Company code 0001 Company code 0002 Plant 1000 Plant 1100 Plant 2000 Stor. loc. 0001 Stor. but in mySAP ERP. loc. loc. loc.co. Organizational structures are assigned uniquely. plant. several plants may be affiliated with one company code. © SAP AG TERP10 8-7 Visit: www.

com . cross-plant.sapeducation. A purchasing group is the key for a buyer or group of buyers responsible for certain purchasing activities. and cross-company-code Purchasing. It is legally responsible for completing purchasing contracts.co. © SAP AG TERP10 8-8 Visit: www.Purchasing Organization/Group Purchasing Organization A purchasing organization is an organizational level that negotiates conditions of purchase with vendors for one or more plants or companies.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. This means that you can determine whether Purchasing is organized centrally or de-centrally in your company.  SAP AG 2004 The purchasing organization is responsible for the enterprise’s purchasing requirements. You can incorporate Purchasing into the company structure by assigning the purchasing organization to company codes and plants. You can distinguish between plant-specific.

a purchasing organization is responsible for procuring materials for only one plant.com .Plant-Specific Purchasing Organization Purchasing organization A Purchasing organization B Company code Plant 1000 Plant 1100  SAP AG 2004 In plant-specific procurement. © SAP AG TERP10 8-9 Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Cross-Plant Purchasing Organization Purchasing organization 1000 Company code Plant 1000 Plant 1100  SAP AG 2004 You can set up a cross-plant purchasing organization for each company code.com . This purchasing organization procures material and services for all plants belonging to the company code.co.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 8-10 Visit: www.

sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 8-11 Visit: www. you cannot assign a company code to the purchasing organization in Customizing.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . the system will ask you to enter the company code for which you want to procure the material. When you create a purchase order.Cross-Company-Code Purchasing Organization Purchasing organization C100 Plant 1000 Plant 2000 Plant 3000 Company code 1000  SAP AG 2004 Company code 2000 Company code 3000 If you want to organize Purchasing on a cross-company-code basis. for example.

The material master is subdivided into information grouped by user departments (functions).Material Master Data Basic Data Purchasing MRP Sales Stocks in plant/ storage location Account Financial Accounting Material master record Work scheduling Quality management Storage Forecasting Warehouse management Classification  SAP AG 2004 The material master record is the main source of material-specific data in an enterprise.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Every area. and invoice verification can use the data stored. materials planning.co.sapeducation. Each user department has a different View of the material master record and is responsible for maintaining the data to support their function. for example: Purchasing data for ordering Inventory management data for posting goods movements and managing physical inventory Accounting data for material valuation upon goods movements or in invoice verification Materials planning data for material requirements planning The data maintained within a view may be valid for more than one organizational level © SAP AG TERP10 8-12 Visit: www. The integration of all material data in a single database object prevents the problem of data redundancy. such as purchasing. inventory management.com . It is used by all Logistic modules.

vendor sub-range). The vendor master record is therefore maintained by Accounting and Purchasing. Purchasing also maintains data at corporate group level.Vendor Master Data General data Address. You can use the authorization concept to define how data maintenance should be organized in the vendor master record. Data in the vendor master record is structured by organizational considerations: General data is valid for the whole corporate group (client). Often. the vendor is regarded as the company’s crediting business partner. This includes the vendor communication data. address data.co. communication. for example. Purchasing data on the vendor is managed separately for each purchasing organization. for example. Each user department can maintain general data centrally or decentrally. payment conditions.sapeducation. control data Bank information Company code data Account information Payment transactions Correspondence Withholding tax Vendor master record Purchasing organization data Purchasing data Partner roles  SAP AG 2004 The vendor master record contains information about a vendor from a Purchasing and Accounting perspective. There are other levels for purchasing data.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. as well as Purchasing and Accounting-specific data. for example. Accounting data is stored at company code level (company) and with the general data. General data is also relevant to Purchasing.com . © SAP AG TERP10 8-13 Visit: www. In Accounting. but which are optional (plant.

then the supplier of goods. By maintaining partner roles in the vendor master record. © SAP AG TERP10 8-14 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Partner Roles Order recipient Invoicing party Vendor Supplier of goods  SAP AG 2004 Forwarder/carrier The vendor can have various functions in its interaction with your company. For example. during the procurement transaction the vendor is the order recipient.com .co. the payee. you can distribute one or more of these roles to different vendor master records.sapeducation. the invoicing party. and finally.

address). you can no longer place purchase orders with this vendor. The system prompts you to maintain the data (for example. you can use an existing vendor as a reference. The control data is adopted from the reference. You can block the vendor master record (for example.Creating a Vendor Master Record with Reference Reference Address data Control data X Copy Blank Control data  SAP AG 2004 To help you create a vendor master record.co. for vendors who deliver products of poor quality).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Once the blocking indicator has been set. but you can overwrite it.com .sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 8-15 Visit: www.

co.sapeducation.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.One-time Vendor Account group Onetime X Vendor master record Description Language Reconciliation act Currency Purchase order Vendor Address Invoice Verification Bank details ? ?  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-16 Visit: www.

.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can store and maintain the following data in info records: current and future prices and conditions (for example. time: 4 days .. the system displays data maintained in info records as default values. freight and discounts) delivery data (for example. © SAP AG TERP10 8-17 Visit: www.Purchasing Info Records Info record 5300000816 Vendor: Material: PurchOrg: 1234 A21 1000 Vendor 1234 Material A21 Planned deliv.sapeducation. allowing them to find out at any time which vendors offer a particular material or which materials can be procured from a particular vendor. Purchasing info records are an important source of information for buyers. Conditions Price/UoM Freight Discount 6 EUR/CS 2% 4% Last purchase order 4500006398  SAP AG 2004 Purchasing info records contain concise information on a vendor and the material you procure from this vendor.co.com . planned delivery time and tolerances) vendor data Texts When you create purchasing documents (for example. Purchasing Info records can be referenced in the planning process to predetermine vendor specific information. purchase orders or contracts).

Conditions Quotation Purchase order Conditions Key PB00 FRA1 RA00 ZOB1 Description Gross price Freight Discount from net Abs.0% 8. you can use extended conditions to define vendor discounts or include discounts for a material type. customs duty Amount 10 EUR 5. Conditions in a purchasing info record apply to all purchase order items that contain the material and vendor contained in the purchasing info record. or if certain criteria in extended conditions apply.sapeducation.co.0% 3 EUR Info record Outline Agreement Conditions 400/t Discount 40/t  SAP AG 2004 Conditions are used in purchase orders to determine price. the system automatically includes the conditions in the purchase order. They therefore influence its effective price. The following types of conditions are used in Purchasing: Conditions in a contract apply to all contract release orders created with reference to this contract.com . Extended conditions are only included in the purchase order if it meets certain criteria.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. When you create a purchase order with reference to a contract or purchasing info record. For example. Extended conditions are more flexible than conditions in info records or contracts in that you can define which criteria must be met if the conditions are to apply to purchase orders. © SAP AG TERP10 8-18 Visit: www.

co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Organization Levels and Master Data: Topic Summary You are now able to: Identify the organizational levels and master data that support the procurement process  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-19 Visit: www.sapeducation.

purchase orders. invoice receipt. goods receipt.Procurement Cycle: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. and Project Systems  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-20 Visit: www.sapeducation. you will be able to: Perform the procurement cycle for stock and consumable materials including purchase requisitions.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Production Planning. and vendor payment Identify the integration points with Financials.co. Plant Maintenance.

Invoice Verification: Vendor invoices are checked for accuracy of prices and contents. By comparing quotations. Payment processing: Financial Accounting normally deals with vendor payments. Pur. determine whether goods or an invoice have been received for the corresponding purchase order item. The buyer can. the most favorable vendor. Purchase order processing: When you enter purchase orders. Goods receipt: The system compares the goods receipt quantity with the purchase order quantity. Purchase order monitoring: The buyer can monitor the processing status of the purchase order at any time online. then MRP will automatically generates a purchase requisition. © SAP AG TERP10 8-21 Visit: www. Determination of the source of supply: mySAP ERP supports the buyer responsible in many different ways when determining sources of supply. for example. for example. Vendor selection: The system supports you during vendor selection by comparing the prices of the different quotations. you can establish.co. The system also supports dunning procedures. the system helps you with the entries. via a purchase requisition. order monitoring order Vendor selection Order processing  SAP AG 2004 The external procurement process is structured in the following way: Determination of requirements: The user department responsible can pass a requirement for materials to the Purchasing department manually. You can send rejection letters automatically.sapeducation.com . You can use determination of the source of supply to create requests for quotation (RFQs) and then to enter the quotations.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Procurement Environment Request Payment processing Reqmt determination Invoice verification Determination of source of supply Goods receipt Purch. If you have set a MRP procedure for a material in the material master.

When you create a purchase requisition for materials that have a material master record. Purchasing converts the purchase requisition into a request for quotation (RFQ) or purchase order. the R/3 System supports you when you enter data by transferring data in the material master record into the purchase requisition.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 8-22 Visit: www.co.Purchase Requisitions Purchasing RFQ manual automatic Purchase requisition SCM (APO) Outline Agreement SRM (EBP) Master data Purchase order  SAP AG 2004 Purchase requisitions are internal documents you use to request your Purchasing department to procure a particular quantity of a material or a service for a particular date.com . Purchase requisitions are either created manually by the department responsible or automatically by MRP.

Req.sapeducation. You can enter a valid info record or outline agreement in the purchase requisition. Vendor ABC 30 Process assignment Purchase order 10 20 30 manual automatic manual automatic  SAP AG 2004 The buyer responsible normally converts the purchase requisitions into purchase orders.com . the buyer has to define the source of supply. © SAP AG TERP10 8-23 Visit: www.Converting Purchase Requisitions Purchase req. You have the following options: If you have not yet entered a valid source of supply for the relevant material-vendor relationship in the system. Assign source 10 Src of sup. 10 20 30 Purchase order With reference to template 10 20 30 Purchase req.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The purchase requisition is then converted into a purchase order manually by the buyer responsible or automatically by the system. 10 20 30 Purch. You can make reference to the purchase requisition on the initial screen as well as on the item overview for purchase order entry. Before converting the purchase requisition to a purchase order.co. you can create the purchase order with reference to the purchase requisition.

In the case of consumable material with a master record: There is no value-based inventory management Consumption is automatically updated in the material master record  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-24 Visit: www.Consumable Material Consumable materials are materials or services that are procured directly for an account assignment object.com .co. Examples of consumable materials: Office supplies: assigned to a cost center Computer systems: assigned to an asset A material master record is not necessary.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

com . . © SAP AG TERP10 8-25 Visit: www. Account assignment category  SAP AG 2004 Consumable materials debit different account assignment objects depending on the account assignment category specified. . The account assignment category determines which category of account assignment is to be debited and which account assignment data you have to prepare. .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. . order C: Sales order . .Account Assignment Objects A: Asset K: Cost center Purchasing document 10 20 30 Assignment to P: Project F: Prod. .

co. The standard configuration contains the following consumable materials with material master record: .Material Type Non-valuated material (UNBW): Quantity is updated. master record with mat. cost center. manual Entry by user necessary Data from material master record Stock account Consumption acc. master record Account assignment Account assgt.sapeducation.Material Type Non-stock material (NLAG): Quantity and value are not updated . as well as the account assignment category: short text (description) material group order unit When you create a purchase order with account assignment. Depending on the account assignment category.Procurement for Consumption Stock material with mat. but value is not.com . master record Consumable material without mat. Consumable materials with a material master record must have an account assignment.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. automatic with acct assgt cat. Account assgt.  SAP AG 2004 When procuring consumable materials that do not have a material master record.. depending on the account assignment category. asset . Enter account assignment cat. the system can use automatic account determination to suggest a G/L account number for the consumption account. you have to enter a cost center or asset number. you have to enter the following. © SAP AG TERP10 8-26 Visit: www..

Note: You can find more information about stock transport orders in the Materials Management documentation on the topic of Inventory Management: Special stocks and special forms of procurement in Materials Management.. you can take into account the associated freight costs in the purchase order.co. With a stock transport order..com . If you have maintained a material master for a certain material. © SAP AG TERP10 8-27 Visit: www. a request for quotation or another purchase order. among other things..sapeducation. When you enter the purchase order data.  SAP AG 2004 A purchase order is a formal request to a vendor to supply certain goods or services under the stated conditions. For example. a default price is copied to the purchase order.Purchase Order Header data Document number Terms of payment Purchase order date Vendor Currency . the material short text or the material groups. the ordering addresses. The purchase order is either sent to a vendor or you carry out a stock transport order in another plant belonging to your company or group. Purchase orders can be created without reference. or with reference to a purchase requisition.. If a purchasing info record already exists in the system. the system suggests values to use. are suggested for you. Purchase order 10 20 30 Item: 10 Item: 20 Item: 30 Material number Short text Order quantity Delivery date PO price . as well as the terms of payment and freight (Incoterms) are suggested from the vendor master record.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

In the purchase order. you can determine whether there are goods receipts or incoming invoices for an item.co. For each purchase order item. Goods Receipt and Invoice Verification are normally carried out based on the purchase order. by creating purchase order items with reference to an existing purchase requisition.sapeducation. you can also enter a purchase order without reference to preceding documents in the system.com . you further define whether the material is delivered for stock or direct consumption (for example. you have the option of determining the current processing status. You can minimize the work involved in entering data. If you do not know the vendor when you create a purchase order. © SAP AG TERP10 8-28 Visit: www. From the purchase order history screen you can display the subsequent documents (material document and invoice document). asset or project). The system suggests possible vendors to you on the basis of the defined sources of supply (outline agreements. quota arrangements). info records. For example. cost center. source list entries.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you can use source determination.Purchase Order Processing Purchasing No reference Purchase order Purchase request Quotation Contract Master data Purchase order Vendor Other plant  SAP AG 2004 The purchase order is a formal request to a vendor to supply you with goods or services at the conditions stated in the purchase order. RFQ or purchase order. Of course.

The vendor sends your company the material invoice. A liability only arises when material is withdrawn from consignment stock.Item Category Item Categories PReq RFQ n to e en t typ nd e n pe De cum do the Standard B K L M S T U W D Limit Consignment Subcontracting Material unknown Third-party Text Stock transfer Material group Services PO Outline Agreement  SAP AG 2004 The item category defines the process used to procure a material or service. not when the stock is placed in the consignment stores. Third-party order: You order material from a vendor with the instruction that the vendor should deliver the goods direct to a third party (a customer. Subcontracting: The finished product is ordered from a vendor. © SAP AG TERP10 8-29 Visit: www. which you then manage as consignment stock. Note: Subcontracting. The components that the vendor needs to manufacture the finished product are entered as “material to be provided” items. Consignment: The vendor makes material available. the item categories already defined include: Standard: You use this item category for materials that are procured externally. consignment.sapeducation. stock transfer orders and third-party orders are covered in the Materials Management documentation on Inventory Management: Special Stocks and Special Forms of Procurement in Materials Management. In the standard system.com . Stock transport orders: The material is transferred from one plant to another.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example).

You can also include and issue standard texts. Item texts describe a purchase order item more precisely. purchase order changes and order acknowledgements as messages. © SAP AG TERP10 8-30 Visit: www.line Expediter/ reminder Rejection Order acknowledgement expediter  SAP AG 2004 You can issue purchase orders. fax machine or EDI.sapeducation. You can set which header texts and item-based texts the system issues. Output Printer EDI E-mail Fax Printout SA sched. Note: You will find more detailed information about purchasing document output in the Materials Management documentation on Purchasing: Entering Texts.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example.co. The header text is printed at the start of the purchase order and contains generally applicable information. Output can be via a printer.com . Print Functions and Information Transmission.Issuing Messages Purchasing doc.

 SAP AG 2004 Posting a goods receipt to stock with reference to a purchase order has a number of advantages for you. a material document is created that contains information such as the material delivered and the quantity delivered.Goods Receipt Purchase order Deliv. This makes it easier to enter the goods receipt and check overdeliveries and underdeliveries when goods arrive. at least one accounting document is created which records the effects the material movement has on the value of the stock. including: The goods receiving department can check whether the goods delivered are what was actually ordered. When a goods receipt to the warehouse is posted. for GR Ext. In transactions relevant for material valuation. note GR area Material doc. The storage location in which you place the material into stock in the associated plant is also recorded.co.sapeducation.com . The system suggests data in the purchase order when you enter the goods receipt (for example material ordered. © SAP AG TERP10 8-31 Visit: www. The Purchasing department can send a reminder about late deliveries. quantity).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The purchase order is automatically updated with the delivery. vendor or other plant Accounting doc.

Examples of these goods movements are goods receipts.com . the movement type determines. Together with other influencing factors. which stock or consumption accounts are updated in Financial Accounting. The movement type also determines the structure of the screen when you enter documents and the updating of the quantity fields. The movement type takes over important control functions in Inventory Management. It plays a central role in automatic account determination. goods issues or transfer postings. among other things.sapeducation.Movement Types Goods receipt into warehouse/stores 101 122 Return delivery to vendor  SAP AG 2004 The movement type is a three-digit key to differentiate between goods movements in the R/3 System. © SAP AG TERP10 8-32 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

The material and accounting documents are independent documents. The document header contains generally applicable data. The company code in which the accounting document is posted is taken from the plant in which the goods movement takes place.Material and Accounting Documents Material document Document header Material doc.  SAP AG 2004 The material document consists of a document header and at least one item. The accounting document can be clearly identified by the company code. © SAP AG TERP10 8-33 Visit: www. Paint 002 25 PC Alu. 2001 LS-1147 EUR Document items Quantity Material Plant MvT 101 101 1000 001 10 L. The accounting document records the effects of material movements on the accounts.co. The G/L account numbers and the associated amount posted are recorded at item level. accounting document number and fiscal year.. such as the document date.. and document currency.sapeducation. Date Reference Currency 5000000642 June 4. Stock GR/IR account EUR 75+ 75- The material and accounting document for a goods movement are created simultaneously. posting period. Date Delivery note 500000757 June 4. profile 1000 Document items Account Short text 1 2 3 300010 191100 .com . 2001 LS-1147 Accounting document Document header Accounting doc. The header information includes the posting date and the name of the creator. You can identify the material document by the material document number and the material document year.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Which quantity of which material is posted to which storage location of the associated plant is recorded at item level. posting date.

© SAP AG TERP10 8-34 Visit: www. for example.Effects of a Goods Receipt Purchase Update PO and PO history order Material master Update stock and value Notification of goods receipt (optional) GR slip Hard copy (optional) Accounting doc. the goods receipt slip or a pallet label. Material doc.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. other areas are affected by the Goods Receipt: Purchasing – the Purchase Order History is updated Quality Management (if active) – an Inspection Lot is created Warehouse Management (if active) – a Transfer Requirement is created along with the goods being placed into the warehouse. Entry of goods receipt Account Movement documentation Update stock and consumption accounts Transfer requirement for warehouse management (if active) Warehouse Management Quality Management Creation of an inspection lot to trigger a quality inspection  SAP AG 2004 In addition to the Material (quantity) and Accounting (value) Documents being created. Output may be generated.com .sapeducation.co.

com . In Customizing for Inventory management.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. which differ in the way the stock types are listed and in the order of the stock types. But you can call up additional information functions via the menu bar. However. plant.Stock Overview Client 400 4600 pieces Client + Company code + Plant + Storage location CoCode 2000 2500 pieces CoCode 1000 2100 pieces Plant 1000 1200 pieces Plant 1100 900 pieces SLoc 0001 300 pieces SLoc 0002 600 pieces  SAP AG 2004 In the stock overview. This means that you can only view the current stock situation. you can display material stocks for each organizational level. There are several display versions for stock overviews. company code. you cannot see future planned goods receipts and goods issues in this list. the system administrator defines which stocks are displayed in each column and the order in which they are displayed.co. The stock overview is a static display of stocks. consignment material) as well as for client. You can display the stock overview for batches/valuation type and special stocks (for example.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 8-35 Visit: www. and storage location. Quantities posted for a particular stock type are totaled for each organizational unit. You can view firm stock commitments on the stock overview screen.

quantity still to be invoiced. the procurement process is completed by Invoice Verification. the system suggests data from the purchase order and the goods receipts for the purchase order. terms of payment and so on. When you enter an invoice with reference to a purchase order. the system warns the user and blocks the invoice for payment. for example. vendor. Posting the invoice completes the process of Invoice Verification.com . Therefore. material. If there are variances between the purchase order or goods receipt and the invoice.Invoice Processing Material document Invoice Invoice verification Purchase order Invoice document Accounting document Master data  SAP AG 2004 In Materials Management. However. The purchase order history is updated and Financial Accounting can pay the open invoice item. the appropriate information for these tasks is passed on to other departments.co. There.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. if necessary.sapeducation. payment and evaluation of invoices is not part of Invoice Verification. invoices and credit memos are entered and checked for accuracy of the contents and prices. © SAP AG TERP10 8-36 Visit: www. Invoice Verification creates a link between Materials Management and external or internal accounting.

With purchase-order-based Invoice Verification.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Purchase order Item: 1 2 3 Invoice Item: Delivery note number 1 2 3 ? Bill of lading number  SAP AG 2004 Invoice items can be posted with reference to a goods receipt. irrespective of whether there have been partial deliveries. you can settle all items. you use the goods receipts as the basis of the invoice entry. a purchase order or a delivery note.co. an open item is credited on the vendor account. When an invoice is posted. The postings are automatically made to the corresponding G/L accounts. With goods-receipt-based Invoice Verification. You must set this type of Invoice Verification in the purchase order.com . Invoices for quantities greater than the goods receipt quantity cannot be posted. © SAP AG TERP10 8-37 Visit: www.Types of Invoice Verification Purchase order no.sapeducation.

Since a provision has already been created for this liability in a GR/IR clearing account at the time of goods receipt. If the invoice price differs from the purchase order price. the stock value and the current moving average price is recalculated and updated in the material master.sapeducation. When you post an invoice. an accounting document is created.com . The individual items are posted to the corresponding accounts. The individual items are posted to the corresponding accounts. The provisions in the GR/IR clearing account are reversed.co. The invoice document is entered in the purchase order history.Effects of Invoice Verification Invoice (for purchase order) A XX Post B XX When you post an invoice. an accounting document is created. Price Variance Material master Moving average price Value Purchase order history Goods receipts Down-payments Invoices Document no. the invoice receipt now clears this. © SAP AG TERP10 8-38 Visit: www. 51000123 Vendor 100 GR/IR 100 +  SAP AG 2004 Invoice receipt creates a liability towards the vendor. The offsetting entry is made to the vendor account and creates an open item there. for a material valuated with moving average price.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 8-39 Visit: www. The standard system contains common payment methods and corresponding forms that have been defined separately for each country.sapeducation.Elements of the Payment Transaction Select payment method and bank Select items for payment Calculate the payment amount. taking account of cash discount periods Cash 10 Vendor 10 10 Post the payment document Print payment medium Manual Automatic  SAP AG 2004 All payment transactions include the elements shown on the slide.com . A payment transaction can be carried out either manually via A/P document entry outgoing payments… or automatically by means of the payment program.

informing them of the rejection. This takes the pressure off of the purchasing department. The system then notifies the vendor or service provider via e-mail. If the manager rejects the document. The vendor receives the purchase order.co. or enter the requirement directly on the entry screen and transfer this to the shopping cart.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. When an order is placed. © SAP AG TERP10 8-40 Visit: www. Employees check the documents that the business partner created (invoice or confirmation) and release the document. Employees can then process the requirement coverage request directly from the work item. Employees can hold the requirements or order them.com .‘Classic’ E-Procurement Scenario Employee Browse through online catalogs Create shopping cart Place order or save cart Check status Manager Approve or reject requirement coverage request Employee Receive product Check invoice Vendor Receive purchase order Confirm goods delivery or service performed Create invoice Execution  SAP AG 2004 Buying Company employees are responsible for the procurement of the goods and services that they need for their work area.sapeducation. the system starts a workflow and places the confirmation in the employees’ inbox for their approval. If the document contains errors. who in turn can concentrate on strategic tasks. employees receive a work item in their inbox. such as contractual negotiation. Employees either search in a catalog for a suitable material or service. After the goods are delivered or the service is performed. If business partners enter the confirmation. the Enterprise Buyer system checks whether the shopping cart or requirement coverage request needs to be approved. employees can also reject it. employees can confirm this.

If the requester creates a shopping cart in which the data is incomplete. © SAP AG TERP10 8-41 Visit: www. the vendor is missing for an item. for managers.com . Purchasers can also shop on behalf of other users. Purchasers can only display contracts. Purchasers are also responsible for processing of shopping carts with value limit and for the purchasing data in the business partner master records. Purchasers can define templates for recurring procurement processes that employees can then use when creating shopping carts.Enterprise Buyer Offers More. The strategic purchaser is responsible for strategic procurement tasks. They can complete the data and send the purchase order to the vendor.co. Enterprise Buyer is integrated with the Business Information Warehouse (BW) to provide sophisticated reporting. The strategic purchaser compiles vendor lists. The Business Information Warehouse is used for both operational and strategic analysis. purchasers receive the incomplete purchase order in their worklist. for example..sapeducation.. and comparing received bids belongs to this work area. Analysis Business-warehouse-based enterprise reporting Negotiate Contracts Operational Procurement Complete Purchase orders Sourcing Strategic Purchaser Process Contracts Process Bid Invitations Operational Purchaser Process purchase Orders One-Step Buying over Exchanges Integration Exchanges Strategic Procurement  SAP AG 2004 Operational purchasers are responsible for processing and issuing purchase orders in the Enterprise Buyer system. for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Purchasers have reporting tools at their disposal with which they can analyze shopping carts per cost center or product locally. Creating public and restricted bid invitations. The strategic purchaser is responsible for the creation of contracts and for the purchasing data in the business partner master records.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. a work item is sent to the Inbox of the relevant approver. If it is required. e-mail. the necessary purchase requisitions. a workflow is triggered that checks whether approval is necessary. purchase orders or reservations are created for the shopping cart. fax Confirmation Goods Receipt Invoice Invoice Global Business Partner Product Master  SAP AG 2004 You implement Enterprise Buyer and one or more Backend systems (SAP or Non-SAP). All Materials Management is mapped in the ERP system. When the shopping cart is ordered. and in which Backend system. service entry sheets.sapeducation.co.com . If it is not required. Which documents are created. goods receipts.‘Classic’ Scenario Enterprise Buyer R/3-Backend or Non-SAP Backend Purchase Requisition Shopping cart created Workflow approval Purchase Order Message to vendor XML. and invoices) exist in the Backend system. depends on the information in the shopping cart and on the settings in Customizing for Enterprise Buyer. © SAP AG TERP10 8-42 Visit: www. All materials management documents (such as purchase orders.

The vendor master record represents the creditor account in Finance.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. it can be directly assigned to a sales order. a requirement that has arisen in the Sales area can be passed on to Purchasing. when a requisition is created. Integration in Sales and Distribution Within the framework of materials planning and control. WMS handles and monitors storage. Integration in Production Planning Materials Management is closely linked to Production Planning through inventory needs. As soon as you enter a sales order. In addition. Information on each vendor is stored in a vendor master record that contains both accounting and procurement information. Integration in Plant Maintenance Materials Management and Plant Maintenance are linked by Bills of Materials. It is possible to post a good receipt with reference to an equipment BOM. Serial numbers are activated in Materials Management but used within the Plant Maintenance system.sapeducation.Materials Management Integration SAP Materials Management Financial Accounting Human Capital Management Manufacturing Management Accounting Sales Order Management Plant Maintenance Production Planning  SAP AG 2004 Integration in Financial Accounting Purchasing maintains data on the vendors that are defined in the system jointly with Finance. Inventory management is responsible for staging of components required for production. which manages storage bins in complex warehouse structures. It is also possible to withdraw part for maintenance orders. While Inventory Management manages the stock quantity and value.co. © SAP AG TERP10 8-43 Visit: www. you can initiate a dynamic availability check of on hand stock. Integration in Logistics The inventory management system can be extended by the Warehouse Management System (WMS).

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. goods receipt. Production Planning.com .Procurement Cycle: Topic Summary You are now able to: Perform the procurement cycle for stock and consumable materials including purchase requisitions.sapeducation.co. and vendor payment Identify the integration points with Financials. purchase orders. Plant Maintenance. and Project Systems  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-44 Visit: www. invoice receipt.

com .sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Reporting: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.co. you will be able to: Identify the reporting and analysis tools used in Procurement  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-45 Visit: www.

co. You can use Standard Analysis to analyze the information contained in the documents. The analyses in the system provide you with a quick and convenient overview.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 8-46 Visit: www.sapeducation. as well as for documents. For example.… Standard reports  SAP AG 2004 In Purchasing. As the employee responsible in Purchasing.com . vendor. you can output a list of all purchasing info records for a material or vendor. based on particular criteria. The System updates these documents and stores them in database tables. you want to obtain an overview of your vendors and purchasing organizations. or you can obtain an overview of the material master records in your enterprise.Standard Reporting Purchase order GR doc Invoice doc. info records. For example. you enter a variety of documents. you want know: which purchase orders were effected at a particular vendor for a particular period the number of purchase orders for which you have already received goods whether a vendor delivered the complete quantity or only a partial quantity whether a vendor keeps to his or her delivery dates whether a goods receipt and invoice receipt are correct the average value of each purchase order for a purchasing organization or group You can also carry out analyses for master data. Document entry Document database List Master data Material. enabling you to act accordingly.

g.com .sapeducation.2001 25000 20000 03.) and make selections. vendor. You can use the standard transactions in the application to display the complete master record or document information from the various drill-down levels of the list. freq curve Correlation Time series Drilldown by vendor Purchasing Group Analysis Purchasing group Meyer Schmidt Order value 100000 200000 Invoice amount 90000 195000 Purchasing group: Meyer Drilldown by period Vendor Order value Invoice amount Schulz AG 60000 50000 Berger AG 40000 40000 Additional information Master data Documents Info jump Purchasing group: Meyer Vendor: Schulz AG Month Order value Invoice amount 02. material group. All the functions for statistical analyses are graphically supported. Cum. A wide range of functions can be used to individually examine the key figures and characteristic values on which the analysis is based from a business perspective. The data basis for a standard analysis is established when you determine an object to analyze (e. Each analysis can be archived.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. This data is then organized and can be displayed in an initial list and a variety of drill-down lists.2001 35000 30000  SAP AG 2004 Standard analyses provide a wide range of functions for creating presentations and analyses for the data basis in the LIS. etc.Reporting in Standard Analyses Functions ABC analysis Classification Segmentation Plan/actual comp. © SAP AG TERP10 8-47 Visit: www. purchasing group.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.com .co.Reporting: Topic Summary You are now able to: Identify the reporting and analysis tools used in Procurement  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-48 Visit: www.

co.Procurement Cycle: Unit Summary You are now able to: Identify the organizational levels and master data that support the procurement process Perform the procurement cycle for stock and consumable materials including purchase requisitions. and Project Systems Identify the reporting and analysis tools used in Procurement  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 8-49 Visit: www.com . purchase orders. invoice receipt. Production Planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and vendor payment Identify the integration points with Financial Accounting. Plant Maintenance.sapeducation. Controlling. goods receipt.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In our enterprise.co. ______________________________________________________ 1-2-2 A plant is assigned to exactly one purchasing organization. ______________________________________________________ 1-2-3 A purchasing group is always responsible for only one purchasing organization.Procurement: Exercises Unit: Procurement Topic: Organizational Levels in the Procurement Process At the conclusion of this exercise. in the warehouse. and Invoice Verification are organized by regional and functional considerations. you will be able to: • List the organizational levels that are relevant to the procurement process. ______________________________________________________ 1-2-4 You use mainly plants to map the purchasing structure of your enterprise in the mySAP ERP System.sapeducation. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 1-1-2 Can a plant belong to more than one company code? ______________________________________________________ 1-1-3 Can you use the same storage location number in more than one plant? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 1-2 True or False 1-2-1 A purchasing organization can procure material or services for only one plant. the responsibilities of the departments in purchasing.com . ______________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 8-50 Visit: www. The project team is testing how it can map this enterprise structure using the relevant organizational levels. • Explain the relationship between these organizational levels. 1-1 Questions on Organizational Levels in the Procurement Process 1-1-1 List the organizational levels in that are relevant to the procurement process.

The company has entered a business relationship with a new vendor. you are responsible for maintaining the following views of the material master record in your enterprise: • Basic data 1 • Purchasing • Purchase order text • General Plant Data/Storage 1 • Accounting 1 Create the data for the material for the following organizational levels: • Plant: 1000 • Storage location: 0001 When you maintain the data screens. you have to create a new vendor master record. © SAP AG TERP10 8-51 Visit: www.sapeducation.e. material master maintenance is decentralized. i.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The project team is testing how it can manage this using the material master maintenance function. In our enterprise. using material number T-RA1##. you will be able to: After completing this topic. As a member of the purchasing department. 2-1 Create material master record Create a new material master record for the “Chromolux 2000” headlight.com . observe the following requirements.co. you will be able to: • Create a material master record • Create a vendor master record. Assign the headlight to the “mechanical engineering” industry sector and the material type “raw material” [ROH]. each user department is responsible for creating its own data for a material.Unit: Procurement Cycle Topic: Master Data At the conclusion of this exercise. To enable you to order from this vendor.

Purchasing data: Purchasing group 0## normally procures this headlight. The base unit of measure “piece” is used to manage stock of this material.Basic data 1: Enter “Chromolux 2000” in the material description. © SAP AG TERP10 8-52 Visit: www. Storage 1: The headlight is to be stored in storage location 0001 in storage bin BL-01.co.com . This is suggested from the vendor master record. you can define which language you want to use.sapeducation. Save your entries. Purchase order text: Enter the purchase order text you wish or adopt the text below: “The delivered material has to fulfill our technical specification MSI TSP no.0 KG. Under or overdeliveries are not accepted. The system adopts the material description and the purchase order text from the material master record and prints them on the purchase order document in the language chosen.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The headlight belongs to material group 003 (Bulbs). Enter the relevant purchasing value key in the field provided to address the requirements below: Urging letters about late goods receipts should be sent after 10. and 30 days.5 KG. Accounting 1: The material is assigned to the valuation class raw materials 1 and is valuated using the moving average price of 80 EUR. The net weight is 3. The gross weight of the headlight is 3. 73264. It takes 2 days to process goods receipts for this material.” When creating a purchase order. 20.

Use F4 input help to determine the number of the control account and enter this in the appropriate field. If we pay the invoice within 14 days. 2 % is deducted. (=_______________________________________) The freight and shipping conditions are FOB Philadelphia. The invoice has to be settled within 45 days.co.sapeducation. enter a contact person and telephone number for the vendor’s purchasing department. © SAP AG TERP10 8-53 Visit: www. and if we pay within 30 days. In this case. Use F4 input help to determine the relevant payment conditions. Maintain the incoterms accordingly. Purchasing data The purchase order currency used for the vendor is EUR. (Default values for address data) Title Company Name Fast Group## Vehicle parts Search term WB200-## Street 127 West Street Postal code 19116 City Philadelphia Country US Region PA Language EN Accounting Information (Accounting) The reconciliation account in G/L accounting has the description “Trade Payablesdomestic”.com . Assign it to account group LIEF. From the perspective of head office. the vendor grants us a discount of 3 %.2-2 Create vendor master record You know the Purchasing and Accounting data for a new vendor. Purchasing has agreed on different payment conditions from those of Accounting. In the field provided.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Payment transactions (Accounting) Check or bank transfer can carry out automatic payment transactions. Number of reconciliation account: _________________________________________ Enter A1 in the cash management group field. create a vendor master record T-L05B## for the organizational levels company code 1000 and purchasing organization 1000. there is no cash discount.

com . Enter the relevant payment conditions key on the Payment Transactions Accounting screen. Entry in field: __________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 8-54 Visit: www.co.sapeducation.2-3 Change vendor master record The payment conditions agreed by Purchasing are also valid for accounting transactions.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You have agreed with vendor T-L05B## that purchase requisitions can automatically be changed into purchase orders. Change the control data on the Purchasing screen of the vendor master record accordingly.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Currently..sapeducation. The goods delivered will be posted to the plant’s valuated stock material and a portion consumed by a designated cost center. These ten pieces should be consumed (expensed) to the appropriate department. only one vendor can supply the material. Your Engineering Dept. • Create a manual check to pay the open vendor’s invoice.com . A goods receipt is posted for the headlights that were ordered. • Use logistics invoice verification to post a vendor invoice and explain the effects on the purchase order.co. The Purchasing department will then convert the requisition into a purchase order.Unit: Procurement Topic: Basics of Stock Material Procurement At the conclusion of this exercise. separating the stock portion from the consumable portion. The invoiced items are checked against the purchase order and the goods receipt. • Post a vendor’s invoice. • List the most important effects of a goods receipt for a purchase order. • Create and process a purchase order. you will be able to: After completing these exercises you will be able to: • Create a Purchase Requisition for consumable and stock materials. 3-1 Create Purchase Requisition Create a Purchase Requisition for 100 pieces of material T-RA1##. The 100 pieces will be received as follows: 90 pieces will be placed into stock. 10 pieces will be expensed to Cost Center 1000. The company would like to procure the “Chromolux 2000” headlights for the first time for a pilot series. • Post a goods receipt for a purchase order. wants an additional ten pieces upon the first receipt. Some of the goods will be consumed upon receipt and some will be posted to stock. You enter the vendor invoice for the headlights in invoice verification. • Explain the document concept at goods receipt. The Research & Development department will create the purchase requisition for this new material. © SAP AG TERP10 8-55 Visit: www.

© SAP AG TERP10 8-56 Visit: www. Purchase order no: 3-3 Display purchase order Display the purchase order and answer the questions below. Status: To display the processing status of the message.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.3-2 Create purchase order with reference to purchase requisition You decide to purchase the material T-RA1## from vendor T-L05B## for 50. Create a purchase order with reference to this requisition for purchasing organization 1000 and plant 1000.com .00 EUR each.sapeducation. 3-4-1 Where is the purchase order text on the document printout? Header data Item data [] [] 3-4-2 Print the document. 3-3-1 Which user created the purchase order? Created by: ____________________________________________ 3-3-2 When was the purchase order created? Created on: _____________________________________________ 3-4 Display message Display a printout (message) of the purchase order on your screen. The header menu contains the entry “Messages. 3-5 Determine status of message processing Has the message for your purchase order already been printed? Display the status of the message. display the purchase order document again.” 3-6 Change purchase order You have found out that you now need 150 pieces of the material T-RA1## for the pilot series of your new motor bike. Change the purchase order accordingly (140 to stock & 10 to cost center). instead of the 100 you have ordered.

review the storage location stocks of material T-RA1## in storage location 0001 of plant 1000.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and the quantity still to be delivered for the purchase order item. Where do you find information about the changes you have made to the purchase order? Make a note of the menu path. Post the stock material for the purchase order into unrestricted-use stock in storage location 0001 in plant 1000. Ordered:_______________________________________________________________ Delivered: _____________________________________________________________ Still to be delivered: _____________________________________________________ 3-8 Display the Stock Overview for a material Prior to the goods receipt. Menu path: ____________________________________________________________ Determine the purchase order quantity. the delivered quantity. Make note of the material document number.com . Unrestricted-use: ________________________________________________________ In quality inspection:_____________________________________________________ 3-9 Post goods receipt The total quantity of the material you ordered is delivered. Material document number: _______________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 8-57 Visit: www. The consumable material will be consumed upon receipt.3-7 Display purchase order Display the purchase order document you have just changed. requiring no storage location.sapeducation.

we deliver the following materials: Item 10 Qty 150 UoM PC Material number T-RA1## Description Chromolux 2000 3-10 Display material document Display the material document for the goods receipt you have just posted. Which stock account was debited because of the goods receipt posting? Account number: ________________________________________________ With what value is the stock account posted? Amount: ______________________________________________________ Which account is offset for the stock posting? Account number: ________________________________________________ 3-10-2 Exit the Accounting Document and close the List of Accounting Documents dialog box. display the Stock Overview Report to determine the change in inventory. From the material document. 450000####.Delivery note Motolux Ltd.co. MA 02156 Delivery note number: Waltham.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. NY 10008 With reference to your purchase order No.sapeducation. 3-10-1 Branch from the material document to the accounting document. 3 Faraday Park Waltham. What is the quantity in Unrestricted Use? Unrestricted-use: _______________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 8-58 Visit: www. [Current date] 471100-## IDES New York plant 13 South Street New York.com .

Post the invoice document and make a note of the document number. Invoice document number: _____________________ Invoice Motolux Ltd.500. MA 02156 Invoice number: 100350-## IDES New York plant 13 South Street New York.co.sapeducation. 450000####. NY 10008 Waltham.3-10-3 View the purchase order history from within the material document. 3 Faraday Park Waltham.700. Use logistics invoice verification to enter this.00 EUR 7. Make sure you use the correct tax code when entering the invoice.00 EUR plus 16 % tax 1.200.00 EUR The agreed terms of payment apply © SAP AG TERP10 8-59 Visit: www. Is the material document for the goods receipt listed in the purchase order history? ______________________________________________________ 3-11 Enter vendor invoice The vendor sends you the following invoice for your purchase order.00 EUR 8.com . we are invoicing you for the following items: Item 10 Qty 150 PCs Material number Description T-RA1## Chromolux 2000 Price per unit Total value 50.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. [current date] With reference to your purchase order no.

com .sapeducation. been correctly cleared as a result of the invoice receipt? To which account is the input tax posted? Account no: __________________________________________________ Amount: ______________________________________________________ 3-12-2 Display the Purchase Order from the invoice verification document. Is the document number of the accounting document identical to that of the invoice verification document? Give reasons for your answer: ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ To which account are vendor liabilities posted? Account number: _________________________________________________ Amount: ______________________________________________________ Have the provisions on the GR/IR account. which resulted from the goods receipt. 3-12-1 Branch to the financial accounting document.3-12 Display invoice verification document Display the document created in invoice verification.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In what way has the purchase order history changed as a result of the invoice receipt? ______________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 8-60 Visit: www.co.

com . Write down the number of the payment document. The payment is to be made via house bank 1000.sapeducation. Enter LP01 as the printer. Use payment method C (pre-numbered checks) and check lot 0001.co. Post a manual outgoing payment with simultaneous check printing.3-13 Post a manual outgoing payment with check printing The vendor requires payment immediately. Instead of waiting for the weekly payment processing job. Calculate the payment amount. you decide to issue a manual check.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. __________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 8-61 Visit: www.

you will use reporting and analysis in the Logistics Information System to translate these requirements. Add these two key figures to the standard analysis.com .co. Choose the relevant characteristic display. Arrange the key figure “purchase orders” before the purchase order value and the key figure “deliveries” before the invoice value. you will be able to: • Carry out a purchasing group analysis in the LIS.Unit: Procurement Topic: Reporting At the conclusion of this exercise. PO value: ______________________________________________________ Purchase orders: ______________________________________________________ What amount has already been settled? Invoice amount: ______________________________________________________ 4-2 4-3 © SAP AG TERP10 8-62 Visit: www. Select the purchasing values for the last three months. Add key figures You want to obtain an overview of the number of purchase order items and the number of deliveries. IDES wants to have an overview of purchasing transactions at all times. The management board often requests purchasing analyses in order to plan for Purchasing.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. To do this. Change characteristic display You want to display the key for the characteristic. as well as the name of the purchasing group. it requires analyses of total purchase order value and purchase order quantity compared with goods receipt quantity and quantity settled. As a member of the procurement team. The project team wants to check the system’s ability to react quickly and appropriately to these requirements.sapeducation. 4-1 Analyze purchasing values for purchasing groups You want to use the Purchasing Information System to determine the scope of procurement of purchasing groups 001 to 018 for purchasing organization 1000. Make a note of the total purchase order value and the total number of purchase order items for your purchasing group (0##).

you then switch the drill-down to the vendor.co.Display vendors for purchasing group With which vendors have you effected purchase orders for purchasing group 0##? Make a note of the number of vendors and the total purchase order value.” Choose the percentage total of the purchase order value.com . View → Switch drill-down. Number: ______________________________________________________ PO value: ______________________________________________________ 4-5 Determine top 5 purchasing groups Which purchasing groups had the five highest purchase order values during the analysis period? Make a note of the total purchase order value of the five top purchasing groups. perform an ABC analysis for the value key “purchase order value.sapeducation. it is important that you know the selection criteria used in the analysis. and segment C is 10 %. You should therefore look at the selection log for purchasing group analysis. [X] Vendor 4-7 Display selection log To interpret the result of your analysis correctly. To do this. Segment A is 70 %.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. segment B is 20 %.. From the initial list. Which vendor has the highest purchase order value? Vendor: ______________________________________________________ Before you perform the ABC analysis. Study the complete list for the ABC analysis of purchase order value. What is the key and description of the info structure for this analysis? Info structure: __________________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 8-63 Visit: www. PO value: ______________________________________________________ 4-6 Perform ABC analysis Determine the most important vendors in terms of purchase order value for purchasing organization 1000 and purchasing groups 001 to 018. make sure you are in the initial list..

com . storage locations are completely independent organizational units with separate inventory management. 1-1-2 Can a plant belong to more than one company code? No. False © SAP AG TERP10 8-64 Visit: www. False 1-2-4 You use mainly plants to map the purchasing structure of your enterprise in the mySAP ERP System. plant. and purchasing organization.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. storage location. a plant is always assigned to only one company code. company code.Procurement: Solutions Unit: Procurement Topic: Organizational Levels in the Procurement Process 1-1 Questions on Organizational Levels in the Procurement Process 1-1-1 List the organizational levels in that are relevant to the procurement process. Client.sapeducation. False 1-2-2 A plant is assigned to exactly one purchasing organization. False 1-2-3 A purchasing group is always responsible for only one purchasing organization. 1-2 True or False 1-2-1 A purchasing organization can procure material or services for only one plant.co. despite having identical storage location numbers or names in the plants concerned. 1-1-3 Can you use the same storage location number in more than one plant? Yes.

sapeducation.5 Weight Unit KG Net weight 3 Select Enter to proceed to next selected screen for entry (Purchasing) Purchasing group 0## Purchasing value key 1 GR processing time 2 Review Warning Message and Select Enter to clear warning and proceed to next selected screen for entry © SAP AG TERP10 8-65 Visit: www.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .Unit: Procurement Topic: Master Data 2-1 Create material master record Create a new material master record for the headlight “Chromolux 2000”. using material number T-RA1##. Logistics → Materials Management → Material master Material → Create [general] → Immediately (Initial screen) Material T-RA1## Industry sector M Material type ROH (View selection) [X] Basic data 1 [X] Purchasing [X] Purchase order text [X] General Plant Data/Storage 1 (Organizational levels) Plant 1000 Storage location 0001 (Basic data 1) Description Chromolux 2000 Base unit of measure PC Material group 003 Gross weight 3.

sapeducation. 73264. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing Master data → Vendor → Central → Create © SAP AG TERP10 8-66 Visit: www.(Purchase order text) Language Long text EN Own entry or: “The delivered material has to fulfill our technical specifications MSI TSP no. From the perspective of head office. create a vendor master record T-L05B## for the organizational levels company code 1000 and purchasing organization 1000. (Storage 1) Storage bin BL-01 Select Enter to proceed to next selected screen for entry (Accounting 1) Valuation Class Price Control Moving Price Save Material Master 2-2 3000 Raw Materials 1 V 80 Create vendor master record You know the Purchasing and Accounting data for a new vendor.com .” Click in the item description field and Select Enter to proceed to next selected screen for entry. Assign it to account group LIEF. you will not automatically proceed to the next view.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Note: If your cursor is not in the description field.

(Initial screen) Vendor T-L05B## Company code 1000 Purchasing 1000 organization Account group LIEF (Address) Maintain the address data according to the exercise requirements or enter the address data you want. Title Company Name Fast Group## Vehicle parts Search term WB200-## Street 127 West Street Postal code 19116 City Philadelphia Country US Region PA Language EN Hit enter or select Next Screen icon (Control Screen) No Data Entry .co.sapeducation.com .Hit enter or select Next Screen icon (Payment Transactions Screen) No Data Entry .Hit enter or select Next Screen icon (Accounting Information: Accounting) Reconciliation account 160000 Cash Mgmnt group A1 Hit enter or select Next Screen icon (Payment transactions: Accounting) Payment methods SU (Select S and U from Payment Methods List) Hit enter or select Next Screen icon (Correspondence: Accounting) No Data Entry .Hit enter or select Next Screen icon (Purchasing data) PO currency EUR Terms of Payment ZB00 Incoterms FOB Philadelphia Salesperson Brenda Mansfield (default) Phone no.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Hit enter or select Next Screen icon Save Vendor Master © SAP AG TERP10 8-67 Visit: www. 610/592-8055 (default) Hit enter or select Next Screen icon(Partner Function) No Data Entry .

Organization 1000 [X] Payment transactions (company code data) [X] Purchasing data (Payment transactions: Accounting) Payment terms ZB00 (Purchasing data) [X] Save Vendor Master Automatic purchase order © SAP AG TERP10 8-68 Visit: www.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing Master data → Vendor → Central → Change (Initial) Vendor T-L05B## Company code 1000 Purch. Enter the relevant payment conditions key on the Payment Transactions Accounting screen. Change the control data on the Purchasing screen of the vendor master record accordingly.2-3 Change vendor master record The payment conditions agreed by Purchasing are also valid for accounting transactions.co. You have arranged with vendor T-L05B## that purchase requisitions can automatically be changed into purchase orders.

Select the Close pushbutton to turn this informational display off. (Initial screen) Order type NB Purchase Requisition (Header data) No Data Entry (Item overview) Item 10 Account Assignment Leave blank Category Material T-RA1## Quantity 90 Delivery date Current date + 1 month Plant 1000 Item 20 Account Assignment K Cost Center Category Material T-RA1## Quantity 10 Delivery date Current date + 1 month Plant 1000 (Item detail ) for item 20.Unit: Procurement Topic: Basics of Stock Material Procurement 3-1 Create Purchase Requisition Create a Purchase Requisition for 100 pieces of material T-RA1##. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing Purchase Requisition → Create The first time you access the Purchase Requisition Creation function the Enjoy SAP: Purchase Requisition Help will be displayed.sapeducation. The 100 pieces will be received as follows: 90 pieces will be placed into stock.com . do not change ) Cost Center 1000 Save the Purchase Requisition © SAP AG TERP10 8-69 Visit: www.co. 10 pieces will be expensed to Cost Center 1000. 400000 ( default.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. charged to cost center G/L Account no.

g) Select the requisition number created in exercise step 4-1. h) Click on the Adopt icon in the Document Overview. Select the Close pushbutton to turn this informational display off.com .co. Net Price T-L05B## 1000 50 j) Click on the Document Overview Off pushbutton to display only the purchase order data k) Save the Purchase Order and record the number assigned by the system in the exercise section of this step. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant known (Initial screen) The first time you access the Purchase Order Creation function the Enjoy SAP: Purchase Order Help will be displayed.3-2 Create purchase order with reference to purchase requisition You decide to buy the material T-RA1## from vendor T-L05B## for 50. © SAP AG TERP10 8-70 Visit: www. The steps to this process are: a) Select Document Overview On pushbutton b) Choose the Selection Variant List icon c) Choose Purchase Requisitions d) Enter the following values: Plant Material Document type 1000 T-RA1## NB (purchase requisition) e) Select Enter and then Execute the query lookup f) The purchase requisition number created in exercises step 4-1 will be displayed in the Document Overview Section. The requisition data is copied to the Purchase Order fields on the right side of the screen. In order to create your purchase order by copying an existing requisition the user will have to do a lookup from a user-defined screen variant. i) Now enter the required Purchasing data: Vendor Purchasing Org.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.00 EUR each. Create a purchase order with reference to the requisition purchasing organization 1000 and plant 1000.

e) Select the Document Overview Off pushbutton 3-3-1 Which user created the purchase order? Look at the Title Bar of the Screen to determine the user. 3-4 Display message Display a printout (message) of the purchase order on your screen. LP01 [Document number from previous exercise] [X] [Purchase order] Goto → Display message (Or [Display message] pushbutton) © SAP AG TERP10 8-71 Visit: www. 3-3-2 When was the purchase order created? Look at the Document Date next to the vendor name.com .sapeducation. The purchase order fields on the right side of the screen are populated with the selected purchase order’s data.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.3-3 Display purchase order Display the purchase order and answer the following questions. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Messages → Print/transmit Purchasing document Program → Execute (Or [Execute] symbol) Output Device Select Print Pushbutton.co. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Display To display your purchase order: a) Select the Document Overview On pushbutton b) Choose the Selction Variant List icon c) Choose My Purchase Orders d) Double Click on the Purchase Order Number displayed.

3-6 Change purchase order You have found out that you now need an additional 150 pieces of the material TRA1## for the pilot series of your new motor bike. LP01 [] [X] 3-5 Determine status of message processing Has the message for your purchase order already been printed? Display the status of the message. Edit → Output message (Or [Output message] symbol) Output Device Select Print Pushbutton. From the display of the printout.co.sapeducation. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Display (Initial screen) Purchase order PO number from the exercise 3-2 (Item overview) Goto → Messages The green light indicates that the message has been successfully processed. Select the purchase order number from this exercise.3-4-1 Where is the purchase order text on the document printout? Header data Item data 3-4-2 Print the document.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Save the Purchase Order © SAP AG TERP10 8-72 Visit: www. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Change Enter the purchase order number from previous exercise and make the quantity changes indicated above and in the quantity column. Change your purchase order accordingly (140 to stock & 10 to cost center). return to the Message Output screen. instead of the 100 you have ordered.com .

com . Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Display Where do you find information about the changes you have made to the purchase order? Make a note of the menu path. review the storage location stocks of material T-RA1## in storage location 0001 of plant 1000. Unrestricted-use: 0 In quality inspection: 0 T-RA1## 1000 © SAP AG TERP10 8-73 Visit: www. and the quantity still to be delivered for the purchase order items In the Items Detail section select the Delivery Schedule tab to display the delivery information for each product.sapeducation.3-7 Display purchase order Display the purchase order document you have just changed. Environment → Item Changes Now determine the purchase order quantity. enter the following data: Material Plant Select the Execute icon. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview On the Stock Overview: Company Code/Plant/Storage Location/Batch screen. Item 10 140 0 140 Item 20 10 0 10 Total 150 0 150 Scheduled Quantity Delivered Open Quantity .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the delivered quantity.co. 3-8 Display storage location stocks for a material Prior to the goods receipt.

Select Enter. At the top of the Goods Receipt transaction. select the OK indicator for both lines. change the transaction from Goods Receipt to Display.000. enter the following data: Document date Posting date Delivery note Current date Current date 471100-## In the Line item section. raw materials 1 With what value is the goods receipt valuated? Amount: 7. Remain in the Goods Receipt transaction for the following exercise.com . Close the Detail Data Section by selecting the Close Detail Data icon.00 EUR Which account is offset for the stock posting? © SAP AG TERP10 8-74 Visit: www. 3-10 Display material document Display the material document for the goods receipt you have just posted. The material document that you just created should default.3-9 Post goods receipt The total quantity of the material you ordered is delivered. In the Header Data Section. Record the material document assigned by the system. The materials from the purchase order are copied to the screen. Select the Doc.co. Post the total suggested quantity.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. info tab and then the FI Documents button. Which stock account was debited because of the goods receipt posting? Account number: 400000 Inventory. 3-10-1 Branch from the material document to the accounting document. Enter Storage Location 0001. Double click on the Accounting document.sapeducation. Post the goods receipt for the purchase order into unrestricted-use stock in storage location 0001 in plant 1000. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management Goods movement → Goods receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order (MIGO) Top of Screen: A01 Goods Receipt R01 Purchase Order Enter your PO# from Exercise 3-2 Select Enter. Observe the requirements on the delivery note and make a note of the material document number.

Select the History icon (scroll) Yes the material document is listed in the Purchase Order History.Account number: 191100 GR/IR clearing (external) 3-10-2 Exit the Accounting Document and close the List of Accounting Documents dialog box.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.700 Tax amount 1. Verify that your document is in balance. © SAP AG TERP10 8-75 Visit: www. Select the Where tab. 3-11 Enter vendor invoice The vendor sends you the following invoice for your purchase order. Unrestricted-use: 140 Exit the Stock Overview report to return to the Material Document Display. display the Stock Overview Report to determine the change in inventory.com . Post the invoice document and make a note of the document number. What is the quantity in Unrestricted Use? Select the Open Detail Data button.sapeducation. select the Stock Overview icon (mountain and sun). Use Logistics Invoice Verification to enter this.co. 3-10-3 View the purchase order history from within the material document. In the Where tab. From the material document. (the field to the PO number from exercise 3-2 right of reference document category) Select Enter. Select the Save icon to record the invoice verification document Remain in the transaction for the next exercise. Is the material document for the goods receipt listed in the purchase order history? Select the Purchase Order Data tab.200 Tax code (field to the VN – 16% Domestic input tax right of tax amount) On the PO Reference Tab enter the following data: Reference Document Category Purchase Order/Scheduling Agreement Purchasing doc.. Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics invoice verification → Document entry → Enter invoice (Initial screen) Document date Current date Posting date Current date Reference 100350-## Amount 8.

This means that the invoice document is entered and checked in Invoice Verification and the information relevant to Financial Accounting is transferred to a follow-on document with a different document number. In what way has the purchase order history changed as a result of the invoice receipt? The invoice receipt document is listed in the purchase order history along with the goods receipt document. 3-12-3 Display the Purchase Order from the invoice verification document. Double click on the PO number in the line item detail.sapeducation.00 EUR Have the provisions on the GR/IR account.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. which resulted from the goods receipt. select Invoice document → Display 3-12-1 Branch to the financial accounting document. Select the Follow-on documents button Double click on Accounting document Is the document number of the accounting document identical to that of the invoice verification document? The document numbers are not identical. resulting from the goods receipt. Select the Purchase order history tab.3-12 Display invoice verification document Display the document created by invoice verification. This means that the provisions on the GR/IR account.com . To which account are vendor liabilities posted? Account number: T-L05B## Amount: 8.co. Remain in the Display Invoice Document transaction. were completely written off. © SAP AG TERP10 8-76 Visit: www.250. Within the Enter Incoming Invoice: Company Code 1000 transaction. To which account is the input tax posted? Account number: 154000 Amount: 100 EUR Exit the Accounting document and close the Lists of Documents in Accounting dialog box. there were no price or quantity variances between the vendor invoice and the purchase order or goods receipt quantity. been correctly cleared as a result of the invoice receipt? Yes. Part of the reason Logistics Invoice Verification was developed was to separate Material Management and Financial Accounting into separate systems.

_____________ Value 8. you decide to issue a manual check.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. e) Choose Post.700 T-L05B## © SAP AG TERP10 8-77 Visit: www. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document entry → Outgoing payment → Post + print forms On the Payment with Printout: Header Data screen enter the following data: Field Name Company Code Payment method House Bank Check lot number Printer for forms Print Immediately Value 1000 C 1000 0001 LP01 Selected b) Choose the Enter payments button. 3-14-1 Post a manual outgoing payment with simultaneous check printing. Enter the following values: Field Name Amount Vendor c) Choose Process open items.sapeducation.com . Instead of waiting for the weekly payment processing job.co. Write down the number of the payment document. d) The open item for your vendor is listed.3-14 Post a manual outgoing payment with check printing The vendor requires payment immediately.

co. Add these two key figures to the standard analysis. Settings → Char. Press the [Move] pushbutton. Arrange the key figure “purchase orders” before the order value and the key figure “deliveries” before the invoice value. Info systems → Logistics → Purchasing → Purchasing group → Purchasing values (Selection screen) Purch. 4. Select the purchasing values for the last three months. Place the cursor on the key figure description that the moved key figure should precede. 3.Unit: Procurement Topic: Reporting 4-1 Analyze purchasing values for purchasing groups You want to use the Purchasing Information System to determine the scope of procurement of purchasing groups 001 to 018 for purchasing organization 1000. Edit → Choose key figures Select the key figures “Purchase orders” and “Deliveries” and press the [Choose] pushbutton.com . 1. organization Purchasing group Month 1000 001 [Curr. display → Key and description 4-3 Add key figures You want to obtain an overview of the number of purchase order items and the number of deliveries. Select Continue icon to display the additional key figures. as well as the name of the purchasing group. Choose the relevant characteristic.sapeducation. month] 4-2 Change characteristic display You want to display the key for the characteristic. 2.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Month – 2] 018 [Curr. Select the key figure that is to be moved in the Selection Criteria column. © SAP AG TERP10 8-78 Visit: www.

Double click to go to the display of all vendors for your purchasing group in the standard drill-down of characteristics. 4-5 Determine top 5 purchasing groups Which purchasing groups had the five highest purchase order values during the analysis period? Make a note of the total purchase order value of these top five groups.sapeducation. Study the complete list for the ABC analysis of purchase order value. Which vendor has the highest purchase order value? Display initial list: View → Basic list Place the cursor in the “Order value” column. perform an ABC analysis for the value key “purchase order value.. press the “Total list” pushbutton. Segment A is 70 %. Edit → ABC analysis. (Top N) Number 5 4-6 Perform ABC analysis Determine the most important vendors in terms of purchase order value for purchasing organization 1000 and purchasing groups 001 to 018..4-4 Display vendors for purchasing group With which vendors have you effected purchase orders for purchasing group 0##? Make a note of the number of vendors and the total purchase order value. segment B is 20 %. and segment C is 10 %..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . View → Top N. © SAP AG TERP10 8-79 Visit: www. (Choose strategy) ( ) (Strategy Parameter) Segment A Segment B Segment C Total Order value (%) 70 % 20 % 10 % Look at the complete list for ABC analysis at purchase order value. Select Back to return to Purchasing Group View of report. This contains the information you require.” Choose the percentage total of the purchase order value.co. Place the cursor in the “PO value” column in the initial list of the purchasing group analysis. Place the cursor on purchasing group 0## in the characteristics column. In the display of business graphics. To do this..

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. What is the key and description of the info structure for this analysis? To display the selection log. You should therefore look at the selection log for purchasing group analysis.com .4-7 Display selection log To interpret the result of your analysis correctly. it is important that you know the selection criteria used in the analysis. View → Basic list Extras → Selection log Info structure: S011 – Purchasing groups © SAP AG TERP10 8-80 Visit: www.co. you have to exit ABC analysis and return to the basic list.sapeducation.

you must enter all relevant data for purchasing and accounting in one single step? Determine whether this statement is true or false. 2. 6. 3. 4. A purchase organization must always be assigned to a company code. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. When you create a master record for a vendor.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.com . A plant can be assigned to several company codes? Determine whether this statement is true or false.Procurement: Test Your Knowledge 1. You cannot enter a goods movement in SAP R/3 without specifying a ________________. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence.sapeducation. A The purchase order is deleted B An accounting document can be generated C A material document is generated for each item D The PO history is updated for each item of the purchase order E A material document is generated F A credit memo is automatically generated for the vendor for the amount of the delivery value 5. Determine whether this statement is true or false. What are the effects of the entry of a goods receipt against a purchase order in the SAP R/3 ? Choose the correct answer(s). and _______ are examples of organizational levels that play a role in the maintenance of material master records. © SAP AG TERP10 8-81 Visit: www. _______. Client.

When you create a master record for a vendor. It is also an important factor influencing the stock or consumption posting made in accounting. Answer: movement type The movement type determines the kind of goods movement.com . You cannot enter a goods movement in SAP R/3 without specifying a ________________.Procurement: Answers 7. © SAP AG TERP10 8-82 Visit: www.sapeducation. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. Answer: False A plant can be assigned to only one company code. 8. you must enter all relevant data for purchasing and accounting in one single step? Determine whether this statement is true or false.co. The purchasing and accounting views can be maintained separately. Answer: False SAP R/3 also affords the possibility of a decentralized maintenance of a vendor master record. A plant can be assigned to several company codes? Determine whether this statement is true or false.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 9.

com . What are the effects of the entry of a goods receipt against a purchase order in the SAP R/3 ? Choose the correct answer(s). Determine whether this statement is true or false. E One material document and one accounting document are generated per goods receipt. A purchase organization must always be assigned to a company code. It is also updated when you enter a return delivery or a reversal for this PO item. © SAP AG TERP10 8-83 Visit: www. D. The PO history for a PO item is updated when a goods receipt is entered with reference to this item.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. A The purchase order is deleted B An accounting document can be generated C A material document is generated for each item D The PO history is updated for each item of the purchase order E A material document is generated F A credit memo is automatically generated for the vendor for the amount of the delivery value Answer: B. Answer: plant and storage location Data at the client level: General data that applies to the entire enterprise. 12.sapeducation. Data at the plant level: All data that is valid for a plant Data at the storage location level: All the data that is valid for a certain storage location. Answer: False The assignment of a purchasing organization to a company code is optional. Client. _______. 11.10. and _______ are examples of organizational levels that play a role in the maintenance of material master records.co.

sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Inventory and Warehouse Management Contents: Special Features of Goods Receipts Stock Transfers and Transfer Postings Storage Functions Physical Inventory Procedures  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 9-1 Visit: www.co.com .

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.Inventory and Warehouse Management: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. you will be able to: Enter a goods receipt into blocked stock and quality inspection Explain the difference between stock transfers and transfer postings Describe physical inventory procedures  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 9-2 Visit: www.com .co.

com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.sapeducation.Inventory and Warehouse Management: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 9-3 Visit: www.

Inventory and Warehouse Management : Business Scenario In your enterprise. based upon the material. As a project team member.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you may transfer material between two plants.sapeducation.  SAP AG 2005 © SAP AG TERP10 9-4 Visit: www. You can then enter transfer postings to move the material between the stock types. you can post goods receipts to different stock types.com . Your enterprise also carries out physical inventories of its warehouse stocks. you need to familiarize yourself with these different inventory and warehouse procedures.co. In some instances.

com .sapeducation.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Special Features of Goods Receipts: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. you will be able to: Enter a goods receipt into blocked stock and quality inspection  SAP AG 2005 © SAP AG TERP10 9-5 Visit: www.

A goods issue leads to a decrease of warehouse stock. Whereas with stock transfers there is always a physical movement of goods.co.Goods Movements Plant 1 Storage loc. 1 Unrestricteduse stock Plant 2 Storage loc. A transfer posting results in a change in the stock ID number or the stock category of a material. 2 Vendor Production Stock in quality inspection Blocked stock Storage loc. Transfer postings need not involve an actual (physical) goods movement. A goods receipt leads to an increase of warehouse stock.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. material consumption. © SAP AG TERP10 9-6 Visit: www. 3 Customer Production  SAP AG 2005 A goods receipt is a goods movement in which the receipt of goods from both an external vendor and from production is posted. or goods shipment is posted to a customer. A stock transfer is removal of materials from a particular storage location an placement into another storage location. Stock transfers can take place both within the same plant an between two plants. A goods issue is a goods movement in which a material withdrawal. goods issue.com .

material consumption.com . A transfer posting is a super ordinate term for stock transfers and changes the stock identification or qualification of a material. A goods receipt (GR) is a goods movement in which the receipt of goods from both an external vendor and from production is posted.co. © SAP AG TERP10 9-7 Visit: www. a transaction that causes a stock change is marked as a goods movement. A goods issue leads to a decrease of warehouse stock.sapeducation. A stock transfer is removal of materials from a particular storage location and placement into another storage location. In general. or goods shipment is posted to a customer. You can distinguish between goods receipts. or the transfer of consignment material.Goods Receipt Overview Plant 1 PO Storage loc. A goods issue (GI) is a goods movement in which a material withdrawal. 1 Unrestricteduse stock Vendor with reference Order Stock in quality inspection Blocked stock Production  SAP AG 2005 Goods movements include both external and internal movements. and transfer postings. regardless of whether the posting is linked to a physical movement or not. the transfer posting from material to material. A goods receipt leads to an increase of warehouse stock.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. goods issue. stock transfers. Examples of a transfer posting include the release of the stock for quality inspection. goods issues. Stock transfers can take place both within the same plant and between two plants.

Goods Receipt to GR Blocked Stock
Plant 1
PO Storage loc. 1
Unrestricteduse stock

Vendor

GR blocked stock

MvT 105 release

Stock in quality inspection

MvT 103 Conditional acceptance (non-valuated)
Blocked stock

 SAP AG 2005

If you wish to accept goods from a vendor conditionally (because a certificate is missing, for example), you initially post the goods to the goods receipt blocked stock (GR blocked stock) upon receipt, using movement type 103. The quantity posted to GR blocked stock does not yet form part of your regular inventory. It is merely recorded in the PO history. The material document generated at the time of the goods receipt serves merely as a record of the receipt of the goods. Since GR blocked stock is not valuated, no accounting document is generated at the time of the goods receipt. The valuated stock is not changed as a result of a receipt to GR blocked stock. Furthermore, you should note that although GR blocked stock is updated in the PO history, the open PO quantity is not reduced as a result. You can display GR blocked stock from two views: Stock overview for the material (at plant level) PO history for the purchase order item When the conditions for the acceptance of the delivery have been fulfilled, you transfer the material to unrestricted-use stock, stock in quality inspection, or blocked stock. The valuation and updating of the stock data does not take place until the material is released using movement type 105. If the conditions for release are not satisfied, it is possible to return the goods to the vendor.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-8
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Goods Receipt into Stock in Quality Inspection
Material master
Purchasing Post to QI stock Work scheduling QI stock

Reference document

Purchase Order
Stock type Quality inspection

Order
Stock type Quality inspection

Goods receipt

Where
Movement type 101 Stock type Quality inspection

 SAP AG 2005

You enter goods receipts against production and purchase orders with movement type 101. For a goods receipt into the warehouse, you can decide on the basis of the stock type whether the receipt is to be booked into unrestricted-use stock, stock in quality inspection, or blocked stock. If the goods receipt into stock in quality inspection is to be preplanned, you have a number of options: If the material is generally subject to a quality check prior to use, set the - Post to inspection stock indicator in Purchasing or Work Scheduling Data - in the material master record. The stock type Quality Inspection is then - adopted in the purchase or production order. If you wish to make the material subject to a quality check in exceptional cases only, enter the stock type Stock in Quality Inspection only in the relevant document (purchase or production order). An example from - purchasing would be a case where material is procured from a new vendor and the quality of the vendor’s goods needs to be checked in every case. Hint: You will find the stock type for the PO item in the item details on the Delivery tab page. In the production order, you will find the stock type on the Goods Receipt tab page. When you post a receipt into the warehouse, the quantity and value of the stock is increased irrespective of the stock type (except for material types without value updating).

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-9
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Special Features of Goods Receipts: Topic Summary

You are now able to: Enter a goods receipt into blocked stock and quality inspection

 SAP AG 2005

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-10
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Stock Transfers and Transfer Postings: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: Explain the difference between stock transfers and transfer postings

 SAP AG 2005

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-11
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Transfer Posting/Physical Stock Transfer

Transfer posting
Change to stock type, material number or batch number Additional physical material movement possible

Stock to stock Material to material Consignment to warehouse

Stock transfer
Physical material movement One- and two-step procedures possible

Stor. loc to stor. loc Plant to plant Company code to company code

 SAP AG 2005

In the case of transfer postings, the key aspect is a change in the stock ID number or the stock category of a material. Transfer postings need not involve an actual (physical) goods movement. In the case of stock transfers, on the other hand, there is always a physical movement of goods. Examples of transfer postings: - Stock to stock (for example, in quality inspection to unrestricted-use) or - material to material Examples of (physical) stock transfers: - Storage location to storage location - plant to plant As you can see from the examples, transfer postings and physical stock transfers can take place at different organizational levels. If stock is transferred between two storage locations within a plant, we speak of a storage-location-to-storage-location stock transfer. If stock is transferred between two plants and the plants belong to the same company code, we speak of a plant-to-plant stock transfer. If the plants are assigned to different company codes, we speak of a company-code-tocompany-code stock transfer.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-12
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Stock-to-Stock Transfer Posting
Plant 1
Storage location 1

343

Unrestricted-use stock
321 322

Stock in quality inspection
349 350

Blocked stock

344

 SAP AG 2005

There are three stock types in inventory management that indicate the usability of a material: unrestricted-use, in quality inspection, and blocked.If the usability of a material changes, you must make transfer postings between the different stock types. With this type of transfer posting, you can also enter a physical goods movement to a different storage location. However, it is only possible to enter a movement within one plant, not between several plants. Examples: Material is posted to stock in quality inspection at the time of a goods receipt against a purchase or production order. Following quality inspection, the quantity is posted to unrestricted-use stock. Hint: If inspection processing in the quality management system is active, you cannot post any issues from stock in quality inspection within Inventory Management. Such movements can only be carried out within the framework of inspection processing. Due to a damaged water pipe in a warehouse, a certain material can no longer be used and is transferred to blocked stock.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-13
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

One- Step and Two- Step Stock Transfer Procedures
Issuing organizational level Receiving organizational level

Step 1: Remove fr. Storage

In stock transfer 2nd step: Place in stor.

Stock

Step 1: Remove fr. Storage + Step 2: Place in storage

Stock

 SAP AG 2005

A stock transfer/transfer posting consists of a goods issue from the issuing point and a goods receipt at the receiving point. The goods issue and goods receipt can be entered with a single posting for all transfer postings/stock transfers. For some stock transfers, you have the additional option of entering the goods issue and goods receipt in two separate steps and thus in two separate postings. In the case of storage-location-tostorage-location and plant-to-plant stock transfers, a distinction is made between the one-step procedure and the two-step procedure. The one-step procedure has the advantage that you enter a single transaction in the system. On the other hand, using the two-step procedure enables you to monitor stocks that you are in the process of transferring from one place to another. Once you have posted the goods issue from the issuing point, the stock is regarded as in transfer at the receiving point, and is treated as such in the system. Hint: In the case of stock transfers between plants, the two-step procedure is necessary if users have authorizations only for their own plant in each case. Hint: At the time of physical inventory, you should not have any stocks in transfer because you cannot inventory such stocks.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-14
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Storage Location to Storage Location: One- Step
Plant 1
Storage loc. 1
Unrestricteduse stock

Storage loc. 2

311 321 323 349 325

Unrestricteduse stock

Stock in quality inspection

Stock in quality inspection

Blocked stock

Blocked stock

 SAP AG 2005

A stock transfer from one storage location to another is carried out within a plant. You can post a storage-location-to-storage-location stock transfer using the one-step procedure for all stock types. In the process, a material document is generated, containing two material document items for each item you entered: One item for the removal of the material from storage (goods issue) at the issuing storage location One item for the placement of the material in storage (goods receipt) at the receiving storage location An accounting document is not generated for this stock transfer because the transferred material is managed in the same plant, and therefore has the same posting data. Hint: In the case of a storage-location-to-storage-location stock transfer, an accounting document is generated if the material is split-valuated and the valuation type changes in the course of the transfer.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-15
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Storage Location to Storage Location: Two-Step
Plant 1
Storage location 1 313 Storage location 2

Stock in transfer

Unrestricteduse stock

315

Unrestricteduse stock

 SAP AG 2005

Using the two-step procedure, you can only transfer material from unrestricted-use stock at the issuing location to unrestricted-use stock at the receiving storage location. After the stock removal posting, the quantity is booked out of the issuing storage location. At the receiving storage location, the quantity is already included in the stock for that location, not as unrestricted-use stock, however, but as stock in transfer. The quantity is not available for unrestricted use at plant level either. When the goods are received at the receiving storage location, the quantity is transferred from stock in transfer to unrestricted-use stock. In the course of a stock transfer from storage location to storage location using the two-step procedure, two material documents are generated: one at the time of goods issue (in this case referred to as removal from storage), and a second at the time of goods receipt (in this case referred to as putaway or placement in storage). Valuation does not take place in the case of the two-step procedure.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-16
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Cross-Plant Stock Transfer
Company code A Plant 1
Valuation

Company code B Plant 1

Valuation

Possible procedures: Plant 2 One-step procedure Two-step procedure Stock transport order (with/without delivery)

 SAP AG 2004

In the case of a plant-to-plant stock transfer, the plants between which material is transferred can belong either to the same company code or to different ones. As a general rule, cross-plant stock transfers can only be booked out of unrestricted-use stock. In contrast to a storage-location-to-storage-location stock transfer, a plant-to-plant transfer affects Financial Accounting and Material Requirements Planning. Financial Accounting (only if the two plants are assigned to different valuation areas): - A cross-plant stock transfer leads to a value update in the stock accounts. An accounting document is generated parallel to the material document for the stock transfer. The stock transfer is valuated at the valuation price of the material in the issuing plant. - In the case of a cross-company-code stock transfer, two accounting documents are created at the time of posting: one for each company code. - The offsetting entry to the stock posting is then made to a company-code clearing account. Hint: If the stock transfer is entered in two separate steps, valuation always takes place at the time of the first step.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-17
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Plant to Plant: One-Step/Two-Step Procedures
Plant 1
Storage location 303
Stock in transfer

Plant 2

305
Unrestricteduse stock

Storage location

301

Unrestricteduse stock

 SAP AG 2005

In the case of the one-step procedure, the goods issue and goods receipt are posted in a single material document. In the case of the two-step procedure, when removing the material from storage, you must specify the receiving plant, in addition to the material and the issuing organizational levels. This is necessary because valuation of the stock transfer takes place when the material is removed from storage and posted to stock in transfer at the receiving plant.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-18
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Stock Transport Order
Issuing Plant
Storage location

Receiving Plant
Stock Transp. Order

1

Unrestricteduse stock

Storage location

3 2
351
Stock in transit

unrestr.-use stock

101

stock in quality insp. blocked stock

 SAP AG 2005

A stock transfer using a stock transport order has the following advantages compared with a stock transfer without a stock transport order: The stock transport order is integrated within MRP; purchase requisitions generated by MRP can be converted into stock transport orders. The receipt can be planned at the receiving plant. You can enter delivery costs and a forwarder/carrier in the stock transport order. The goods receipt can be posted directly to consumption. In the case of a goods receipt into the warehouse, you can also post the material to stock in quality inspection or to blocked stock. The entire process (goods issue and goods receipt) can be monitored via the PO history.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-19
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Stock Transfers and Transfer Postings: Topic Summary

You are now able to: Explain the difference between stock transfers and transfer postings

 SAP AG 2005

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-20
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Storage Functions: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: Explain storage functions

 SAP AG 2004

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-21
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Sampling
Material SP- 01 Total stock: 100 pc Total value: 1.000,MA price: 10,Material Doc Sample SP- 01 5 pc Material SP- 01 Total stock: Total value: MA price: 95 pc 950,10,-

Plant 1
Storage location unrestr.-use stock stock in quality insp. blocked stock 333 331 335

Postings
Stock account GI 50 Work from quality control GI 50

 SAP AG 2005

A sample is entered in the same way as a goods issue without reference. In the standard system, the following movement types are defined for a withdrawal for sampling: 331: Withdrawal for sampling from stock in quality inspection 333: Withdrawal for sampling from unrestricted-use stock 335: Withdrawal for sampling from blocked stock

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-22
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Scrapping
Material SP- 01 Total stock: Total value: S price: 100 pc 200,2,Material Doc Scrapping SP- 02 10 pc Material SP- 01 Total stock: Total value: S price: 90 pc 180,2,-

Plant 1
Storage location unrestr.-use stock stock in quality insp. blocked stock 551 553 555

Postings
Stock account GI 20 Work from quality control GI 20

 SAP AG 2005

In the standard system, the following movement types have been defined for scrapping: . 551: Withdrawal for scrapping from unrestricted-use stock . 553: Withdrawal for scrapping from stock in quality inspection . 555: Withdrawal for scrapping from blocked stock Scrapping causes a reduction in the associated stock. The value of the scrapped material is booked out of the stock account to a scrap account.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-23
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Negative Stock
Physical goods receipt Physical stock 1.000 PC 100 PC

8:00

+ 900 PC

Book inventory

Physical goods issue + posting
- 300 PC

Physical stock Book inventory

700 PC - 200 PC

11:00
Posting of goods receipt

- 300 PC

Physical stock

700 PC 700 PC

16:00
 SAP AG 2005

+ 900 PC

Book inventory

A negative stock occurs when you post a goods issue (GI) with a quantity that is larger than the book quantity. Negative stock balances may be required if, for organizational reasons, you enter goods issues before the corresponding goods receipts, and the material is already physically located in the warehouse. Negative stocks always indicate that physical movements have to be entered in the system at a later stage. Example: According to the book inventory, you have 100 pieces of a material in storage location 0001 of plant 1000. In actual fact, 900 pieces have already entered the warehouse and a physical stock of 1000 pieces is therefore available. This goods receipt has not yet been entered in the system due to time reasons. 300 pieces of the material are urgently required for production and withdrawn from the warehouse. This goods issue is immediately entered in the system. You therefore have a book inventory of -200 pieces, despite a physical stock of 700 pieces. The goods receipt of 900 pieces is later posted. The book inventory and physical stock match again. See above figure as reference. So that you can work with negative stock in SAP R/3, you have to specifically allow this in Customizing for the affected material. Negative stock is possible for unrestricted-use and blocked stock and for the following special stocktypes: Vendor consignment (K) Stock of material provided to vendor (O) Consignment stock at customer (W) Salesorderstock(E) Projectstock(Q) Returnable packaging with customer (V) Returnable transport packaging (M) Caution: If you work with negative stock balances, you have to ensure that you do not have negative stocks on the balance sheet key date or when you carry out a physical inventory.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-24
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Return Delivery
Plant 2
GR for purchase order MvT 103 Non-valuated Purchase Order Return delivery with MvT 124

GR blocked stock

Storage location 1
Vendor GR for purchase order MvT 101 Valuated Return delivery with MvT 122

 SAP AG 2005

If you have made a conditional acceptance of the goods and have posted the goods receipt with movement type (MvT) 103 in the GR blocked stock, use movement type 124 for the return delivery. As a non-valuated goods receipt is concerned in this case, the return delivery is also non-valuated. If, however, you have increased your own valuated stock in the goods receipt by posting with movement type 101 then the return delivery is posted with movement type 122. This means that the return delivery reduces the stock on both a quantity and value basis. If you enter a return delivery, you can refer to the material document of the goods receipt or purchase order. You also have the option of using the functions of the Shipping (LE-SHP) component when posting a return delivery; for example, you can use picking and packing. You will therefore have detailed shipping documents and delivery notes. You can use return deliveries via Shipping for standard purchase orders, purchase orders with account assignment and material number, and purchase orders with special stocks.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-25
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Shelf Life
Customizing: Check
Shelf Life Expiration Dates

Application
Material master S-01

Plant Plant 1000 1100 1200 ... Movement type MvT ... Check SLExpDate 101 102 105 ... 1 1 : No check 1: Enter and check 2: Enter only 3: No check at GI BBD/ProdDt.

Gen. Plant data/ Storage Remaining shelf life

Optional

30 d

+
Purchase Order S- 01 100 pc Required Remaining shelf life 30 d

 SAP AG 2005

When you receive goods from a vendor, the system may check the minimum shelf life of the goods during the goods receipt. You can therefore ensure that goods are only placed in storage if their shelf life corresponds with your requirements. To check the minimum shelf life in the goods receipt for the purchase order, the following prerequisites must be met: The shelf life expiration date check must be activated for the plant and the movement type. In the purchase order item, make sure the remaining shelf life is maintained (item detail Delivery tab page). You can enter a default value for the remaining shelf life in the material master record (General plant data/storage). Hint: The minimum remaining shelf life value is the number of days that a material has to be usable for the system to accept the goods receipt.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-26
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Under and Over Delivery

PO quantity 100 pieces Underdelivery tolerance 80 90 100 Overdelivery tolerance 110 120

Underdelivery warning message

No messages if variances

Overdelivery error message

 SAP AG 2005

Under Deliveries are generally allowed. The system interprets and accepts the Under Delivery as a partial delivery. If you check the entries before posting the goods receipt, the system refers to the under delivery by warning message. In the order item, you can also enter a percentage value for under delivery tolerance. If the total of previously delivered and currently entered quantities lies within the under delivery tolerance, the system does not issue a warning message. If the total is under the tolerance, the system then creates a warning message during a check. Over deliveries to a purchase order item are only allowed if this is determined in the order item. You have the option of setting the indicator for unlimited Over delivery in the purchase order item or specifying a percentage Over delivery tolerance. If the total of previously delivered and currently entered quantities lies within the over delivery tolerance, the system does not issue a message. If the total is over the tolerance, then the system issues an error message. If the same under and over delivery tolerances are always valid for one material, you can define them in the material master record as default values for purchasing. The tolerances are determined by the purchasing value key that can be specified in the purchasing data of the material master record.

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-27
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Warehouse and Storage Functions: Topic Summary

You are now able to: Explain warehouse and storage functions

 SAP AG 2005

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-28
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Physical Inventory Procedures: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: Describe physical inventory procedures

 SAP AG 2005

© SAP AG

TERP10

9-29
Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

sapeducation. stock in quality inspection.Physical Inventory Reasons Inventoried stock management units Material Plant. and blocked stock of a material at a storage location of a plant separately in each case. For example.com . A stock management unit is uniquely defined by: Material Plant storage location Stock type Batch Special stock Each stock management unit of a material is counted separately. and the inventory differences are posted per stock management unit.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you must record the quantities of unrestricted-use stock. storage location Stock type Accounting: Determination of material stocks for current assets Batch Special stock Material requirements planning: Correction of incorrect stock quantities  SAP AG 2005 The physical inventory is carried out on the basis of stock management units.co. A stock management unit is a non-divisible part of a stock of materials for which a separate book inventory exists. © SAP AG TERP10 9-30 Visit: www.

you post the inventory differences that have been identified. you enter the count results in the system. inventory docs 1 Print physical inv. Creation of physical inventory documents 2. The system then determines the inventory differences. further PI documents are generated.sapeducation. the stock quantity and stock value are updated and the stock accounts are updated in accounting. Entry of count 3. In the third phase. SAP R/3 provides several procedures for the mass-generation of PI documents. you print out the documents in order to start the counting process. you create the physical inventory (PI) documents.  SAP AG 2005 The physical inventory process comprises three phases: 1. lists 2 Stock count Enter count 3 Analyze differences Post differences Material Accounting doc. In the second phase. In this case. If some of the results seem doubtful.com . After selecting the stocks to be counted and creating the PI documents.co. Posting of inventory difference In the first phase. © SAP AG TERP10 9-31 Visit: www. you can arrange for a recount of the stock management units affected.doc.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In the process. doc.Physical Inventory Process Phases Inventory Create phys.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Physical Inventory Document Header Plant Storage location Special stock Inventory number Grouping Planned count date Count date. you can specify a physical inventory number in the document header (this number should not be confused with the number of the PI document). and vendor or customer or project (depending on the special stock). posting of differences. special stock. The status of an item indicates whether or not the item has been processed. © SAP AG TERP10 9-32 Visit: www. counted.. posting date. You can specify the storage bin or the material group as further grouping values.sapeducation. and in evaluations.. The items of a PI document are then all assigned to a material group or a storage bin in addition to the above-mentioned groupings When creating a PI document. Overview/Details  SAP AG 2005 A physical inventory document contains data that includes: The plant and storage location in which counting is to take place The date on which the count is to take place (planned count date) The materials to be counted The batches that are to be counted (in the case of material subject to a batch management requirement) The partial stock that is to be counted (in the case of split valuation) The stock types to be counted The status of the item The status of the PI document You create PI documents per plant and storage location. Deletion status Item Material Quantity Batch Stock type Alternative unit of measure Item deleted Status Items 1st item 2nd item ..co. the processor. posting status. You can use the status of a PI document item as a selection criterion in searches for physical inventory documents. The physical inventory number facilitates selection of the PI documents to be processed during entry of the count data. or the month and/or date of the physical inventory for this purpose. For example. If you wish to inventory special stocks. you may wish to use the ID of the count group. you create PI documents per plant.. You can display an overview of the status of the items in the document statistics.. Count status. storage location. You have a free choice of physical inventory numbers. or recounted. or the department. posted.com .

.You can make the following changes to a PI document: In the document header .. Create or change the physical inventory number In a not-yet-counted item .co. Change the planned count date .....nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Freeze book inventory . Change the stock type . Set or unset the posting block .sapeducation.com .. Set the deletion indicator Enter new items (as long as no count has yet been entered) Delete the document © SAP AG TERP10 9-33 Visit: www. Change the count unit of measure .

28.09.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Count 255 entered in evening.com .09. GR 27. This prevents goods movements from changing the book inventory figure that is relevant to the inventory-taking process.09.co. The system blocks all the stock management units of the relevant PI document by means of the Posting Block indicator in the PI document header. To do so. you set the Freeze Book Inventory indicator in the PI document. Posting block set in the evening Book inventory 250 copied to inventory document + posting block removed Difference posted  SAP AG 2005 You can block all goods movements relating to a stock management unit for the purposes of a physical inventory.09.09. © SAP AG TERP10 9-34 Visit: www.sapeducation. 29. 30. If it is not possible to block the goods movement for organizational reasons. the Physical Inventory Block indicator shows the value X (material blocked for movements due to physical inventory). In the Storage Location view of the material master record. you can freeze the book inventory in the PI document at the time of the count.Blocking Goods Movements Stock 250 100 250 250 325 370 Posting block 75 GR 45 GR 31.

09. 190 After the count 265 215 260 Book inventory fixed in morning (250) and 255 counted Count entered in evening (255) and difference (255-250) posted  SAP AG 2005 If it is not possible to block the goods movement for organizational reasons. © SAP AG TERP10 9-35 Visit: www.09. in the PI document header. then you can freeze the book inventory in the PI document at the time of the count.sapeducation. This prevents foods movements from changing the book inventory figure that is relevant to the inventorytaking process. To freeze book inventory. GI 28.09.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 45 GR 31.09. GI 30.09.co. 75 -50 GR 29.Freezing Book Inventory Stock 250 100 -60 GR 27.com . set the Freeze Book Inventory indicator.

In the PI document.co. Here. change. Hint: Using the zero stock count and the variance warning can cause the system to issue an undesirably large number of warning messages. When the entered data is saved. above which the system issues a warning message. display count Post difference Display or change document Recount document or item © SAP AG TERP10 9-36 Visit: www.com .sapeducation. The difference between the count result and this book inventory is the inventory difference. You can analyze this difference via the list of differences. document Enter count Difference list Post differences Not Processed Counted Posted Status Recounted  SAP AG 2005 For the physical inventory count. The list of differences contains the following information on each item: Quantity counted Book inventory Difference quantity Difference amount You can perform the following functions with the list of differences: Enter. you must print out the PI document and forward it to the persons responsible for the count. all not-yet-processed document items are set to zero stock. You can enter items counted as zero stock using the zero count facility. the count status of the item is set to Counted and the count date is updated in the document header. the system determines the book inventory in the system. you can enter a percentage variance of the count quantity from the book inventory.Entering Physical Inventory Count Recount item Create inv. When entering the physical inventory count.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can enter the stock figures in the system with and without reference to a PI document.

© SAP AG TERP10 9-37 Visit: www. All further postings for this document must be made in this fiscal year or in the first period of the following year if back posting is allowed. If a document exceeds the document tolerance defined for the user group. in the following period. the system creates a material document that corrects the stock figures.com . if back posting to the previous period is allowed. He or she can process the other items. The system fixes the posting period of the accounting document automatically when the first count is entered for the physical inventory document. and an accounting document recording the necessary account movements. Note: You can specify a reason for the inventory difference discovered for each item.co. For example. the user may not post the differences for these items.Posting of Inventory Differences Inventory tolerance group: maximum postable amount at user Material document Difference list Post differences Accounting document  SAP AG 2005 You can post the inventory differences either via the list of differences or via separate transactions. If the total value of the document lies below the document tolerance. The fiscal year is set as a result of specification of the planned count date when the PI document is created.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. but certain items exceed the maximum amount per item. When an inventory difference is posted. a user who is assigned to this physical inventory tolerance group may not post an inventory difference for this document. The inventory difference must therefore either be posted in the same period or. you can record that a certain difference is due to theft.sapeducation.

© SAP AG TERP10 9-38 Visit: www. Post inventory difference In SAP R/3. Create physical inventory documents 2.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2 Enter count Enter count 2→1 Phys.sapeducation. created 2+3 →1  SAP AG 2005 In every physical inventory. Enter count without PI document and post inventory difference (1. When they are posted. 2. inv.co. inventory doc. The count results are entered. the system automatically creates a PI document when you save. Enter count 3. you go through three basic phases: 1. and 3) All three phases are carried out in one step. The following options are available if you wish to combine steps in the physical inventory: Enter count without physical inventory document (1 and 2) When a count is entered without a document. Enter count Enter count 3 3 Post differences Post differences 1 2+3 Post difference Post difference Phys. inventory doc. created Create phys. Enter count and post physical inventory difference (2 and 3) The count results are entered for an already existing PI document and the inventory differences are immediately posted when these results are saved. the system generates a PI document and posts the inventory difference. doc. You post the difference with reference to this PI document. inventory doc. you have the option of combining individual phases and performing them in a single step.com .Combining Physical Inventory Steps 1 Create phys.

Physical Inventory Procedures: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe physical inventory procedures  SAP AG 2005 © SAP AG TERP10 9-39 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .co.sapeducation.

co.com .Inventory and Warehouse Management: Unit Summary You are now able to: Enter a goods receipt into blocked stock and quality inspection Explain the difference between stock transfers and transfer postings Explain warehouse and storage functions Describe physical inventory procedures  SAP AG 2005 © SAP AG TERP10 9-40 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

Amount in GR blocked stock: Amount in Unrestricted-use: © SAP AG TERP10 9-41 Visit: www. 1-1 Materials T-M510A## and T-M510B## on PO 4151-02## have been exposed to moisture during transportation. 1-1-4 Record the amount of inventory in GR blocked stock and in unrestricted use for material T-M510A##.com . you will record a conditional acceptance of the materials (movement type 103). 1-1-1 Enter the receipt of materials T-M510A## and T-M510B## only against purchase order 4151-02## into GR blocked stock. you will be able to: • Enter a goods receipt into GR blocked stock and quality inspection As senior store person you record incoming deliveries of ordered materials. 1-1-2 Record the amount of inventory in GR blocked stock.co.sapeducation.Inventory and Warehouse Management: Exercises Unit: Inventory and Warehouse Management Topic: Special Features of Good Receipts At the conclusion of this exercise.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Subsequent close inspection reveals that material T-M510A## did not suffer any damage as a result of getting soaked. Plant 1000. Amount in GR blocked stock: 1-1-3 Release GR blocked stock of material T-M510A##. Therefore. You cannot immediately decide whether the materials have been damaged as a result. Some materials need to be inspected by the quality department before they can be put into unrestricted use. Post this receipt to unrestricted-use stock at storage location 0001. Release the relevant GR blocked stock and book the material into unrestricted-use stock. You book deliveries that are clearly defective into GR blocked stock. you need to understand how to enter goods receipts into GR blocked stock and into quality inspection stock types. Therefore.

sapeducation. 1-2-2 Display the stock overview from within the material document and record the stock in quality inspection of material T-M510C##. The materials T-M510A## and T-M510B## have already been received in the prior exercise.1-2 Enter a goods receipt against a purchase order. Selected materials are booked into quality inspection (QI stock) at the time of goods receipt. Amount in Quality Inspection: © SAP AG TERP10 9-42 Visit: www.com . Enter the receipt of 100 pc of material T-M510C## (gaskets) with reference to purchase order 4151-02##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Check that the delivery of material T-M510C## is booked into quality inspection. 1-2-1.co.

materials must be transferred from a central storage location to the factory outlet storage location. 2-1-1 Review the Stock Overview Report and record the amount of inventory in Quality Inspection and in Unrestricted-use for material T-M510C## at plant 1000. Also. for direct factory sales.Unit: Inventory and Warehouse Management Topic: Stock Transfer and Transfer Posting At the conclusion of this exercise. you posted a goods receipt of material T-M510C## into quality inspection. 2-1-3 Display the Stock Overview Report. and record the amount of inventory in Quality Inspection and Unrestricted-use. Record the material document number. storage location 0001. 2-1 In exercise 1-2. after materials that are received into quality inspection are inspected and approved. from the material document. Material Document © SAP AG TERP10 9-43 Visit: www. Amount in Quality Inspection: Amount in Unrestricted-use: 2-1-2 Enter a transfer posting for all 100 pieces from quality inspection at plant 1000 storage location 0001 into unrestricted use at plant 1000 storage location 0001.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-2-1 Remove 10 pc of material T-M510A## from storage at plant 1200 storage location 0001. Amount in Quality Inspection: Amount in Unrestricted-use: 2-2 Transfer material T-M510A## from the central storage location 0001 of plant 1200 to storage location 0120 for direct factory sales. you will use a stock transfer posting using the two-step procedure. Therefore. in your enterprise. and transfer them to storage location 0120 (direct factory sales). The material has been inspected and approved. In your enterprise.com . are then transferred to unrestricted use. You need to understand how to enter a transfer posting to reflect this change in material status.co. you will be able to: • Enter a transfer posting.sapeducation. Use the two-step procedure. • Enter a stock transfer using the two-step procedure.

com .2-2-2 Record stock in transfer at plant 1200.sapeducation.co. Stock in Transfer: 2-2-3 Enter the placement into storage of the 10 pc of each of T-M510A## as a stock putaway for a material document. 2-2-4 Verify that the stock in transfer of material T-M510A## at plant 1200. storage location 0120.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. storage location 0120 has been completely cancelled out as a result of the putaway. Stock in Transfer © SAP AG TERP10 9-44 Visit: www.

Goods movements are to be blocked during the physical inventory. Post the physical inventory difference. storage location 0001. 3-1-1 Create physical inventory documents for plant 1000. Enter the count data for all three stock types for material T-INV1## at storage location 0001. Make note of the count: Open_________________ Counted_______________ Cleared________________ Recounted_____________ Deleted_______________ © SAP AG TERP10 9-45 Visit: www. Make a note of the PI document.com .Unit: Inventory and Warehouse Management Topic: Physical Inventory At the conclusion of this exercise. 3-1-2 Set the posting block for the physical inventory document. you will be able to: • Create physical inventory documents • Enter the results of physical inventory counts • Post inventory differences You wish to carry out periodic physical inventories in your enterprise.co. The count is to take place in two days.sapeducation. 3-1-5 Display the physical inventory statistics of the PI document. 3-1-3 Enter the physical inventory count provided below: Material T-INV1## T-INV1## T-INV1## Stock type 1 2 4 Stock 490 10 0 3-1-4 Display the differences in the list of differences. 3-1 Carry out a physical inventory of material T-INV1## in plant 1000.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Assign GR## as the physical inventory group number.

followed by the number of the reference document. b) Enter Movement type 103 and confirm your entry with Enter. c) Enter the purchase order number 4151-02## and choose Execute. f) Remain in the MIGO transaction for the next exercise.sapeducation. The material document that you just created defaults.co.com . Therefore. Acknowledge the Change to Default Values dialog box. Amount in GR blocked stock 100 d) Exit the Stock Overview Report. e) Choose Post. Remain in the MIGO transaction for the next exercise. you will record a conditional acceptance of the materials (movement type 103). 1-1-1 Enter the receipt of materials T-M510A## and T-M510B## only against purchase order 4151-02## into GR blocked stock. Logistics →Materials Management →Inventory Management Goods Movement →Goods Movement (MIGO) a) Choose transaction Goods Receipt and reference Purchase Order.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Always enter the desired movement type first. Release the relevant GR blocked stock and book the material into unrestricted-use stock. choose transaction Display and reference Material Document. d) Set the Item OK indicator for the line items for materials T-M510A## and T-M510B## only. b) Choose Execute c) Choose the Where tab and select the Stock overview icon. Caution: The lines of the material document are created with the movement type set in the default values. Record the amount of inventory in GR blocked stock. Subsequent close inspection reveals that material T-M510A## did not suffer any damage as a result of getting soaked. © SAP AG TERP10 9-46 Visit: www. a) In the MIGO transaction. You cannot immediately decide whether the materials have been damaged as a result. by selecting continue. Navigate to GR blocked stock using the Right columns button.Inventory and Warehouse Management: Solutions Unit: Inventory and Warehouse Management Topic: Special Features of Good Receipts 1-1 Materials T-M510A## and T-M510B## on PO 4151-02## have been exposed to moisture during transportation.

a) Choose transaction Release GR blocked stock and reference Material Document. and choose Post. Exit the MIGO transaction. e) Confirm the Quality Inspection stock type for the delivered item on the Where tab page.sapeducation. Acknowledge the Change to Default Values dialog box. 1-1-4 Record the amount of inventory in GR blocked stock and in unrestricted use for material T-M510A##. by selecting continue. The materials T-M510A## and T-M510B## have already been received in the prior exercise. c) Enter the purchase order number 4151-02## and choose Execute. Selected materials are booked into quality inspection (QI stock) at the time of goods receipt. b) Choose Execute. © SAP AG TERP10 9-47 Visit: www.1-1-3 Release GR blocked stock of material T-M510A##. The material document that you created in exercise 1-1-1 defaults. Check that the delivery of material T-M510C## is booked into quality inspection. d) Set the Item OK indicator for item 1. Remain in the MIGO transaction for the next exercise. Amount in GR blocked stock:0 Amount in Unrestricted-use: 850 d) Exit the Stock Overview Report. Post this receipt to unrestricted-use stock at storage location 0001. Plant 1000. 1-2 Enter a goods receipt against a purchase order.co. c) Choose the Where tab and select the Stock overview icon.com . The material document that you just created defaults. b) Choose Execute. f) Choose Post. a) Choose transaction Display and reference Material Document. Remain in the MIGO transaction for the next exercise. 1-2-1 Enter the receipt of 100 pc of material T-M510C## (gaskets) with reference to purchase order 4151-02##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. b) Change the movement type to 101. Logistics→ Materials Management →Inventory Management →Goods Movement → Goods Movement (MIGO) a) Choose transaction Goods Receipt and reference Purchase Order. c) Set the Item OK indicator for item 1. enter Storage Location 0001 if necessary. Navigate to GR blocked stock using the Right columns button.

The material document that you just created defaults.1-2-2 Display the stock overview from within the material document and record the stock in quality inspection of material T-M510C##.com .co. Exit the MIGO transaction. Amount in Quality Inspection: 100 d) Exit the Stock Overview Report. c) Choose the Where tab page and select the Stock overview icon. b) Choose Execute. © SAP AG TERP10 9-48 Visit: www. a) Choose transaction Display and reference Material Document.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

c) Enter the following data: Material = T-M510C## Plant = 1000 Stor. Remain in the MIGO transaction for the next exercise. Logistics→ Materials Management →Inventory Management →Goods Movement → Goods Movement (MIGO) a) Choose transaction Transfer Posting and reference Others. e) Choose Post. b) Verify that the movement type is 321.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you posted a goods receipt of material T-M510C## into quality inspection. Change it if necessary. © SAP AG TERP10 9-49 Visit: www. 2-1-1 Review the Stock Overview Report and record the amount of inventory in Quality Inspection and in Unrestricted-use for material T-M510C## at plant 1000.sapeducation. storage location 0001. Logistics→ Materials Management →Inventory Management→ Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Enter the following data: Material : T-M510C## Plant : 1000 Storage location: 0001 Select Execute Amount in Quality Inspection: 100 Amount in Unrestricted-use: 0 2-1-2 Enter a transfer posting for all 100 pieces from quality inspection at plant 1000 storage location 0001 into unrestricted use at plant 1000 storage location 0001.com . Loc = 0001 Unit of Entry = 100 Enter d) Verify the Item OK indicator is set. Loc = 0001 Destination Stor. The material has been inspected and approved. Enter a transfer posting for all 100 pieces from quality inspection at plant 1000 storage location 0001 into unrestricted use at plant 1000 storage location 0001.Unit: Inventory and Warehouse Management Topic: Stock Transfer and Transfer Posting 2-1 In exercise 1-2.co.

sapeducation.co. a) Choose transaction Display and reference Material Document. Remain in the MIGO transaction for the next exercise.com . b) Choose Execute On the Transfer tab select the Stock overview icon. and record the amount of inventory in Quality Inspection and Unrestricted-use. from the material document. by selecting continue. The material document that you just created defaults.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-2 Transfer material T-M510A## from the central storage location 0001 of plant 1200 to storage location 0120 for direct factory sales. Amount in Quality Inspection: 0 Amount in Unrestricted-use: 100 d) Exit the Stock Overview Report and exit the MIGO transaction. e) Choose Post. Material Document © SAP AG TERP10 9-50 Visit: www. Record the material document number. 2-2-1 Remove 10 pc of material T-M510A## from storage at plant 1200 storage location 0001. f) Record the Material Document number.2-1-3 Display the Stock Overview Report. c) Enter the following data on the Transfer Posting tab page: Material T-M510A## Plant 1200 (From) Storage Location 0001 Dest Storage Location 0120 Unit of Entry 10 Enter d) Verify that the Item OK indicator is set. b) Enter movement type 313 (Transfer Posting Storage Location to Storage Location). Acknowledge the Change to Default Values dialog box. Use the two-step procedure. Logistics→ Materials Management →Inventory Management →Goods Movement → Goods Movement (MIGO) a) Choose transaction Remove from Storage and reference Others. and transfer them to storage location 0120 (direct factory sales).

The material document that you just created defaults.co. 2-2-4 Verify that the stock in transfer of material T-M510A## at plant 1200. b) Enter the number of the material document from the removal from storage exercise 2-2-1.sapeducation. Stock in Transfer 0 e) Exit the Stock Overview Report and the MIGO transaction. d) Position the cursor on the line storage location 0120 and choose Choose. c) On the Where tab page. a) Choose transaction Display and reference Material Document. d) Position the cursor on the line storage location 0120 and choose Choose. The storage-location-related stock in transfer is described as Transfer (SLoc).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The storage-location-related stock in transfer is described as Transfer (SLoc). storage location 0120 has been completely cancelled out as a result of the putaway. a) Choose Place in Storage and reference Material Document. b) Choose Execute. 2-2-3 Enter the placement into storage of the 10 pc of each of T-M510A## as a stock putaway for a material document.com . b) Choose Execute. Stock in Transfer: 10 e) Exit the Stock Overview report. e) Select Post. Remain in the MIGO transaction for the next exercise. d) Set the Item OK indicator. Hint: You can use the search function: Find Material Document. Entermovement type 313 and the user name SCM510-## as selection values. storage location 0120. c) On the Transfer tab select the Stock overview icon. © SAP AG TERP10 9-51 Visit: www. a) Choose transaction Display and reference Material Document.2-2-2 Record stock in transfer at plant 1200. choose the Stock Overview icon. c) Choose Execute.

Inventory Number GR##. Inventory Doc. Logistics →Materials Management →Physical Inventory → Phys. Plant 1000. Logistics →Materials Management →Physical Inventory → Phys. c) Choose Post. →Change a) Enter the PI document number from exercise 3-1-1 and choose Header. b) Set the Posting Block indicator. d) Enter Material Number T-INV1## and Stock Type 2. Storage Location 0001. storage location 0001. Make a note of the PI document.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Unit: Inventory and Warehouse Management Topic: Physical Inventory 3-1 Carry out a physical inventory of material T-INV1## in plant 1000. PI Document Number 3-1-2 Set the posting block for the physical inventory document. e) Enter Material Number T-INV1## and Stock Type 4.Enter the count data for all three stock types for material T-INV1## at storage location 0001. 3-1-1 Create physical inventory documents for plant 1000. © SAP AG TERP10 9-52 Visit: www.co. f) Select Post. c) Enter Material Number T-INV1## and Stock Type 1. →Create a) Enter the Planned count date <today+2 days>. The count is to take place in two days. b) Choose Enter.sapeducation.com . g) Record the PI Document number. Assign GR## as the physical inventory group number. Inventory Doc. and Phys.

b) Enter the count result.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. e) Choose Post Difference. only enter the number of the PI document created in exercise 3-1-2. select Post.co. f) On the Post Inv. c) Choose Post. Post the physical inventory difference. from exercise 3-1-1 and choose Enter.sapeducation. →Display a) Enter the physical inventory document number. c) Choose Execute. Inventory Doc. 3-1-5 Display the physical inventory statistics of the PI document. d) Select all items. Open Counted Cleared Recounted Deleted 0 3 3 0 0 © SAP AG TERP10 9-53 Visit: www. Logistics →Materials Management →Physical Inventory → Difference → Difference List b) In the selection criteria. 3-1-4 Display the differences in the list of differences. from exercise 3-1-1 and choose Overview. Make note of the count: Logistics →Materials Management →Physical Inventory → Phys.3-1-3 Enter the physical inventory count provided below: Material T-INV1## T-INV1## T-INV1## Stock type 1 2 4 Stock 490 10 0 Logistics →Materials Management →Physical Inventory → Inventory Count →Enter a) Enter the physical inventory document number. Set the Zero Count indicator for the third item.com . g) Exit the List of Inventory Differences. b) Choose Statistics. differences: Initial Screen.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.com .Lifecycle Data Management Contents: Product Lifecycle Management Overview Product Structure Browser Engineering Workbench Classification Variant Configuration Document Management System Engineering Change Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 10-1 Visit: www.co.

co.sapeducation.Lifecycle Data Management: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. you will be able to: Explain how Lifecycle Data Management integrates with the business processes within the mySAP ERP solution Explain the purpose of Product Structure Browser and Engineering Workbench Describe the functions of the Classification system Explain Variant Configuration Gain a basic understanding of the Document Management System Explain the Engineering Change Management Process  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 10-2 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

Lifecycle Data Management: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 10-3 Visit: www.com .sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.Lifecycle Data Management: Business Scenario In your enterprise.com . you use the various life cycle data management tools that enable collaborative engineering and product development.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 10-4 Visit: www. you need to understand the function of the supporting tools provided in mySAP ERP. Therefore.

Any user can call this data at any point from the start of planning to the discontinuation of the product.Product Lifecycle Management Engineering Sales & Production Service Customer Relationship Management Supply Chain Management Product Lifecycle Management Initial product idea  SAP AG 2004 Start of production End of Discontinuation production of product You can manage all product and project data using mySAP Product Lifecycle Management.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The mySAP Product Lifecycle Management solution can be used in tight integration with mySAP Customer Relationship Management. and mySAP Supply Chain Management. © SAP AG TERP10 10-5 Visit: www.co.com .

routings. classes. such as the material master. Engineering change management lets you make changes dependent on date. versioning. and documents. serial number. and engineering change management Object links to other R/3 objects Product structure management Management of materials.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.com . bills of material. most products are first created with a CAD system. © SAP AG TERP10 10-6 Visit: www. or links to other objects. bills of material. engineering workbench. This data can be transferred to the connected Enterprise system by using the PLM interface. This enables the storage of originals in SAP secure storage areas. routings. or custom effectivities. The product data can be recorded in configuration management and transferred to other systems by using replication. using document management. This product data is then managed. At a glance you can see all product-relevant information. This allows you to run a separate system for the engineering process. The product structure browser is the central navigation tool for product data. and replication workbench Integration Integration of most CAx solutions using the PLM interface Engineering change and configuration management Changes to R/3 objects with different validities Documentation of the configuration and distribution to other systems using replication  SAP AG 2004 In the engineering environment.Components of Life-Cycle Data Management Document management Secure storage areas. in addition to the production system.sapeducation. and so on Management using product structure browser. status management. documents.

BOMs. classes. documents. The Enterprise Application Integration (EAI) Viewer lets you display originals directly in the browser.12.Product Structure Browser System Help Product Structure.2001 Choose Manage Save Product structure P-100 Revision levels Docum ent DRW P-100 000 00 DRW P-100 000 00 DRW P-100 000 02 Descript. If you refresh the browser you can immediately see the changes. such as materials.co. © SAP AG TERP10 10-7 Visit: www. you can limit the detail data displayed according to the processing situation.sapeducation. characteristics. Validity date 21. or routings. It displays in tree-structure form all objects that belong to each other functionally. You can call and change each of the objects from the browser.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Pum p PRECISION 100 Viewer Tools Nav igation Options Draw ing for pump Draw ing for pump Draw ing for pump Equipm ent Serial nos Change num ber CNG CNG CNG CNG CNG 01 02 03 04 05 Change Change Change Change Change 01 02 03 04 05 Classification 001 100 002 100 IDE IDES Material class 1 Material class 2 IDES class Standard pumps P-100 Casing C Flyw heel GG Shaft Cov er C Bearing Support Metal St37 Draw ing for pump Draw ing for pump BOMs P-100 1000 1 Items 0010 L 100-100 0020 L 100-200 0030 L 100-300 0040 L 100-400 0050 L 100-500 0060 L 100-600 0070 R 100-700 0080 D DRW P-100 000 00 0090 D DRW P-100 000 01 Variants Change num bers  SAP AG 2004 The graphical Product Structure Browser is the central navigation and information tool in mySAP Life-Cycle Data Management. Using filters.com .

You can define a worklist for the Engineering Workbench.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 10-8 Visit: www.co. You can maintain both BOMs and routings in the EWB. and modifying or deleting the existing objects. such as creation of new objects in the database.com . The objects are copied from the database into the worklist. Save the worlist after processing the objects.Engineering Workbench Worklist Routing BOM Operation 10 Operation 20 Operation 30 Item 10 Item 20 Item 30  SAP AG 2004 The Engineering Workbench (EWB) is used as a maintenance environment for product structures and can be used to do more than simply create BOMs and routings. This contains selected objects that are to be processed in the Engineering Workbench.sapeducation.

co. in the EWB the complete task list or BOM does not need to be locked for processing.Engineering Workbench: Simultaneous Processing Worklist 1 Routing BOM Worklist 2 Operation 10 Operation 20 Operation 30 Item 10 Item 20 Item 30  SAP AG 2004 Another advantage of using the Engineering Workbench is the lock logic on individual data. Any item from any BOMs can be processed by different users at the same time.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 10-9 Visit: www. the Engineering Workbench gives you information on how to contact that person.sapeducation. The person responsible can release the item or operation without stopping processing on other objects. If you want to edit an item that is being processed by someone else.

© SAP AG TERP10 10-10 Visit: www. or power.. For example. and more on entering object attributes and specifications. There is less emphasis on entering an exact object number. or for similar ones that lie between limits that you define. You can search for objects that correspond exactly to your search criteria.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. ????  SAP AG 2004 Classification supports the end-user when searching for objects.Classification ?? Where on earth..com .co. you can search for a pump according to the lift of a pump.

© SAP AG TERP10 10-11 Visit: www.. you first search according to the relevant classes where the materials are classified.. As materials are classified in an enterprise. a material is copied to the BOM.com ..Finding a Material BOM maintenance List of classes Selection Pumps Paints Computer "I need a paint in my bill of material. which has the characteristics values that were entered in the selection criteria.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. List of Materials Material Color Gloss Paint: Characteristics Casing color: Gloss yes/no Blue ." Item 10.sapeducation.. The characteristics are assigned.100-100 Matchcode K Item 20 ??? Assignment BOM maintenance Item 10 100-100 Item 20 100-806 . and the search is started. You select a relevant class and display the characteristics of the classes. You receive a list of materials.co. 100-805 blue 100-806 blue w/o gloss gloss  SAP AG 2004 You require a material master as a new component for the BOM... Finally.

A document could be included in another class as a material master. The following steps are carried out in the framework of classification: 1. Maintain classes and assign the relevant characteristics to classes 3. Casing color Gloss: Yes/no Classification Assignment Object: Class: 100-806 (mat. Create an object (such as a material).com . and assign the class 4. Rather than being directly assigned to the object (such as the material). Relevant objects are assigned to the classes. Then they create these characteristics with specific characteristic values.Classification System: Functions Characteristics Class Class color Power Thread type Length Gloss: Yes/no Weight Casing color .) Color Value assignment Casing color: Gloss: Blue Yes Object search Find class Find objects in a class  SAP AG 2004 This function is only available if the proper preparation has been completed beforehand..co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Find object © SAP AG TERP10 10-12 Visit: www. the characteristics are instead assigned to a class. Create characteristics and allowed values 2. The person responsible has to consider which attributes (characteristics) properly describe their product..

© SAP AG TERP10 10-13 Visit: www. This classification can either take place directly in the object or in the relevant transactions in classification. and the assignment of the characteristics in the class.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Assignment and Value Assignment Classification = assignment + assigned values Color 100-806 Assignment Color class Casing color Gloss: Y/N Assignment Classification Assignment Casing color: Blue Gloss: Y/N Y  SAP AG 2004 Classification means the assignment of objects to a class.com .sapeducation.co.

Variant Configuration: Overview Variant-rich products  SAP AG 2004 Variant-rich products have a vast selection of combinations of individual product features. variant configuration is used in the SAP R/3 Enterprise.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. For this reason. © SAP AG TERP10 10-14 Visit: www.com .

a company that sells or manufactures products. However. © SAP AG TERP10 10-15 Visit: www. with variants. characteristics are used to describe the features of configurable products.com . The configurable material covers all possible features of the product.Variant Configuration for a Pump Pump type Medium Oil Water Plunger Rotary Wing Drive type Manual Electric Connection Right-angled flange Round flange (2 holes) Round flange (4 holes) Other Color Blue Black Red Rotation Left Right Either Pump lift 2 -20 m Circulation Open Closed  SAP AG 2004 Complex products are reflected in complex configuration tasks in sales and production.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. A product that is to be manufactured in multiple variants is reffered to as a configurable material.co. and therefore it is not a finished product. must perform these configuration tasks quickly and accurately. In the SAP R/3 Enterprise.

You use dependencies to configure the BOM. © SAP AG TERP10 10-16 Visit: www. You use dependencies to select the operations that are required for a specific variant. The task list or routing of a configurable material contains all operations that could possibly be required to produce a variant of the material.sapeducation. for example. If the configuration profile contains the appropriate settings. You can explode the tasklist according to the assigned characteristic values. in other words.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. to select the components that are required for the specific variant.Configurable Master Data Master data Dependencies Configured BOMs Configured routing Dependencies Super BOM Dynamic BOM/Order BOM Dependencies Super task list  SAP AG 2004 Copy of task list Dynamic operation sequence The BOM of the configurable material contains all components that could possibly be required to produce a variant of the material. you can make manual changes to the BOM for a sales order. The BOM is exploded according to the characteristic values assigned. Save the BOM as an order BOM for the sales order.com . you can delete or insert components.

Access is controlled using the authorization concept.Document Management External NC program Contracts Computer creates originals SAP system Document info record Material Equipment BOM  SAP AG 2004 The Document Managment System allows the integration of external files into mySAP ERP. The document info record can be linked to other objects. or even electronic files. As the required object you use a document info record. The document is made up of a document info record and the original that belongs to it.co.sapeducation. folders. © SAP AG TERP10 10-17 Visit: www. The originals can be stored in different secure storage areas.com . You can choose the format of the external files. A document is an information carrier with specific information on it that is determined for either the person responsible or for the exchange of information between systems (DIN definition). in order to make the original information available to these objects. which controls the process steps for the originals.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and displayed and processed directly from the document info record. The original can be in paper format.

The document info record is also distinguished by versioning or classification. and third-party archiving systems are connected by using the ArchiveLink interface. Third-party CAD systems are connected to mySAP ERP using the PLM interface.Document Info Record Functions Version management Status management Classification Secure storage areas Document info record Integration in R/3 Object links Interfaces to external systems PLM interface and ArchiveLink interface Display and processing of originals ECL viewer and Microsoft Office integration Easy DMS interface  SAP AG 2004 Document info records allow you to manage original application files and control the process flow. These originals can also be stored in a secure storage area if required.sapeducation. or Microsoft Office integration. You can link a document info record to other objects. and displayed or edited directly when processing the document info record. The Easy DMS interface gives the end user an easy way to handle document management. This is a tool for creating and changing documents without specialist knowledge and without an SAP GUI. You can use the ECL viewer.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .co. © SAP AG TERP10 10-18 Visit: www. The "actual" information is contained in the assigned original application files. such as materials or equipment.

co.. without having to display the document info record. © SAP AG TERP10 10-19 Visit: www..  SAP AG 2004 If you wish to make information in the form of originals available to other objects. and use the object link to a material master to make it available. The originals can be displayed on the page linked to the object.com .sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The object links can also be maintained from either the object side or the document side.Document to Object Links SAP objects Material Equipment Functional location Purchase requisition Document WBS element PRT QM info record Purchase order Change number Network operation Production order Customer Sales document item And so on . documentation or screen information to a document info record. You can link specifications. then object links are created between the document info record and these objects.

Here they are controlled by the R/3 Enterprise.sapeducation.co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 10-20 Visit: www. you can only use them again if you have the correct authorization. You control the storage of the originals with Knowledge Provider (KPro).Storage Areas for Originals Working area for originals Knowledge Provider controls: SAP database Storage (check in) Secure storage area for originals Display. edit HTTP content server Display Edit Print Check in Details Create Open  SAP AG 2004 Delete You can “check in“ originals from the work area. You can connect HTTP content servers or SAP databases to the KPro. This protects them from unwanted reviewing. and into the secure storage area.

such as BOMs and routings more than once.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example. and shop floor and production control. and. when the release key is set for these areas. An effectivity can be a point in time. as necessary. MRP. This means that the objects can be stored with all relevant change status as they occur. These changes are monitored. You can use ECM to store objects. © SAP AG TERP10 10-21 Visit: www. documented completely.Why Make Changes with Engineering Change Management? Changes that belong together are grouped in a change number Monitoring and documentation of changes Saving multiple change statuses for an object Planning and realization of a specific effectivity Integration in the logistics process chain  SAP AG 2004 You can use ECM to group together changes for different objects that are affected by one change. The changes take effect automatically at the pre-defined effectivity in the areas of the logistics process chain. The definition of effectivity in the change master record or in the ECO makes changes effective when this effectivity is made active.com .sapeducation. sales orders.co. ECM is a central logistical function for master data changes.

sapeducation.A Material Change and its Consequences Change the shaft Change BOM BOM Change routing Routing Change Number N-1 Change document . which is used in a BOM and is linked to a document info record by an object link.. The product changes can be carried out with either a change master record or an Engineering Change Request (ECR) and Engineering Change Order (ECO). You can bring these objects together by Engineering Change Management (ECM). A material change.  SAP AG 2004 Changing a material can have many consequences within a company.. This change also affects the data in mySAP ERP. If you need to change a shaft.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. there is a material master record for this. can also affect bills of material. as well as affecting the material master record.co. and documents. routings. © SAP AG TERP10 10-22 Visit: www.com .

co.Linked Objects Material masters Routings Routing Reference operation set (Reference) rate routing Inspection plan Equipment task list Master recipe Task list Bills of material Change Number Material BOM Document structure Equipment BOM Functional Location BOM Sales order BOM Classes Characteristics Classification Documents Configuration profile Dependencies  SAP AG 2004 You can use ECM to make changes to many mySAP PLM Life-Cycle Data Management objects.sapeducation. you can create a change definition. Therefore.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. which is valid for all BOMs and routing. or determine BOM and routing types through a specification. © SAP AG TERP10 10-23 Visit: www.com . This is how you can change a material BOM with a relevant change number. without affecting the document structure.

sapeducation. Alternative dates allow you to control the valid-from date for individual objects more precisely. You determine which objects can be changed with the change number and how by selecting the object types. © SAP AG TERP10 10-24 Visit: www. The object management records specify the actual objects to be changed. exactly which BOM is changed and with which usage. Here you can specify. You can use classification to search for change numbers.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . These include a short change description. You can assign accompanying documents in the form of document info records to the change number. 50000002 Object types Material Bill of Material Task List (and so on) Accompanying documents Classification Alternative dates  SAP AG 2004 In the change header of the change number you enter general data on the change.co. and the status. the validity.Structure of a Change Number Change header Reason for change Validity Status Object management records Material: BOM: Routing: P-100 P-100. 1000. 1 N. for example.

Assignment of Object Management Records Object management rec. This gives you precise control over an object change.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. is to be changed. 1 Object type: . Object: . © SAP AG TERP10 10-25 Visit: www. Change Number Header Object type: Material Object: Material P-100 Object: Material P-100 Object type: Bill of material Object: BOM P-100. or which routing.  SAP AG 2004 The user uses the object types to define whether a bill of material or a routing can be changed...com ..sapeducation.co.. 1000. 1 Object management rec. Then the object management records specify which bill of material. Object: BOM P-100. 1000.

In the header of the ECR. The user then enters the objects that are to be changed. the user enters general information.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Enter objects Change Master Record Material P-100 BOM: P-100 ECR/ECO ECR Enter objects Object mgmt rec. The ECR/ECO. has a status network that enables change processes to be requested. Process objects Material P-100 BOM: P-100 ECO Process objects Object mgmt rec.sapeducation. depending on status. Material P-100 BOM: P-100 Change type: 002 Status change Object mgmt rec. This conversion is dependent on status. unlike the change master record.Comparison of Change Master Record and ECR/ECO Change master record Object mgmt rec.co. Material P-100 BOM: P-100 Change type: 002  SAP AG 2004 In the header of the change master record. The user enters the objects that are to be changed or gets the system to generate them. checked. such as the reason for the change or the validity. the user enters general information. © SAP AG TERP10 10-26 Visit: www.com . A workflow gets the right work to the right person at the right time. Then the user changes the objects. such as the reason for the change or the validity. The user cannot change objects until the ECR has been converted to an engineering change order (ECO). and released. A workflow management system can coordinate the flow of all kinds of information throughout the various activities.

Partially confirmed production orders can also be changed. automated change of production orders that are already used in production Triggered by sales order changes.sapeducation.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In this situation.Order Change Management Provision of a systemsupported tool for the controlled. The changes can either be changed because of a customer requirement or an engineering change by means of a change request.com . or master data changes Engineering or technology changes are required Production order created and partially confirmed Create change master record for master data changes Make changes to master data Release the change Select objects affected by the changes Determine and check the eligibility of the changes Make the changes to the production order  SAP AG 2004 At times. sales orders or projects need to be changed even if they are already scheduled in production and converted into production orders. It enables the early conversion of product structures through requirements planning in production structures and the possibility of changing data up to the very last possible moment. © SAP AG TERP10 10-27 Visit: www. you can use Order Change Management (OCM) in the SAP R/3 Enterprise.

Describe the functions of the Classification system.sapeducation.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 10-28 Visit: www. Explain the purpose of Product Structure Browser and Engineering Workbench.co. Explain Variant Configuration.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Explain the Engineering Change Management Process.Lifecycle Data Management: Unit Summary You are now able to: Explain how Lifecycle Data Management integrates with the business processes within the mySAP ERP solution. Gain a basic understanding of the Document Management System.

you will be able to: • Create a material master record • Assign a class to a material master record • Create a document info record and assign it to a material master record • Use the Product Structure Browser You want to be able to search for a material based upon its properties. you want an overview of your product in the product structure browser.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. because classification will be done later on. Save your material master record © SAP AG TERP10 10-29 Visit: www. T-F6##. 1-1-1 Create a finished product in plant 1000 with the following data: Material: T-F6## Industry Sector: Mechanical Engineering Material Type: Finished product Create the following views for your material master record: Classification Basic data 1 Material description: Base Unit of Measure: Classification view: Class type: Class: Basic data 1 Pump T-F6## PC 001 Leave blank Double click on Material class type 001 in the dialog box.Lifecycle Data Management: Exercises Unit: Lifecycle Data Management At the conclusion of this exercise. The properties of a product are store as characteristics and characteristic values. Do not make any entries on the following detail screen.com . You also want to manage original application files centrally. Finally. The characteristics are assigned to a class which is assigned to the material master records. in plant 1000. To do this you use the document management system. 1-1 Create a finished product.co.

The log field is maintained depending on the status.1-2 Classify the material master record. You will use an available document info record and its originals as a template. © SAP AG TERP10 10-30 Visit: www. Assign values to the characteristics and make a note of the values. 1-3-1 Use the Find Objects in Classes report. a dialog box asks for a log field entry.co. Search with the following class: Class: 100 Class Type: 001 As a result of your search. Assign values to the characteristics and make a note of the values. 1-2-1 Classify material T-F6## by assigning it to class 100 Pumps.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation. 1-4-1 Create a document info record with the following data: Document: T-F6## DRM 000 00 Document Type: Document Part: Document Version: Template: Document: Document Part: Document Version: T-D01 000 00 In the field for document data. you will see the pumps that match the characteristic values that you entered. . enter the following: • • Description: Lab/Office: Pump T-F6## KB1 Save your document info record When you save the document info record or confirm an entry by using the enter key. Pump lift: ___________________ ___________________ Pump capacity: Save your material master record 1-3 Perform a search for a material using the classification system. 1-4 In this task you will create a document info record.

1-5-1 After creating the document info record and making the first entries.co. 1-6-1 Change material master record T-F6##. and determine whether changes to the original application files are necessary.com .sapeducation. To do this display the following document info record and its original application files: Document: Document Type: Document Part: Document Version: T-F6## DRM 000 00 Double-click or choose the display icon. and enter the following in the additional data: Basic data 1 Document Type: DRM Document: T-F6## Document Part: 000 Document Version: 00 Choose the display icon (spectacles) to display the original application files. Another dialog box appears where you can select the original application files.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Enter the following in the log field for status "Work Request" (WR): Document Created 1-5 Display your document info record. to display the original application files. You can also display the original by choosing Display from the mouse menu. Save your material master record © SAP AG TERP10 10-31 Visit: www. link your material master record to a document info record. display your original application files. 1-6 Finally.

com . you use the product structure browser to get an overview of the product structure.sapeducation. 1-7-1 On the initial screen of the product structure browser. you can also display these from the browser.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Since the document has several original application files. enter your material: Material: T-F6## Display the documents and classifications for your material.1-7 Next.co. Exit the browser © SAP AG TERP10 10-32 Visit: www.

T-F6##.com .co.sapeducation. 1-1-1 Create a finished product in plant 1000 with the following data: Logistics→ Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Create (General) → Immediately Material: T-F6## Industry Sector: Mechanical Engineering Material Type: Finished product Select Enter. Do not make any entries on the following detail screen. Create the following views for your material master record: Basic data 1 Classification Enter the following data on the Basic data 1 view: Field Material description Base Unit of Measure Select Enter Data entry Pump T-F6## PC Double click on Material class type 001 in the dialog box.Lifecycle Data Management: Solutions Unit: Lifecycle Data Management 1-1 Create a finished product. in plant 1000. because classification will be done later on.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 10-33 Visit: www. Select the Save icon to save your material master record.

co. 1-3 Perform a search for a material using the classification system.sapeducation. assign values to the characteristics and make a note of the values. Select the Find in initial class button. As a result of your search.1-2 Classify the material master record. Cross-Application Components→ Classification System → Find → Find Objects in Classes Use the matchcode search "Materials for class” for the material. On the Find Objects in Classes screen enter the following values: Class: 100 Class Type: 001 Select Enter Enter the characteristic values that you assigned to the characteristics when you classified your material in exercise 1-2-1. Assign values to the characteristics and make a note of the values.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 10-34 Visit: www. 1-2-1 Classify material T-F6## by assigning it to class 100 Pumps. you will see the pumps that match the characteristic values that you entered. Pump lift: ___________________ ___________________ Pump capacity: Select the Save icon to save your material master record. Logistics→ Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Material: T-F6## Select Enter Select the Classification view Classification view: Class Type: Class: 001 (Material class) 100 Pumps (complete) You have already entered the class type. Select Enter Using the drop down. Exit the search result.com .

enter the following data: Field Document Document Type Document Part Document Version In the Template section: Field Document Document Part Document Version Enter In the field for document data.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation. The log field is maintained depending on the status. 1-4-1 Create a document info record with the following data: Logistics → Central Functions → Document Management → Document → Create On the Create Document: Initial Screen. You will use an available document info record and its originals as a template. Enter the following in the log field for status "Work Request" (WR): Document Created © SAP AG TERP10 10-35 Visit: www. When you save the document info record or confirm an entry by using the enter key.co.1-4 In this task you will create a document info record. a dialog box asks for a log field entry. enter the following: • • Description: Lab/Office: Pump T-F6## KB1 Data entry T-D01 000 00 Data entry T-F6## DRM 000 00 Select the Save icon.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and enter the following in the additional data: Logistics→ Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Enter Material T-F6## Enter Select the Basic data 1 view. Data entry T-F6## DRM 000 00 1-6 Finally.co. Logistics → Central Functions → Document Management → Document → Display On the Display Document: Initial Screen. enter the following data: Field Document Document Type Document Part Document Version Enter Double-click or choose the display icon. and determine whether changes to the original application files are necessary.com . link your material master record to a document info record. Enter Choose the Additional data button Select the Document data tab Enter the following data: Document Type: DRM Document: T-F6## Document Part: 000 Document Version: 00 © SAP AG TERP10 10-36 Visit: www. to display the original application files. Exit the document info record. You can also display the original by choosing Display from the mouse menu. display your original application files.1-5 Display your document info record.sapeducation. 1-5-1 After creating the document info record and making the first entries. 1-6-1 Change material master record T-F6##.

co.com . Cross-Application Components → Engineering Change Management → Environment → Product Structure 1-4-1 On the initial screen of the product structure browser.sapeducation. Since the document has several original application files. enter your material: Material: T-F6## Display the documents and classifications for your material. Exit the browser © SAP AG TERP10 10-37 Visit: www. you use the product structure browser to get an overview of the product structure. Another dialog box appears where you can select the original application files. To view the characteristics and characteristic values. To view the documents. you can also display these from the browser. In the tree-structure. select the puzzle piece icon in the values column. expand the Documents and Classification nodes. select the eyeglass icon in the original column.Choose the display icon (spectacles) to display the original application files.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Save your material master record 1-4 Next.

sapeducation.com . Determine whether this statement is true or false. such as materials. characteristics.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. documents. 2. 3. classes. _________________________________________________________ 5. Within Engineering Workbench the complete task list or BOM is locked for processing.co. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence. © SAP AG TERP10 10-38 Visit: www. Document management allows the integration of external files into your Enterprise system. BOMs. Characteristics are assigned to a ________ which is assigned to an ________. Determine whether this statement is true or false.Lifecycle Data Management: Test Your Knowledge 1. What is the tool that displays in tree-structure form all objects that belong to each other functionally. List some of the benefits of using engineering change management. or routings. __________________________________________________________ 4.

Lifecycle Data Management: Answers 6. You can store objects (for example BOMs. such as materials. 10. documents. Allows you to make changes dependent on date. such as an operation. 8. You can group together changes for different objects that are affected by one change 2.sapeducation. List some of the benefits of using engineering change management.co. What is the tool that displays in tree-structure form all objects that belong to each other functionally.com . document management allows the integration of external files into your Enterprise system.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. characteristics. 7. Answer: Characteristics are assigned to a class which is assigned to an object. 4. Characteristics are assigned to a ________ which is assigned to ________. classes. It is a central logistical function for master data changes. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Answer: Product structure browser is the tool that displays in tree-structure form all objects that belong to each other functionally. routings) more than once base upon relevant change statuses. Engineering Workbench allows the user to lock individual items. BOMs. Answer: 1. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence. Answer: True. serial number. Determine whether this statement is true or false. within a task list. Answer: False. or custom effectivities. 9. © SAP AG TERP10 10-39 Visit: www. or routings. Within Engineering Workbench the complete task list or BOM is locked for processing. 3. Document management allows the integration of external files into your Enterprise system.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation.Project Management Contents: Project Structures Project Planning Project Budgeting Project Execution Period-End Closing  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-1 Visit: www.co.

Production Planning. and Sales Order Management.com .sapeducation. Identify the integration points with Financials. you will be able to: Describe the basic data used in a project. execution.co. and period-end closing steps in project management. budgeting. Explain the project planning.Project Management: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-2 Visit: www. Materials Management.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co.com .Project Management: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-3 Visit: www.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co. different departments create projects to organize and monitor project related activities and to plan and control project costs. you need to understand project structures and the processes of managing a project.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-4 Visit: www. As a project team member.sapeducation.Project Management: Business Scenario In your enterprise.

They have precise targets that are agreed on between the contractor and the sold-to party. © SAP AG TERP10 11-5 Visit: www. Uniqueness  SAP AG 2004 Projects are tasks with particular characteristics: They are usually complex.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. unique. Projects are usually an integral part of a business's commercial processes.Project Characteristics SD Hierarchy of Project Parts Resources Purchasing Budget CrossDepartmental Profitability Dates Planning & Control Costs/Revenues Accounting Production Payments Complexity.sapeducation. Several departments are involved in a project. They are limited in duration and are cost and capacity intensive.co.com . They are of mostly strategic significance for the business carrying them out. They are subject to specific quality requirements. you need a project-specific organizational form that should be in a position central to the user departments involved. and involve a high degree of risk. Before you can control all the tasks that occur as part of project execution.

and payments. and budgeting. Activities form the operative basis for planning and controlling dates. the dates and costs defined in the individual activities are totaled up (aggregated) at the WBS level and can be evaluated. The individual tasks are linked to each other. and shows the project activities to be fulfilled in hierarchical form.sapeducation.co. and materials). costs. machinery.com . When activities are assigned to WBS elements.Project System Master Data WBS Elements Resp. Activities are used to show the flow of a project or of activities involved in a project. as well as for scheduling. © SAP AG TERP10 11-6 Visit: www.-Oriented Org.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and grouped together to form what are known as networks. It forms the operative basis for planning costs. Production resources and tools (PRTs). revenues. Activity funds already assigned are checked against the budgets of the WBS elements. and resources (personnel. 1: N Activities Process-Oriented Org. WBS Element and Activity Assignments  SAP AG 2004 A work breakdown structure (WBS) is a model of a project.

make resources available.com .co.-End Closing Settlement WBS ---------------- Budget Release Network Prod. and assign budgets. The project itself comprises several phases.Phases in a Project Status/ Phase Concept Rough-Cut Planning Costs Detailed Planning Approval Execution Commitment Costs Revenues Per.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 11-7 Visit: www. Order Final Confirmation Time SD Document Invoice Quotation  SAP AG 2004 Order Billing Doc.sapeducation. The Project System gives you the support you need in all project phases. A high degree of precision is required when planning and coordinating large and complex projects. you will schedule deadlines and dates. When planning the flow of a project.

 SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-8 Visit: www. you will be able to: Describe the basic functions associated with work breakdown structures.com . Explain the purpose of networks and activities.Project Structures: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.co.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Describe the use for mass change.

It contains default values that can be passed on to the WBS elements. organizational data and planning parameters. Since the work breakdown structure is structured hierarchically. You define organizational units such as company code. A WBS is a model of a project. The various work packages in the project are described in individual WBS elements. The WBS elements are the objects that are actually used for planning and updating actual data.  SAP AG 2004 The project definition contains data used for the entire project (start and finish dates.Work Breakdown Structures: Structure Project Definition WBS Elements E-99## E-99## Elevator E-99##-1 Engineering E-99##-2 Procurement E-99##-3 Assembly E-99##-4 Acceptance E-99##-1-1 Electrical E-99##-1-2 Mechanical E-99##-2-1 Motor E-99##-2-2 Cabin E-99##-2-3 Equipment Work Brkdwn Struct. You can use the Project Builder or the project planning board to create and change the work breakdown structure.sapeducation. for example).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 11-9 Visit: www. You can edit projects in tabular or graphical mode. business area. You can further divide these elements at various levels until you reach the level of detail you require. It is specified at the beginning of the project creation process.com . and shows the project activities to be carried out as a hierarchical structure. The controlling area is unique for the entire project. and plant for each WBS element. profit center.co. the data can be summarized and displayed for the corresponding higher-level WBS elements.

and the budget. Costs. control. dates. basic dates. Process Costs Interest Calc. and monitoring of costs.co. analysis.sapeducation. description.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and payments are often planned using activities. which are assigned to WBS elements. © SAP AG TERP10 11-10 Visit: www.Work Breakdown Structures: Functions Dates Basic Dates Scheduled Dates Actual 0 1 /0 1 Dates Costs/Revenues Planned Costs/ Revenues Actual Costs/ Revenues 1 Budget Original Budget Budget Updates Budget Releases Availability Control Payment Data Payment Planning (Debit-Side/Credit-Side) Actual Data Updates Periodic Processing Overheads.com . The emphasis is placed on planning. Results Analysis Settlement Commitment Purchase Requisition Purchase Pur c Order Ordehase r  SAP AG 2004 The WBS forms the basis for all subsequent planning tasks in the project.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .co. © SAP AG TERP10 11-11 Visit: www. except for the assignment of production resources and tools (PRT).Project Builder Current Project Overviews for Selected Object Selected Object Detail Screen for Selected Object Worklist and Templates  SAP AG 2004 You can use the Project Builder to maintain any object in the Project System.sapeducation.

the system conducts checks against existing R/3 master data. and other objects to WBS elements. vendors. system users. work centers. When you do. Partners Cost Center Responsible Profit Center Business Area Company Code  SAP AG 2004 You use operative indicators to define the characteristics of a WBS element. You can assign profit centers. this means that it is possible to process projects across companies. When documents are assigned. You can generate cost-center-based rules for costs projects.com .Work Breakdown Structures: Operative Indicators Invo ice Operative Indicators Invo ice Acc. You can specify in the system that E-mail should be sent to the person responsible for the project if the budget is exceeded. Assgmt Element Planning Element Billing Element Project Managers. You can use R/3 Partner Processing to assign customers. These assignments are used mainly for reporting purposes (see unit about Reporting). This information can be used later for reporting by business area or in profit center accounting.co. shipping points. and to specify what tasks the WBS element will assume during project execution: WBS elements for which you want to plan costs are flagged as planning elements. Each WBS element is assigned its own company code. partners (internal and external). HR organizational units. responsible persons. Example 1: Summarizing a large number of projects by business area and persons responsible. business areas. WBS elements where you want to plan or post revenues are flagged as billing elements. and cost centers responsible for the project to WBS elements. Example 2: Analyzing the project key figures of a large number of projects in your cost center hierarchy or profit center hierarchy. personnel numbers. WBS elements to which you want to post actual costs are flagged as account assignment elements.sapeducation. the business area and profit center are derived from the corresponding WBS element.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 11-12 Visit: www. Since different company codes can be assigned to the various WBS elements in a project.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can do this on detail screens or in the list of WBS elements.com . You can also incorporate WBS elements from other projects or from a standard WBS in an existing WBS (3.co. or a standard WBS as a template to copy from. a section of the project hierarchy. and insert these in the hierarchy (connect mode).Work Breakdown Structures: Maintenance Options Manual 1 Hierarchy Graphic 2 Display Area Project Builder Navigation Area Insertion Area Copy 3 Incorporate 4 = Standard Structure = Operative Structure  SAP AG 2004 You can use the Project Builder to create and change WBS elements. You can use the hierarchy graphic to change WBS elements (by double-clicking). © SAP AG TERP10 11-13 Visit: www. You can also create new WBS elements. When you create a new WBS. you can use an existing WBS.sapeducation. 4). You can also use existing project structures or standard projects as templates to copy from.

or the information system). budget management.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you can create new WBS elements or cut and paste subtrees from the hierarchy.com . Description Bill Plan Acct Create WBS Element Change WBS Element (Detail Screen) Connect (Define Hierarchy) Collapse Subtree Expand Subtree Full View  SAP AG 2004 You can edit the structure of the WBS in the hierarchy graphic. You can call up the hierarchy graphic from various Project System transactions (from the Project Builder. © SAP AG TERP10 11-14 Visit: www.WBS Hierarchy Graphic Display Area Navigation Area Insertion Area WBS Element No. from cost planning. For example.co.sapeducation. for example. scheduling.

1 Engineering 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 T-200##. Activities are linked to each other by means of relationships – this results in a causal and chronological activity sequence. In the Project Builder. they also form a quantity structure for planning: Dates (occurs automatically via scheduling) Costs (occurs automatically via costing) Resources (internal activities and external activities) Material requirements (using the assigned components) The Project System has the following activity categories: Internal processing for capacities to be staged in your own company External processing for tasks to be assigned externally Services for procuring external services Cost activities for planning additional primary costs © SAP AG TERP10 11-15 Visit: www. It also means that the planned and actual data for the activities (dates. This means that the activities are assigned to the WBS elements in question. costs.Activities and Networks: Structures T-200## Turbine Activity List for WBS Element (or Network) T-200##0.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .co.2 Planning 2000 T-200##0.sapeducation.4 Production 4000 T-200##0. At the same time. and payment data) can be aggregated at the WBS element level.5 Assembly 5000 6000 Activities 90xxxx Network 1000 2000 3000 3100 1200 1300 1100 4000 Relationships 5000 6000 1400 1500  SAP AG 2004 The activities in a project describe the various steps and work involved in the project.3 Purchasing 3000 3100 T-200##0. you create activities for WBS elements.

tools. Capacities Costs Milestones Billing Dates Based on Billing Milestones (Invoice/Down Pymnt) External Activity/Service Dates Costs.co. Commitments Payments Costs Activity Dates Costs Payments Materials Purch. Parts/Assemblies Costs. and services you need to carry out various tasks in your project.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Activities and Networks: Functions Internal Activity Work Dates.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 11-16 Visit: www. materials.com . Commitments Dates Payments Periodic Processing Process Costs Overheads Settlement  SAP AG 2004 You use the activities in the network to plan the labor. capacities.

When you create activities.Activities: Maintenance Options Manual 1 Ntwk Structure Graphic 2 Display Area Project Builder Copy Navigation Area Insertion Area 3 Copy Project (incl. 2).co. Using the Project Builder or the project planning board. you can also use existing operative structures or standard structures as templates. Activities) 5 = Standard Structure = Operative Structure Incorporate 4  SAP AG 2004 In addition to maintaining data manually and maintaining data in the network graphic (1.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you can use a standard network or an existing network as a template (3).com . You can also incorporate standard networks in an existing network (4).sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 11-17 Visit: www. you can copy a standard project or existing operative project (including all of its activities) to a new project structure (5).

project planning board. by way of relationships).sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 11-18 Visit: www.com . or the information system. A cycle is a closed sequence of relationships and activities (closed means that. for example). when you start out from one activity. and correct them. you end up back at the same activity.Network Structure Graphic Activity Number Description Activity Dates Display Area 3100 09/14/99 09/21/00 PS01 5 0 40 days 11/02/00 11/09/00 Duration of Activity Relationship Procurement of Parts Control Key Activity Float PS 01 Navigation Area Insertion Area PS 02 PS 03 Create Activity Change Activity (Detail Screen) Connect (Create Relationships)  SAP AG 2004 Schedule Align Structure Full View All of the functions you need to create a network are available in the network graphic (the functions for inserting activities or relationships. for example). If the activity-relationship-activity path is cyclical.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Cycle analysis is a function that you can only perform in the network graphic. you will not be able to schedule the network. Cycle analysis is a tool that enables you to detect cyclical relationships.co. You can access the network graphic from various functions in the Project System (the Project Builder.

In the Project Information System. You can assign PS texts to one or more WBS elements or activities.co. CAD formats. You can use the mySAP ERP Document Management System in the Project System to assign document info records to WBS elements and activities. Word. © SAP AG TERP10 11-19 Visit: www. TIF. PS Texts for Activities or WBS Elements T-200##. or to start workflow tasks. The texts are classified into different text types. Milestones have a range of applications. The files in question are stored in the mySAP ERP database.2 Engineering Planning 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 2000 T-200##. BMP. In the Document Management System (DMS). PPT.com . Milestones: Assignments Documents for Activities or WBS Elements T-200## Turbine …… .3 T-200##. for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.1 T-200##.PS Texts.sapeducation.5 Assembly 5000 6000 Milestones for Activities or WBS Elements  SAP AG 2004 PS texts are user-definable texts that are managed in a PS text catalog. you can display the document info records and the corresponding original documents online. Documents. you can assign original (external) documents in various formats (Excel.. and so on) to an (mySAP ERPinternal) document info record.4 Purchasing Production 3000 3100 4000 T-200##. You can enter PS texts in mySAP ERP SAPscript or in Microsoft Word. You can also display the original documents using the Internet. They can be used for milestone billing in SD. You can assign milestones to activities and WBS elements.

if you make a mass change. you cannot undo the changes made. In many cases. To this end. the system includes a formula line (for simple syntax) and an ABAP Editor for complex operations. WBS elements.Mass Change Changeable Objects: Project Definitions WBS Elements Networks Activities Relationships Mass Change Cannot be Undone!  SAP AG 2004 You can use the mass change function to make cross-project changes to fields pertaining to project definitions. always be particularly careful when you use this transaction. © SAP AG TERP10 11-20 Visit: www.com . but only up to a maximum of 320 hours. formula << 2 * X >> Work is to be doubled for all activities. networks.co. this might mean that a large number of objects will be changed simultaneously. activities. you can change numeric field using formulas instead of setting fixed values. and relationships.6. The same authorization objects as for individual changes are used for mass changes.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. As of Release 4. Examples: Work is to be doubled for all the activities selected. complex operation using ABAP code Remember that. You can test the extent of your changes before you actually make a mass change. For this reason.

co. Describe the use for mass change.com . Topic Summary  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-21 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Explain the purpose of networks and activities.Project Structures: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the basic functions associated with work breakdown structures.sapeducation.

co. Describe different types of project cost and revenue planning and their integration implications. Explain the purpose of planning WBS dates and scheduling. you will be able to: Describe the basic functions associated with project planning board. Define the types of resource planning and their integration implications.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-22 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation.Project Planning: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

and when is revenue received? © SAP AG TERP10 11-23 Visit: www.Project Planning Overview Project Structures Dates 1 Costs.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Revenues Payments Materials Resources  SAP AG 2004 A project is subject to a range of factors: Dates: Will the project be completed in time? Resources: Are the available resources adequate? Costs: What will the project cost? Payments: When will incoming payments be received and outgoing payments made? Result: What is the relationship between costs and revenues? When are costs incurred.co.sapeducation.

all the functions available to you at this point are displayed (Important: the options available will depend on exactly where you have positioned your cursor). relationships. where you can change the field selection or the time settings. When you select Select all and Show all dependent objects. documents.com .Project Planning Board: Objects WBS Elements Activities Documents Relationships PS Texts Materials …… . Important navigation options are available in the project planning board: When you double-click certain points in the project planning board. milestones.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. When you press the right-hand mouse button.co. you go directly to detail screens. activities. Basic Dates Milestones 1  SAP AG 2004 The project planning board is a graphical interface you can use to create and edit all the data for a project: Project definition.sapeducation.. and PS text Planning dates and resources (labor. WBS elements. all the objects in the project planning board are displayed. © SAP AG TERP10 11-24 Visit: www. external processing) Cost planning using activities The project planning board is based on an interactive SAP Gantt chart.

The system displays the material components (and the corresponding requirements dates) assigned to the activities selected. As of Release 4.6.The system displays the work centers (and the capacity load utilization) for the activities selected.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Green bars show that capacity is still available.Project Planning Board: Integration Dates Capacity Overview Hierarchy Graphic Cost/Revenue Overview xx xx xxx xx xxxx xxxx xx x xxx xxx xxxxx Ntwk Structure Graphic t Materials Overview Maint.co. Materials Overview . you can display the PM orders assigned to an activity in a separate chart. © SAP AG TERP10 11-25 Visit: www. you can call up the hierarchy graphic for WBS elements or the network graphic for activities. you can also display the following project overviews: Capacity Overview .com .The system displays the development of costs/revenues for the WBS element or activity selected. and work interactively there. Orders PM  SAP AG 2004 In addition to the Scheduling Overview. From the project planning board (and the Project Builder). Cost/Revenue Overview . red bars mean that the available capacity has been exceeded.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. or calculate dates at a later point in time. reconcile.sapeducation. You can then use this rough-cut plan as the basis for more detailed planning or scheduling using networks. You can use several functions in date planning to compare.co. In rough-cut planning. you specify dates for WBS elements that are binding for more detailed planning.Basic Dates for WBS Elements Project Planning Board WBS E-99## E-99##-1 E-99##-1 E-99##-2 E-99##-1 Actual Dates E-99##-2 E-99##-2 Actual Dates Basic Dates in Project Definition E-99##  SAP AG 2004 You can plan dates for individual WBS elements as well as you can enter outline dates for your project in the project definition.com . © SAP AG TERP10 11-26 Visit: www.

The Purchasing Department carries out service processing (including entry and acceptance of services performed). if you use service activities. you can draw up service specifications and set value limits for any unplanned services.co. External processing is carried out via the purchasing department. Load Utilization Vendor Pu r c Or d hase er Work Center Workforce Planning Externally Processed Activity Service Activity  SAP AG 2004 Internally Processed Activity You use activities in a network to plan the resources required for a project.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 11-27 Visit: www.Resource Planning 2000 3000 1000 1100 1400 1500 3100 1200 1300 4000 5000 Cap. Service activities are also used to procure services externally. and distribute work among employees. You can evaluate the capacities of the various work centers involved.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The difference between service activities and externally processed activities is that. The Project System draws a distinction between the following resources: An internally processed activity determines the output to be provided by machines or personnel in order to complete the activity. reschedule these capacities as necessary. You use an externally processed activity to specify the necessary services to be provided by other companies in order to complete the activity.

when you confirm activities.com . You need to specify the amount of work involved and the work center that is to perform the work. Among Workforce Capacity Leveling Cost Center Data  SAP AG 2004 You must enter work data for an activity so that the system can plan capacities for a project and calculate costs for activities. You can determine work center capacities for the activities.co. Work centers contain data for costing activities. Work centers also contain the scheduling and capacity data necessary for scheduling and capacity planning.sapeducation. If necessary. A work center is the place where an activity is carried out or work output is produced. Actual Dates.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you consume (reduce) capacity requirements. and enter actual dates and actual costs.Internal Processing 1200 Work: 500 hrs Work Center: 2700 Capacity Load Reduction. Actual Costs Scheduling Data Available Capacity Work Performed In-House Cap. Generally speaking. you can use the project planning board or the capacity planning tables to level capacities. Reqmnts Planned Dates Planned Costs Capacity Analysis 1 Assignment to Persons Confirmation Work Distrib. You can also distribute the work among employees (workforce planning). Work is the output to be provided by machines or personnel in order to complete an activity. © SAP AG TERP10 11-28 Visit: www.

for example. which contains prices and delivery times for external processing). A service activity triggers a similar purchasing process. but can also contain a hierarchy of planned services to be purchased. © SAP AG TERP10 11-29 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.External Processing 1400 Description Material Group Purchasing Group Quantity and Unit Work Performed by a Third Party (Vendor) Purchase Requisition Invoice Verification Bid Invitation Quotation Entry Vendor Selection PO Processing Vendor Goods Receipt PO Monitoring Purc Orde hase r  SAP AG 2004 You can create activities and activity elements as externally processed activities or external elements in a network (if. You can access data from purchasing for external processing (a purchasing info record. for example. When you create such an activity.co. and value limits for unplanned services. a purchase requisition is also created. you commission an engineering office to design a machine). The goods receipt for services involves two steps: Entry of services performed Acceptance of services performed. You use the control key to determine whether an activity is externally processed. and processed further in Purchasing.com .

and Production Planning and Control (PP).co.com . © SAP AG TERP10 11-30 Visit: www.sapeducation. Materials Management (MM).Materials in Projects SD PS MM Purc hase Orde r SD Production Order PP  SAP AG 2004 Materials establish the link between the Project System and Sales and Distribution (SD).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Planned Costs in Projects (1) Overall Planning (Hierarch.000 400. where you use a profile to enter quantities (materials. and using these activities to plan costs.co. This method has the following advantages: The resulting plan can be copied to new projects.sapeducation. variable items. Unit costing. Easy Cost Planning is an easy-to-use option for planning costs by cost element. internal activities. Planning) Cost Planning Using Activities/Network Costing 600. external services. In addition to manual planning in the WBS.000 200. As the name suggests. you also have the option of creating activities for WBS elements. using a quantity structure. Planning using network activities is by cost element and period. You can then use Execution Services to enter commitments and actual data relating to the planned costs.000 Cost Element Planning 400000 150000 415000 75000 E F K 10h Activity 1421 10h Vendor 1000 $5000 ce 466000 400000 180000 415000 80000 Unit Costing Projects and Orders Σ Easy Cost Planning I/0099 Σ PP PM/CS CO  SAP AG 2004 You can plan project costs in two different ways: Manual cost planning in WBS Cost planning using activities (network costing) Manual planning in the WBS involves: Overall planning. Easy Cost Planning from Release 4. where you enter costs for each WBS element. If parts of the project are shifted. This type of planning is cost-element-based and period-based. cost planning is shifted automatically along with the activities.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the most basic form. © SAP AG TERP10 11-31 Visit: www.6C. You can break down your figures by fiscal year if you want.com . Detailed planning of primary costs and activity inputs. and so on) for each WBS element. This type of planning is cost-elementbased.

or actions in the costing items (in the example above. Easy Cost Planning can act as a simple preliminary costing for projects. an easy-to-use tool for planning costs in WBS elements. You can use planning templates to enter costing items. Choose a WBS element from the structure tree. In the process.co. © SAP AG TERP10 11-32 Visit: www. In this case. You access Easy Cost Planning for projects from the Project Builder. by a quantity structure of networks/activities. values. The costs so planned are broken down later – for example. we offer Easy Cost Planning.sapeducation.Planned Costs in Projects – Easy Cost Planning  SAP AG 2004 From Release 4.com . with the quantity for an internal activity). Costing items are created for this WBS element. characteristics (such as work in hours) are valued. The characteristic values from the planning template are linked with quantities. the costing items appear under the relevant WBS elements in the structure tree. Cost planning using Easy Cost Planning is by cost element. Once you have adopted the values.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Use Customizing to define the CO versions you want available in Easy Cost Planning. you later use Execution Services to enter commitments and actual data relating to the planned costs. You can also use Easy Cost Planning to create plan data for the project execution phase.6C.

Element Cost Element Planned Costs (Example Without Overheads) Valuation 100 h * 150 10 pc * 800 60 h * 300 9000 Cost Element 612000 400000 415000 466000 Description Internal Proc.00 18.co. Material External Proc. Transport Value 15.000. © SAP AG TERP10 11-33 Visit: www.00 8.com . the system determines the corresponding planned costs automatically.Planned Costs in Networks External Processing Services Material Components Internal Processing Primary Costs Int.00 Σ  SAP AG 2004 50.000.sapeducation.00 9.000.000.00 When you plan dates and resources for network activities. Element Ext. Planned costs are determined for the following objects: Activity inputs for internally-processed activities Primary costs for externally-processed activities and services Primary costs for general costs activities Primary costs for material components Activity elements are costed as if they were activities.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.000.

. Revenue planning using PS billing plans. or on the basis of revenue elements). © SAP AG TERP10 11-34 Visit: www..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. .sapeducation.Planned Revenue – Methods SD Doc. The latter of the two is cost-element-based and period-based. Assigned SD F Revenues Billing Plan for WBS Elements Bill i n Plan g Manual Planning Time 01 02 03 04 05 06 2001 2000 Overall E-1399 E-1399-1 E-1399-1-1 E-1399-1-2 E-1399-2 . This type of planning is revenue-element-based and period-based. . F F Bill i n Plan g  SAP AG 2004 You can plan revenues in your project in the following ways: Manual revenue planning (structure-oriented.. .co. PLAN...... SD DOC.. TOT. This type of planning is revenue-element-based and period-based. Revenue planning using SD documents (sales order items or even quotation items). ...com .

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.Project Planning: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the basic functions associated with project planning board. Define the types of resource planning and their integration implications. Explain the purpose of planning WBS dates and scheduling.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-35 Visit: www.sapeducation. Describe different types of project cost and revenue planning and their integration implications.com .

co. you will be able to: Explain the differences between planning and budgeting.Project Budgeting: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-36 Visit: www.com .sapeducation. Explain the function of budget availability control.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

. Cost Planning Overall Plan Value Bottom-Up Extrapolation Budgeting ..Cost Planning and Budgeting Requested Budget Approved Budget 2004 2003 Overall E-1399 E-1399-1 E-1399-1-1 E-1399-1-2 E-1399-2 ... Budget Top-Down Distribution  SAP AG 2004 While you must estimate your project costs as accurately as possible during project cost planning.co. O R I G I N A L P L A N. The budget differs from the cost plan in that it is binding. © SAP AG TERP10 11-37 Visit: www. ..sapeducation...nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. it is in the approval phase that funds are actually allocated in the form of a budget..com . It is the device by which management approves the anticipated development of project costs over a given period of time. ..... T O T A L D I S T R I B.

000 80.000 30. Together with the costs of apportioned orders. If certain tolerance thresholds are breached (shortfall in budget. © SAP AG TERP10 11-38 Visit: www. Purchase Req..com .sapeducation. The funds overview can be regarded as a passive availability control. Funds Reservation) 50. the Project System also provides an active availability control. However.000 ! 50. budget exceeded). you can specify which reaction should be triggered and when. availability control is run for each subsequent posting in the project.000 PP PM CO PS  SAP AG 2004 When a project is being executed.000 nin g Bu Ex dget ce ed ed Person Responsible Inbox 120. During the availability control: The budget-bearing WBS elements (called controlling elements) are determined.co. Commitments are created and actual costs are incurred. this can trigger various system reactions (a warning. The corresponding assigned funds are determined. and checked against the budget.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The assigned funds can be found in the budget-bearing WBS element and in the lower-level assignable WBS elements.000 Orders 50. various centers call on the available funds. The assigned funds can be found in the budget-bearing WBS element itself.000 Actual Costs 30.000 100. and in the lower-level assignable WBS elements (account assignment elements). The corresponding assigned funds are calculated. for example.000 Commitment (Purchase Order. In Customizing for the tolerance limits. Once activated. The assigned funds are checked against the budgets of the controlling elements.Availability Control + - Er Wa r ro Budget Assigned r 250.000 50. both these forms of fund commitments result in what are referred to as assigned funds. or an error message).

Project Budgeting: Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain the differences between planning and budgeting.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-39 Visit: www. Explain the function of budget availability control.com .co.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . you will be able to: Explain the functions involved with posting to projects and their integration implications.sapeducation.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-40 Visit: www.co. Describe different methods of posting labor to a project. Define the integration between projects and materials management from a purchasing process.Project Execution: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

assigned CO orders Financial Accounting (FI): down payments. payments Asset Management (AM): settlement to assets Human Resources (HR): entry of work for persons. goods receipt for materials and services Inventory Management: goods issue for reservations Sales and Distribution (SD): billing of the sales order Production Planning (PP): confirmation of assigned production orders Plant Maintenance (PM): confirmation of assigned PM orders Controlling (CO): internal activity allocation. © SAP AG TERP10 11-41 Visit: www.Aspects of Project Execution Costs. Actual data is posted to the project by business transactions from various components of the SAP mySAP ERP System. Revenues 1 Dates Resources Payment Data Availability Control Integration MM PP PM SD PS FI AM CO HR  SAP AG 2004 You must release the project (or the work packages in question) before you can enter actual data.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. and posting as activity confirmation Note: You can use the Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) even if you have not implemented the HR component.com .sapeducation. These components include: Materials Management (MM): Purchasing: purchase order.

activity element. changing the activity status. or to an organizational unit. These include posting actual costs. activity. actual labor (work). From the information system. Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) Via the Internet (by creating an individual confirmation. actual dates.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. CATS) CS PM CATS HR Time Sheet  SAP AG 2004 Confirmations document the processing status of activities and activity elements in a network. and accessing individual or collective confirmation).Confirmation Options PDC External System Indiv. or entering time data in the Time Sheet) Using Palm Pilot and the open PS interface Via the PDC interface © SAP AG TERP10 11-42 Visit: www. Various business transactions are carried out automatically by means of confirmations./Collective. You can create confirmations in the following ways: Individually for each network. if applicable. and.com . Workflow CO PS Open PS CATS Notebook Internet Internet Confirmation (Indiv.sapeducation. and enable you to make forecasts as to how the project will progress. Conf. you can send a confirmation workflow to another user. Confirmation 2000 3000 1000 3100 1200 1300 1100 1400 1500 Collective Confirmation PDC Confirmation Offline Solutions 1 4000 5000 6000 - lm Pa ilot P MM Confirmation from Info System.co. or individual capacity As a collective confirmation Using the structure information system (by selecting activities.

Cross Application Time Sheet (CATS) MM CO PS Working Hours CS CATS PM HR Transfer HR Attendance/ Absence Types PS Confirmation PM of Activities CO Internal Cost Allocation MM Services CS  SAP AG 2004 CATS is an integrated function for entering actual time data important in HR. Notes on PP production orders: You cannot use CATS to enter confirmations for production orders because production confirmations deal primarily with yields and scrap quantities. if necessary.sapeducation. the data is transferred to the applications in question. Report programs pass on the released (and. PS. You can determine the layouts yourself. When transferred to CO. and Materials Management-Services (MM-SRV). The actual time data may be important for various applications simultaneously. using data entry profiles. you can use CATS to enter hours and assign them to the production order as receiver object (using the Order field). approved) data to the various applications. © SAP AG TERP10 11-43 Visit: www. the hours so entered are posted as an internal activity allocation in the production order.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. PM. CO.co.com . In this case. However. You can enter activities in the time sheet via the Internet. CS.

and accepting them. © SAP AG TERP10 11-44 Visit: www. they are passed on to the network activity or WBS element. and monitoring the orders until the goods and invoices are received. you can also create purchase requisitions and purchase orders manually. selecting vendors. These purchase requisitions are passed on to the purchasing department. The purchasing process involves issuing a request for quotation to vendors (if applicable).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Depending on the account assignment category of the purchase order. and value limits for unplanned services.  SAP AG 2004 Order Monitoring PO Processing (PO Commit. entering these quotations in the system. entry and acceptance of services is performed instead of goods receipt. When the purchase requisition is converted into a purchase order. Based on the account assignment. The purchase requisition results in purchase requisition commitments for the account assignment object (activity or WBS element). A service activity triggers a similar purchasing process. actual costs are posted upon goods receipt or invoice receipt (valuated. but can also contain a hierarchy of planned services to be purchased. converting the purchase requisitions into purchase orders. this results in purchase order commitments for the account assignment object (this is a different value type than purchase requisition commitments).com . Costs) Quotation Entry Vendor Selection * In service processing. The goods receipt for services involves two steps: entering services performed. nonvaluated goods receipt). where they are processed further. and assign them to WBS elements. As an alternative to having the network generate purchase requisitions automatically.) The network generates purchase requisitions for external processing activities.sapeducation. service activities and materials that are procured directly.Integration: Purchasing Process Purchase Requisition (PO Commitment) Invoice Verification (Act.co. Processing Services Material Component Create and Assign Manually Goods Receipt* (Act. Costs) Bid Invitation Activities Ext.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Project Execution: Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain the functions involved with posting to projects and their integration implications. Describe different methods of posting labor to a project.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-45 Visit: www.com .co. Define the integration between projects and materials management from a purchasing process.sapeducation.

sapeducation. Explain the scenarios involved in settling projects from an integration perspective.Period-End Closing: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: Describe the functions of project period-end closing and their integration implications.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-46 Visit: www.com .co.

The procedures are generally carried out for the previous month at the start of the next month. Object Cat.6.Period-End Closing: Processes Settlement Template Allocation Process Template COABC Incoming Orders Inc. Period-end closing procedures are performed periodically in the background. usually once every period. PS. (Process) S P S_EINK Qty P_LAGER Form_1 Overhead Rates Orders on Hand New Partial Order Invoice Final Invoice Results Analysis F F SchedMan Project Interest Calc.Orders Order Change Pr. Progress Analysis Cost Forecast Costs Time 1 2 3 4 5 6  SAP AG 2004 Period-end closing is the framework for carrying out period-related commercial transactions. © SAP AG TERP10 11-47 Visit: www.co.com . and so on. As of Release 4. You use it to ensure that all the data belonging to a period is determined and that data is available for enterprise controlling purposes. you can use the Schedule Manager to help you carry out period-end closing. The Schedule Manager supports workflows for FI. CO.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

but also for all the WBS elements and activities subordinate to the billing elements. AUC Asset under Const. under the control of the investment profile for the WBS elements. N.S. N.S. profitability segment) Project System (WBS element.co. N. N. N.S. N. N. N. N. Rules prescribing settlement to AUC were generated when the WBS elements were released. Profitability Segment  SAP AG 2004 During settlement. The settlement rule contains the distribution rules and the settlement parameters for a sender object.S.S.S. Reason: Results analysis usually takes place at billing element level. In the case of sales project T-200##.S.S.S. All other objects are assigned the settlement profile . N. activities) You need a settlement rule to carry out settlement.S. N.S.sapeducation. The results analysis data contains not only the costs and revenues for the billing elements. only the billing element has a settlement rule.S. When the project is technically closed. N.Settlement Scenarios Sales Project: Settlement of Billing Element to Profitability Segment Investment Project: Settlement to Asset Under Construction or to Asset F T-200## N. cost center. only the billing element is settled.com .S. E-99##-1 1-1 1-2 E-99## E-99##-2 2-1 2-2 2-3 = No Settlement = Settlement Rule E-99##-3 AUC E-99##-4 N.S.S. the WBS elements are settled to an asset master record.S. You define the settlement rule in the sender object. N.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and the values are transferred from the AUC to the asset.S. © SAP AG TERP10 11-48 Visit: www. This being the case. N.S. network. N. N.Do not settle. The WBS elements for investment project E-99## are settled to assets under construction (AUC). costs/revenues are posted to: Financial Accounting (G/L account) Asset Accounting (fixed asset) Cost Accounting/Profitability Analysis (order.

com .sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-49 Visit: www.co. Explain the scenarios involved in settling projects from an integration perspective.Period-End Closing: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the functions of project period-end closing and their integration implications.

Materials Management. and period-end closing steps in project management. execution.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Identify the integration points with Financials. budgeting.com . Production Planning.Project Management: Unit Summary You are now able to: Describe the basic data used in a project. Explain the project planning.co.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 11-50 Visit: www. and Sales Order Management.sapeducation.

1-2-1 Enter the following data in the dialog box: Field Name Project def. Project profile Template Std proj. The customer project consists of a work breakdown structure and network with activities and the investment project consists of a work breakdown structure. 1-1 1-2 In order to create a work breakdown structure. Using the Project Builder. call up the Project Builder. Values T-200## Turbine model group 1 T-20001 Leave other fields as they are. Do this by copying standard project T-20001 and its activities. © SAP AG TERP10 11-51 Visit: www. def.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . create a project called T-200##.sapeducation.Project Structures: Exercises Unit: Project Structures Topic: Work Breakdown Structures • Project Builder • WBS elements • Activities You use the Project Builder to create a customer project called Turbine and an investment project called Conveyor.

you will now see various objects that were copied from the standard project: + Project definition (1st line) + WBS elements + Activities + Milestones The activities are grouped together in networks with the provisional number (example: %00000000001). Close the network graphic and return to the Project Builder. © SAP AG TERP10 11-52 Visit: www.co. 1-3-3 Drag the line between the Worklist section and the structure tree section down until you can see all the objects in the project.1-2-2 Enter the following in the basic data for the project definition: Field Name Description Start Finish Values Turbine GR## Today’s date Today + 1 year Leave other fields as they are On the left of the structure. 1-2-3 Save project T-200##. 1-3 You now want to add more activities to project T-200##. 1-3-4 Create an external processing activity for WBS element T-200##.com . 1-3-1 Change project T-200## by double clicking the appropriate line in the worklist. and enter FS relationships.1 (Engineering and Design). 1-3-2 Now expand the entire structure. enter the following data: Field Name Activity Text Info record Values 1400 Engineering of rotating blades 5500000093 Leave other fields as they are 1-3-5 Go to the network graphic.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. 1000 → 1400 → 4000 Now align the activities. On the detail screen of the activity External.

1-4-1 Enter the following data in the project definition: Field Name Project def. © SAP AG TERP10 11-53 Visit: www.1-4 Create your investment project E-99##. The structure tree on the left now shows the various objects you have created: • • Project definition (first line) WBS elements 1-4-3 Change the order in which Identification and Name in the structure tree so that the project number appears far left. description and the project profile. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBS Element @ @1 @11 @12 @13 @2 @21 @22 Description New Conveyor GR## Engineering and design Electrical Engineering Mechanical Engineering Structural Engineering Procurement Procure Conveyor system Procure Equipment PE X X Acct asst X X X X X X X X X Confirm your entries.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Maintain the following data there: Lev. Description (no field name visible) Project profile Investment Profile Values E-99## Conveyor GR## 9000 Investment projects 1000 Enter your project number.com . 1-4-2 Go to the WBS element overview. 1-4-4 Save your project.co. then select enter.

The activity is expected to last 25 days. Field Name Duration Values 25 (days) © SAP AG TERP10 11-54 Visit: www. Normal duration. The system has been set up in such a way that scheduling occurs automatically when you save. The activity dates determined are aggregated.sapeducation. use the planning board to change your turbine project. The durations of the various activities. and are displayed for the WBS elements. This occurred during network scheduling. and the relationships between activities. of drawing/calculation/design). You can also extrapolate the activity dates in the project hierarchy. 2-1-2 Consider the scheduling-relevant data in activity 1000 (Engineer.. Activity dates have already been determined for the turbine project. All these fields play a role in scheduling. and look at the control key. 2-1-1 Now display the milestones defined for your project. look at the fields. play a particularly important role in scheduling. On this detailed screen.com . 2-1 In session 1. Factory calendar. and Work center.Exercises Unit: Project Planning Topic: Planning Basic Dates for WBS Elements • Scheduling • WBS date planning In your turbine project. planned dates are determined automatically when you schedule the activities.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Change the duration of the activity.co.

2-1-4 Extrapolate the scheduled dates of the WBS elements right up to the level 1 WBS element (T-200##).com . The system also extrapolates activity dates for the assigned WBS elements – as the scheduled dates of the WBS elements.sapeducation. In the upper part of the screen. Determine these dates by rescheduling.co. These dates can also be extrapolated further to determine the duration of the entire project. 2-1-5 Save your date planning. Now go back to the overview screen of the project planning board. you can see the earliest and latest dates defined for the activity (as a result of scheduling). In the lower part of this screen. the dates for all activities are redetermined. Note that you can set up your system so that dates are scheduled and extrapolated automatically when you save. you can define constraints. © SAP AG TERP10 11-55 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Choose the Dates tab page. 2-1-3 The change you have made will also affect the dates defined for subsequent activities. When you do this. and in this way fix dates for activities.

Values T-200## 1300 T-20000 1300 3 In the results overview. you also plan material requirements. By copying from another project (that is.co.com . These assignments are made automatically by means of the BOM/PS interface. 3-1-1 Enter the following data on the initial screen: Field Name Project definition Profile Material Plant BOM usage 3-1-2 Transfer the bill of materials. you will see the components of the (multilevel) BOM that were assigned to the activities in your project because they had the same reference points. You activate procurement of the material by assigning material components to network activities. There are two other ways of assigning material components to activities: 1. The components are assigned when you save your data. By assigning components manually using the Project Builder or project planning board © SAP AG TERP10 11-56 Visit: www.sapeducation. components have already been assigned to the other project) 2. assign BOM components to the activities of your project T-200##. The engineering and design department uses CAD systems to map the product structure in the form of bills of material (BOMs).Optioanal Exercises Unit: Project Planning Topic: Material Requirements Planning (MRP) In your turbine project. 3-1 Transferring BOMs: In session 1.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

© SAP AG TERP10 11-57 Visit: www. special stock indicator.com . you can see the various components and their requirements dates. In the chart. The Procurement Parameters screen contains important information on quantity and value flows (the account assignment type.sapeducation. or the GR/GI List). Leave the project planning board without saving (no values were changed). display the procurement parameters for the component. for example). for example.3-1-3 Save your bill of materials transfer. By choosing the appropriate tab page. you can see the reservation number for the component. Select all objects. On the General Data screen. and check over the material view of your project.co. Now go back to the overview screen of the project planning board. By right-clicking. and go to the component overview.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and Consumption indicator. you can display other information on the components (the detail screen. 3-1-5 Go to the detail screen of component T-20210. 3-1-4 Go back to the project planning board for project T-200##.

4-1 Now that the turbine project cost planning is complete. This type of cost planning has important advantages over manual cost planning: • • • It can be copied to other projects and stored in standard networks. It is easy to shift in time.Optional Exercises Unit: Project Planning Topic: Cost Planning One type of project cost planning involves using activities and their assignments to WBS elements.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example. you need to postpone project work packages.000 Distribution Key 2 2 © SAP AG TERP10 11-58 Visit: www. 4-1-2 Plan costs for WBS Elements WBS Element E-99##-1 E-99##-2 Cost Element 417000 Purchased Services 415000 External Procurement Total Plan Costs 30.000 130.co. Scheduling. use the Cost Element/Activity Inputs transaction to plan costs for your Conveyor project. call up the cost element planning to plan project costs using plan version 0. capacity requirements planning and procurement is triggered by activities (integration of planning). if. 4-1-1 In session 1. all costs are shifted with the new scheduling.com .

enter the following data: Field Name Act. 5-1-3 Now select activities 1000 and 1100. 5-1-4 Also select the actual set of dates so that you can check over the confirmation dates of both activities. Then go back to the main SAP menu. 5-1-5 Save your data. On the detail screen of the confirmation. change customer project T-200## using the project planning board. Create confirmations for these activities. The confirmation transaction is used to enter both actual dates and actual costs for the activities. 5-1 Create confirmations for your turbine project (T-200##). the project in question must be released before you can enter actual data. 5-1-2 Select all objects and change their status to Released.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . 5-1-1 In session 1. You can use the project structure to evaluate both types of information in aggregated form. © SAP AG TERP10 11-59 Visit: www.start Actual finish Actual work Values Same as scheduled earliest start date Seven days later than scheduled earliest finish date Slightly more than the work planned Leave other fields as they are Use the pushbutton to proceed to the next activity (1100) and enter data in the same way as for activity 1000. Once again.Optioanal Exercises Unit: Project Execution Topic: Confirmation of Activities You use the project planning board to confirm activities in your turbine project.sapeducation.

Then go back to the main SAP menu. the external activities and material components required for the project are purchased from vendors. purchasing organization 1000 (by choosing Assign Manually). 6-1-1 Enter the following data in the initial screen: Field Name Plant Processing key Create purchase requisition Values 1300 NETCH 1 (!!) Leave other fields as they are 6-1-2 Start the planning run. you can manually assign any unassigned purchase requisitions to vendor 1000.co.Optional Exercises Unit: Project Execution Topic: Purchasing Process (***Instructor Only***) In this exercise.com . Furthermore. we will assume that all goods to be procured externally will be procured from one vendor. you will adopt the roles of the MRP and purchasing departments. Do all this work online. 6-1 Instructor only: Carry out an MRP planning run for materials in plant 1300. © SAP AG TERP10 11-60 Visit: www. you will not issue a request for quotation. 6-2-1 Do this by calling up the report called Purchase Requisitions for Project in the information system. To make matters simpler. As trainer.sapeducation. 6-2 Instructor only: Assign the purchase requisitions of the course participants' turbine projects to vendor 1000.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Although it is not absolutely necessary. 6-2-2 Specify that the purchase requisitions should be assigned automatically to vendors using existing purchasing info records. Save the assignments and go back to the main SAP menu. You will also post the goods receipt for the purchase order.

co. In the Create Purchase Order screen.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. so that you can see the open purchase requisitions.6-2-3 In Purchasing. Then open up the item overview. Use the purchase requisition assignment list you created to do this. select all the purchase requisition items and copy them to the purchase order.sapeducation. create a purchase order for vendor 1000. With the shift key pressed down. Enter a purchase order of the type NB.com . Widen the left hand part of the screen.location In plant Propose the OK function in future Propose all items Save these settings Values 0001 1300 X X ____________________ © SAP AG TERP10 11-61 Visit: www. first close the notes in the middle part of the screen. 6-2-4 Now enter a goods receipt for the purchase order. the document overview. First. The following data should be entered in the detail screen: Field Name Stor. check the default value settings you have made. Make any necessary changes. Make a note of the purchase order number: Go back to the main SAP menu. Enter the following data on the initial screen: Field Name Purchasing organization Vendor Plant WBS Element from to Values 1000 1000 1300 T-20001 T-20099 Leave other fields as they are Edit the assignments to vendor 1000. Save the purchase order.

com . enter your purchase order number.order Purchase order number you made a note of earlier © SAP AG TERP10 11-62 Visit: www. Confirm your entries. Purc.co.6-2-5 In the screen for purchase order goods receipts. Goods receipt 6-2-6 Post goods receipt.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Then go back to the main SAP menu.

These tasks will include overhead calculation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . determine the results analysis keys that are assigned to the billing WBS elements of project T-200##. you will execute period end closing using individual processing for each task. results analysis or settlement) are performed on a fiscal year period basis. From the period end closing. Results Analysis.sapeducation.co. 7-1-1 Access the project builder for your project T-200##. access results analysis using individual processing for project T-200##. 7-1-2 Results Analysis: Carry out results analysis for the current period for project T-200##. In the following. Enter the following data in the initial screen: Field Name WBS Element. A results analysis key is required for the calculation of results. 7-1 Assigning the Results Analysis Key and executing Results Analysis. results analysis. and settlement. Values T-200## Current period Current year 0 No Yes © SAP AG TERP10 11-63 Visit: www. (usually at the start of a period and for the preceding period).ClosingOpOptional Exercises Unit: Period-End Closing Topic: Overheads. For your customer project. Calculation to month Year Results analysis version Manual Processing Only Full log Execute the report. Settlement • • • Overhead Results Analysis Settlement Procedures that are performed periodically (for example.

then balances are created for the inventory from which revenue can be generated. Save your results. then reserves are created for the unrealized costs. Field Name Project With hierarchy Period Fiscal Year Test Run Detail Lists Values T-200## Yes Current period Current year No Yes © SAP AG TERP10 11-64 Visit: www.com . This prevents the profit from being overstated in the fiscal period.sapeducation. 7-2-1 Generate the settlement rule for your project T-200##. If the proportional revenue (POC actual revenue: planned revenue) determines calculated COS greater than actual COS. The system uses this figure to calculate reserves for unrealized costs or work in process (WIP). such as the POC. 7-2 Generate the settlement rule for your turbine project and execute settlement. 7-1-3 Access the logs to obtain additional information regarding the results analysis calculation. Cost of sales (COS) is calculated for the project. and the configuration for results analysis key 130001.co. Results analysis key 130001 and results analysis version 0 stipulate revenue-proportional results analysis in the IDES system.Review the list of results analysis values for your project.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. If the proportional revenue determines calculated COS less than the actual COS.

co. From the display.sapeducation. There are two views of the detail list.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Accrual Data for FI.com . Values T-200## Yes Yes Current period Current year Automatic No Yes No © SAP AG TERP10 11-65 Visit: www.7-2-2 Carry out project settlement for your turbine project using the individual processing transaction within the period end closing menu. Display the settled amounts by selecting Detail lists. Sender or Accounting documents for review. Enter the following data in the initial screen: Field Name Project Definition With hierarchy With orders Settlement Period Fiscal Year Processing Type Test Rum Detail list Check trans. you can select the Receiver. and List of Settled Values. Exit the detail list and return to the main SAP menu. Data Execute the report.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Confirm your entries by choosing Enter. call up the Project Builder.) Confirm the Project Builder options by selecting Enter. SAP Easy Access menu Accounting or Logistics → Project System → Project → Project Builder (Select Project Builder by double-clicking. Set the Preview last project indicator in the Project Builder: User-Specific Options dialog box.Solutions Unit: Project Structures Topic: Work Breakdown Structures 1-1 In order to create a work breakdown structure.co.com .sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 11-66 Visit: www.

Choose Continue.co.com . Double-click the line containing T-200## in the worklist.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 1-2-2 Enter the following in the basic data for the project definition: Field Name Description Start Finish Values Turbine GR## Today’s date Today + 1 year Leave other fields as they are On the left of the structure. Project → New → Copy project 1-2-1 Enter the following data in the dialog box: Field Name Project def. If prompted.1-2 Using the Project Builder. Project profile Template Std proj. you will now see various objects that were copied from the standard project: + Project definition (1st line) + WBS elements + Activities + Milestones The activities are grouped together in networks with the provisional number (example: %00000000001).sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 11-67 Visit: www. 1-3 You now want to add more activities to project T-200##. choose Continue to confirm start date message. def. create a project called T-200##. 1-3-2 Now expand the entire structure. Choose Expand all. Values T-200## 2001 Turbine model group 1 T-20001 Leave other fields as they are. 1-2-3 Save project T-200##. 1-3-1 Change project T-200## by double clicking the appropriate line in the worklist. Choose Save. Do this by copying standard project T-20001 and its activities.

© SAP AG TERP10 11-68 Visit: www. Drag down dividing line between Structure and Worklist. and enter FS relationships. 1-3-5 Go to the network graphic. Select Yes to Save Node Item.1-3-3 Drag the line between the Worklist section and the structure tree section down until you can see all the objects in the project. Choose Complete view. double click External processing. Place your cursor on WBS element T-200##. Choose Connect. drag the (pencil-shaped) cursor from the end of the preceding activity to the beginning of the succeeding activity 1000 → 1400 → 4000 Now align the activities. Close the network graphic and return to the Project Builder. In the Template section. Confirm the dialog box that appears. Choose Enter. Choose Back. click Individual Objects. click Activity. and confirm that purchasing data should be read from the purchasing info record. 1-3-4 Create an external processing activity for WBS element T-200##. In each case. Choose Save.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Choose Continue.com . 1000 → 1400 → 4000 Choose Network graphic.1. enter the following data: Field Name Activity Text Info record Values 1400 Engineering of rotating blades 5500000093 Leave other fields as they are Press Enter.sapeducation.co.1 (Engineering and Design). Some of the engineering work for the turbine is to be outsourced to an engineering company. Choose Adjust. On the detail screen of the activity External.

scroll to the right in the table. Choose Project → New → Project 1-4-1 Enter the following data in the project definition: Field Name Project def. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBS Element @ @1 @11 @12 @13 @2 @21 @22 Description New Conveyor GR## Engineering and design Electrical Engineering Mechanical Engineering Structural Engineering Procurement Procure Conveyor system Procure Equipment X PE X X Acct asst X X X X X X X X Confirm your entries. description and the project profile. Enter your data.) Lev. Choose Enter. then select enter.co. Description (no field name visible) Project profile Investment Profile Values E-99## Conveyor GR## 9000 Investment projects 1000 Enter your project number.1-4 Create your investment project E-99##.sapeducation. Maintain the following data there: Choose WBS Element Overview. (In order to set the operative indicators.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 1-4-2 Go to the WBS element overview.com . The structure tree on the left now shows the various objects you have created: • • Project definition (first line) WBS elements © SAP AG TERP10 11-69 Visit: www.

sapeducation. Right-click on the structure tree header – Product Structure:Description and choose Display sequence → Identification – Name Enter a project start date using today’s date and a project end date of 9 nine months in the future. On the basic data tab enter your project start date and end date. Select the project definition in your structure.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . © SAP AG TERP10 11-70 Visit: www. 1-4-4 Save your project.1-4-3 Change the order in which Identification and Name in the structure tree so that the project number appears far left. Choose Save.co.

and are displayed for the WBS elements. use the planning board to change your turbine project.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The activity dates determined are aggregated. The system has been set up in such a way that scheduling occurs automatically when you save.. Activity dates have already been determined for the turbine project. This occurred during network scheduling. You can also extrapolate the activity dates in the project hierarchy. Choose Show all dependent objects. and the relationships between activities. 2-1-1 Now display the milestones defined for your project. planned dates are determined automatically when you schedule the activities. Choose Select all. play a particularly important role in scheduling. The durations of the various activities.sapeducation. 2-1 In session 1. Project System menu Project → Project Planning Board → Change Project Double-click Project T-200## in the worklist.Solutions Unit: Project Planning Topic: Planning Basic Dates for WBS Elements • Scheduling • WBS date planning In your turbine project.com . © SAP AG TERP10 11-71 Visit: www.co.

All these fields play a role in scheduling. Change the duration of the activity. Select Level 1 . Expand the ID column to see the full field.WBS element T-200## Edit → Reconcile/Dates → Extrapolate Dates Values 25 (days) Note that you can set up your system so that dates are scheduled and extrapolated automatically when you save. Determine these dates by rescheduling. and in this way fix dates for activities. Choose Save. Go to the detail screen by double-clicking. and Work center. © SAP AG TERP10 11-72 Visit: www.co. 2-1-4 Extrapolate the scheduled dates of the WBS elements right up to the level 1 WBS element (T-200##). Choose Back. and look at the control key. Factory calendar. you can see the earliest and latest dates defined for the activity (as a result of scheduling). In the upper part of the screen. the dates for all activities are redetermined. Field Name Duration Choose the Dates tab page. Now go back to the overview screen of the project planning board. look at the fields.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Select Yes to save User Specific Options.sapeducation. The activity is expected to last 25 days. Normal duration. you can define constraints. Choose Schedule. Choose Select all. When you do this. Select Dates tab page In the lower part of this screen.2-1-2 Consider the scheduling-relevant data in activity 1000 (Engineer of drawing/calculation/design). The system also extrapolates activity dates for the assigned WBS elements – as the scheduled dates of the WBS elements. 2-1-5 Save your date planning. 2-1-3 The change you have made will also affect the dates defined for subsequent activities.com . Double-click activity 1000 On this detailed screen. These dates can also be extrapolated further to determine the duration of the entire project.

You activate procurement of the material by assigning material components to network activities.Optional Solutions Unit: Project Planning Topic: Material Requirements Planning (MRP) In your turbine project.co.sapeducation.com . By copying from another project (that is. Project System menu Material → Planning → Bill of materials transfer (double-click) 3-1-1 Enter the following data on the initial screen: Field Name Project definition Profile Material Plant BOM usage 3-1-2 Transfer the bill of materials. In the results overview. 3-1 Transferring BOMs: In session 1. you will see the components of the (multilevel) BOM that were assigned to the activities in your project because they had the same reference points. These assignments are made automatically by means of the BOM/PS interface. components have already been assigned to the other project) 4. The components are assigned when you save your data. you also plan material requirements. Choose Execute.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. There are two other ways of assigning material components to activities: 3. By assigning components manually using the Project Builder or project planning board Values T-200## 1300 T-20000 1300 3 © SAP AG TERP10 11-73 Visit: www. assign BOM components to the activities of your project T-200##. The engineering and design department uses CAD systems to map the product structure in the form of bills of material (BOMs).

Project System menu Project → Project Planning Board → Change Project Double-click line T-200## in the worklist Select all objects. Choose Select all. Choose Back twice © SAP AG TERP10 11-74 Visit: www. special stock indicator. Use your right mouse button or double-click component T-20210 By choosing the appropriate tab page. Leave the project planning board without saving (no values were changed).3-1-3 Save your bill of materials transfer. 3-1-5 Go to the detail screen of component T-20210. By right-clicking. Choose the Proc. you can see the various components and their requirements dates. and check over the material view of your project. Now go back to the overview screen of the project planning board. for example). param tab page On the General Data screen. display the procurement parameters for the component.co. for example.com . or the GR/GI List).sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In the chart. and go to the component overview. 3-1-4 Go back to the project planning board for project T-200##. The Procurement Parameters screen contains important information on quantity and value flows (the account assignment type. and Consumption indicator. you can see the reservation number for the component. Choose Save. Choose Component Overview. you can display other information on the components (the detail screen.

© SAP AG TERP10 11-75 Visit: www. capacity requirements planning and procurement is triggered by activities (integration of planning).Optional Solutions Unit: Project Planning Topic: Cost Planning One type of project cost planning involves using activities and their assignments to WBS elements. all costs are shifted with the new scheduling. use the Cost Element/Activity Inputs transaction to plan costs for your Conveyor project.sapeducation.com . 4-1-1 In session 1. It is easy to shift in time. you need to postpone project work packages. 4-1 Now that the turbine project cost planning is complete. Scheduling. call up the cost element planning to plan project costs using plan version 0.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example. if. Enter cost elements 415000 to 420000 Choose Form-based Select the Overview Screen Plan the following values against the appropriate WBS element. This type of cost planning has important advantages over manual cost planning: • • • It can be copied to other projects and stored in standard networks. Project System menu Financials → Planning → Costs in WBS Select “Set Planner Profile” Choose planner profile “SAPALL” 4-1-2 Plan costs for WBS Elements Project System menu Financials → Planning → Costs in WBS → Costs and Activity Inputs → Change Enter the following data in the planning screen: Plan Version From Period To Period Fiscal Year 0 1 12 Current Fiscal Year Enter WBS Element E-99##-1 to E-99##-2 to plan costs for all WBS elements.co.

000 Distribution Key 2 2 At the top of the screen is you planning input values for the periods and year that you are planning.WBS Element E-99##-1 E-99##-2 Cost Element 417000 Purchased Services 415000 External Procurement Total Plan Costs 30.com .sapeducation.000 130.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The first WBS element is also above the entry screen for plan values. Choose Post to save cost element planning © SAP AG TERP10 11-76 Visit: www. Enter the appropriate value for the first WBS element then choose “Next Combination” to plan values on subsequent WBS elements. Select OK to any information messages.co. Note: You will have to press “Next Combination” more than once to get to the next WBS element that has a planning operative indicator.

5-1-3 Now select activities 1000 and 1100.sapeducation. Choose Deselect all. the project in question must be released before you can enter actual data. 5-1-2 Select all objects and change their status to Released. enter the following data: Field Name Act. Project System menu Project → Project Planning Board → Change Project Double-click the line containing T-200## in the worklist. The confirmation transaction is used to enter both actual dates and actual costs for the activities. Holding the Control key (Ctrl) down.Optional Solutions Unit: Project Execution Topic: Confirmation of Activities You use the project planning board to confirm activities in your turbine project. Once again.start Actual finish Actual work Values Same as scheduled earliest start date Seven days later than scheduled earliest finish date Slightly more than the work planned Leave other fields as they are © SAP AG TERP10 11-77 Visit: www. You can use the project structure to evaluate both types of information in aggregated form.com . select activities 1000 and 1100. Then choose Confirm activity. 5-1-1 In session 1.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 5-1 Create confirmations for your turbine project (T-200##). change customer project T-200## using the project planning board. Create confirmations for these activities.co. Choose Select all. On the detail screen of the confirmation. Edit → Status → Release Reverse all selections.

Use the pushbutton to proceed to the next activity (1100) and enter data in the same way as for activity 1000. Enter actual data for activity 1100 (as for activity 1000 above).com . Choose Next activity. Choose Copy.co. © SAP AG TERP10 11-78 Visit: www.sapeducation. Choose Back.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Then go back to the main SAP menu. Choose Back. Choose Set of dates/view. 5-1-5 Save your data. 5-1-4 Also select the actual set of dates so that you can check over the confirmation dates of both activities. Choose Save. Also select the Actual dates option in the dialog box.

As trainer.co. Then go back to the main SAP menu. the external activities and material components required for the project are purchased from vendors. Do all this work online. 6-1 Instructor only: Carry out an MRP planning run for materials in plant 1300.sapeducation.com .Optional Solutions Unit: Project Execution Topic: Purchasing Process (***Instructor Only***) In this exercise. Furthermore. you will not issue a request for quotation. Project System menu: Information System → Material → Purchase Requisitions → For Project Select all the turbine projects of your course attendees. You will also post the goods receipt for the purchase order.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. we will assume that all goods to be procured externally will be procured from one vendor. To make matters simpler. and execute the report. 6-2-1 Do this by calling up the report called Purchase Requisitions for Project in the information system. SAP menu: Logistics → Production → MRP → Planning → Total Planning → Online 6-1-1 Enter the following data in the initial screen: Field Name Plant Processing key Create purchase requisition Values 1300 NETCH 1 (!!) Leave other fields as they are 6-1-2 Start the planning run. © SAP AG TERP10 11-79 Visit: www. Choose Enter three times Choose Back twice 6-2 Instructor only: Assign the purchase requisitions of the course participants' turbine projects to vendor 1000. you will adopt the roles of the MRP and purchasing departments. Choose Execute.

6-2-3 In Purchasing.6-2-2 Specify that the purchase requisitions should be assigned automatically to vendors using existing purchasing info records. If prompted. purchasing organization 1000 (by choosing Assign Manually). If necessary.com .sapeducation. Main SAP menu: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Via Requisition Assignment List Enter the following data on the initial screen: Field Name Purchasing organization Vendor Plant WBS Element from to Values 1000 1000 1300 T-20001 T-20099 Leave other fields as they are Choose Execute.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. so that you can see the open purchase requisitions. choose New Purchase Order. you can manually assign any unassigned purchase requisitions to vendor 1000. Enter a purchase order of the type NB. the document overview. Position your cursor on the line 1000 NB 1000. Edit → Select → Select all Choose Assign automatically. © SAP AG TERP10 11-80 Visit: www. Then open up the item overview. choose purchasing info record 5500000093 Although it is not absolutely necessary. Save the assignments and go back to the main SAP menu. first close the notes in the middle part of the screen. Widen the left hand part of the screen. Choose Close. In the Create Purchase Order screen.co. Choose Back twice. Use the purchase requisition assignment list you created to do this. Edit the assignments to vendor 1000. Choose Save – Change Requisitions. Choose Process assignment. Accept data in popup. create a purchase order for vendor 1000. choose Continue.

check the default value settings you have made. Position the cursor on the first purchase requisition.location In plant Propose the OK function in future Propose all items Save these settings Choose Adopt. 6-2-4 Now enter a goods receipt for the purchase order. With the shift key pressed down. Confirm any warnings Save the purchase order. move the cursor to the last purchase requisition. Press the shift key. select all the purchase requisition items and copy them to the purchase order.Drag the dividing line for the left side of the screen to the right. Make a note of the purchase order number: Go back to the main SAP menu. thereby selecting the whole block.sapeducation. Confirm the dialog box that appears Values 0001 1300 X X ____________________ © SAP AG TERP10 11-81 Visit: www.com . Choose Adopt. Keeping the shift key down. Open up the item overview. Choose Save. Settings → Default Values The following data should be entered in the detail screen: Field Name Stor.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Make any necessary changes. SAP Easy Access menu Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order (MIGO) First. Then choose Back twice.

order Purchase order number you made a note of earlier © SAP AG TERP10 11-82 Visit: www.6-2-5 In the screen for purchase order goods receipts. Choose Post.sapeducation. enter your purchase order number. Confirm your entries.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Goods receipt Choose Execute. Confirm any warnings Then go back to the main SAP menu. Choose Back Purc.co.com . 6-2-6 Post goods receipt.

Assign the results analysis key 130001 to the WBS element T-200##. Results Analysis. A results analysis key is required for the calculation of results.Closing Optional Solutions Unit: Period-End Closing Topic: Overheads. These tasks will include overhead calculation. you will execute period end closing using individual processing for each task.sapeducation. For your customer project. © SAP AG TERP10 11-83 Visit: www. Project Systems menu: Basic data → Project Builder Select project T-200##. Choose Save. Choose the Control tab page.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Double click WBS element. 7-1 Assigning the Results Analysis Key and executing Results Analysis.co. determine the results analysis keys that are assigned to the billing WBS elements of project T-200##. Settlement • • • Overhead Results Analysis Settlement Procedures that are performed periodically (for example. Choose Control tab page. (usually at the start of a period and for the preceding period).com . Branch to the detail screen for billing elements T-200##. and settlement. results analysis. results analysis or settlement) are performed on a fiscal year period basis. 7-1-1 Access the project builder for your project T-200##. No other WBS elements are assigned RA keys. In the following.

© SAP AG TERP10 11-84 Visit: www. This prevents the profit from being overstated in the fiscal period. Calculation to month Year Results analysis version Manual Processing Only Full log Execute the report. Cost of sales (COS) is calculated for the project. Values T-200## Current period Current year 0 No Yes Results analysis key 130001 and results analysis version 0 stipulate revenue-proportional results analysis in the IDES system. then reserves are created for the unrealized costs. If the proportional revenue determines calculated COS less than the actual COS. and the configuration for results analysis key 130001. From the period end closing.co.sapeducation. then balances are created for the inventory from which revenue can be generated. The system uses this figure to calculate reserves for unrealized costs or work in process (WIP). Choose Execute.7-1-2 Results Analysis: Carry out results analysis for the current period for project T-200##. such as the POC. 7-1-3 Access the logs to obtain additional information regarding the results analysis calculation. access results analysis using individual processing for project T-200##. Project System menu: Financials → Period-End Closing → Results analysis → Proceed → Individual processing Enter the following data in the initial screen: Field Name WBS Element. Choose Save.com . Review the list of results analysis values for your project.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Logs → Explanation Facility Save your results. If the proportional revenue (POC actual revenue: planned revenue) determines calculated COS greater than actual COS.

Project Systems menu: Financials → Period-End Closing → Single Functions → Settlement Rule → Individual Processing Field Name Project With hierarchy Period Fiscal Year Test Run Detail Lists Choose Back twice. Project System menu: Financials →Period-End Closing → Single Functions → Settlement → Individual processing Values T-200## Yes Current period Current year No Yes © SAP AG TERP10 11-85 Visit: www. 7-2-2 Carry out project settlement for your turbine project using the individual processing transaction within the period end closing menu.com .7-2 Generate the settlement rule for your turbine project and execute settlement.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. 7-2-1 Generate the settlement rule for your project T-200##.

There are two views of the detail list. Exit the detail list and return to the main SAP menu. and List of Settled Values.Enter the following data in the initial screen: Field Name Project Definition With hierarchy With orders Settlement Period Fiscal Year Processing Type Test Rum Detail list Check trans. From the display.com . Values T-200## Yes Yes Current period Current year Automatic No Yes No © SAP AG TERP10 11-86 Visit: www. Sender or Accounting documents for review.co. Choose Execute. Choose Exit.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Data Execute the report. Accrual Data for FI.sapeducation. you can select the Receiver. Display the settled amounts by selecting Detail lists.

revenues. It shows the operative basis for planning costs. (2) create projects in SAP Project System and transfer them to Microsoft Project. 2. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 5. 4. 3. Projects are tasks with particular characteristics. This results in a causal and chronological activity sequence. (3) change projects and transfer them in both directions. as well as for scheduling and budgeting. List the different type of activities used in Project System. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. What are six typical areas of focus for project planning? © SAP AG TERP10 11-87 Visit: www.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Open PS offers the following options: (1) create projects in Microsoft Project and transfer them to SAP Project System. List six characteristics of projects. The ________________________ in a project describe the various steps and work involved in the projects. Activities are linked to each other by means of relationships. and shows the project activities to be fulfilled in hierarchical form. Determine whether this statement is true or false.sapeducation.co. A _____________________________________________ is a model of a project.Project Structures: Test Your Knowledge 1. and payments. 6.

7. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. 8. 10. ___________________. you can plan the necessary material requirements for a project. 13.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Describe the purpose of the network scheduling type. © SAP AG TERP10 11-88 Visit: www. 12. Describe the function provided by the work center. By assigning materials to activities.com . Determine whether this statement is true or false. 14. ________________. You can plan revenue just one way in your project. Actual data is posted to the project by business transactions from only one other component of SAP. Determine whether this statement is true or false. An externally processed activity determines the output to be provided by machines or personnel in order to complete the activity.co. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. and ___________________ are different types of budget updates. Determine whether this statement is true or false.sapeducation. The system differentiates __________ items and ________________ items. List the three modules integrated tightly to Project System with respect to materials? 11. _______________ 9.

___________________. ___________________. ___________________.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. ___________________. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. and __________________ are examples of period-end transactions run for a project. __________________. © SAP AG TERP10 11-89 Visit: www. __________________.co.sapeducation.com .15. ___________________.

The ________________________ in a project describe the various steps and work involved in the projects. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. revenues.com . Projects are tasks with particular characteristics. (2) have precise targets that are agreed on between the contractor and sold-to party. and payments. This results in a causal and chronological activity sequence. Open PS offers the following options: (1) create projects in Microsoft Project and transfer them to SAP Project System. (4) can be cross-departmental. (3) change projects and transfer them in both directions. and involve a high degree of risk. Answer: Work breakdown structure (WBS) 3. and (6) are of mostly strategic significance to the business carrying them out. (4) resources. (5) are subject to specific quality requirements. Answer: Projects (1) are usually complex. Answer: Activities 4. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Activities are linked to each other by means of relationships. 2. (3) are limited in duration and are cost and capacity intensive.Project Structures: Answers 1. It shows the operative basis for planning costs. List the different type of activities used in Project System. (2) dates. as well as for scheduling and budgeting. (2) create projects in SAP Project System and transfer them to Microsoft Project. A _____________________________________________ is a model of a project. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. (3) payments. unique. and cost activities (for planning additional primary costs). and shows the project activities to be fulfilled in hierarchical form. What are six typical areas of focus for project planning? Answer: The typical areas of focus for project planning are (1) project structures. and (6) costs/revenues.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. List six characteristics of projects. Answer: True 6. services (for procuring external services). 5. Answer: Internal processing (for capacities to be staged in your own company).co. (5) materials.sapeducation. external processing (for tasks to be assigned externally). © SAP AG TERP10 11-90 Visit: www.

Describe the purpose of the network scheduling type. Reservations are created for stock items. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. sales order. 10. 9.7. List the three modules integrated tightly to Project System with respect to materials? Answer: Materials establish the link between the Project System and (1) Sales and Distribution. 11. project stock. As such.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 8.com . Answer: You must enter work data for an activity so that the system can plan capacities for a project and calculate costs for activities. An externally processed activity determines the output to be provided by machines or personnel in order to complete the activity. or sales order stock. © SAP AG TERP10 11-91 Visit: www. Purchase requisitions are created for these components and passed directly to Purchasing. You need to specify the amount of work involved and the work center that is to perform the work. and (3) Production Planning. the work center is the place where an activity is carried out or work output is produced. (2) Material Management. The system determines the earliest dates of the activities by means of forward scheduling. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Answer: False An internally processed activity determines the output to be provided by machines or personnel in order to complete the activity. and the latest dates by means of backward scheduling. The scheduling type determines the direction in which you start to schedule. By assigning materials to activities.co. Answer: Networks in the Project System are always scheduled forward and backward. Non-stock items are used for components that are not procured by way of warehouse stock.sapeducation. The system differentiates __________ items and ________________ items. Describe the function provided by the work center. you can plan the necessary material requirements for a project. or project stock). Answer: Stock and non-stock Stock items are entered for materials that are kept in stock (warehouse. but are procured directly by a network activity instead.

and (9) Human Resources (entry of work for persons. (5) Plant Maintenance (confirmation of assigned PM orders). interest calculation. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. (6) Controlling (internal activity allocation.sapeducation. and (3) using sales documents (sales order items or even quotation items) 13. and settlement are all examples of period-end transactions run for a project. Answer: False Actual data is posted to the project by business transactions from various SAP components including: (1) Materials Management (purchase order. incoming orders. Fill in the blank to complete the sentence. Answer: False You can plan revenues in your project (1) manually (structure-oriented or on the basis of revenue elements). posting of activity confirmation). returns. results analysis.12. (3) Sales and Distribution (billing of the sales order). ___________________. ___________________. Determine whether this statement is true or false. © SAP AG TERP10 11-92 Visit: www. 14. payments. ___________________. ___________________. cost forecast. Answer: Supplements.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. overheads. Actual data is posted to the project by business transactions from only one other component of SAP. (4) Production Planning (confirmation of assigned production orders). and ___________________ are different types of budget updates. (2) Inventory Management (goods issues). Answer: Template allocations. (8) Asset Management (settlement to assets). (2) using PS billing plans. __________________. progress analysis. assigned CO orders). ________________. (7) Financial Accounting (down payments. and transfers are different types of budget updates. ___________________. __________________. 15.co. You can plan revenue just one way in your project. journal entries). Determine whether this statement is true or false.com . ___________________. and __________________ are examples of period-end transactions run for a project. goods receipt for materials and services).

co.sapeducation.Enterprise Asset Management Contents: Enterprise Asset Management Organizational Levels Technical Objects Breakdown Maintenance Process Reporting and Analysis  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-1 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

sapeducation. you will be able to: List the organizational levels in Enterprise Asset Management Define the technical objects used in the Enterprise Asset Management Perform the Corrective Maintenance process Identify the reporting and analysis tools used in Enterprise Asset Management Identify the integration points with other mySAP ERP processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-2 Visit: www.co.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Enterprise Asset Management: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.

sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Enterprise Asset Management: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-3 Visit: www.co.com .

As a project team member.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you need to identify technical objects used in plant maintenance and also the breakdown maintenance cycle. when a piece of equipment malfunctions.sapeducation.com . and to plan and control the repair costs. you create a maintenance order to plan and monitor the repair activities.Enterprise Asset Management: Business Scenario In your enterprise.co.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-4 Visit: www.

com .sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: List the organizational levels used in Enterprise Asset Management Define the various organizational units in a Plant and Cross-plant Maintenance system Define maintenance work centers and their role and functions in Enterprise Asset Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-5 Visit: www.Enterprise Asset Management Organizational Structures: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.co.

© SAP AG TERP10 12-6 Visit: www. site. for example.co. It corresponds. If the maintenance work is planned at this plant. Locations subdivide a maintenance plant according to locational criteria. building for example: mechanics Planning-Based Organizational Units Maintenance planning plant Maintenance planner groups for example: foreman. the plant is one of the most important organizational units. Within Logistics. is called the maintenance plant. A maintenance plant can also be subdivided into plant sections based on responsibility for production. at which the operational systems of a company are installed. the maintenance plant is also the maintenance planning plant (planning plant for short). The plant. The units of capacity in Plant Maintenance are managed as maintenance work centers. A maintenance planning plant is the organizational unit in which maintenance requirements are planned. for example. The subsidiaries with their own financial statements and balance sheets are defined as company codes. coordinates.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. These requirements can either come from your own plant or from another maintenance plant assigned to this maintenance planning plant.sapeducation. to a corporate group with several subsidiaries. The planners within a maintenance planning plant are defined by maintenance planner groups. Maintenance work centers are assigned to the respective maintenance plant as workshops. The person responsible for the plant section is the contact person who coordinates production and maintenance (plant engineer).Organizational Levels General Organizational Units in Logistics Client Company code Plant Location-Based Organizational Units Maintenance plant Location Maintenance Work Centers for example: site. Within a client.com . building. It usually represents a production unit of a company. work scheduling  SAP AG 2004 The organizational structure in Enterprise Asset Management is as follows: The client is the highest-level element of all the organizational units. the system always accesses the same database.

All further functions (maintenance planning. however..Cross-Plant Maintenance Plant 1200 Maintenance requirement Plant 1300 Maintenance requirement Workshops Plant 1000 Planning of maintenance requirements Workshops Maintenance requirement Warehouse …. Material  SAP AG 2004 Plant-specific planning: Maintenance plant = planning plant. the maintenance orders are executed by workshops from the same plant.co. Cross-plant planning: Multiple maintenance plants are assigned to a planning plant. as a technical system there requires maintenance (= maintenance plant). and the spare parts are stored in the same plant (for example: plant 1000). In one plant (for example.com . plant 1300) as well as the spare parts procurement take place in another plant (plant 1000).sapeducation. In most organizational structures. the tasks are performed by workshops available locally. the maintenance requirement is planned in the same plant where it occurs. plant 1200) there is a need for maintenance. spare parts storage) are. order execution. Other constellations are also conceivable: The planning of a plant's requirements (for example. the responsibility of another plant. However. © SAP AG TERP10 12-7 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. A work center can be one of the following: Machine Group of machines Person Group of people In Plant Maintenance.Maintenance Work Centers Maintenance Work Centers For example: Welding Metalworking Mechanics  SAP AG 2004 A work center is an organizational unit within an operational system. © SAP AG TERP10 12-8 Visit: www.com .sapeducation. work centers are used as: Main work center in the master record for the equipment or functional location Main work center in a maintenance item Main work center in the task list header Performing work center in the operations for a task list Main work center in the order header Performing work center in the operations for an order Work centers belong to the master data and provide the capacity required to perform a task.

you can use work center hierarchies to aggregate (at higher-level work centers) the available capacity and capacity requirements of lower-level work centers.00 124. the link to the cost center provides activity types for valuating the operation. During scheduling. the time required for the operations must be calculated and compared with the time available in the work center. If the work center is used in an operation. Its goal is to assign to the various cost objects the costs that were incurred by them. Capacity planning: In capacity planning.00 4048. For this. which have been entered for scheduling in the work centers.com . During capacity planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.00 1200. The standard values and quantities in the operations are used as the basis for this calculation.Work Center: Main Functions Work center Work center 10 Default values for task lists and orders 11 Costing data Scheduling data and available capacity Task list/order Costing 2724.sapeducation. the capacity requirements for the operations in the orders are determined and compared with the available capacity defined in the work center. the start and end dates for the operations are calculated from this data using formulas. © SAP AG TERP10 12-9 Visit: www.00 Lead time scheduling Capacity planning  SAP AG 2004 The Work Center has several functions as follows:Costing: You can use costing to determine the costs of an internal activity by a product unit. Scheduling: You can use scheduling to determine the dates when operations should be performed.

Enterprise Asset Management Organizational Structures: Topic Summary You are now able to: List the organizational levels used in Enterprise Asset Management Define the various organizational units in a Plant and Cross-plant Maintenance system Define maintenance work centers and their role and functions in Enterprise Asset Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-10 Visit: www.com .co.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

com . you will be able to: Define Functional Locations Identify functional location using structure indicator Define Equipment Identify the application of Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-11 Visit: www.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.Technical Objects: Topic objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

condensation). You can structure the functional location according to spatial (for example. polymerization. technical (for example. Spatial Technical Functional Criteria  SAP AG 2004 Functional locations are hierarchically ordered structures that represent a technical system.co. building 2). hierarchical structure. press frame. or functional.Functional Location Functional location = multi-level. © SAP AG TERP10 12-12 Visit: www.. building 1. press hydraulics). process-oriented criteria (for example.com . organized according to .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. press. or part thereof. The aim of creating a functional location is to structure a technical system or building into units that are relevant for Plant Maintenance. that is.. building.sapeducation.

com . Maintenance tasks have to be performed for individual areas in the structure of your technical system and this work must or should be recorded.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 12-13 Visit: www.Criteria for Functional Locations For what purpose is a functional location created? Execution of maintenance tasks Recording of maintenance tasks Data collection over long periods of time. Technical data for certain parts of your technical system has to be stored and evaluated over a long period of time. You want to analyze what effects the usage conditions have on the the likelihood of damage to the installed equipment.co. The costs of maintenance tasks have to be monitored for certain parts of your technical system. Cost monitoring by area What affect do the usage conditions have on the likelihood of damage to the installed aggregates?  SAP AG 2004 You should use functional locations to structure your systems if: You want to represent the structures of the technical systems in your company according to functional criteria.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

which equals the maximum length of the coding template. and how these characters are grouped together or split.letters.9 A1-B02. © SAP AG TERP10 12-14 Visit: www. The structure indicator consists of two input fields: Coding template and Hierarchy levels The coding template is used to control which characters may be used for identification .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. A functional location can be identified using a maximum of 40 characters.sapeducation.9-C.9-C A1-B02. or both.Structure Indicator Coding template Hierarchy levels AN-ANN-N-X-X 1 2 3 4 5 6 A=Alpha N=Numeric X=Alphanumeric Location number A1 A1-B A1-B02 A1-B02.1 System Area Sub-area Function Sub-function Item  SAP AG 2004 The identification for functional locations is created using the structure indicator. The hierarchy levels are used to define which level ends at which character and how many hierarchy levels the structure may contain.co. numbers.com .

address. structure indicator. equipment. Organisation: Account assignment (for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. responsibilities (for example.Master Record for Functional Location Functional location master record Equipment usage Classification Documents/technical drawings General Location Multilingual texts Organization Structure Address/partner Meas. © SAP AG TERP10 12-15 Visit: www.sapeducation. Additional data or links in the master record for the functional location can also be activated as tab pages or called up using pushbuttons (see figure). Location: Location data. company code. object type. higher-level functional location. manufacturer data and so on.com .co. points/counters Permits  SAP AG 2004 The master record for the functional location uses the following views: General: Class. Structure: For example. cost center). reference data. maintenance planning plant).

Automatic Assignment Upon Creation C1 Clarification plant C1-M Mechanical cleaning C1-M01 Sand trap C1-M02 Oil/fat trap C1-B01 Pump plant C1-B Biological cleaning C1-B02 Filtering station Existing functional locations New functional locations C1-M01-2 Ventilator C1-M02-2 Ventilator C1-B01-1 Pump 1 C1-B02-2 Filter cell  SAP AG 2004 The structure of the functional location is based on the structure indicator. © SAP AG TERP10 12-16 Visit: www.com . If this is the case. C1-M01-2). the system checks whether a hierarchy with this structure indicator already exists and whether the new identification is suitable for the existing hierarchy.sapeducation. If you create a new functional location (for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. when the new functional location is created. it is included in the existing structure.

A piece of equipment can be linked with a material (if there is inventory management. for which maintenance tasks should be performed and recorded. property Systems. pumps. Equipment can be installed at functional locations. for the object). Pieces of equipment usually represent single objects (for example. motors.Equipment Individual physical object to be maintained as an autonomous unit Means of production Means of transport Test equipment Production resources/tools Equipment Customer devices Buildings.sapeducation.co. © SAP AG TERP10 12-17 Visit: www. system parts Vehicles  SAP AG 2004 A piece of equipment is an individual physical object that is to be maintained as an autonomous unit. in the sense of Materials Management. vehicles).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

Breakdown.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 12-18 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. prepared or preventive maintenance tasks are required for an object and must be recorded. The costs of maintenance tasks for this object are to be monitored.com .co. Technical data for this object must be collected and evaluated over long periods of time .Criteria for Equipment Master Record For what purpose is a piece of equipment created? Management of individual data Recording of maintenance tasks Object-based recording of costs Evaluation of technical data Recording of usage times  SAP AG 2004 You should always create an equipment master record for a technical object if: You need to manage individual data for the object. You need to record the usage time of this object at functional locations.

higher-level functional location. © SAP AG TERP10 12-19 Visit: www. company code. cost center). track changes to the equipment over a specific period of time. it automatically creates a new time segment whenever certain changes are made in the master record. You can use the time-based data to monitor a piece of equipment dynamically. If your system is customized accordingly. structure indicator. manufacturer data and so on.Equipment Master Record Equipment master record General Documents/technical drawings Equipment usage Classification Location Organization Structure Multilingual texts Address/partner Meas. Additional data or links in the master record for the equipment can also be activated as tab pages or called up using pushbuttons (see figure). reference data. address.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. that is. points/counters Permits Internal Note  SAP AG 2004 The equipment master record uses the following views in the standard system: General: Class.com . responsibilities (for example. Location: Location data. object type. maintenance planning plant). Organisation: Account assignment (for example. equipment.co.sapeducation. The time segment describes the equipment usage. Structure: For example.

Spare parts planning in the task list.Spare parts can be planned in the task list based on a bill of material.If a technical object uses a bill of material.com . the bill of material has three important functions: Structuring of the object. There are three categories of maintenance bill of material: Material BOM Equipment BOM Functional location BOM © SAP AG TERP10 12-20 Visit: www.sapeducation.Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance Structuring of object Spare parts planning in order Maintenance bill of material Technical object Spare parts planning in task list  SAP AG 2004 The maintenance bill of material differs from other BOMs in that it only contains items relevant to Plant Maintenance.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Spare parts planning in the order. Additionally. you can use this simply during the planning or a maintenance order to plan spare parts.the structure of an object should be displayed as clearly as possible from a maintenance viewpoint.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The aim is not to create a bill of material for each technical object but to create just one bill of material and then assign this to the technical objects. The number of the corresponding material is entered in the Construction type field(see figure).co. you must: Create a material Create a material BOM for the material The bill of material can then be assigned to one or more technical objects (equipment or functional location). A material BOM is a bill of material that is first created for a material independently of a technical object.sapeducation. You can make the assignment(s) in the respective technical object master record using the Structure view. © SAP AG TERP10 12-21 Visit: www.Bills of Material: Example of Material BOM Material M-1521 Object master record.com . Structure view Material BOM 10 Casing type A 20 Compressor 30 Seal 40 Spool 50 Screw 60 Spacer 70 Shaft type A 80 Locking pin 90 Valve 100-100 1 100-200 1 100-300 4 100-400 1 100-500 9 100-600 5 100-700 1 100-800 2 100-900 1 PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC Construction type field Material BOM as maintenance bill of material  SAP AG 2004 Material BOMs are always used in Plant Maintenance if a number of similarly constructed objects have to be maintained. This avoids the use of redundant bills of material. To do this.

co.sapeducation.Technical Objects: Topic Summary You are now able to: Define Functional Locations Identify functional location using structure indicator Define Equipment Identify the application of Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-22 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

Corrective Maintenance Process: Topic objectives At the conclusion of this topic.com .sapeducation.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: Identify and perform the phases of the Corrective Maintenance process Identify the integrations points with other mySAP ERP modules  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-23 Visit: www.

sapeducation. resources Order release Printout Maintenance planner Capacity leveling Availability check Technician/ Storeperson Maintenance supervisor Planned/unplanned mat. and technical completion.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The required materials are withdrawn from storage with reference to the order.In this step the task is performed on site. The order contains the tasks to be performed. confirmation History Material usage. completion Order settlement Tech.the shop papers are printed. then the order is put into process and .Corrective Maintenance: Process Corrective Maintenance Internal-/External Service/Material Technical object Description Date Malfunction Material Tools 1 2 3 4 5 Notification Planning Scheduling Execution Completion Work to be performed Int. Step 1: Notification:. usage list  SAP AG 2004 The corrective maintenance process involves the following steps . material availability check. capacity requirement check) which are important for the subsequent release. together with the materials and tools required.In the planning. execution. orders are created for the requirements outlined in the notification.Malfunctions and other requirements are detailed in the notification and entered in the system. scheduling.co. orders. Step 5: Completion:. withdrawals that have not been reserved through the order) are also possible. PMIS.The completion phase is composed of the partial steps of time confirmation (enter the actual times worked).notification. Unplanned withdrawals of material (that is. spare part not available for required date). planning./ext. You can use the notification list to find and process notifications.In the control step the order undergoes checks (for example. withdrawal Time conf. © SAP AG TERP10 12-24 Visit: www. Step 2: Planning:. Step 3: Scheduling:. If no serious problems arise (for example. Step 4: Execution:. notifications. technical completion (completing the results).com .usually in the same step . Tech. and completion. The Controlling department can settle the order at the same time.

Tech. The notification usually refers to a technical object and contains a description of the malfunction or requirements.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. notifications. © SAP AG TERP10 12-25 Visit: www. External procurement Time conf.Cycle for Corrective Maintenance Corrective Maintenance Internal-/External Service/Material Technical object Description Date Malfunction Material Tools Production worker Maintenance planner 1 2 3 4 5 Notification Planning Scheduling Execution Completion Work to be performed Int. usage list  SAP AG 2004 The starting point for corrective maintenance (step 1) is the notification of damage./ext. completion Tech. a malfunction. PMIS. causes and so on). A notification does not necessitate the creation of an order in every case. a request for modification work). data can be entered in a notification to build up the history (for example. damage. resources Order release Printout Capacity leveling Availability check Planned/unplanned mat. is introduced owing to the request or malfunction. orders.sapeducation. or some other request (for example.com . withdr. A maintenance task. which is very frequently processed using a maintenance order. In addition. confirmation History Material usage.co.

You enter and maintain data in a notification item to determine a problem. creating a report). that no cost monitoring.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. damage. and which may have only arisen after the maintenance task was executed (for example. The task data describes activities that should still be performed. or the activity executed in greater detail. However. © SAP AG TERP10 12-26 Visit: www. They are particularly important for inspections. if order processing is not active). however. This data is valid for the complete maintenance notification. because they prove that certain tasks have been performed.co. you can also use tasks for planning purposes (for example. material planning or capacity requirements planning is possible for this type of processing.com . Header data is information used to identify and manage the maintenance notification.Maintenance Notification: Structure Notification Date/time/reported by Description Maintenance object: . you can plan to use different people to process the notification. in some cases.Equipment . and monitor the execution of activities for specific periods of time.Assembly .Functional Location . Activities document the work performed for a notification.Material serial number Location data Breakdown/availability Notification Text items Activities Damage location Damage Cause of damage Activity Execution factors Dates Task description Tasks  SAP AG 2004 Each maintenance notification contains header data. A notification can contain several items. Note. In this case.

. you can also enter these maintenance notifications without specifying an object number. This is the case. the system transfers all the relevant data for the piece of equipment and the functional location. or if a maintenance request refers to a new object to be provided for an investment program. Functional location Equipment (with or without assembly) Material number + Serial number (with or without equipment number) Without reference object © SAP AG TERP10 12-27 Visit: www. In other words. The hierarchy for these objects corresponds to the sequence specified. if you enter a maintenance notification for an assembly on a piece of equipment. or for a material with serial number..Objects in Maintenance Notification Material with serial number Assembly Functional location Equipment .co. if a malfunction report refers to an object that is not managed in the system under a number. which is assigned to a functional location.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. in each case with or without assembly. for functional locations with exactly one piece of equipment installed.com . A view for the reference object can be chosen for an individual notification or for a notification type as follows: Functional location + Equipment + Assembly (standard setting) Functional location + Equipment + Assembly. for example. However.sapeducation. the equipment is set automatically. or no object  SAP AG 2004 All the types of maintenance notification mentioned can be entered for both a functional location and a piece of equipment.

or planning usage times. Typical planning tasks include creating operations. withdr. notifications. External procurement Time conf. Maintenance planner 1 2 3 4 5 Notification Planning Scheduling Execution Completion Work to be performed Int.Cycle for Corrective Maintenance Corrective Maintenance Internal-/External Service/Material Technical object Description Date Malfunction Material Tools Production worker Maintenance pl.com . PMIS. the order is created and planned from the notification. resources Order release Printout Capacity leveling Availability check Planned/unplanned mat. © SAP AG TERP10 12-28 Visit: www./ext.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. confirmation History Material usage. orders.co.sapeducation. usage list  SAP AG 2004 In step 2. completion Tech. reserving spare parts. Tech.

com .sapeducation. Case: The maintenance notification is not entered centrally. Case: A maintenance order is automatically generated from a maintenance item by the maintenance plan © SAP AG TERP10 12-29 Visit: www. Case: In a maintenance order. Case: An activity report for an existing maintenance order is entered subsequently as a technical confirmation 5. 3. Case: The maintenance order is created directly (for example. breakdown order) 2.co. The maintenance order is created for the maintenance notification by the person responsible. several maintenance notifications are combined into one or more objects 4.Creation of Maintenance Orders Direct creation of order Creation of order based on notification Maintenance order/notification Maintenance notification Maintenance notification Maintenance order Combination of maintenance notifications for maintenance order Maintenance notification Maintenance notification Maintenance order Entry of order with subsequent activity report Automatic generation of maintenance order from maintenance item  SAP AG 2004 Maintenance order Maintenance item Maintenance notification Maintenance order 1.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. It is proposed from the master record for the reference object and can be changed when the first settlement rule is maintained for the order. The costs view tells you how much the estimated-. Production resources/tools (for example. priority of tasks. serial numbers) and is implemented if the same activity must be performed at multiple objects of the same type. The object list contains the objects to be processed (functional locations. but are not used up. scheduled dates for order execution. There is a technical view and a controlling view available. main object. last person who changed the order and so on.Elements of Maintenance Order Order header For example: Order type. salary details For example: Material. description Standard time.sapeducation. qty. The data in the settlement rule provides information on who should bear the costs. description and type of order. control key. It is valid for the whole maintenance order . tools. and actual costs are in the value categories for this order. The order operation describes the tasks that should be performed for the maintenance order and who performs them with what guidelines. protective clothing. priority. assemblies. storage loctn Material list Production resources/tools Settlement rule Costs (estimated/ planned/actual)  SAP AG 2004 The header data is information that serves to identify and manage the maintenance order. the number. dates.co. plan-. Maintenance notifications For example: work center. creator. plant. description Object list Operation Equipment (assembly). activity type. trucks) are required to execute the maintenance order. which are required and used when the maintenance order is executed.for example. equipment.com . © SAP AG TERP10 12-30 Visit: www. The material list (component list) contains spare parts. functional locations.

The first notification is indicated as the header notification. You can use customer exit IWO10027 to distribute the order costs proportionately to the objects in the object list.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 12-31 Visit: www.co. update of history or cost distribution will take place. Even if no reference object has been specified for the maintenance order on the header data screen. Both the header notification and the other notifications in the object list can be separated from the order again.Maintenance Order: Object List Object list 901760 Order 901760 M-1000-N001 M-1000-N002 Equipment or Functional Locations or Notifications  SAP AG 2004 The object list is an integral part of the maintenance order. Customer exits are dealt with in the following BC425 course. The object list does not "control" the order . If notifications are assigned to the order using the object list. the first notification in the order header appears in the 'Notification' field. This is used to compile multiple notifications and also to assign several technical objects to the order. you can assign technical objects and/or maintenance notifications to the maintenance order in the object list.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.no adjustment of work to be performed.

© SAP AG TERP10 12-32 Visit: www. The goods issues entered appear in the document flow of the order.co.com . unplanned goods issues with reference to the order number. You can set the reservation time in your system using the Customizing function. A material provision list and material withdrawal slips can be printed together with the order papers. if they are kept in stock. The materials that you plan for the maintenance order will be reserved in the warehouse. Planned goods issues are entered with reference to the reservation (reservation number). The order can also be released if there is no availability.sapeducation. whether the system should make the material reservation effective or generate the purchase requisition immediately or only when the order is released. An availability check can be called up when components are assigned in the order.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for each operation in the maintenance order. which are required to execute the task. The materials can be bill of material components for the reference object or freely assigned materials. An automatic availability check is performed when the order is released. In Customizing.Stock Material – Process Flow Component assignment Material reservation Availability check Order release Printing Automatic availability check Goods issue  SAP AG 2004 You can plan materials. it is decided for each order type.

Depending on the order type. the purchase requisitions are generated either when the order is saved or released. Goods receipts are entered with reference to the purchase order after the order has been put in process. any invoice differences are automatically credited to. When goods receipts are entered. The account assignment of the purchase order to the order instigates the posting to the order. In purchasing. The purchase order items are assigned to the maintenance order. © SAP AG TERP10 12-33 Visit: www. additional purchase information can be entered. or debited from the maintenance order. purchase orders are generated from purchase requisitions.Non-Stock Material – Process Flow Component Assignment Purchase application Purchase order Order Release Goods receipt Invoice receipt  SAP AG 2004 When components are assigned in the order.co. When the invoice is received.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The goods receipts entered appear in the document flow of the order. the maintenance order is debited with the purchase order value.sapeducation.com .

From the order you can access an external catalog directly (R/3 Enterprise) or you can connect to the catalog through the Enterprise Buyer Professional (EBP) component Supplier Relationship Management (SRM). as well as on direct material assignment and the use of BOMs.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation.co. © SAP AG TERP10 12-34 Visit: www.Material Through Internet Catalog Direct Catalog Access Catalog access through EBP  SAP AG 2004 The material planning in the maintenance order can be based on internet catalogs.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.sapeducation.com .Direct Catalog Access R/3 Order 4711 Operation 10 Operation 20 To the catalog External catalog 1 2 Components transfer Order 4711 Operation 10 Pump P1000 Cog Gx01 Operation 20 Panel 10-10 3 Pump P1000 Cog Gx01 Panel 10-10 Purchase Requisition  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-35 Visit: www.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can find further information on this topic in the PLM315 and SRM210 courses. The component list is then transferred to the back-end system. Components are sought in and selected from a catalog defined in the EBP. EBP and the back-end system are linked to each other.Catalog access through EBP R/3 Order 4711 Operation 10 Operation 20 Order select EBP External catalog To the catalog 1 Order 4711 Operation 10 Operation 20 2 Order 4711 Operation 10 Pump P1000 Cog Gx01 Operation 20 Panel 10-10 Components transfer 5 Order 4711 Operation 10 Pump P1000 Cog Gx01 Operation 20 Panel 10-10 From Shopping cart 3 Pump P1000 Cog Gx01 Panel 10-10 4 Purchase Requisition  SAP AG 2004 A prerequisite for this process is that the EBP system's Customizing must be set up on the back-end system (R/3).).sapeducation. Component planning is started and the system looks for the order. © SAP AG TERP10 12-36 Visit: www..co. EBP system is started through the URL (http://.com . a purchase requisition application is generated. When you save or release the order. The component list is copied and added to the operation (usually as a non-stock item). An operation is selected. A possible process could be as follows: Maintenance order is created in the backend system. The component list is transferred to the EBP where it is completed or changed..

co.com .sapeducation.Cost Analysis in Maintenance Order By value category Plan Actual Internal service External service Warehouse issue Other 403000 Spare parts 415000 External material 615000 Labor hours By cost element Plan Actual Maintenance order Operation 10 Operation 20 Operation 30 .. cost elements are assigned to value categories.  SAP AG 2004 You can display the expected costs in two ways: At cost element level (Controlling view) At value category level (Maintenance view) In Customizing.. © SAP AG TERP10 12-37 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

© SAP AG TERP10 12-38 Visit: www.co. orders.com . notifications. PMIS./ext.e. Scheduling. completion Tech.sapeducation. External procurement Time conf. confirmation History Material usage. resources Order release Printout Capacity leveling Availability check Planned/unplanned mat. withdr. Here we are considering step 3 i.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In this step the order is subjected to various checks: The material availability and the capacities required are checked and the required shop papers are printed. Tech. Maintenance planner Maintenance supervisor 1 2 3 4 5 Notification Planning Scheduling Execution Completion Work to be performed Int. usage list  SAP AG 2004 Cycle for Corrective Maintenance has several steps.Cycle for Corrective Maintenance Corrective Maintenance Internal-/External Service/Material Technical object Description Date Malfunction Material Tools Production worker Maintenance pl.

and the necessary permits.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can only perform the following activities after you have released the order: Print shop papers Withdraw material Post goods receipts Enter time confirmations Complete task You can release a maintenance order immediately after it has been created. orders from maintenance plans). At the time of release (at the latest). To enable these orders to be released upon creation. material reservations become relevant for materials planning. and purchase requisitions generated.co. the indicator Release immediately must be set for the required order types by the system administration in Customizing. can be withdrawn Papers can be printed Confirmation possible Goods movement possible  SAP AG 2004 When you release a maintenance order. © SAP AG TERP10 12-39 Visit: www. the system checks the availability of material.sapeducation. materials can be withdrawn.com .Order release Effects of order release: Reservation effective. This option is available for maintenance orders created automatically by the system (for example. production resources/tools.

If your system is connected to the Document Management System (DMS). One material withdrawal slip is printed for each material component. time tickets are printed in the numbers specified for each operation.Maintenance Order: Print Maintenance order Fax transfer Material withdrawal slip Job ticket Control ticket Pick list Object list Time ticket Confirmation slip  SAP AG 2004 Job ticket: The job ticket is a document which gives the person executing the maintenance work a complete overview of the order.sapeducation. It also contains information about permits. and is only printed for operations with the corresponding control key.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Confirmation slip: Used by workers as an entry sheet for their work times. Material pick list: Shows the warehouse clerk which materials have been planned for each operation in this order. © SAP AG TERP10 12-40 Visit: www. engineering/design drawings of the technical system concerned) on the job ticket.co. Time ticket: Contains the standard time and duration.com . Object list: Shows an overview of the objects (technical objects. notifications) involved in the order. you can also print graphics (for example. The worker enters the time required to execute the operation on the time ticket. Operation control ticket: Shows the maintenance engineer responsible a complete overview of the maintenance order. Material withdrawal slip: Authorizes the person executing the maintenance work to take the materials required for the order from the warehouse. For each manual worker involved on the order.

usage list  SAP AG 2004 The execution phase i. store person 1 2 3 4 5 Notification Planning Scheduling Execution Completion Work to be performed Int. notifications./ext. orders.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 12-41 Visit: www. step 4 of the cycle for Corrective Maintenance involves the withdrawal of spare parts from the warehouse and the actual execution of the order. Sen. Maintenance planner Maintenance supervisor Technician.Cycle for Corrective Maintenance Corrective Maintenance Internal-/External Service/Material Technical object Description Date Malfunction Material Tools Production worker Maintenance pl.co. completion Tech.e. Tech.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. resources Order release Printout Capacity leveling Availability check Planned/unplanned mat. PMIS. confirmation History Material usage. withdr.com . External procurement Time conf.

sapeducation. The goods movements for a maintenance order are displayed in the document flow of the order. There are two types of withdrawal: Planned withdrawal of stock material Unplanned withdrawal of stock material Materials can also be procured externally.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Material Withdrawal Pick list Planned Material Withdrawal Unplanned Material Withdrawal Maintenance Order ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________  SAP AG 2004 Manual workers withdraw materials from the warehouse to perform maintenance tasks.com . © SAP AG TERP10 12-42 Visit: www. The Material Where-Used List (IW13) lets you check which withdrawals for a material were planned and which were unplanned.co.

com ./ext. and so on) and the effects of the damage on the asset's condition are recorded in the technical confirmation. and marks the final completion of the order. The technical confirmation indicates that the order is finished for Plant Maintenance.sapeducation. Tech. External procurement Time conf. store person Technician. The business completion performed by Controlling takes place after the order has been settled (also by Controlling). Completion. Maintenance planner Maintenance supervisor Technician. Settlement and business completion are dealt with in the PLM316 course. resources Order release Printout Capacity leveling Availability check Planned/unplanned mat.co. usage list  SAP AG 2004 Here we are considering the final step in the cycle for Corrective Maintenance i. repairs performed. withdr.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Cycle for Corrective Maintenance Corrective Maintenance Internal-/External Service/Material Technical object Description Date Malfunction Material Tools Production worker Maintenance pl. The technical findings (damage.e. After the work has been completed. PMIS. the actual time required is confirmed. cause of damage. notifications. © SAP AG TERP10 12-43 Visit: www. Sen. confirmation History Material usage. orders. Maintenance supervisor 1 2 3 4 5 Notification Planning Scheduling Execution Completion Work to be performed Int. completion Tech.

activities. and so on. these are not as easy to structure and analyze as activity reports. confirmation texts can be entered with confirmations of time.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . on a collective screen Entry using the cross-application time sheet (CATS) Once completion confirmations for operations/sub-operations in a maintenance order have been entered. Alternatively. As soon as all the operations/sub-operations in a maintenance order have been completely confirmed. © SAP AG TERP10 12-44 Visit: www. The system therefore allows you to reverse completion confirmations if required. There is always a risk of completion confirmations being assigned to the wrong operations/suboperations or entered with the wrong data. Measurement readings are entered as measurement documents for the reference object. the system automatically assigns the status PCNF (Partially confirmed) to these operations/sub-operations. if no setting has been made in Customizing that a final completion confirmation should be proposed automatically. the order itself is assigned the status CNF (Finally confirmed).Order Confirmation: Times/Activities Times Individual entry Collective entry Overall Completion Confirmation Time sheet (CATS) Activities Activity reports Overall Completion Confirmation Confirmation texts Measurements/counter readings  SAP AG 2004 There are three different ways to confirm the time required for work on a maintenance order: Individual entry of times for each order operation Collective entry by direct entry or using an operation list Overall completion confirmation: Times. measurement values. However.sapeducation. The activities performed are entered as maintenance notifications with notification type "Activity report" and assigned to the corresponding order.co.

tasks. but all the relevant details for an order on a single screen.1 bar 5834 L & activities. and services  SAP AG 2004 The overall completion confirmation enables you to confirm not only working times.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 12-45 Visit: www.com .Overall Completion Confirmation Completion confirmation Order 901760 Operation 10 Operation 20 2h 3h Time Material 100-501 100-605 2 Pc 2 Pc Measurement documents Measuring point Counter 932 43110.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Time confirmations and technical confirmations can therefore be processed in the same way. configured to suit your individual requirements.

sapeducation.if necessary. If you have not maintained a settlement rule for the maintenance order. All open reservations and capacities that still exist for the maintenance order are closed. © SAP AG TERP10 12-46 Visit: www. the maintenance work required for this order has been completed. This depends on what periods are assigned to the order in the Plant Maintenance Information System (PMIS). you can .and account assignment data. invoice receipts for materials delivered and consumed. All the purchase requisitions for which there are no purchase orders that still exist for the maintenance order are marked with a deletion flag. for example.use the Update Reference Object Data function (right mouse button) to update the order.com . If this is not possible owing to missing data. The deletion flag can be set. However. A reference date and time must be entered for the technical completion. In other words. If. the system directs you to where the settlement rule can be maintained. the cost center of the equipment changes during the order processing. However. The maintenance order can then only be changed online as follows: It can be locked or unlocked. or from delayed time confirmations. it is created automatically by the system. the order can still receive costs. the reference date has no influence on the determination of the location.co. for example.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. This is determined from and set to the day's date when the order is created.Maintenance Order: Technical Completion Order 901760 Limited ability to change order Status 'Technically completed' Create settlement rule Deletion flag for purchase requisitions Close open reservations Close open capacities  SAP AG 2004 The maintenance order obtains the status TECO (Technically completed). The order data and the data from maintenance notifications and usage histories are available in the maintenance history and can be used for the evaluation of past work and the planning of new work.

The order is given the status that it had before the technical completion.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 12-47 Visit: www.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.Reverse Technical Completion Order 901760 Order becomes modifiable again Status REL (Released) is set Location and account assignment data are re-copied from the object Open purchase requisitions are recompiled Open reservations are recompiled Open capacities are recompiled TECO  SAP AG 2004 You can reverse the status TECO (technically completed) if required. in other words. capacity requirements and reservations are restructured and the deletion indicator is reset again for unconverted purchase requisitions.

co.Document Flow All document types created for the maintenance order can be displayed: Notification Completion confirmation Goods movement Purchase requisition Purchase order Maintenance order  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-48 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the creation of change documents for the respective objects must be activated. equipment. To use this function.co. This enables you to track who has changed the data or status of which fields and when. © SAP AG TERP10 12-49 Visit: www. orders.Action Log Who changed what and when? Causes of damage Texts Malfunction data Technical objects Dates Maintenance order Maintenance notification Address Purchasing data Account assignment data Priorities Sales data Damage  SAP AG 2004 Changes to notifications. and functional locations are displayed in chronological order in an action log.sapeducation.com .

relevant information can be found in:.Production and HR System in Course PLM315 .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Information on the integration aspects can be found in the following courses:Materials Management Controlling Financial Accounting . SAP PM Plant Maintenance.com . Integration with the standard system is planned. as part of Product Lifecycle Management has manifold integration aspects.sapeducation. You can find information about these components in SAPNet.Funds Management in Course IPS910 Joint Venture is part of the Industry Solution IS-Oil and must be installed separately.Investment and Project Management in Course PLM316 .Plant Maintenance Integration Production Materials Management Joint Venture Management Accounting Project Management Plant Maintenance Financial Accounting HR System Investment Management Funds Management Asset Accounting Real Estate Management  SAP AG 2004 The component.co.In this course.Real Estate Management in Course AC290 .Asset Accounting in Course PLM305 . © SAP AG TERP10 12-50 Visit: www.

Corrective Maintenance Process: Topic Summary You are now able to: Identify and perform the phases of the Corrective Maintenance process Identify the integrations points with other mySAP ERP processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-51 Visit: www.co.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

you will be able to: Understand the tools involved in analyzing maintenance history Process reports using the Plant Maintenance Information System  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-52 Visit: www.com .co.Reporting and Analysis: Topic objectives At the conclusion of this topic.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

where the status Completed must be set each time. The data for completed notifications and orders can be analyzed in full.sapeducation.You can perform analyses in the list editing function for the orders. A notification is transferred to the notification history when completed. Completed notifications and orders: You can use completed notifications and orders for mediumterm evaluations.Maintenance History Completed Notifications Completed Orders Damage Description Damage objects Down Times Activities __________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ __________ ____________________ __________ ____________________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ Object Work center Scheduling of work Material usage Costs by class Tasks Lists  SAP AG 2004 Analyses in maintenance processing are based on completed notifications or orders and historical orders. Historical orders are generated when completed orders are archived and they form the basis for long-term analyses. whereas an order is transferred to the section for completed orders. where the status Historical must be set.com . © SAP AG TERP10 12-53 Visit: www. They are transferred to the order history.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Historical orders contain the most important order data in condensed form. Evaluations can be performed in the corresponding list editing function.

location Equipment 1000253 1000255 1000255 1000253 1000255 Work ctr MECHMNT MECHMNT MECHMNT MECHMNT MECHMNT Reserved Unit 2 1 2 1 2 PC PC PC PC PC Reserv. by order number.sapeducation. order type.co. The material where-used list also indicates which materials were planned withdrawals. Orders can be chosen according to different selection criteria. © SAP AG TERP10 12-54 Visit: www. equipment and so on.com . with reference to a reservation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. for example. reference 2 1 2 1 2 Unit PC PC PC PC PC 100-200 904051 1000083 1000258 MECHMNT 18 18 PC PC 18 18 PC PC  SAP AG 2004 You can use the "Material where-used list" function to verify the use of materials in maintenance orders within a specific period of time. for example. and which were unplanned (without reference to a reservation).Material Usage Example: Use of material 100-100 from 01/01/01 to 01/01/02 Material Order 100-200 901021 901021 901118 901234 901256 1000056 Notification Funct.

The information structures provide the database for standard analyses. ABC analyses. Different functions are available at each level.000 12.Standard Analysis Options Additional information Equipment master record Order Drill-down by planner group Planning-related analysis Planning plant 1000 90 68. classification. You can select data in the background at any time.000 Functions ABC analysis Classification Dual classification Planned/actual comparison Cumulative frequency curve Correlation Planning plant: 1000 Planner Order Order group number costs Drill52 26.com .000 03/2002 24  SAP AG 2004 Standard analyses provide many functions that enable you to find specific information for detailed evaluations.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and ranking lists. The drill-down function allows you to vary the detail of information. You can define the key figures or choose them online during the analysis itself.000 down by 010 020 38 42. You can access summary information in the information structure and branch to the display of master data and movement data. All the results can also be displayed graphically. correlation.sapeducation.000 period Planning plant: 1000 Planning group: 010 Month Order Order number costs 02/2002 28 14. for example. dual classification. cumulative frequency curves. You can specify the range of data to be evaluated. Selection versions also enable you to define the way you view the data. You can save the data selected for standard analysis as a selection version. © SAP AG TERP10 12-55 Visit: www. You can specify the sequence in which levels of information are displayed or you can follow the standard drill-down sequence.co.

sapeducation.com .Reports and Analysis: Topic Summary You are now able to: Understand the tools involved in analyzing maintenance history Process reports using the Plant Maintenance Information System  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-56 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

Enterprise Asset Management: Unit Summary You are now able to: List the organizational structures in Enterprise Asset Management Define the technical objects used in the Enterprise Asset Management Perform the Corrective Maintenance process Identify the reporting and analysis tools used in Enterprise Asset Management Identify the integration points with other mySAP ERP modules  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 12-57 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.co.com .

you need to understand the structure and function of technical objects used in Plant Maintenance. which is defined using a structure indicator. An equipment master is maintained by an enterprise in order to maintain transactional data for its individual business objects. such as pumps. 1-1 Display the Structure of a Functional Location. and welding machines. and vehicle assembly.co. engine assembly.sapeducation. The representation is based on a hierarchy of functional locations.Enterprise Asset Maintenance: Exercises Unit: Enterprise Asset Maintenance Topic: Technical Objects At the conclusion of this exercise. you will be able to: • Display the structure of functional locations • Display an equipment master record The functional location is used to map an enterprise’s complex technical systems such as welding. 1-1-1 Display the structure display of the clarification plant ## and determine the functional location labels of the valves in the pump station of the biological cleaning functional location. motors.com . Valves in Pump Station for Biological Cleaning: 1-2 Display a Functional Location master record.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. As a project team member. 1-2-1 Display the functional location ##-B02 and determine the following: Maintenance Plant _____________________________ Cost Center ___________________________________ Main Work Center ______________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 12-58 Visit: www.

sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 1-3-1 What is the Description? 1-3-2 What is the Maintenance Plant? 1-3-3 What is the Cost Center that this piece of equipment is assigned? 1-3-4 What is the Construction Type? 1-3-5 What is the Functional Location © SAP AG TERP10 12-59 Visit: www.com .co.1-3 Display the equipment master record for equipment TEQ-##.

2-1-1 Create a maintenance request for equipment P-1000-N001: a new welded joint is to be made on the casing of the pump motor. You will also technically complete the order. As the work is done on the order. Along with material withdrawals. you will be able to: • Create a maintenance notification • Create a maintenance order from a maintenance notification • Release a maintenance order • Perform planned and unplanned material withdrawals • Perform a completion confirmation • Technically complete a maintenance order The first step in the corrective maintenance cycle is to create a notification. A planned material withdrawal is when the material is listed on the order. Maintenance Notification Number ____________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 12-60 Visit: www. you will then convert it into a maintenance order.com . Material withdrawals can either be planned or unplanned. You will enter both types of material withdrawals. material needs to be withdrawn from inventory. Enter a damage description. An unplanned material withdrawal is when during the repair process an unexpected piece of material was needed. labor also needs to be charge to the order.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-1-2 Save the maintenance request. After you create the notification.co. The order also serves as a cost collector.sapeducation. Operations and spare parts are planned in the order. Using the completion confirmation transaction you will record the actual labor hours worked for the order. The notification contains information about the equipment or functional location as well as the reason for the notification. 2-1 Create a Maintenance Request.Unit: Enterprise Asset Maintenance Topic: Corrective Maintenance Process At the conclusion of these exercises. The order is the most important component in planning maintenance tasks.

© SAP AG TERP10 12-61 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. your order’s status must equal released. Enter a Planned Material Withdrawal 2-7-1 Withdraw the reserved material with reference to your maintenance order from exercise 2-4. Perform an availability check to verify that the component has sufficient inventory to cover the requirement quantity.com . Using the notification that you created in the previous exercise. Release your maintenance order from exercise 2-4. Save 2-3 Assign material 100-600. you will convert it to an order within the change notification transaction. You must charge the time to your order using the overall completion confirmation transaction. 2-7 2-8 Perform a Completion Confirmation 2-8-1 It took you two hours to fix the pump.2-2 Create a Maintenance Order by converting the Maintenance Request 2-2-1 The next step in the corrective maintenance process is to create a maintenance order using order type PM01. Maintenance Order Number ____________________________ 2-4 2-5 Display the Planned/actual comparison for your order. Assign the order to work center T-ME## and to business area 1000. from the BOM to the order. 2-5-1 What are the planned costs for cost element 400000? ___________________________________________ 2-5-2 What are the planned costs for cost element 655901? ________________________________________ 2-6 Order Release 2-6-1 To be able to post any inventory transactions or completion confirmations.co. Save your order. What material is withdrawn? ________________________________________________ 2-7-2 Post the goods issue.

2-9-2 What is the status of the order after the technical completion? _________________________________________________ 2-9-3 What are the consequences of the technical completion of a maintenance order? __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ 2-10 View the actual costs of your order for each value category.2-9 Technically Complete an Order 2-9-1 The work on the pump is completed. you need to technically complete the order. therefore.sapeducation.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-10-1 Which value categories have actual costs? __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 12-62 Visit: www.co.

. 3-2-1 Determine which piece of equipment incurred the greatest overall costs. On the List of Orders report.sapeducation. you need to understand the different reporting and analysis tools available in Plant Maintenance. As a project team member.com .co. you will be able to: • Process a maintenance order list • Process a material usage report • Perform a location analysis using the Plant Maintenance Information System You want to be able to process evaluations to analyze costs. how could you determine which of the orders is the one that you created? ______________________________________________________ 3-1-3 Display the details of your order. damage. usage times. 3-1-1 You would like to see planned and actual costs on the report and you would also like the report to be sorted by descending order numbers. _____________________________________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 12-63 Visit: www. Can you make any changes to your maintenance order? Why not? ______________________________________________________ 3-2 Perform a location analysis for the current fiscal year for the maintenance plant 1000. 3-1-2 You would like to see the order details for the maintenance order that you created. etc.Unit: Enterprise Asset Maintenance Topic: Reporting and Analysis At the conclusion of this exercise. 3-1 Process a standard report that lists all completed maintenance orders for equipment P-1000-N001.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You also want listings of maintenance orders or maintenance notifications. but you are not sure of the order number.

Pump Station and Pump Sets to determine the Valves used in the Clarification Plant.com .sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Valves in Pump Station for Biological Cleaning: Expand Biological Cleaning.Enterprise Asset Maintenance: Solutions Unit: Enterprise Asset Maintenance Topic: Technical Objects 1-1 Display the Structure of a Functional Location. Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Technical Objects → Functional Location → Structural Display Enter the following data on the Functional Location Structure: Selection screen: Field Functional Location Levels below Location Hierarchy Expand Assembly Select the Execute icon Data entry ## 1 Selected Selected 1-1-1 Display the structure display of the clarification plant ## and determine the functional location labels of the valves in the pump station of the biological cleaning functional location. ##-B01-1A ##-B01-1B ##-B01-2A ##-B01-2B Exit the structure display.co. © SAP AG TERP10 12-64 Visit: www.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 1-3-1 What is the Description? Electric Pump 001 1-3-2 What is the Maintenance Plant? Select the Location tab.1-2 Display a Functional Location master record.co. 4110 1-3-4 What is the Construction Type? Select the Structure tab.sapeducation. 1-3 Display the equipment master record for equipment TEQ-##. 1000 1-3-3 What is the Cost Center that this piece of equipment is assigned? Select the Organization tab. Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Technical Objects → Functional Location → Display On the Display Functional Location: Initial Screen enter functional location ##B02. 1-2-1 Display the functional location ##-B02 and determine the following: Select the Location tab Maintenance Plant 1000 Select the Organization tab Cost Center 4110 Main Work Center Mechanik Exit the functional location master record. P-1000 1-3-5 What is the Functional Location? ##-B02 Exit the equipment master record. © SAP AG TERP10 12-65 Visit: www. Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Technical Objects → Equipment → Display On the Display Equipment: Initial Screen enter equipment TEQ-##.com .

com . select No. Select the Save icon. 2-2-2 Save the maintenance request. When prompted if you want to save your data.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Enter a damage description. Select the Exit icon.co.(which is to the right of the Notification field) Equipment Data Entry Weld Joint Fitting . The functional location and other data from the equipment master record are filled in.Unit: Enterprise Asset Maintenance Topic: Corrective Maintenance Process 2-2 Create a Maintenance Request Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Notification → Create (Special) → Maintenance Request 2-2-1 Create a maintenance request for equipment P-1000-N001: a new welded joint is to be made on the casing of the pump motor.## P-1000-N001 Select the Enter icon. Enter the following data on the Create PM Notification: Maintenance request screen: Field Description .sapeducation. Maintenance Notification Number ____________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 12-66 Visit: www.

Perform an availability check to verify that the component has sufficient inventory to cover the requirement quantity.sapeducation. Select the Components tab. verify that the required quantity can be confirmed on the requested date. Select the component’s row and then select the Check material availability icon in the lower portion of the screen. 2-2-1 The next step in the corrective maintenance process is to create a maintenance order using order type PM01. Select the Enter icon. Using the notification that you created in the previous exercise. In the Confirmation Proposal screen. In the Create Order dialog box. Assign the order to work center T-ME## and to business area 1000. from the BOM. Change the requirement quantity to one. expand P-1000 by selecting the arrow. enter the following data: Field Order type Business area Main work center Select the Enter icon Remain in the order for the following exercises Data Entry PM01 1000 T-ME## 2-3 Assign material 100-600. select the Create icon. In the lower portion of the screen.com . On the Change PM Notification: Maintenance Request screen. your notification number defaults. you will convert it to an order within the change notification transaction. Perform the Availability Check. Select the Save icon. and then select the Continue button.co. select the List button. which is the piece of paper icon to the right of the Order field. Within the structure list.2-2 Create a Maintenance Order by converting the Maintenance Request Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Notification → Change On the Change PM Notification: Initial screen.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-4 Save your order. then select the Choose (green check) icon. Maintenance Order Number ____________________________ © SAP AG TERP10 12-67 Visit: www. Click once on 100-600 Support base.

Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Order → Change On the Change Order: Initial screen.2-5 Display the Planned/actual comparison for your order. Within the order. Select the Enter icon. select Extras → Cost reports → Planned/actual comparison Or within the order. your order number defaults. Select the Enter icon.45 answer may vary depending on planning 2-5-2 What are the planned costs for cost element 655901? 9.com . your order number defaults. select the Costs tab and then select the Report Planned/actual button. © SAP AG TERP10 12-68 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Select the Save icon. 2-6 Order Release Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Order → Change On the Change Order: Initial screen.09 answer may vary depending on planning Exit the report and the maintenance order. your order’s status must equal released.sapeducation.co. Release your maintenance order from exercise 2-4. 2-5-1 What are the planned costs for cost element 400000? 45. 2-6-1 To be able to post any inventory transactions or completion confirmations. Select the Release icon (the green flag icon).

You will also indicate that the order is finally confirmed. enter the following data: Field Movement type Plant Storage Location Data entry 261 1000 0001 Select the To Order button. You must charge the time to your order using the overall completion confirmation transaction.co. © SAP AG Data Entry 2 Select Select Select TERP10 12-69 Visit: www. 2-7-1 Withdraw the reserved material with reference to your maintenance order from exercise 2-4.com . Enter your order from exercise 2-4. type in your order number. 2-8 Perform a Completion Confirmation Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Completion Confirmation → Entry → Overall Completion Confirmation Select Extras → Settings and choose profile PM0002. clear open reservations. 2-8-1 It took you two hours to fix the pump. What material is withdrawn? 100-600 2-7-2 Post the goods issue. save the selection profile. Select the Save icon.sapeducation. from exercise 2-4 and then select the Enter icon. Field Act. On the Overall Completion Confirmation screen. Work F (Final confirmation) C (Clear open reservations) N (No remaining work) Select the Save icon. The profile determines the layout of the confirmation screen.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.2-7 Enter a Planned Material Withdrawal Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Completion Confirmation → Goods Movement → Goods Movement On the Enter Goods Movement: Initial screen. You will enter your labor hours in the Time Confirmation section of the screen. and no work is remaining.

Within the order. Select the Continue icon. The status of the order is TECO. 2-10-1 Which value categories have actual costs? Internal Labor Internal Material/Spares Spares (own production) Exit the order. Select the Enter icon Select the Costs tab. 2-9-4 The work on the pump is completed.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. you need to technically complete the order as well as the notification. Outstanding reservations are cleared. Select the Enter icon. 2-9-5 What is the status of the order after the technical completion? Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Order → Change On the Change Order: Initial screen. 2-9-6 What are the consequences of the technical completion of a maintenance order? The order can no longer be changed. Outstanding purchase requisitions are assigned a deletion flag. your order number defaults. verify that the Complete notifctns indicator is selected. Order status equals TECO. Select the Enter icon.co. therefore.2-11 Technically Complete an Order Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Order → Change On the Change Order: Initial screen. select Order → Functions → Complete Complete(technically) In the Complete dialog box. 2-12 View the actual costs of your order by value category Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Order → Change On the Change Order: Initial screen. Outstanding capacity loads are removed. your order number defaults. your order number defaults. © SAP AG TERP10 12-70 Visit: www.com .

Enter equipment P-1000-N001 in the equipment field. © SAP AG TERP10 12-71 Visit: www. how could you determine which of the orders is the one that you created? The fields Entered by or Planner Group could be added to your report. Can you make any changes to your maintenance order? Why not? Double click on your order. Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → History → Order List → Change On the Change PM Order: Selection of Orders screen. On the List of Orders report. (To select both at the same time use the shift key. Add Entered by field to your report by selecting the Current icon and then choose Entered by and then Show selected fields. Select the Current icon.com . To sort the report by descending order numbers.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Then select the Transfer (green check) icon. 3-1-2 You would like to see the order details for the maintenance order that you created. On the right hand side choose Total planned costs and Total actual costs. Select the Execute icon. No changes can be made because the status of the order is TECO.sapeducation. 3-1-3 Display the details of your order. select the Order column then the Sort in Descending Order icon. deselect the order status indicators for Outstanding and In Process and select the Completed indicator. but you are not sure of the order number. 3-1-1 You would like to see planned and actual costs on the report and you would also like the report to be sorted by descending order numbers. Exit the report.co.Unit: Enterprise Asset Maintenance Topic: Reporting and Analysis 3-3 Process a standard report that lists all completed maintenance orders for equipment P-1000-N001.) Select Show selected fields.

choose Settings→ Column width→ Characteristic → Enter a width of 40 Exit the report.3-4 Perform a location analysis for the current fiscal year for the maintenance plant 1000.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . To increase the width of the equipment column. Select the Switch drilldown button and choose Equipment then the Continue icon.costs column and choose the Sort in descending order icon. To add the equipment number and the equipment description.co. Change the analysis period to the current fiscal year.sapeducation. 3-4-1 Determine which equipment number incurred the greatest overall costs. © SAP AG TERP10 12-72 Visit: www. enter 1000 in the Maintenance Plant field. Select the Execute icon. Do not save the analysis. Select the Total act. Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Information System → Standard Analyses → Location On the Location Analysis: Selection screen. choose Settings→ Characteristic display →Key and description.

5. 3. © SAP AG TERP10 12-73 Visit: www. The usage list displays all the pieces of equipment that have been installed in chronological order. maintenance requirements are collected within notifications and then dealt with during order processing.com . Equipment is defined as a collection of physical objects that are maintained as individual autonomous units. 2. Why would you create functional locations to structure your systems? _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 4.sapeducation.Enterprise Asset Maintenance: Test Your Knowledge 1.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Determine whether this statement is true or false.co. The ______________ displays an overview of the objects involved in the order. Determine whether this statement is true or false. In the Corrective Maintenance process. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

In the Corrective Maintenance process. 9.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Costs of maintenance tasks need to be monitored. maintenance requirements are collected within notifications and then dealt with during order processing. 7. Answer: False Equipment is defined as an individual physical object that should be maintained as an autonomous unit. The usage list displays all the pieces of equipment that have been installed in chronological order. Equipment is defined as a collection of physical objects that are maintained as individual autonomous units. The ______________ displays an overview of the objects involved in the order. Answer: True In the Corrective Maintenance process.co.sapeducation. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Answer: The object list displays an overview of the objects involved in the order. Technical data has to be store and evaluated over a long period of time. Answer: True The usage list displays all the pieces of equipment that have been installed in chronological order. 10. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.com . Effects of the usage conditions on the installed equipment have to be analyzed. © SAP AG TERP10 12-74 Visit: www.Enterprise Asset Maintenance: Answers 6. Why would you create functional locations to structure your systems? Answer: Maintenance tasks have to be performed and recorded at this location. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 8. maintenance requirements are collected within notifications and then dealt with during order processing. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

Human Capital Management Contents: Organizational Structures Employee Records Human Capital Management Processes Reporting and Analysis  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-1 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co. you will be able to: Define organizational structures in Human Capital Management Manage employee records Describe basic business processes in the area of Human Capital Management Identify the integration points with other ERP processes Explain the reporting and analysis tools in Human Capital Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-2 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .Human Capital Management: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co.Human Capital Management: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-3 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

to compete effectively. you need to understand how to align employee skills. with business objectives. activities.co.Human Capital Management: Business Scenario In your enterprise.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . you need to align all corporate resources. To do so.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-4 Visit: www. As a project team member. and incentives with business objectives and the strategies to reach them. including employees. you need to transform traditional HR functions into a comprehensive program for Human Capital Management (HCM).

co. you will be able to: Define organizational structures in Human Capital Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-5 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.HCM Structures: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.com .

employee Administration Group PersAdmin Time PayrAdmin Supervisor 1300 001 002 003 Helmuth Hesse Dagmar Krause Oliver Zeuner Organizational structure  SAP AG 2004 A personnel management system enables you to reproduce company hierarchies and the relationships within the hierarchies.co. and a payroll area. Its highest level is a company code. The allocation of employees to the structures in their enterprise is of the utmost importance in Human Capital Management.g.. Organizational Assignment.sapeducation..area Central 9900 Corporate Other Personnel structure EE Group 1 Active employee Payr. Travel expenses (D) Trav. and for Time Management and Payroll Accounting. In doing this. active or inactive) and type (e. Enterprise. salary or hourly) that are needed for HR administrative purposes.Exp -D Contract data Com. © SAP AG TERP10 13-6 Visit: www. and personnel subareas. 1001 EE Group From 1 Active employee Salaried Staff. it is the first step in entering personal data. and Personnel Structure Personnel No. a job.com . When you enter data for an employee in infotype 0001. area 31. area D2 HR-D: Salaried empl Personnel structure EE Subgroup DU Salaried staff Organization plan Percentage Position 100.Organizational.person 0001 Subarea Bus. The Enterprise Structure hierarchy is a legal and financial structure.12. personnel and organizational structures. and a cost center. This results in the employee‘s assignment to an organizational unit. You assign employees in infotype 0001. The Personnel Structure is relational. and its subdivisions are personnel areas.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You also assign employees to positions. rather than hierarchical. 01/29/1999 Cost Center 2100 01/01/1994 Enterprise structure Enterprise structure CoCode Pers Area Cost Ctr 1000 IDES 1300 Frankfurt 2100 Leg.9999 Michaela Maier 1300 Frankfurt Finance and Admin. and to store and manage employee data. for the entry of additional data.key Administrator Admin. unit Org. The first step in recording personnel data is to assign the employee within the company structures. the employee is assigned to a company code.Spec-D Job key Org.00 50000076 50011880 50000073 1300 Functional Specialist Func. BILLE Chng. Information on the organizational assignment of employees is of great importance for authorization checks. a personnel area. It forms employee groups by specific status (e. To EE Subgroup DU Name Pers. Organizational Assignment. you include employees in the enterprise.g.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Enterprise Structure: Example ABC International Client ABC S. Each personnel area must be assigned to a company code. © SAP AG TERP10 13-7 Visit: www.com . Groupings are defined for personnel subareas to specify which entries from subsequent settings can be used for employees assigned to a particular company code or personnel area. Balance sheets and Profit & Loss Staements. required by law.co.A. These groupings directly or indirectly affect Time Management and Payroll Accounting. Personnel area – is an organizational element area used exclusively in Personnel Administration and is unique within a client.sapeducation. Personnel subarea – is also unique to Personnel Administration. Country C Company code Location A Location B Location C Location D Personnel area Headquarters Production Personnel subarea  SAP AG 2004 The enterprise structure for Human Capital Management processes uses the following organizational elements: Client – all personnel administration organizational elements exist within a client Company code – represents an independent accounting unit. Country A ABC AG Country B ABC Inc. are created at the company code level.

sapeducation. The personnel areas within a client must be clear. for the payroll accounting area. The personnel area has the following functions: It allows you to generate default values for data entry. Country A Personnel area Personnel subareas 1000 Location A 1300 Location B 3000 Location C 3100 Location D  SAP AG 2004 A personnel area is a Personnel Administration-specific unit and is the subunit of the company code.co. © SAP AG TERP10 13-8 Visit: www. It is a selection criterion for reporting. for example.Personnel Areas A personnel area is a specific entity for personnel administration.A.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. It represents a subdivision of the company code. ABC International Company codes 2000 ABC AG Country B 3000 ABC Inc. The individual personnel areas in a company code have four-digit alphanumeric identifiers. It constitutes a unit in authorization checks. Country C 1000 ABC S.

Personnel Subareas Personnel subareas are subdivisions of personnel areas. namely the pay scale and wage type structures and the planning of work schedules. To define a public holiday calendar.co. The principal organizational aspects of human resources are controlled at this level.com . Master data entry and the setting up and processing of wage types and pay scale groups in payroll depend on the country grouping. The personnel subarea is assigned a four-character alphanumeric identifier. ABC International 1000 ABC S. To set groupings for Time Management so that work schedules and substitution. The main organizational functions of the personnel subarea are as follows: To specify the country grouping. The control features are stored according to the country. To generate a default pay scale type and area for an employee’s basic pay. Country C 1000 Location A Personnel subareas 1300 Location B 3000 Location C 3100 Location D 0001 Head office 0002 Production 0001 Sales  SAP AG 2004 Personnel subareas represent a further subdivision of the personnel area.sapeducation. To assign a legal person which differentiates between companies in legal terms. absence and leave types can be set up for individual personnel subareas. Country A 2000 ABC AG Country B 3000 ABC Inc. The grouping must be unique within a company code.A. The organization of the most important subareas of personnel administration takes place at this level. To define subarea-specific wage types for each personnel area. © SAP AG TERP10 13-9 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Employee subgroups are a finer division of employee groups.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. All employees who are paid at the same time are assigned to the same payroll area.Personnel Structure Retirees Contractors Active Employees Employee Group Hourly Salaried Employee Subgroup Weekly Semi-Monthly Payroll Area  SAP AG 2004 The administrative personnel structure for human resources relates primarily to work hours and compensation. in how overtime pay is accounted. they are grouped according to status for administrative purposes. as. The payroll area provides the payroll program with the number of employees to be included in a payroll run and the dates of the payroll period. for example.com . and payroll areas. The payroll areas group employees according to how often they are paid. Employee groups are used to generate default values for payroll accounting area and basic pay. such as absence quotas. and as one unit of the authorization check. Subgroup groupings can also define the validity of work schedules and various time management elements. employee subgroups. as a selection criterion for reports.sapeducation.co. or to restrict the validity of payscale groups according to collective agreement provisions. Typically. © SAP AG TERP10 13-10 Visit: www. Employee subgroup groupings allow you to define different payroll procedures. Employee groups represent different types of employees. It is made up of three elements: employee groups.

Wage earners.  SAP AG 2004 Employee group is a general division of employees.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. for example. pensioners and early retirees make up the main employee groups in Personnel Administration. © SAP AG TERP10 13-11 Visit: www. External Non pay-scale employee Salaried employee Active Hourly wage earner Pensioner Trainee Employees are differentiated further within the employee subgroups. for example. according to employee group. The following are the principal functions of the employee group: Default values can be generated for payroll accounting area and basic pay. and the attendance or absence quota type the validity of time quotas.co. however. The employee group defines the relationship between an employee and a company in that the employee makes a certain contribution to the company in terms of work. The employee subgroup is a fine division of employee groups according to the status of employees. for example. The employee subgroup grouping for the work schedule defines the validity of work schedules. Active employees are differentiated according to their status trainee. for example. The employee subgroup grouping for primary wage types controls the validity of wage types on an employee subgroup level. you can specify whether an employee’s pay should be accounted on an hourly or monthly basis. The most important features are described below: The employee subgroup grouping for the Personnel Calculation Rule allows you to define different payroll procedures for different employee subgroups. It can. you can define default values using the employee subgroup. for the payroll accounting area. salaried employees and non pay scale employees are all examples of subgroups within the employee group ”active”.Employee Group and Subgroups The employee group subdivides employees into various categories. whereas the grouping for collective agreement provisions restricts the validity of pay scale groups to certain employee groups. hourly wage earner or salaried employee. When entering data. also be extended to suit individual customer requirements. Active employees. All control features of the personnel structure are defined at employee subgroup level. The employee group is used as a selection criterion for reporting. You can generally use the standard catalog to set up employee groups. The employee group is one unit of the authorization check.

Infotypes provide a logical grouping of data fields.sapeducation. you should not enter the new payroll accounting area until the start of the following month.co. © SAP AG TERP10 13-12 Visit: www. The payroll accounting area provides the payroll driver with two pieces of information: the number of employees to be accounted and the dates of the payroll period. All employees who are accounted together are assigned to the same payroll accounting area. The number of employees to be accounted is determined using the Organizational Assignment infotype (0001) which stores the payroll accounting area. If an employee changes status from wage earner to salaried employee in the middle of the month. and the payroll accounting area is different for both. Note: An employee may only change payroll accounting areas at the end of a period. Acct area x Acct area y Jan 1 Pay Feb 1 Pay Jan 1 Pay Feb 1 Pay Payroll on the 28th day of month for current month  SAP AG 2004 Payroll on Thursday for the following week The payroll accounting area is an organizational unit defined for the purposes of payroll accounting.com . Payroll accounting is generally performed for each payroll accounting area.Payroll Accounting Areas The payroll accounting area represents an organizational unit defined for the purposes of payroll accounting.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

com . or more specifically as project groups. you must specify the number of corresponding positions required in the organization. Person  SAP AG 2004 The organizational plan is a comprehensive and dynamic model of the structural and personnel environment in your enterprise. Positions are occupied by persons. © SAP AG TERP10 13-13 Visit: www. Organizational units are related to cost centers from Controlling. Organizational Unit Positions are the individual employee assignments in the enterprise. Organizational units can be loosely defined as functional or regional departments.sapeducation. Each job represents a unique classification of responsibilities in your organization. The hierarchical interrelationships that exist between the organizational units represents the organizational structure of your enterprise. you should consider what specific tasks and requirements are associated with the individual jobs.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You must relate organizational units with one another in an organizational plan. depending on the type of organization you have. objects that hold positions Position Job Jobs are general classifications of tasks that are routinely performed together. Once you have created a job. which you can view and evaluate at any time.The Organizational Plan Organizational units describe the various business units that exist in your enterprise.co. When you create jobs.

HCM Structures: Topic Summary You are now able to: Define organizational structures in Human Capital Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-14 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .co.sapeducation.

sapeducation. you will be able to: Describe how to manage employee records in Human Capital Management Identify the use and benefits of Employee Self Service (ESS)  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-15 Visit: www.Employee Records: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. unit Org.area Contract Administrator Group Personnel Time Payroll Supervisor 0001 XX HR-´X: Salaried EESubgroup XX Salaried Organizational structure Position Percentage Job Org.area Cost ctr Personnel structure Organizational structure Personnel structure EE group 1 Active Payr. key 50000836 100 50000064 50000827 0001  SAP AG 2004 The task of a human resource management system is to let you: Map organizational hierarchies and the relationships between employees in the system Record and administer employee data efficiently and accurately. person 0001 Subarea Bus.com . This is the first step when you create the personal data record for an employee. When you record employee data. the organizational assignment of the employee in the structure has the highest priority.The Employee in the Organization Organizational Assignment (0001) PersNo.9999 Leg. © SAP AG TERP10 13-16 Visit: www.sapeducation.area 0001 New York 0001 New York Enterprise structure Enterprise structure CoCode Pers. Name Valid 4711 Anne Albert 05/01/2002 0001 0001 1000 - 12/31/.

Data fields are grouped into data groups or information units according to their content. for example. place of residence. these information units are called information types or infotypes for short. Personal Data Addresses Planned Working Time Infotypes: logical groupings of data fields  SAP AG 2004 Individual information. street. and house number make up an employee's address and are consequently stored (together with additional data) in the Addresses infotype. In Human Resources.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 13-17 Visit: www. has the key 0006. Infotypes have names and 4-digit keys. HR data is therefore stored in groups that logically belong together according to content. such as last name.co. For example. The Addresses infotype. first name and date of birth.Infotypes Organizational Assignment 10099100 Basic Pay etc. is defined in data fields.

. on the other hand. Infotypes that are rarely used.sapeducation. One infotype can be included in more than one menu. To access a particular menu.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . Gross/net payroll Period Period Fr. © SAP AG TERP10 13-18 Visit: www. might not be included in any menus at all. click on the tab page. Today All From today Up to today Current period Choose to Net payroll Organizational Assignment Personal Data Addresses Bank Details Family Member/Dependents Challenge Internal Medical Service Maternity Protection/Parental Leave Current week Current month Last week Last month Current year  SAP AG 2004 Infotypes that are most frequently used are grouped together by subject matter and assigned to static menus.Initial Entry Screen for Infotype Maintenance HR Master Data Edit Goto Extras Utilities Settings System Help Maintain HR Master Data Basic personal data Infotype text Actions Basic contract data E. The green ticks next to the menu list of infotypes indicate that these records already exist for the selected personnel number.

to the various subtypes of the same infotype. Name EE Group EE Subgroup 4599200 Vera Sorokin 1 X0 Active employee Hourly wage ea.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.9999 Hourly wager earn.Subtypes Maintain HR Master Data Create Family/Related Person Personnel No. you can store different types of addresses: Permanent residence (subtype 1) Temporary residence (subtype 2) Home address (subtype 3) The entry screens for the various subtypes may be different. You can also create separate histories for each subtype. You may want to subdivide such information to make it easier to manage or because you want to assign different control features . Vera Sorokin CABB Caliber A Basic personal data Actions Organizational assignment Personal Data Addresses Bank Details Family/Related Person Challenge Internal Medical Service Maternity Protection/Parental Leave Military Service Styp Sty 2 Direct selection 1 2 10 11 12 Infotype 0021 Nationality Subtype 2 2nd/3rd na City of birth Name Spouse Child Divorced spouse Father Mother  SAP AG 2004 Subtypes are used to subdivide infotype data records.12.com .co. Examples: In the Family member subtype in the Family/Related Person (0021) infotype. Personnel No. You can assign access authorizations for each subtype. Basic contract data Pers area Family / related person Family member Last name First name Other title Name prefix Gender Date of Birth Birthplace Female Child Sorokin Birth name Initials Name format Name prefix Male EE Group EE Subgroup From 1001 1 X0 Active employee To Name Pers area 31. © SAP AG TERP10 13-19 Visit: www.sapeducation.such as time constraints . you can store different family members: Spouse (subtype 1) Child (subtype 2) In the Address type subtype in the Addresses (0006) infotype..

the system displays a new infotype for you to process. or when an organizational reassignment occurs. Wechsel Reassignment Sequence of infotypes to show a personnel activity  SAP AG 2004 The personnel actions function groups all of the infotypes together that must be maintained when a particular human resource process is performed. When you perform an action. such as when an employee is hired. At the end of the sequence.Personnel Actions Planned Working Time Org. Assignment Actions Personalmaßnahmen Personnel Actions Personalmaß Personnel number 12345678 Hiring Org. you may want to skip a particular infotype without entering any data. After you have saved a record. This function also makes it easier for you to enter data. or even cancel the action.sapeducation. because it prevents you from having to access each individual infotype. This ensures that all of the information relevant to the process is entered in the system.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the system returns to the initial screen after saving Personnel actions allow you to store an Actions (0000) infotype for the activity to be performed to log the current personnel action. Each personnel action contains the infotypes for which data must be entered for the human resource process in question. © SAP AG TERP10 13-20 Visit: www.co. and displays them one after the other for you to maintain.

You can scroll forwards and backwards within the personnel file. If more than one record exists for an infotype. Org. Assignment Actions Personalmaßnahmen Personnel Personalmaß File Personnel number 4711  SAP AG 2004 The personnel file lists all of the infotypes for which records have been created for a personnel number.sapeducation. . .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. after which it returns to the initial screen. The system then goes to the next infotype. they are displayed one after the other. The infotypes are displayed in ascending numerical order.Personnel File Display all infotypes for a personnel number Additional infotypes. © SAP AG TERP10 13-21 Visit: www.co.com .

Each infotype record is stored with a specific validity period. the old data is not lost. His or her organizational assignment. Some examples of this include: An employee moves.co. If this is the case. The new salary must be stored for the relevant date. If new information is entered and saved in an infotype. circumstances can always arise which make it necessary to enter new data or correct current data.Maintaining Employee Data Change of address Pay increase New working time Change of employee subgroup New PS group  SAP AG 2004 Employee data must be kept current.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. An employee gets a pay raise at the start of the year. An employee changes job within the organization. After an employee is hired. working time. the system reacts based on rules. or time constraints set up for that particular infotype or subtype. © SAP AG TERP10 13-22 Visit: www.com . Data can be stored for the present. or past. and his or her new address must be stored in the system. the system checks whether a record already exists for this infotype. Instead. This may be done within Personnel Administration infotypes or through Employee Self Service. even if their validity periods coincide.sapeducation. and salary also change. it remains in the system so that you can perform historical evaluations. This means that the system can contain more than one record of the same infotype at the same time. When an infotype is updated. future.

SAP ESS has an intuitive. yet easy-to-use applications that empower employees to view.com .sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 13-23 Visit: www. create and maintain data in the R/3 system via the intranet/internet. Macintosh.co.SAP ESS can be used with the Netscape Navigator and MS Internet Explorer. user-friendly interface.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and can be implemented on Windows. and Unix if the appropriate Internet Browser is used. .SAP Employee Self-Service Intuitive Interface Personalized Similar look to SAP’s other Web products  SAP AG 2004 SAP ESS consists of many components such as: SAP Office SAP Employee Self-Service is a set of powerful. Who’s Who Employee Directory Time Management Expense Reports Benefits Personal Information Training and Event Management Skills Profile My ESS .

and to off-load many of the data entry and related customer service activities that may be typically performed in a company’s human resources. or owner of the data. SAP ESS is an effective means for providing real-time access and data maintenance capabilities to the source. create and maintain data any time. SAP ESS consists of many components such as: Office Time Management Expense Reports Benefits Personal Information Training and Event Management Qualifications Appraisals  SAP AG 2004 With SAP ESS employees can take responsibility for updating and keeping their own data current.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. HTML based user interface. via web-based technology. payroll.sapeducation. yet easy-to-use applications that empower employees to view. create and maintain data in the R/3 system via the intranet.co. benefits and travel departments.What is Employee Self-Service? SAP Employee Self-Service is a set of powerful. anywhere. SAP ESS empowers employees to view. © SAP AG TERP10 13-24 Visit: www. SAP ESS has an intuitive.

and administrative workload in Human Resources departments. travel expenses. By enabling employees to maintain their own data and to have access to their own information. routine. Information is provided to all Employees Individual information (Payroll result. © SAP AG TERP10 13-25 Visit: www.com . Employees become responsible for part of their personal data.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Human Resources History Before ESS Large.sapeducation. postage and data entry time. Critical Human Resources staff is locked with data entry. „Public“ information (Who‘s who. All business processes take place via paper or informally Many versions of the same data With SAP ESS Employees own data maintenance. time management. The human resources department is freed from many of the data entry and related customer service activities and reduces the costs of paper. employees often had to call the HR department to access information that they now have at their fingertips. calendar) Delivery of Human Resources services is bureaucratic  SAP AG 2004 Prior to ESS. qualifications. companies empower them to take responsibility and ownership.

SAP ESS inherits mySAP ERP’s international architecture. The SAP ESS main menu can be customized and enhanced. Macintosh. The Internet templates are easily adaptable to match the look and feel of company intranet and corporate identity. and Unix if the appropriate Internet Browser is used. 6. taking full advantage of inherent workflow. R/3 business logic. and Workflow ESS functionality that leverages the strengths of underlying SAP infrastructure Global capabilities Enabling access from any platform at any time from anywhere Easy to use Personalized 2. SAP ESS. and audit functionality SAP ESS utilizes the same database.co. SAP ESS Highlights 4. with its unsurpassed language and currency management capabilities. It takes full advantage of mySAP ERP’s global capabilities. user-friendly interface.com . © SAP AG TERP10 13-26 Visit: www. No dual maintenance or reconciliation is required. 5. SAP ESS can be used with the Netscape Navigator and MS Internet Explorer. No training is required.The Highlights 1.sapeducation. including travel management and purchasing Inherent integration between SAP R/3 business scenarios. security. including country localization. 3. and can be implemented on Windows. SAP ESS has an intuitive.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.SAP ESS . Extensive functionality beyond basic HR functionality.  SAP AG 2004 SAP ESS leverages the power of SAP. 7.

bank information © SAP AG TERP10 13-27 Visit: www.inquiry.sapeducation.addresses. Change own data.Inbox. Calendar.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.SAP ESS Functionality Office Time Management Travel Management Benefits Jobs Payment Personal Information  SAP AG 2004 SAP ESS is now reflected in the role Employee Self-Service. Who’s Who.Time Sheet (CATS). time statement Travel Management . My Assets Time Management . display total compensation statement Personal Information . work schedule. Listed here are some of the examples of ESS functionality that can exist within ESS: Office .job opportunities. application status Payment . display leave balances.business trips Benefits. Jobs.employment and salary verification.com . Internal Service Request. Request and cancel leave / vacation. enrollment.co. spending account claims. retirement plan valuation results.

Employee Records: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe how to manage employee records in Human Capital Management Identify the use and benefits of Employee Self Service (ESS)  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-28 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

sapeducation. you will be able to: Describe the basic business processes of Human Capital Management Discuss the integration points with other mySAP ERP processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-29 Visit: www.com .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.HCM Processes: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

co.Human Capital Management Processes Cost Planning & Reporting Recruitment Hiring Course Credit Employee Self-Service Travel Planning Training & Personnel Development Payroll Administration Managing Work Time Compensation & Benefits  SAP AG 2004 The Human Capital Management Processes include: Recruitment Hiring Training and Personnel Development Managing Work Time Compensation and Benefits Payroll Administration Travel Planning Personnel cost planning and Reporting Employee Self-Services © SAP AG TERP10 13-30 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Moreover.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. that is in the Employee Self-Service Employment Opportunities. Managers can map their decisions about applicants effectively in the Manager's Desktop and save costs in the process.co.com .Recruitment: From Vacancy to Hiring an Applicant ? Vacancy Advertisement Applicants Profile match up Position Person Hired as an employee What are our requirements? What can the applicant offer?  SAP AG 2004 The Recruitment component enables you to carry out the entire recruitment procedure.sapeducation. applicant administration. © SAP AG TERP10 13-31 Visit: www. in cases where you decide to hire the applicant. advertising. selection of applicants. from entering applicant data to filling vacant positions. The SAP system supports personnel requirements. and applicant correspondence. The HR department then takes care of the subsequent administrative tasks involved. you can transfer the applicant data from Recruitment to Personnel Administration. External applicants and employees can apply online in the Employment Opportunities Web application.

logging. for instance Confirmation of receipt of application.sapeducation. standard texts are delivered in Word and SAPscript. © SAP AG TERP10 13-32 Visit: www.. You can link applicant activities to standard texts. You can print the invitation letter for the applicant via this activity. Certain applicant activities are created for applicants automatically by the system when you perform certain applicant actions.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . Invitation to interview. When you create an activity. To be interviewed Activity Standard text Invitation to interview Interview letter  SAP AG 2004 Recording. and planning activities for an applicant in the selection procedure takes place using applicant activities. For example. if you invite an applicant for an interview. the system can output an appropriate standard letter via applicant correspondence. In the standard system. the applicant activity Invitation to Interview is automatically created for the applicant.. An applicant activity is a concrete administrative step that an applicant passes through in the selection procedure.Applicant Activities and Applicant Correspondence Applicant action Applicant Actions Applicant number 4711 Initial entry of basic data Enter additional data .

Becker Applicant number 1234 Personnel number 9999 M. The applicant's data is transferred directly from the applicant database to the employee database. This greatly reduces the effort involved in processing. You can enter the additional data.com .Hiring an Applicant Work contract n c ati tio om nera t Au t ge ac ntr co --------------------Signature L. Note: There is an option that enables you to generate work contracts automatically via applicant correspondence for applicants you would like to hire in your company. and change. All the data you have already created in the individual infotypes in Recruitment is copied as default values during the transfer to Personnel Administration.co. Becker Employee file If you hire an applicant. the data created for the applicant for the future employee.sapeducation. Le Clerc L. later in Personnel Administration. Becker Applicant file  SAP AG 2004 L. such as working time and salary details. data transfer takes place either directly in Recruitment or directly in Personnel Administration. In integrated systems.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 13-33 Visit: www. you can transfer his or her data to the Personnel Administration component. This enables you to reuse.

and payroll.Hiring an Employee Organizational Assignment Salary Data Hiring etc.com . New employees can also be hired independently of the Recruitment component. data relevant to the new employee is created. by means of a personnel action in Personnel Administration. © SAP AG TERP10 13-34 Visit: www. In such cases. time recording.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Work schedule Early Normal Late Personal Data/ Addresses  SAP AG 2004 Shift Data The most important aspect of master data administration in a human resources system is the entry of employee data for personnel administration.co.sapeducation.

© SAP AG TERP10 13-35 Visit: www. Once you have entered all the necessary data in an entry screen. If you do not want to record any data here.Hiring Action Select personnel action Enter data and save infotype Org. Wechsel Reassignment  SAP AG 2004 A range of employee data must be entered into the system when an employee is being hired. You do this by running the personnel action Hiring and enter all the necessary data in the relevant infotype.sapeducation. Assignment Personal Data Actions Personalmaßnahmen Personnel Actions Personalmaß Personnel number 12345678 Hiring Org. you must save your entries. skip the screen. The system displays a new entry screen for processing. Note: You can customize personnel actions to suit your requirements in the Implementation Guide (IMG).co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

we refer to them as qualifications.sapeducation. it inventories individual skills and matches them to work requirements for: Recruiting Career Planning Succession Planning Training Personnel Development allows you to maximize the value that your employees provide to the company.Personnel Development Qualifications and requirements Career and Succession Planning Training & Event Management  SAP AG 2004 Personnel Development focuses on the value that employees provide to a company. Both refer to the same object but from a different perspective. All qualifications (and requirements) are stored centrally in a catalog. © SAP AG TERP10 13-36 Visit: www. When related with employees. Among other things. when related with positions. You can also increase job satisfaction by considering suitability and preferences for job assignments. This means that you can compare the qualifications of a person with the requirements defined for a position. we refer to them as requirements. for example. You can assign qualifications to employees and positions. You can plan and implement specific training measures to promote skill development so that qualified employees are available. You edit the qualifications catalog in Customizing for Personnel Development. You can also make changes in a system that has already gone live by choosing the Current settings menu option.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .co.

Career Planning involves identifying possible career goals for employees.com . to encourage the professional development of employees in a company. and planning their professional development.Career and Succession Planning ? … Career Planning: Planning an employee's professional career Succession Planning: Looking for suitable candidates to fill vacant posts ?  SAP AG 2004 Career and Succession Planning has two goals.sapeducation.co. © SAP AG TERP10 13-37 Visit: www. to ensure that there is always sufficient headcount. and second. Succession Planning involves looking for suitable candidates to fill open posts. First.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Users might gear these development measures to producing specific results such as identifying the need to transfer an employee to a specific post (using career and succession planning scenarios). a trainee program for sales staff). or ensuring that employees keep pace with technological developments. They might also be more general measures geared toward retaining or enhancing existing employee skills and abilities. The appraisal results can provide input for planning an employee's further career development. You can plan and implement specific personnel and training measures to promote the professional development of your employees. This is achieved by drawing up qualification potentials. Such development plans are referred to as general development plans since they apply to all employees.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.com . You can group qualifying actions (such as training courses or job rotation) into development plans (for example.sapeducation. Personnel Development sets out to ensure that an organization has all the qualifications and skills it needs in all fields. Management can determine the personnel development needs in an enterprise by comparing current and future working requirements with existing qualifications and the development preferences of the employees. You can praise employee performance and conduct. You can perform objective setting with SAP R/3 Enterprise. © SAP AG TERP10 13-38 Visit: www.Personnel Development and Qualifying Actions Position Person Person Position "Administrator" Objective Setting and Appraisals Profile match up Development Plans Knowledge of Microsoft Word required? Position "Department Manager"  SAP AG 2004 Confirmation of participation in MS Word course Course The Personnel Development function can help you maximize the value of your employees for your enterprise. You can tailor these general plans to suit the needs of individual employees. You can also increase your employees' motivation and job satisfaction by giving consideration to their preferences and suitability for jobs.

for instance. and fee and cost settlement. The application offers you a comprehensive array of templates to help handle the associated correspondence with attendees and instructors (attendance confirmations.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Employee Self-Services (ESS) and Internet services enable you to save time and money by providing direct access to the core functions of the day-to-day activities (view event catalog. cancellation confirmations and so on). management of business events. and extend and update employees' skills and knowledge.. prebook. Comprehensive reporting and a sophisticated appraisal system complement the suite of functions. lets you offer new delivery methods. © SAP AG TERP10 13-39 Visit: www.sapeducation. Integration between SAP HR Training and Event Management and multiple other application components enables you to streamline internal processes. Integration with SAP Knowledge Warehouse. and attendees. The employee can be booked directly into available training sessions Costs of training can be assigned to the proper budgets Training and Event Management's extensive scope of functions encompass the entire process of planning and administering business events: demand determination and date scheduling.com . so that development plans can be done efficiently and effectively Example: A company requires its Customer Service Representatives to be proficient in MS Word. she may need to attend a course on MS Word.co. resources.Training and Event Management Position Person Person Position “Office Manager" Profile match up Qualification deficit? Confirmation of attendance  SAP AG 2004 Seminar Training: Qualifications/ requirements matching is also important in detecting skills gaps among employees. If the employee does not have this skill. and book. or cancel attendance) as Self-Service solutions.

Business event groups can. be combined to form higher level business event groups resulting in a hierarchically structured curriculum or catalog. Business event types are assigned to event groups.com . © SAP AG TERP10 13-40 Visit: www. A business event type is a prototype event including all of the general attributes that apply to events of this type. Event groups and types form the basic framework of the business event catalog.sapeducation. in turn.co. English for Beginners Advanced English Business English Technical English Most of the information relevant to business events is stored with the business event types .Business Event Preparation: Business Event Hierarchy Employees Courses Language Courses French English Business event groups are purely for structural purposes and can occupy multiple levels in the hierarchy. 03/09/00 – 06/10/00 Technical English 10/10/00 – 10/11/00 Technical English 03/11/00 – 05/12/00 Technical English 08/01/01 – 09/02/01 Technical English  SAP AG 2004 The business event catalog is presented in a hierarchical form. Note: You create business event dates in the dynamic business event menu. It is made up of business event groups and event types. instructor etc. They form the basic framework of the business event catalog. You can create business event dates either with or without resources (location.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.). A business event (also referred to as a business event date) inherits all of the attributes stored for the event type. A business event type is not scheduled to take place on a specific date. You book attendees for business events. A business event group is a grouping together of business event types that share the same characteristics or deal with related subject matter. A business event is a specific occurrence of a business event type on a specific date. and is scheduled to take place on a specific date.

external person. and contact person. You use the priority feature to specify whether a booking is essential. such as checks for event prerequisites (qualifications and events attended) or checks for bookings for the same event type.sapeducation. the relevant billing and allocation data is stored or checked in Training and Event Management. and interested party. Once the maximum number of bookings has been reached. Once the optimum number of bookings has been accepted for an event.co. or waiting list. organizational unit. © SAP AG TERP10 13-41 Visit: www. only bookings with essential priority are accepted. applicant. user.com . The following checks are performed for both individual and group attendees: Existence check Availability check Capacity check A number of additional checks are carried out for individual attendees. and for group attendees of the types company. you can only make waiting list bookings.Book Attendance: Overview 1 Select business event 2 Select attendee (attendee type + name) or create if necessary 3 Specify booking priority: ● Normal ● Essential ● Waiting list booking 4 Enter or check information for billing and activity allocation: ● Fee ● Fee assignment Internal activity allocation Billing Free of charge 5 Book attendee  SAP AG 2004 You can make bookings for individual attendees of the types person. customer. When bookings are made.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can assign various booking priorities to the attendees. normal.

The Extended Search function offers additional selection options.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You must set up ESS users for your employees (using transaction HRUSER) and an R/3 Internet user for Web users (using transaction SU05). To use the selfservices of Training and Event Management. or rebookings). © SAP AG TERP10 13-42 Visit: www.com . the employee can rebook or cancel bookings or submit requests to do so via the approval workflows). if necessary. You can offer your employees and other Web users access to these applications via the corporate intranet as Employee Self-Services and as Internet Applications on the Internet.Employee Self-Service (ESS) in Training and Event Management Training and Event Management has two Employee SelfService features that complement one another: Training Center: where employees can view the current event catalog and book themselves for events. From the list display. such as selection by target group. ESS Training Center: Employees can display the company's current business event catalog.sapeducation. Employees can book or remove events using the shopping basket. You can display detailed information and access a Web Link display for business event locations. ESS My Bookings: This ESS application lets employees display their current booking data for all of their booking operations (bookings. The applications are presented in an intuitive and easy-to-use format. Employees can fill a shopping basket and save it for later editing. rebook or cancel their bookings.co. My Bookings: where employees can view their own booking data and. The hit list of events displays the most important data of the business event. cancellations. You must maintain the business event data (event catalog) you want to display on the intranet or Internet. Employees can fill a shopping basket with events and save it for later editing. materials and so on that are linked to them via the Knowledge Link infotype. You can click the Internet icons beside event types and event dates to display relevant documents. ESS can be used in conjunction with approval workflows especially developed for them Company Internet Intranet User  SAP AG 2004 Training and Event Management lets you offer self-service access to the most important day-to-day functions of the application. You select a subject area on the search screen. you must satisfy the following prerequisites: You must install the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) and a Web Browser.

Use of organizational units as attendees and organizers of business events Personnel Administration: Use of persons from the HCM Master Data as attendees and instructors R/3 Appointment Calendar: Automatic generation of entries in the R/3 Appointment Calendar for attendance bookings and instructor activity SAP Knowledge Warehouse: Display of information material from the Knowledge Warehouse (training materials.com . videos. use of attendee types customer and contact person Materials Management: Use of materials from the material master as resources for business events.co. efficient data exchange.Training and Event Management Integration with other mySAP ERP processes Materials Management Sales Order Management Personnel Development Time Management Organizational Management Personnel Administration Accounting Training & Event Management SAP Knowledge Warehouse R/3 Appointment Calendar  SAP AG 2004 Integration with other application components facilitates direct.) in Training and Event Management and its SelfService applications Cost Accounting: Internal activity allocation of attendance fees and instructor costs. use of appraisal systems from Personnel Development Time Management: Recording and checking of attendance (for internal event attendees and instructors) Organizational Management. documentation. This data can be further processed in Training and Event Management. etc. generation of purchase requisitions and material reservations Personnel Development: Check for and transfer of qualifications. Sales and Distribution: Billing of attendance fees. cost transfer posting for business event costs © SAP AG TERP10 13-43 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

© SAP AG TERP10 13-44 Visit: www. Costs generated by the working times can be assigned according to their source in Controlling.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Information from Time Management is used in Logistics to determine employees’ availability for capacity requirements planning. online menus.co. and display working times flexibly. flextime) can be managed manually or automatically. You can determine work requirements for the enterprise and plan employee shifts. Evaluating Working Time: SAP Time Management functionality allows you to query on. Use of Working Time: Information on working times is used to calculate gross wages in Payroll Accounting. Working times can be used for activity allocation in Controlling.sapeducation. Time accounts (such as leave. and the Employee Self-Service (ESS) application. integration with automatic time recording systems.com .Time Management: The Process Ways to Record Working Time Evaluating Working Time Use of Working Time Cross Applications Time Sheet Self-Service Applications Incentive Wages & Payroll Accounting Time Accounts Cost Assignment Personnel/Time Administrators Activity Allocation Time Reporting Time Recording Terminals Shift Planning Capacity Planning  SAP AG 2004 Ways to Record Working Time: Several options are available for recording working times. You can generate time tickets automatically using postings from Plant Data Collection (PDC). including a central time sheet(CATS).

illness.sapeducation. overtime.com . such as Leave  SAP AG 2004 Illness Valuation and remuneration of employee working time is based on time data recording.Types of Time Data Work schedule Early Normal Late + changes to the planned specifications from the work schedules Attendances.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 13-45 Visit: www. leave. You record deviations from or exceptions to an employee’s work schedule in the Time Manager’s Workplace. such as Substitutions Changes to planned working time Seminar Business trip Availability Addition to planned working time Absences.co. substitutions. and business trips. This information is then stored in the appropriate infotypes. Examples of employee time data are hours worked.

or changes to planned working time.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. leave. such as: Online entries by time administrators Separate time recording systems Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) Employee Self-Service (ESS) applications. Workflow forms.sapeducation. business trips.com .co. or touch screen systems Customer systems with an interface to the R/3 System Time data. is stored in infotypes. A personnel or time administrator records this data in various ways: Time Manager‘s Workplace: administer data for a group of employees Maintain individual infotypes: record and change data through infotype screens Fast entry: Records data in one infotype for several employees at the same time.Recording Data in Time Management Internet Workflow Time Recording Terminals Employee Self-Service Time Manager‘s Workplace Fast entry Time Sheet Time Administrator  SAP AG 2004 To record employee times in Time Management. such as Internet Application Components (IACs). you can use a variety of systems and methods. such as hours worked. © SAP AG TERP10 13-46 Visit: www. such as those listed above.

and default values.What is CATS? A variety of user interfaces CATS classic/CATS regular CATS notebook Joint data storage & validation logic CATS HCM Time quotas Payroll Financials Costs Invoices Project Mgmt Costs Project progress Deadlines Manufacturing External employees’ activities Target applications  SAP AG 2004 The Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) is another form of Employee Self-Service.com . © SAP AG TERP10 13-47 Visit: www.co. You can use it to record the actual working times of individual employees. The Cross-Application Time Sheet offers the following advantages: Cross-application standard screens for entering working times Ease of use for all users Default values and data entry templates Integrated approval process Support for corrections SAP enhancements for increased flexibility in the definition of authorization checks.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. plausibility checks.sapeducation.

com .CATS Business Process nal Optio nal Optio Create account assignment Administrator Online in SAP system Record times Personalized input help Online and offline checks Release times Release times for approval Approve times By workflow or report Follow-on processes Invoices Accounting Payroll  SAP AG 2004 The process in the Cross-Application Time Sheet consists of the following steps: Entry of time data in the time sheet Release of time data Approval of time data (also using a Workflow) Transfer of time data to the target application Note: The "release time data" and "approve time data" steps are optional.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 13-48 Visit: www.co.

you specify Compensation area.com . additional payments/deductions.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Compensation Process Compensation Plans Org. recurring payments or compensation stock options infotype record When you set up a Compensation Process. a country grouping Compensation plan type and category Guidelines Whether the plan creates a basic pay. the changes relevant for payroll accounting are carried out automatically Multi-level approval is supported © SAP AG TERP10 13-49 Visit: www. Bonus and Merit increase. that is. you specify: Eligibility rules Budget type Compensation planning and approval: Managers can only see their own data All data can be created in the status “planned” Planning sheets (data) can be “submitted” for approval Once approved. For example the compensation process Annual Salary Review could be linked to two compensation plans. Management Eligibility What? Guidelines Who? How much? When? Budget Processes  SAP AG 2004 A Compensation Process is linked to one or more Compensation Plans. When you set up a Compensation Plan.co.

you can determine the internal value of jobs and positions at your enterprise to ensure that you remain competitive. and so on to employees in accordance with remuneration policy at the enterprise. and a control mechanism for implementing this policy.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. It provides a central overview of remuneration policy.co. You assign budgets to organizational units.Areas of Compensation Management Job pricing Budgeting BU BU O O BU O BU O Compensation administration BU BU O O Long-term incentives  SAP AG 2004 The Compensation Management component controls and manages remuneration policy at an enterprise. you can create budgets centrally and decentrally.sapeducation.com . Furthermore. you can generate pay grade structures to which you can assign jobs and positions at your enterprise. Budgeting enables you to plan and control expenses for compensation adjustments. You can also roll up budgets using organizational units. and decentralized compensation administration. It also facilitates compensation planning and budgeting. shares. In this way. You can save the results of external job evaluation systems and salary surveys. You can manage long-term incentives (stock options plans). You use Compensation administration to distribute salary increases. Compensation Management comprises four areas: You can perform job pricing within Compensation Management. Using these results. © SAP AG TERP10 13-50 Visit: www.

com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.Total Compensation Statement An HR administrator can generate and print several Total Compensation Statements which can then be sent to employees.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-51 Visit: www. Employee Self-Service Each employee can display his or her own personal Total Compensation Statement in the Internet.sapeducation.

Budgets are distributed and compensation managed for organizational units and/or employees. Salary data is changed as a result of compensation administration.com .Integration of Compensation Management Personnel Development Appraisal results MDT Organizational Management Who?/Who for? which department which jobs. The organizational structure and job/position data are read from the Organizational Management component. Compensation Management can use information stored in the Personnel Development appraisal system to compensate employees on the basis of their appraisal results.co. Integration with Treasury simplifies the task of managing long-term incentives. The approval and activation procedures for compensation adjustments can be controlled by Workflow.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 13-52 Visit: www. Compensation Management can update infotypes 0008 Basic Pay and 0015 Additional Payments (Personnel Administration).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. positions Payroll Personnel Administration What? Workflow approval activation Compensation Management How? mass maintenance individual maintenance payments bonus Treasury (ALE)  SAP AG 2004 Compensation Management uses information from various components. Compensation Management reads data on employee payments from the Personnel Administration component. The functions included in the Compensation Management theme category of Manager´s Desktop (MDT) enable line managers to perform tasks related to salaries. such as salary increases and bonus payments. Changes to employees' salary data are written to Payroll.

Employees enroll themselves in the benefits plans and receive varying benefits. again. Savings. depending on which plans they select. Stock Purchase. the employee contributes considerably less for these company-based plans. There are six international plan categories defined in the system: Health. Companies frequently offer benefits packages at a reduced rate to their employers. processing employee benefits is a simple and user-friendly process. Insurance. then they would have to pay if they were to enroll privately. You can use the Miscellaneous plan category for benefit plans that do not fit neatly into one of the other plan categories. this varies according to the specific benefits plan. As a result. As a result. Contributions are paid by either the employer or the employee.co. and Miscellaneous. or both. You store restrictions and eligibility for the benefits plans in the IMG. You put group together varying plans for different employees according to several factors.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. North America).sapeducation. Credit. employees generally participate in benefit plans offered by their employers as part of their compensation package. © SAP AG TERP10 13-53 Visit: www.Overview of Benefits Employer (ER) Benefits Plans Employees (EE)  SAP AG 2004 In many countries (esp. such as fitness programs or company car privileges.

such as evaluating the payroll account. then call up the control record for the relevant payroll area.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 13-54 Visit: www. Here. These payments and deductions are included in the payment calculation by means of different wage types.com .sapeducation. bank transfers and check payments. payroll accounting comprises a number of work processes including the generation of payroll results and remuneration statements. you carry out the required steps in preparation for the payroll run. which are calculated for an employee during a payroll period.co. etc. however. If you want to start payroll from the menu. specify first the country. payroll accounting is the calculation of payment for work performed by each employee. The employee is usually paid by bank transfer or check and the payment amount is printed in a form for the employee. More specifically. The calculation of payment comprises two main steps: Calculation of remuneration elements Statutory and voluntary deductions (country-specific) Both the remuneration elements and the statutory and voluntary deductions consist of individual payments and deductions.Payroll Procedure Payroll procedure Master Data Time Data Remuneration statement Transfer to Accounting Payments to various payees  SAP AG 2004 Broadly speaking. Payroll accounting also includes a number of subsequent activities: transfer of payroll results to Accounting various evaluations.

com . This is determined by country-specific regulations and. the philosophy of the company.sapeducation. Different factors determine whether such benefits increase or reduce the taxable income.co. in some countries. An employee's remuneration consists of all wage types calculated for him or her during a payroll period. various bonuses and gratuities are included in the remuneration calculation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 13-55 Visit: www. Deductions can be made for items such as a companyowned flat.Calculation of Remuneration Elements Basic pay Gratuities Sick pay Remuneration elements Bonuses for night work  SAP AG 2004 Overtime Vacation allowances Bonuses for dirty work The remuneration elements for an employee are formed from individual wage and salary types that are used during a payroll period. company-sponsored day care or similar benefits. Payments such as basic pay.

for example. are used to calculate the deductions. total gross amount.Statutory and Voluntary Deductions Tax Unemployment insurance Remuneration elements Loans Transfer of remuneration Pension insurance  SAP AG 2004 Voluntary and statutory deductions. different totals are formed during the payroll run.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. are taken from the gross calculation to determine the payment amount. and these totals are be used for subsequent processing.co. Different gross values. © SAP AG TERP10 13-56 Visit: www. and gross tax amount. such as tax and social insurance contributions. For this reason.

and approving it. © SAP AG TERP10 13-57 Visit: www.co. to posting the actual travel expenses and carrying out possible revisions and retroactive accounting. can be customized Reporting SAP R/3 Reports & SAP Queries Manager's Desktop Business Warehouse (BW) Mobile Self-Services Mobile Travel Expenses for Laptops (Offline) Mobile Travel Planning for Handhelds  SAP AG 2004 The Travel Management module enables you to carry out the complete range of procedures from entering a travel request. payment. rental car.Travel Management: Processes & Functions Travel Planning Travel request & approval Booking flights. Personnel Management Country versions 17 preconfigured country versions with country-specific features International version.sapeducation.com . Controlling.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. hotel. taxation Integration with Financial Accounting. rail ticket online using Employee SelfService Travel Policy Management Negotiated rates and prices Integration with travel centers and Travel Expenses Travel Expenses Enter travel expenses using Employee Self-Service Credit card clearing &cost distribution Workflow Settlement.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. objects Line Manager Personnel Cost Planning Specialist Cost Planning Run Automated Detailed Planning Consistency Checks and Release  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-58 Visit: www.Personal Cost Planning and Simulation: Process and Roles Involved Planning Preparation Board or HR Department Definition of rules. and scenarios Data Collection Employees Organizational units.sapeducation. jobs.co. and customer org. positions.com . guidelines.

Cost Planning Overview – Business Example Pay information Basic Pay: Recurr. © SAP AG TERP10 13-59 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation.co. Payments/Deductions LTIs: Additional Payments Capital Formation Payroll Results Simulated Pay Scale Reclasssification Employee Position Job Personnel cost plan Decentralized planning Headcount planning included Different scenarios Best support for line managers Integration with subsequent processes Detail planning for line managers Pay information Planned Compensation Planning of Personnel Costs  SAP AG 2004 mySAP ERP HCM SAP BI mySAP ERP Financials The Released Personnel Cost Plan provides data for transfer to mySAP ERP Financials and data for transfer to Compensation Management or Training & Event Management in mySAP ERP Human Capital Management.

sapeducation.com .HCM Processes: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the basic business processes of Human Capital Management Discuss the integration points with other mySAP ERP processes  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-60 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

you will be able to: List options for reporting Human Capital Management information  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-61 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Reporting and Analysis: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Many reports can be viewed as lists (ALV) or they can be download to a PC application. They enable you to define your own search criteria and then create lists of employees and employee data. The standard system includes a large number of reports to help you meet your reporting requirements. for example. Personnel administrators are confronted daily with large volumes of data that must be recorded and evaluated. ABAP reports are available for this purpose.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 13-62 Visit: www. or perform statistical evaluations.Analytics and Reporting Lists/statistics Graphics connection GRAPHICS 5% MS Excel MS Word 30% 45% 20% File Data changes File File  SAP AG 2004 Reporting plays a central role in Human Capital Management.com .

As of 4.sapeducation. The hierarchical levels required before accessing a particular report vary from component to component. You can access standard reports in the Menu Tree.6c. it remains Ad Hoc Query within Human Capital Management. Reports which are created in Ad Hoc Query or SAP Query can be saved and added to the standard report structure.com . SAP Query. The standard reports can also be modified in customizing.The Information System in HCM HIS Per Ad Hoc Query Available fields Infotype 0000: Actions Mill Per PE Soc Employment status Infotype 0001: Org. Assignment Ric Pfis Hoc Mai Hor Mill Smi Rot Infotype 0002: Personal Data Menu Tree Administration Recruitment Personnel Development Benefits Compensation Management Personnel Cost Planning SAP Query Report Generator  SAP AG 2004 Ad Hoc Query and SAP Query enable you to create reports.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. SAP also delivers many important standard reports for all applications within SAP. © SAP AG TERP10 13-63 Visit: www. In addition to delivering reporting tools for creating reports. The reports are generally found and executed at the lowest level within the InfoSystem. Ad Hoc Query is integrated into SAP Query. You start the reports from the main Information System within the SAP Easy Access menu or from an information system within a component or one of its sub-components. HIS) to create a report. Although it is called InfoSet Query in other R/3 components.co. you have the option of starting a standard report or using a tool (Ad Hoc Query. When accessing the info system for Human Resources. You can personalize the Menu Tree by hanging queries created in Ad hoc Query and SAP Query in it.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.com .Reporting and Analysis: Topic Summary You are now able to: List options for reporting Human Capital Management information  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-64 Visit: www.co.

com .co.sapeducation.Human Capital Management: Unit Summary You are now able to: Define organizational structures in Human Capital Management Manage employee records Describe basic business processes in the area of Human Capital Management Identify the integration points with other ERP processes Explain the reporting and analysis tools in Human Capital Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 13-65 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

enter 01. Mark this position as Manager of own organizational unit. 1-1-1 For the date and preview period. 1-1 Extend the existing organizational plan for your company.sapeducation. you will be able to: • • Set system defaults and parameters relevant to HR.01. 1-1-4 Create an additional position ## Administrator based on the job ## Admin © SAP AG TERP10 13-66 Visit: www. Due to the growth in your company. 1-1-3 Create the position ## Head of Department based on the job ## PoD.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. new organizational units and positions need to be created.2003 and up to 3 years in the future.Human Capital Management: Exercises Unit: Human Capital Management Topic: Organizational Structures At the conclusion of these exercises.com . Create a new organizational unit and position. 1-1-2 Create the organizational unit ## Purchasing.

a drop down menu appears listing all available tabs. 2-2-2 How many hours does Dave Demmerle work per week? Weekly Working Hours © SAP AG TERP10 13-67 Visit: www.Unit: Human Capital Management Topic: Employee Records At the conclusion of these exercises. 2-2-1 In which company structures does Dave Demmerle belong? Company Code: Personnel Area: Personnel Subarea: Employee Group: Employee Sub-group: Payroll Accounting Area: Position: You can display all available tabs at any time by selecting the “Other menu” button to the right of the tabs. Clicking the desired menu item switches to that tab’s display. The HR department regularly reviews data for current employees.sapeducation. HR will be hiring new employees to fill the additional positions 2-1 Before reviewing and changing current data in the system.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. personnel number 100002. In addition. you will be able to: • • • Set system defaults and parameters relevant to HR. set your user parameters for country and user group in order for certain settings to default correctly. 2-1-1 Set the following user parameters: Parameters MOL UGR BEN Value 10 10 10 (Personnel country grouping) (User group (HR master data)) (Benefit area) 2-2 Display the personnel data for employee Dave Demmerle. now that a new organizational unit has been setup. to answer the following questions. Hire a new employee to fill a position.co. When you click on this button.com . Review master data for a current employee.

2-2-3 What types of leave and how many days may Dave Demmerle take? You can always find an infotype by entering part of its name in the Infotype field and choosing Display. The system then creates a dynamic list of all infotypes that include this search string in their title. 2-2-4 Exit the Employee Record. You can also enter the exact number of the infotype you require in the Infotype field.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. 2-3-1 Enter the following data for the Create Actions infotype: Field Name Position Personnel area Personnel subarea Employee group Employee subgroup Input Data Number from exercise 1-1-4 3000 (New York) 0001 (Manhattan) 1 (Active) U4 (Salaried) 2-3-2 Save the data on the Create Organizational Assignment infotype. assuming that you know it already. If only one infotype matches the search string. 2-3-3 Enter the following data for the Create Personal Data infotype: Field Name From Member Last name First name Gender Birth date SSN © SAP AG Input Data 01/01/YYYY – 12/31/9999 (YYYY = Current year) Spouse Your choice Your choice Your choice 06/25/1970 Your choice TERP10 13-68 Visit: www. Remember to Save between each infotype.com . it is immediately displayed. 2-3 Hire a new employee with personnel number 500102## at the beginning of the current year to fill the administrator position created in the previous exercises.

co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.2-3-4 Enter the following data for the Create Family Member/Dependents infotype: Field Name From Last name First name Member Gender Birth date SSN Input Data 01/01/YYYY – 12/31/9999 (YYYY = Current year) Your choice Your choice Spouse Your choice 06/25/1970 Your choice 2-3-5 Enter the following data for the Create Addresses infotype: Field Name Address Type Address Line 1 City State/zip code Input Data Permanent Residence 321 Broad Street SAPBerg PA/18974 2-3-6 Enter the following data for the Create Withholding Info W4/W5 US infotype: Field Name Filing Status Select Save.sapeducation. Input Data Married © SAP AG TERP10 13-69 Visit: www.com .

co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.2-3-7 Enter the following data for the Create Basic Pay infotype: Field Name Pay scale type Pay scale area PS Group Level Amount Select Save to continue. This will complete the personnel action. 2-3-8 You may skip the Create Adjustment Reasons Communications and Bank Details infotypes by selecting the yellow arrow to the right (next record) button. Input Data 01 (Standard contract) 06 (New York) GRD01 03 2.com .000 © SAP AG TERP10 13-70 Visit: www.sapeducation.

Enter and process the new employee’s travel expenses. 3-1 You want to send employee 500102## to a Communications class. you will be able to: • • • Book the new employee for word processing training. Does the employee have travel privileges? If not.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Enter training attendance/time data for the new employee. It is listed under Management and Leadership Development. This infotype is in the HR Master Data. 3-1-1 Book employee 500102## in the Communication class. Employees may also incur travel costs either by attending training courses or by visiting other company sites.Unit: Human Capital Management Topic: Human Capital Processes At the conclusion of these exercises. 3-1-2 Before sending employee 50102## to training.com . This course is scheduled throughout the current year. As a project team member. To be competitive and to gain knowledge. verify he/she has travel privileges. employees within your company may attend training classes.co.sapeducation. you need to understand the processes of booking attendance in training courses and recording trip costs. © SAP AG TERP10 13-71 Visit: www. you will have to create the Travel Privileges infotype.

3-2 Your employee attended the Communication training course and incurred travel expenses.com .00 1.00 32. Enter a travel expense report for employee 500102##.35 Currncy USD USD USD USD USD Date MM/01/YYYY MM/01/YYYY MM/02/YYYY MM/01/YYYY MM/02/YYYY You may have to enter additional data for some entries such as a description and location. Reimbursement Amount © SAP AG TERP10 13-72 Visit: www. 3-2-1 Enter the trip costs based upon the following receipts: Exp Ty AIRP TELE HTL DINN DINN Amount 225.sapeducation.80 400 .co. Trip Number ___________________________________________ 3-2-2 Simulate the trip costs and record the reimbursement amount for employee 500102##.00 35.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Select Enter. In the Job field.Human Capital Management: Solutions Unit: Human Capital Management Topic: Organizational Structures 1-1 Extend the existing organizational plan for your company. In the selection area. In the overview area. double click on the object type Organizational unit. Highlight the box Head of own organizational unit.01. click on the term organizational unit and search for the name Purchasing. In the search area.co. Mark this position as Manager of own organizational unit. select Column and Configuration. In the selection area. 1-1-3 Create the position ## Head of Department based on the job ## PoD. Select Execute. 1-1-2 Create the organizational unit ## Purchasing. enter 01. Click on the button Date and preview period. Deselect Chief and Check ID. double click on the organizational unit Purchasing with the Organizational ID of 50010673.2003 and up to 3 years in the future. enter the description ## HoD and the long text ## Head of Department. enter 3. Save your entries. double click on the object type Position. Select Find (Enter). Choose the button Create and in the popup that appears.com . © SAP AG TERP10 13-73 Visit: www. Save your entries. On the Basic data tab page.2003 and in the Time period field.01. On the Basic data tab page. Human Resources → Organizational Management → Organizational Plan → Organization and Staffing → Change 1-1-1 For the date and preview period. enter 01. enter the short description ## Pur and the long text ## Purchasing. enter ## HR Mgr or make the selection by using the F4 help. select your newly-created organizational unit ## Purchasing and choose the Create button.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. In the popup that appears. In the Start date field.

com . In the overview area. © SAP AG TERP10 13-74 Visit: www. Highlight the box Head of own organizational unit.sapeducation. Save your entries. On the Basic data tab page. enter the description ## Adm and the long text ## Administrator. double click on the object type Position. enter ## Admin or make the selection by using the F4 help.1-1-4 Create an additional position ## Administrator based on the job ## Admin. In the popup that appears. select your newly-created organizational unit ## Purchasing and choose the Create button.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In the Job field.co.

personnel number 100002. Select the box to the left of Organizational Assignment from the list. enter the following data: Personnel no: 100002 2-2-1 In which company structures does Dave Demmerle belong? Ensure that the Employee Information tab is selected. Select the Display icon and record the following: Company Code: 3000 IDES US Personnel Area: 3500 Philadelphia Personnel Subarea: 0001 Philadelphia Employee Group: 1 Active Employee Sub-group: U1 Hourly rate/labor Payroll Accounting Area: UW US Weekly Position: _50011134 Admin_ Select the Back icon. 2-1-1 Set the following user parameters: System → User profile → Own data Select the Parameters tab on the Maintenance screen. Make the following entries: Parameters MOL UGR BEN Value 10 10 10 (Personnel country grouping) (User group (HR master data)) (Benefit area) 2-2 Display the personnel data for employee Dave Demmerle.sapeducation.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. set your user parameters for country and user group in order for certain settings to default correctly. Human Resources → Personnel Management → Administration HR Master Data → Display On the Display HR Master Data screen.co.Unit: Human Capital Management Topic: Employee Records 2-1 Before reviewing and changing current data in the system. to answer the following questions. © SAP AG TERP10 13-75 Visit: www.

com . Select the Display icon and record the weeklyworking hours. 2-2-3 What types of leave and how many days may Dave Demmerle take? You can always find an infotype by entering part of its name in the Infotype field and choosing Display. © SAP AG TERP10 13-76 Visit: www. 28 days of Vacation 10 days of Sick Leave 2-2-4 Exit the Employee Record.You can display all available tabs at any time by selecting the “Other menu” button to the right of the tabs. Clicking the desired menu item switches to that tab’s display. The system then creates a dynamic list of all infotypes that include this search string in their title. Weekly working hours :40 Select the Back icon. Select the Exit icon. You can also enter the exact number of the infotype you require in the Infotype field. When you click on this button. it is immediately displayed. Select Planned Working Time. a drop down menu appears listing all available tabs. If only one infotype matches the search string.sapeducation. assuming that you know it already.co. Enter Select the Leave Entitlement infotype.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Type leave into the Infotype field. Select the Display icon and record the leave types and days. 2-2-2 How many hours does Dave Demmerle work per week? Select the Payroll information tab.

Human Resources → Personnel Management → Administration HR Master Data → Personnel Actions Personnel no.2-3 Hire a new employee with personnel number 500102## at the beginning of the current year to fill the administrator position created in the previous exercises. Select the Execute icon.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-3-1 Enter the following data for the Create Actions infotype: Field Name Position Input Data Number from exercise 1-4. Start 500102## 01/01/YYYY (YYYY = Current year) Select Hire from the list of Personnel Actions. Choose ##Administrator 3000 (New York) 0001 (Manhattan) 1 (Active) U4 (Salaried) Personnel area Personnel subarea Employee group Employee subgroup Select Save.com . 2-3-2 Save the data on the Create Organizational Assignment infotype. Remember to Save between each infotype. Enter ## and then select the drop down.sapeducation. Select Save © SAP AG TERP10 13-77 Visit: www.co.

Choose Enter to confirm message warning “Enter data for payroll past (retroactive accounting. Input Data 01/01/YYYY – 12/31/9999 (YYYY = Current year) Your choice Your choice Your choice 03/22/1967 Your choice Married (Use list of possible entries) 2-3-4 Enter the following data for the Create FamilyMember/Dependents infotype: Field Name From Member Last name First name Gender Birth date SSN Select Save.” Input Data 01/01/YYYY – 12/31/9999 (YYYY = Current year) Spouse Your choice Your choice Your choice 06/25/1970 Your choice © SAP AG TERP10 13-78 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.co.com .2-3-3 Enter the following data for the Create Personal Data infotype: Field Name From Last name First name SSN Birth date Gender Marital status Select Save.

500 Input Data Married Input Data Permanent Residence 321 Broad Street SAPBerg PA/18974 © SAP AG TERP10 13-79 Visit: www.sapeducation. 2-3-9 You may skip the Create Adjustment Reasons Communications and Bank Details infotypes by selecting the yellow arrow to the right (next record) button.com . 2-3-6 Enter the following data for the Create Withholding Info W4/W5 US infotype: Field Name Filing Status Select Save. Choose Enter to confirm message warning “Enter data for payroll past (retroactive accounting. Input Data 01 (Standard contract) 06 (New York) GRD01 03 2. Choose No to cancel. Choose Enter to confirm message warning “Enter data for payroll past (retroactive accounting. This will complete the personnel action. the system displays a message regarding enrollment.co.” 2-3-7 Enter the following data for the Create Basic Pay infotype: Field Name PS type PS area PS Group Level Amount Select Save.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.2-3-5 Enter the following data for the Create Addresses infotype: Field Name Address Type Address Line 1 City State/zip code Select Save.” After the save.

com . Note: A green traffic light indicates seats are still available in the class.sapeducation.co. With the class selected right click your mouse and select Book. expand Management and Leadership Development. expand the class.Unit: Human Resources Topic: Human Resource Processes 3-1 You want to send employee 500102## to a Communications class. Select the Cancel icon to exit the Book Attendance:Data dialog box. Enter through any Booking Checks messages. to verify that your employee has been booked in the class. Exit the Dynamic Attendance menu. © SAP AG TERP10 13-80 Visit: www. 3-1-1 Book employee 500102## in the Communication class.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. This course is scheduled throughout the current year. Human Resources → Training and Event Management → Attendance→ Attendance Menu From the Dynamic Attendance Menu screen. Expand the Business Leadership folder. On the Dynamic Attendance menu. In the Book Attendance:Data dialog box enter the following data: Person 500102## Select the Book Attendance icon at the bottom of the screen. It is listed under Management and Leadership Development. by selecting the arrow. Expand the Communication event and select a class.

Enter a travel expense report for employee 500102##. Select the Create icon. Accept the default values. The employee is now assigned to various reimbursement and expense groups. To verify if the employee has travel privileges.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The system takes you to the Employee information tab. Select the Enter icon. Review the travel infotypes. YYYY = Current year) Reason: Attend Communication Class City: Philadelphia Travel Expenses Travel © SAP AG TERP10 13-81 Visit: www. you need to create the Travel Privileges infotype. Therefore.co. 3-2 Your employee attended the Communication training course and incurred travel expenses. verify he/she has travel privileges. Does the employee have travel privileges? Human Resources → Personnel Management → Administration→ HR Master Data→ Maintain From the Maintain HR Master Data screen. Select Exit.3-1-2 Before sending employee 50102## to training.com . 500102## Select the Create icon. This infotype is in the HR Master Data. Change the Valid From date to 01/01/YYYY. Enter the following trip data: From: MM/01/YYYY 07:00 (MM = Current month + 1. Verify Trip schema Domestic trip (01) in the Choose Trip Schema dialog box. enter: Personnel No. Select the Travel Privileges infotype.sapeducation. 3-2-1 Enter the trip costs based upon the following receipts: Human Resources → Travel Management Expense Manager On the Travel Management screen. Select Save. enter the personnel number 500102##. The Travel Privileges infotype does not have a green check next to it signifying that an infotype does not exist. type “travel” in the Infotype field and select Enter. YYYY = Current year) To: MM/02/YYYY 20:00 (MM = Current month + 1.

00 1.80 Select Exit twice.com .80 35.00 150. 3-2-2 Simulate the trip costs and record the reimbursement amount for employee 500102##. enter the following expenses and receipt information: Exp Ty AIR TELE DINN HTL Amount 225.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. enter the following data: Description: Hotel Location: Philadelphia Confirm all dialog boxes by selecting the Enter icon.co. Select the Save icon. Trip Number ________________________________________ Remain in the Travel Expense Manager for the next exercise. From the Travel Expense Manager. select the trip that you just created and select the Results button. Reimbursement Amount: 411.On the same screen. © SAP AG TERP10 13-82 Visit: www. In the dialog box for additional information about the hotel expense.00 Currncy USD USD USD USD Date MM/01/YYYY MM/01/YYYY MM/01/YYYY MM/01/YYYY Select Enter.sapeducation.

The pages of a personnel file that make up an employee’s master data record and that are created via a personnel action are called ____________.co. When an infotype is updated. The employee group is an organizational unit defined for the purposes of payroll accounting.com . Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence. . Determine whether this statement is true or false. What are the three structures that you define in Human Capital Management? _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 4. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 3. © SAP AG TERP10 13-83 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. . 2. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.sapeducation. The steps in Cross-Application Time Sheet process are: . 5. 6. the old data is lost. and .Human Capital Management: Test Your Knowledge 1. A job represents a unique classification of responsibilities in your organization and is used in defining positions. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

8. Answer: False. What are the three structures that you define in Human Capital Management? Answer: Enterprise. . 9. Instead. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Answer: True – a job represents a unique classification of responsibilities in your organization and is used in defining positions. it remains in the system so that you can perform historical evaluations.com . A job represents a unique classification of responsibilities in your organization and is used in defining positions. Answer: Time Data Entry. The steps in Cross-Application Time Sheet process are: . Infotypes can be created via personnel actions or maintained individually. Approval.co. The payroll accounting area is used for the purposes of payroll accounting.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. When an infotype is updated data is not lost. and Organizational structures. Answer: False. Human Capital Management has hundreds of standard infotypes. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.sapeducation. The pages of a personnel file that make up an employee’s master data record and that are created via a personnel action are called ____________.Human Capital Management: Answers 7. and Transfer 12. Personnel. Release. Answer: Infotypes. Determine whether this statement is true or false. © SAP AG TERP10 13-84 Visit: www. 11. The employee group is an organizational unit defined for the purposes of payroll accounting. Each infotype is stored with a specific validity period. 10. When an infotype is updated. the old data is lost. Custom user-defined infotypes can be created. . and . The employee group is a general division of employees. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

com .co.ERP Financials – Financial Accounting Contents: Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting Accounting Transactions in the General Ledger.sapeducation. Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable Fixed Asset Accounting Financial Closing Activities  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-1 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: Explain the organizational structures and master data of Financial Accounting Perform typical accounting transactions in the application components of Financial Accounting Identify the integration points with Sales and Distribution. Materials Management.co.sapeducation.ERP Financials .Financial Accounting: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.com . and Controlling Understand Fixed Asset Accounting Prepare financial reports  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-2 Visit: www.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-3 Visit: www.co.com .

Financial Accounting: Business Scenario Within the enterprise. you need to recognize the functions within the Financial Accounting module.ERP Financials .  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-4 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Each company has its own complete general ledger to record financial transactions. Each company must also fulfill certain reporting requirements. exist several companies.com .sapeducation. As a project team member.

co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-5 Visit: www.Organizational Elements: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.sapeducation.com . you will be able to: Explain the functionality of the main structures used in the Financial Accounting processes and their purpose.

Company Code In an international business. Since most governments and tax authorities require each operating entity to be established as a separate legal entity. © SAP AG TERP10 14-6 Visit: www. There must be at least one company code in the production environment for a business to be live. operations are often located across numerous countries.sapeducation.co.com . The company code key is a 4 digit alphanumeric field. commercial law. and other financial accounting criteria. You should create a company code according to tax law. Company code Independent accounting entity =  SAP AG 2004 The company code does not usually extend across national boundaries. Company codes are usually created based on geographic considerations.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The company code is the smallest SAP entity that supports a full legal set of books. a company code is usually defined.

com . © SAP AG TERP10 14-7 Visit: www. subsidiaries) where legally required. the business area is entirely optional and flexible within the constraints of the business area definition. Business areas may be used to facilitate external segment reporting across company codes. Business area is a 4 digit alphanumeric field. If no external business segment reporting is legally required.sapeducation.co. Area of operation Machinery Business area 1000 Machinery Plant construction = 2000 Plant construction Automotive 3000 Automotive  SAP AG 2004 You can set up several business areas to which the system can assign postings made in any company code defined within a client.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Business Areas Business areas are used for internal purposes to create balance sheet and profit and loss statements or alternatively can be used to meet external segment reporting requirements. covering the company's main areas of operation (product lines.

that is. you can make postings to them from any company code.sapeducation.co. Germany North America Europe Asia/Australia 3000 4000 6000 USA Canada Mexico 1000 2000 2100 2200 2300 Germany England Portugal France Spain 5000 Japan 1000 Machinery  SAP AG 2004 2000 Plant constr. 3000 Automotive Business areas are generally company-code independent.Organizational Structures International Frankfurt. © SAP AG TERP10 14-8 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.co.com .Organizational Elements: Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain the functionality of the main structures used in the Financial Accounting processes and their purpose.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-9 Visit: www.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you will be able to: Describe financial master data and explain the way it is grouped Explain basic settings  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-10 Visit: www.co.Master Data: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.com .sapeducation.

the posting to the respective reconciliation account in the General Ledger takes place analog to this. that means. the General Ledger often contains only collective postings. the G/L account designation and the categorization of the G/L account as an income statement or balance sheet account. e. different valuation approaches should possibly be used for: the trade balancing of an account according to regional requirements © SAP AG TERP10 14-11 Visit: www. The Asset Accounting (AA) records all business transactions that have to do with the management of assets. In such cases. IAS. the posting data is represented in a more differentiated way in so-called subledgers which pass on their data in compressed form to the General Ledger.g. depreciations. etc) are recorded within the assigned company code. as soon as a posting is made to a subledger. the processing of receivables and Asset Accounting. The General Ledger (GL) contains the recording of all accounting-relevant business transactions on to G/L accounts from a business point of view. in orderly form. It often happens that asset lists and movements have to be evaluated differently for different purposes. Reconciliation accounts connect the subledgers to the General ledger in realtime.sapeducation. The chart of accounts contains.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Materials Management). German HGB) Key figure analysis Group consolidation Vendor FI AP  SAP AG 2004 The component Financial Accounting (FI) focuses on the General Ledger. the definitions of all G/L accounts of the General Ledger. For reasons of clarity. All postings that are executed for the asset (acquisitions. Every general ledger is structured according to a chart of accounts. The Accounts Receivable Accounting (AR) records all business transactions that have to do with the relationships to customers.com . retirments. It takes much of its data from Sales & Distribution (SD). These definitions basically include the account number.Tasks in Financial Accounting FI GL Reconciliation Accounts General Ledger Balance Sheet Assets Account P/L P&L Accounts Banks Reconciliation Accounts FI AA Assets FI BL FI AR Customer Display business transactions Money and value flows Display and valuation of positions Display of profits/losses Parallel accounting principles (US GAAP.co. The Accounts Payable Accounting (AP) records all business transactions that have to do with the relationships to suppliers. It takes much of its data from Purchasing (MM . Important tasks of Financial Accounting are the recording of monetary and value flows as well as the evaluation of the inventories.

co. it may be necessary to prepare a balance sheet.) In order to be able to carry out these different valuation approaches. The objects that are to be consolidated hang below the consolidation groups and are called consolidation units. so-called valuation areas are established in SAP R/3. For many companies today. business areas (business area consolidation). Reasons for this can be: Access to international capital markets Orientation towards foreign shareholders Global fusions and acquisitions Increased transparency These parallel accounting standards can be realized using R/3 by managing different valuations on different G/L accounts and these G/L accounts are used in different balance sheet/P&L statement structures. not only for the national accounting standards.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. US-GAAP. The EC-CS (Enterprise Controlling . to IAS. The Bank Ledger (BL) supports the booking of cash flows. combinations of companies and business areas or combinations of companies and profit centers. but also in accordance with other valuation guidelines such as IAS (International Accounting Standards) or US-GAAP (General Accepted Accounting Principles).Consolidation) forms the group structure using consolidation groups and units for the tasks of Consolidation. © SAP AG TERP10 14-12 Visit: www. Consolidation groups are defined for each hierarchy. They represent levels and consolidation takes place on these.the financial statement for tax purposes (insofar as another valuation is permitted) the internal Accounting (Costing) parallel accounting standards for the group balancing of account (acc. Depending on the consolidation type.com . profit centers and hierarchy nodes (profit center consolidation).sapeducation. Consolidation groups can be: subgroups (company consolidation). these are companies. etc.

the balance sheets required by the legislator as well as the P/L statement are compiled. international comparability).sapeducation. In this case.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The aim of recording business transactions is to create a Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Statement in the sense of a report. for example.g. Many Balance Sheet/P&L Structures are already delivered. financial means. Which of these procedures should be used is either legally prescribed or can be chosen freely where a legal option exists. These external Reporting requirements. from this. the business transactions that are entered in the subledgers. but also those entered in Materials Management (material stock) or in Treasury flow into the balance sheet in real time. Financial reports that are required for external Reporting purposes (for example. by general accounting standards such as US-GAAP or IAS.Integration of the G/L Accounts in Financial Accounting Balance Sheet FI AA FI GL General Ledger Assets Σ Σ Σ Σ Assets Assets Liabilities Equity capital MM Material Loans Σ Σ TR Loans FI AR Customers SD Receivables Liabilities FI AP Vendors MM Bank FI BL Profit and Loss Bank accounts Expenditure Income  SAP AG 2004 The General Ledger is managed at company code level and. In terms of integration. © SAP AG TERP10 14-13 Visit: www. In these Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss structures. Treasury Management (this includes. Two procedures can generally be applied for structuring the Profit & Loss statement: Period Accounting Cost-of-sales Accounting Both procedures result in the same operating income.co. The component "Treasury" (TR) focuses on functions such as payment means. are provided. The assets of a company are listed in the balance sheet. like the different legal requirements of the relevant financial authorities. These reports must be adapted to the specific national requirements. loans and Market Risk Management. Balance Sheets and P/L Accounts) are created in FI. the decision in favour of one of the procedures is made based on an analysis from a business point of view (e. derivatives and bonds). as a rule. Different Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss structures can be set up in SAP R/3 for the different reporting requirements. it is defined exactly which accounts should appear in which balance sheet items. divided into Assets (application of funds) and Liabilities (source of funds).com . foreign exchange.

different accounts for personnel expenses). Administration. for example Manufacture. Production. such as. the total output of a period is set against the total costs for a period. This structuring clarifies how the expenses are distributed to the different production factors. the revenues of a period are set against the cost of sales for a period.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 14-14 Visit: www. the expenses are not structured according to expense types. In Cost-of-sales Accounting.In Period Accounting. Distribution. etc. The cost of sales for the period show the expenses that have been incurred for the realization of the revenue. but according to their business origin. The balance sheet changes remain unconsidered.com . Here.co. as they are in the Period Accounting.sapeducation. that means the balances of similar expense accounts can be easily grouped (for example. The total output of a period is defined here as the sales revenue minus a decrease in the warehouse inventory or plus an increase in the warehouse inventory. The revenues of the period are determined in exactly the same way as in Period Accounting. The total costs of the period are structured according to the individual expense type. Research & Development.

co.com . whether the account is a P&L type account or a balance sheet type account. The definitions consist mainly of the account number.. and the type of G/L account. © SAP AG TERP10 14-15 Visit: www. and as many additional charts as needed! 1000 10000 1000 2000 20000 2000  SAP AG 2004 Each general ledger is set up according to a chart of accounts.Charts of Accounts INT CAUS GKR . account name. that is. Many country-specific charts of accounts are included in the standard system..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. You can define an unlimited number of charts of accounts in the R/3 System. The chart of accounts contains the definitions of all G/L accounts in an ordered form.sapeducation.

com . A chart of accounts can be used by multiple company codes (see diagram). This chart of accounts is assigned to the company code.co. you have to specify one chart of accounts for the general ledger. This means that the general ledgers of these company codes have the identical structure.Chart of Accounts Assignment Chart of accounts Company code A Company code B Company code C  SAP AG 2004 For each company code. © SAP AG TERP10 14-16 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

The four field statuses of a field can be Suppress. Required. Finally. and Optional. field status of the company code segment of the master record is determined when creating. changing or displaying the same.sapeducation.co..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. . Display.com . © SAP AG TERP10 14-17 Visit: www.Account Groups for G/L Accounts Cash accounts Cash Company codespecific settings Account definition in chart of accounts Account groups Account 001111 General ledger Asset Material P&L Liab. Cash 000000-099999 unt Acco up gro  SAP AG 2004 Account groups classify G/L accounts into user-defined segments They also determine the number range of the accounts that will fall into these user-defined segments..

interest calculation. The first.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Controls for the following are found in this segment: account control. bank/financial details.sapeducation. the company code segment. joint ventures.G/L Account Master Record Account definition in chart of accounts Account X PLUS Company codespecific settings PLUS Company codespecific settings CC 1000 CC 3000 Account X in company code 1000  SAP AG 2004 Account X in company code 3000 There are two segments to the G/L master record. the chart of accounts segment. the account group (which controls company code segment fields) and the consolidation account number. account management. has high level control features the like description of the account.com . and document control © SAP AG TERP10 14-18 Visit: www. The second. whether the account is a balance sheet account or a P/L account.co. details how the company code that uses that specific account manages the account.

In this way.co. the reconciliation between subledger and general ledger is always guaranteed.sapeducation. aa bb  SAP AG 2004 The reconciliation account ensures real-time integration of a subledger account with the general ledger. The G/L account reconciliation account itself is not designed for direct posting. © SAP AG TERP10 14-19 Visit: www. postings are limited to reconciliation accounts by the use of account types.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Ledger Accounts . vendors. In the general ledger.Reconciliation Accounts and Sub-Ledgers General ledger Reconciliation accounts for customers. . .com . and assets aa bb Subsidiary ledgers Contract AR Customers Vendors Assets Subsd. .

Any company code defined in the client will have access to the vendor general data information. Vendor specific information such as name and address is stored at the client level.Vendor Master Record Account definition at client level Vendor X General data PLUS Company codespecific settings PLUS Company codespecific settings CC 1000 CC 2000 Vendor X in company code 1000  SAP AG 2004 Vendor X in company code 2000 Vendor master records contain data that controls how transaction data is posted and processed.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 14-20 Visit: www. Master data that is needed by a company to define how that particular company code will process transactions with the vendor is stored in company specific records. This includes all the information about a vendor that is needed to be able to conduct business with them. This technique prevents individual company codes from maintaining data that would be identical in nature.co.

sapeducation.co.com . The various purchasing organizations of the group have to enter data specific to purchasing in the vendor master record before the supplier's master record can be used. 1000 The purchasing organizations purchase goods and services from suppliers. © SAP AG TERP10 14-21 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. who are paid by accounts payable.Purchasing Data in the Vendor Master Record Account definition at client level Vendor X General data PLUS Company codespecific settings Purchasing organizationspecific settings PO 1000 CC 1000 Vendor X in company code 1000  SAP AG 2004 Vendor X in purchasing org.

© SAP AG TERP10 14-22 Visit: www. This includes all the information about a customer that is needed to be able to conduct business with them. Any company code defined in the client will have access to the customer general data information.co.sapeducation. Customer specific information such as name and address is stored at the client level.Customer Master Record Account definition at client level Customer X General data PLUS Company codespecific settings PLUS Company codespecific settings CC 1000 CC 2000 Customer X in company code 1000  SAP AG 2004 Customer X in company code 2000 Customer master records contain data that controls how transaction data is posted and processed.com . Master data that is needed by a company to define how that particular company code will process transactions with the customer is stored in company specific records. This technique prevents individual company codes from maintaining data that would be identical in nature.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

and division) must define sales area-specific settings for a customer before it can start doing business with that customer.Sales Area Data in the Customer Master Record Account definition at client level Customer X General data PLUS Company codespecific settings PLUS Sales areaspecific settings CC 1000 Sales area 1000-10-10 Customer X in company code 1000  SAP AG 2004 Customer X in sales area 1000-10-10 A sales area (combination of sales organization.co. © SAP AG TERP10 14-23 Visit: www. distribution channel.sapeducation.com . These could be special conditions and terms of payments that the customer has arranged with the specific sales area.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

you can define certain control parameters and default values for depreciation and other master data. Additionally. The application component TR (Treasury) is used for managing financial assets.  SAP AG 2004 The asset class is the main criteria for defining the asset. In the asset class. There are functions available for processing leases..sapeducation.Asset Class Accounts for buildings Account 001111 1000 000000-099999 unt Acco lass c Asset Accounting 1000 100000-199999 Buildings Machinery Business equipment 2000 200000-299999 Standard assets 3000 300000-399999 4000 400000-499999 Assets under construction Low-value assets 5000 500000-599999 .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. The asset classes used by IDES for this are: 4000 For assets under construction 5000 For low-value assets Note 1: You can also create asset classes for intangible assets and leased assets. Each asset has to be assigned to an asset class. there is at least one special asset class for assets under construction and one for low-value assets. © SAP AG TERP10 14-24 Visit: www.. Assets that do not appear in the same line item of the balance sheet (such as buildings and equipment) have to be assigned to different asset classes. Note 2: The application component PM (Plant Maintenance) is used for the technical management of assets.com .

Assets in FI Organizational Units Company code Asset 1 Asset 2 Asset 3 Business area A  SAP AG 2004 Business area B Business area C Each asset belongs to a company code and business area. etc. you can assign the asset to various CO objects (cost center. internal order. © SAP AG TERP10 14-25 Visit: www.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. retirements. All postings made for the asset (acquisitions.com .) are applied in the assigned company code and business area. depreciation.sapeducation. Additionally. activity type) and logistic organizational units (for selection purposes only).

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.sapeducation.Master Data: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe financial master data and explain the way it is grouped Explain basic settings  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-26 Visit: www.com .

A/R: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.sapeducation. A/P. Describe document processing methodology and terminology.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-27 Visit: www.Accounting Transactions in the G/L.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . you will be able to: Explain how the Finance Application can meet basic financial processing requirements.co.

co. If you have ceased a disposition procedure for a material in the material master set. He can define. The R/3 system supports the purchaser responsible in determining possible supply sources. To do this. Furthermore. © SAP AG TERP10 14-28 Visit: www. for example. plant and other data relevant to the organization of purchasing must be provided. whether a goods receipt or an invoice has been executed for the respective order position. This procedure runs exclusively in MM. The system also supports dunning. The required entry data such as supplier. When goods are received. a document is created in FI with which the evaluated goods are posted to the material stock account or the consumption account (debit) and to a goods receipt / invoice receipt account (credit). One option for determining the supply source is to create queries and finally record the offers.sapeducation. Purchase order handling: The system provides you with entry tools when creating orders. requirements planning is carried out first of all.Process overview: Purchase to Pay Purchase to Pay Order Requirement Order Goods Receipt Invoice Verification Payment Material Supplier Plant Purchasing Org. the system checks. Selecting a supplier is facilitated by price comparisons of the different offers. At the same time. material.com . The purchaser can supervise the processing status of the order in the system. the responsible department can register a materials requirement manually to Purchasing using an order requirement. the quantity of goods received against the order quantity. among other things.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. No postings take place in FI. you can access orders and conditions which already exist in the system. it is possible to have the order requirement automatically created by the R/3 system. Cancellation letters can be dispatched automatically. Purchaser Group Warehouse Vendor Pay Method Bank  SAP AG 2004 One essential business process is the purchase of goods that will be presented here as Purchase to Pay in order to explain the most important transactions in Accounting. From a logistical point of view. A material document is created in MM to update the inventory.

The vendor invoice is posted in MM and.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. All of these purchasing processes are settled in R/3 via Logistics. It is here that decisions are made about the payment process. © SAP AG TERP10 14-29 Visit: www. a document is created in FI with which the invoice amount is posted to the goods receipt / invoice receipt account (debit) and the vendor account (credit). such as. The goods receipt / invoice receipt account is used to make sure that a goods receipt is executed for every invoice and vice versa.sapeducation. the payment methods and the bank settlement.co. at the same time.After the invoice has been received in the Invoice Verification. for example. the Vendor Invoice is checked as to the correctness of computation and content. The Payment Processing usually takes place in Financial Accounting.com .

due to several sequential postings. Account Statement Vendors  SAP AG 2004 If you follow the individual subprocesses of the general Purchase to Pay procurement.as a price difference.co. therefore in the Profit and Loss Statement. Likewise.sapeducation. procurement into the warehouse is a material stock increase bound to a bank account reduction. the liabilities built up in the short term by the payment are balanced again. From the point of view of the balance sheet. ultimately the GR/IR clearing account as well as the bank clearing account are balanced again.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. then you will recognize that. Payment Program FI BL Material Loans Receivables Liabilities Bank Allocation Bank Incoming Bills FI AP 2.Inventory Procurement Process from the Account View Balance Sheet MM FI GL Bank accounts Assets Liabilities Equity capital 1. © SAP AG TERP10 14-30 Visit: www. 4. Goods Receipt to Warehouse GR/IR Allocation Assets 3. External price fluctuations which may arise can be recorded .depending on the price control of the material .

Integration with Materials Management Goods receipt Purchase order MM Purchase order Order amount Material Document Goods receipt Document Line items Material GR/IR Material stock or consumption 1 MM FI GR/IR 2 1 Invoice receipt Invoice verification documentv Document Line items GR/IR Vendor GR/IR Vendor Tax Tax FI No document Vendor 2 MM  SAP AG 2004 FI The last two steps can be completed in reverse order. depending on the order the goods and the invoice are received. The goods receipt/invoice receipt clearing account ensures that goods were received for each invoice.com . and vice versa (GR/IR).sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 14-31 Visit: www.co.

com . © SAP AG TERP10 14-32 Visit: www. taking account of cash discount periods Cash 10 Vendor 10 10 Post the payment document Print payment medium Manual Automatic  SAP AG 2004 The standard system contains common payment methods and corresponding forms that have been defined separately for each country.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.sapeducation.Elements of the Payment Process Select payment method and bank Select items for payment Calculate the payment amount.

com .01. Status Maintain parameters Parameters have been entered Start proposal run Payment proposal has been created Edit proposal Payment proposal has been edited EDI Start payment run Posting orders: x generated.. 03.Overview of the Automatic Payment Program Run date Identification Account C or V Account 10 or V C 20 Account . PK …. the system does the following: Posts payment documents Clears open items Prepares data for the printing of payment media © SAP AG TERP10 14-33 Visit: www. PK ….co..nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Document PK …. Line items PK …. Line items PK …...10 . . x completed Payment run has been carried out DME Start printout  SAP AG 2004 During the payment run.or V C 20 ..10 .20 .XXXX AC200 Document Line items Document PK …..

When an order has been settled effectively. After the sales order has been entered. The sales order is generated at the level of the distribution chain. all services with regard to the customer run off as an integrated process.sapeducation. Two scenarios which are typical for Accounting are introduced here as an example: The anonymous sale of products ex stock and the made to order production using the generation of a service as an example. © SAP AG TERP10 14-34 Visit: www. There can be several sales organizations within one company code.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In the R/3 module Sales and Distribution (SD). the system carries out an availability check for the desired delivery date. The combination of a sales organization and a distribution channel is also called a Distribution Chain. Every sales organization can use different distribution channels to sell goods. In SAP R/3.com . documents that are linked to one another are used and a corresponding Workflow is introduced via these. The ordered items can apply to different Divisions. the Sales Organizations are legally responsible for sales.Process Overview: Order to Cash Order to Cash Product sale ex stock Incoming Orders Transport Delivery Sale of a service Billing Dunning & Payment Incoming Orders  SAP AG 2004 Account assignments from activities Billing Dunning & Payment The sales order is the basis of the sales process. Many different scenarios can be settled via the sales order in SD.co.

The customer can use these as model examples or directly as templates for his own processes. An invoice document is created in SD and a printed invoice is sent to the customer. preconfigured item categories with which you can display the different business processes. Finally. You can create a Transport Order that generates a commissions order.com . a corresponding sales order item . When Payment has been made by the customer. Made-to-order production using the creation of a service as an example: Producing a service represents. All dunning data are saved in one dunning proposal. For example. In this case. in this services example. This means that costs and revenues are derived automatically from the material production costs or from the SD sales prices. to some extent similar order settlements are imaginable. it is settled via a sales order item that . The first two characters provide information about the type of sales document for which this item category was originally designed.controlled via Customizing . billing. can be posted individually and directly on the SD item. So that you can already gain an idea of the effect of the item category from the key. the dunning program executes automatic dunning for a limited amount of accounts. but later also the revenues. payment and dunning are nearly all identical to the steps in sales ex stock. an outbound delivery document is created. The last step in the sales and distribution process is Billing. the SAP R/3 system is supplied with different. the higher the number of days in arrears. materials orders or overhead rates can be offset. a dunning level is defined which is higher. However. The last two characters tell you about the use of the item category. © SAP AG TERP10 14-35 Visit: www. This means that the costs. The documents defined in R/3 make sales order administration easier for you and your customers. On the basis of this dunning level. In MM. a goods issue document and an accounting document in FI are created. In order to enable Controlling for this. From the Controlling point of view. you can pass on the costs and revenues to the profitability analysis (CO-PA) via the Order Settlement. a check is made whether reminders have to be sent and dunning levels are allocated. transactions such as internal activity allocations. you receive your money and post the receipt of payment in FI. dunning fees and interest can be calculated and the dunning text that is selected depends on the dunning level. The accounts are selected in the dunning run and checked for overdue items. a direct services generation process that can also be displayed via a sales order item. Automatic dunning can be triggered for either only one account (individual dunning) or. in order to post the goods issue to the correct general ledger accounts. A dunning history is administered via the dunning notice which has been sent. The cost bearer sales order item can be posted for all transactions of the service generation directly. So that you have a better overview.managed via Customizing .is not a cost bearer.sapeducation. many other and. external invoices.co. The item category is defined in the system using a four-character key. The R/3 makes it possible to analyze the stock on open items and dun overdue items automatically. In addition to these two exemplary sales order items. FOSG is a forward order with the generation of a service while FOST is a forward order for a standard (stock item). The goods to be delivered are posted as Goods Issue.Product sale ex stock: Because this sale is no longer a services generation process (the material is lying evaluated in stock). in contrast to ex stock sales. In doing this. transport and delivery do not apply. SAP uses the key often used in their standard package. The required goods are removed from the stock and prepared for delivery. The delivery cannot be billed until the goods have been removed from the stock and posted as goods issue. On the day of shipping. The steps incoming orders. you do not post individually on each of the sales order items.opens as a cost bearer.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. billing is the point when the revenue occurs. When the service generation is finished. For example.

A goods issue document is created in MM. The last stage in the sales process is billing. and an accounting document is created in FI so that the goods issue is posted to the correct G/L accounts.Sales Process & Integration Sales SD Sales order FI No document Shipping Outbound delivery Outbound delivery Transfer order Picking Goods issue Goods issue Document Line items … … SD Billing SD Billing document MM FI Line items … … FI Invoice  SAP AG 2004 On the day of shipping. and a printed invoice is sent to the customer.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The accounting document debits cost of goods sold and credits inventory.sapeducation. The goods to be delivered are posted as a goods issue.co. A billing document is created in SD. a document is created in FI so that the receivable and revenue can be posted to the correct accounts. At the same time.com . The accounting document debits the customer and Credits revenue © SAP AG TERP10 14-36 Visit: www. an outbound delivery document is created.

Delivery Material Stock Change FG (P/L) (settlement/PO) Receivables Loans Bank Liabilities FI BL 3. In the ideal case. because the income is higher than the expenditure. © SAP AG TERP10 14-37 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the external stock sales process creates several central documents from the account point of view. Billing FI AR Customers P/L Expenditure Income Payment  SAP AG 2004 In the overview.External Stock Sales Process with Account Determination Balance Sheet MM FI GL Assets Liabilities Equity capital 1. Billing creates the income and the corresponding receivables vis-à-vis the customer. except with an adjusted. costs of the production order). An expenditure (for example.sapeducation. you first of all have to look at the activity output of the product. a finished inventory was created from the delivery or settlement of the production order. which is also shown in the profit and loss statement by a corresponding profit. all accounts are settled exactly. In order to reach a more exact understanding.co. higher bank balance. thereby reducing the stock account.com . that is paid through bank accounts (compare lesson 'Plan to Product Process') precedes both the external procurement of services and in-house production. The delivery in the Order to Cash process withdraws from this produced stock. (costs/PO) 2. In in-house production. leading to a credit memo on your bank account. The payment settles these receivables.

The maximum amount that constitutes a minor payment difference is defined in tolerance group settings. Any greater payment difference (outside of tolerance) must be dealt with manually.co.Incoming Payments in Accounts Receivable Complete payment Minor payment difference (within tolerances) Greater payment difference (outside tolerances) Post partial payment Customer 8000 5000 Partial payment Residual item Generate residual item Customer 8000 3000 8000 Invoice reference to open item  SAP AG 2004 The items are cleared if the customer pays his or her open items to the full amount or with an authorized deduction of cash discount. this can be charged off automatically. If a minor payment difference exists. Residual item: The open invoice is cleared and a new open item (residual item) in the amount of the payment difference is created.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. © SAP AG TERP10 14-38 Visit: www.sapeducation. Partial payment: The item being short-paid does not clear.

co. Describe document processing methodology and terminology. A/P.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-39 Visit: www. A/R: Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain how the Finance Application can meet basic financial processing requirements.sapeducation.com .Accounting Transactions in the G/L.

you will be able to: Describe the roles of Depreciation Areas in Asset Accounting Explain asset postings.com .sapeducation.Fixed Asset Accounting: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-40 Visit: www.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

co. retirements) can be posted in various ways to meet the organizational and business requirements of the company. goods receipt and invoice receipt) © SAP AG TERP10 14-41 Visit: www.sapeducation.Asset Transactions Assets General ledger Asset 100 Clearing 100 Asset transaction using (non-integrated) clearing accounts Assets Vendors Asset 100 Vendor 100 Asset transaction integrated with accounts payable or accounts receivable Asset transaction from MM MM Assets Vendors Asset 100 Vendor 100  SAP AG 2004 Asset transactions (acquisitions. but without reference to a purchase order Via materials management using the MM functions (purchase order. the offsetting entry is made to a G/L clearing account To a vendor. In FI-AA you can post in the following ways: Without a vendor or a purchase order.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

for each fiscal year. and perform simulations.com .co. It is possible to branch to master data. © SAP AG TERP10 14-42 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. per period. You can drill down to the details of the FI transactions.sapeducation.Asset Explorer Selection from asset and year Planned values Selection of depreciation area Transactions in fiscal year Book values Depreciation parameters Overview: posted/ planned depreciation Tab  SAP AG 2004 The asset explorer offers a clear overview of the activity for an asset. other cost objects. You can see transactions that have been posted to the asset plus planned and posted depreciation per depreciation area.

To keep more than one valuation basis.Depreciation Areas Asset xy in year 2004 Asset value Book Depreciation Legal Cost accounting Parallel valuation 100000 100000 Depreciation 40000 40000 Remaining value 60000 60000 100000 100000 10000 10000 90000 90000  SAP AG 2004 Often asset balances and transactions need to be valuated differently for various purposes. Separate transaction figures are kept in each area: Per asset and depreciation area & for individual value components such as balances. depreciation. You can thus use a different depreciation method for general business procedures from the depreciation method required by the tax authorities. and remaining book value. © SAP AG TERP10 14-43 Visit: www. Various data is stored in the asset master record for depreciation areas. depreciation areas are kept in the SAP system.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. which control the calculation of normal and special depreciation for the special depreciation areas.sapeducation.com .

co.Depreciation Run FI AA FI GL Book depreciation Planned depreciation Posted depreciation Depreciation accounts book depreciation Cost accounting Planned depreciation Depreciation posting run Posted depreciation Cost accounting depreciation accounts Parallel depreciation Planned depreciation Posted depreciation Depreciation accounts e.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The depreciation is posted to the corresponding depreciation accounts in the general ledger and to the assigned CO cost object assigned to the asset master record. The run can be in direct or batch mode © SAP AG TERP10 14-44 Visit: www.g.com . for IAS  SAP AG 2004 Only after the depreciation posting run has been completed is the depreciation actually posted in asset accounting and in the general ledger.

co.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Fixed Asset Accounting: Topic Summary You are now able to: Maintain an Asset Master Record Describe the role of an Asset Class Describe the roles of Depreciation Areas in Asset Accounting Explain asset postings.com .  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-45 Visit: www.

Prepare Financial Statements: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. you will be able to: Describe the process of preparing financial statements.sapeducation.com .co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-46 Visit: www.

© SAP AG TERP10 14-47 Visit: www.co. There is a list of country-specific reports for completing VAT tax forms. currently several reports meet country-specific requirements. and other reports for additional legal reporting requirements (such as a report for international trade as required by German law). statement USA GKR Statement Germany INT Financial statement IDES Company code financial statements Business area financial statements Operating chart of accounts Country-specific chart of accounts  SAP AG 2004 To support legal reporting requirements.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . support for the consolidated EU report.Preparing Financial Statements Financial statement versions CAUS Fin.

© SAP AG TERP10 14-48 Visit: www. and other reports for additional legal reporting requirements (such as a report for international trade as required by German law). There is a list of country-specific reports for completing VAT tax forms.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Aspects of Reporting Company code reporting Consolidated report (EU) VAT tax reports Other legally required reports  SAP AG 2004 To support legal reporting requirements.com . support for the consolidated EU report.sapeducation. currently several reports meet country-specific requirements.

sapeducation. This program includes both parts of the financial statements. This standard report is found both in the application or general information system menu paths. RFBILA00 Balance sheet ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ Income Statement Assets Company code ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ Revenue Liabilities Expenses Shared equity Net income Financial statements are created using the general ledger of a company code. Restricting views to one or the other is done by selecting only those accounts that are relevant.co. The following financial statements can be created: Balance Sheet Income (Profit & Loss) Statement  SAP AG 2004 SAP delivers a standard Balance Sheet and P/L. which is executed by program RFBILA00. © SAP AG TERP10 14-49 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .Balance Sheet and P&L.

sapeducation.Prepare Financial Statements: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the process of preparing financial statements.co.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-50 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

Materials Management.co. and Controlling Understand Fixed Asset Accounting Prepare financial statements  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 14-51 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .sapeducation.ERP Financials – Financial Accounting: Unit Summary You are now able to: Explain the organizational structures and master data of Financial Accounting Perform typical accounting transactions in the application components of Financial Accounting Identify the integration points with Sales and Distribution.

or assets. 1-1-3 A ______________ is the organizational entity for which balance sheets as well as profit & loss statements can be executed across company codes covering a company’s main areas of operation. 1-1-2 A ______________ is the smallest organizational unit for which a complete self-contained set of books can be executed. the organizational structures must be defined.sapeducation.com . - © SAP AG TERP10 14-52 Visit: www. vendors.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 1-1-1 A ______________ is the legal unit of consolidation to which company codes are assigned. or run transactions that affect the master data. customers. 1-1 Fill in the blanks or answer the questions below to test your knowledge of R/3 structure.Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting: Exercises Unit: Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting Topic: Organizational Structures • Group Company • Company Code • Business Area Before you begin the process of creating G/L accounts.co.

Exercises Unit: Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting - Topic: Master Data At the conclusion of these exercises. 2-1 Answer the following questions to gain a better understanding of account groups.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. it is necessary to group and thereby structure it. Several new accounts will need to be added to accommodate the new integrated system. 476000 CC1000 © SAP AG TERP10 14-53 Visit: www. G/L Account No.com . IDES International has many subsidiaries around the world. you will be able to: Maintain financial master data and explain the way it is grouped within mySAP ERP. and requires a standardized chart of accounts for reporting. 113100 Chart of Account INT Account Group Account Text G/L Account No.co. 2-1-1 Is it mandatory to have account groups for G/L master data? 2-1-2 What is the purpose of G/L account groups? 2-1-3 Display the following 2 general ledger accounts residing in chart of accounts INT and fill in the requested information. The team needs to assure themselves that current master records are grouped in a logical manner. Business requirements dictate that certain information be present in master records. The project team must feel comfortable with adding new accounts when the need arises. Because IDES has a great deal of master data.

“Posting without tax allowed”. Line item display for the new account is required. Flag the field. “-”. 2-2-7 What would need to be done to create this account for use in company code 3000? Remember company code 3000 uses chart of accounts CAUS. 2-2-1 Create a new general ledger account for cash in chart of accounts INT.com . The tax category should be set to input tax. It will be used for payroll cash. therefore.). Add informational text to the new account master indicating the purpose of the new recycling account. It will be mapped to the group chart of accounts CONS using account number 312600 (other misc. Management wants to keep track of the additional costs of the new program. Therefore assign the account to field status group G033. The sort criteria when displaying the line items should be by document number and fiscal year (sort key 002). make sure to attach the account to a P&L account statement type. answer the following questions or perform requested tasks. CONS is the group chart of accounts for INT. 2-2-2 What needs to be done to make this account available for posting? 2-2-3 Create the account for use in company code 1000. For organizational purposes attach this account to account group SAKO.co. Note the number of your new general ledger account. It should be a balance sheet account and should be included in the account group Liquid Funds Accounts. Since it is an expense account. therefore assign the new account to group account number 110100 in CONS. assign the account to field status group G005. Use the account number 4043## for your new account. Use account number 1137## for your new account where ## refers to the number of your group. Since the account is a bank account we want bank-related fields to display when using this account. Note the number of your new general ledger account. The sort criteria when displaying the line items should be by document number and fiscal year (sort key 002). Line item display for the new account is required.2-2 In order to gain a better understanding of general ledger master records. Make sure the account is tagged Relevant to cash flow. 2-2-6 The recycling account is being added to support a state mandated recycling effort. For cash management purposes assign the account to commitment item 1423. Since the account is an expense account we want expense type fields to display when processing documents using this account.sapeducation. We will be closing out the balance of this account to retained earnings account 900000 at year-end. 2-2-4 Create a new general ledger account for recycling expense in chart of accounts INT. The account will be managed in EUR. which is the local currency for company code 1000.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-2-5 Make the new recycling account available for use in company code 1000. © SAP AG TERP10 14-54 Visit: www. Do not concern yourself with the rest of the Bank/Financial details for the time being.

The release approval group is used to classify customers and vendors. create the sales views of the master record for your customer. Since the annual sales and number of employees is different. Use reconciliation account 140000 to tie the customer to the general ledger. for use in company code 1000. continue by creating company specific records for company code 1000. First fill in the client level data by creating a unique name for your customer. Heidelberg. postal code 68944. sales organization 1000. ## refers to your group number in the class. therefore reference CUST-99 in CC 1000. You will always be able to search for customers using this field. Be sure to save your customer master record once you have finished all entries. This is located in the state of Baden Wuerttemberg. Verify that all partner relationships are referencing your own customer.2-3 In order to gain a better understanding of the customer and/or vendor master record(s). Save the data when all information has been entered. 2-3-2 Since a customer order will typically be placed in the Sales & Distribution module. The customer’s address is Haupstrasse 100. distribution channel 12 and division 00 to simplify your task. This field is located on the accounting information screen of the company code data section. Input your group number. answer the following questions or perform requested tasks.com . Assign your customer to release group 0100. Make sure the Tax Classification is set to 1 indicating the customer is liable for taxes.co. Assign your customer the language key your course is being taught in. and payment terms such that purchases will be due immediately (ZB00). Tax classification is found at the bottom of the billing screen.sapeducation. (Partner functions tab) 2-3-4 What is the sales district of your customer? (Sales tab) © SAP AG TERP10 14-55 Visit: www. 2-3-1 Create a customer. You will be using this customer for testing later in the course. CUST-##.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. distribution channel 12 and division 00. group##. Assign your customer to account group KUNA in order to permit an external number assignment. Germany. 2-3-3 List the business partners for your customer. Your customer will be placing orders in sales organization 1000. After client information is complete. There is a similar set up in CUST-99. in the search term field. Their VAT registration number is DE188888889. you will need to update those fields with information about your customer (be creative).

You will be using this vendor to test procurement of materials later in the course. there was an error in creating your customer. The vendor’s address is Bahnhofstrasse 29000 in Hockenheim Germany 68766. 2-3-6 Since the purchasing organization will be responsible for handling the initial creation of purchase orders.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. VEND-##. What additional details are available? © SAP AG TERP10 14-56 Visit: www. Use reconciliation account 160000 to tie the vendor to the general ledger. Then double click on the changed fields. and the partner number Vend-##. Input your group number. The correct address should be Haupstrasse 150. it has been decided after the original creation of customers that all customers should be set up to record payment history. Create a partner relationship on the partner function screen. This is located in the state of Baden Wuerttemberg. 2-4-2 Display the changes for CUST-##. Change the salesperson and phone number to reflect correct information of the new vendor. Enter planning group A4 for use in cash management. First fill in the client level data. C and U. CUST-##. Assign the vendor to account group LIEF in order to permit an external number assignment. create the purchasing view of the master record for your vendor by referencing VEND-99.com . Create a unique name for your vendor. Purchasing Organization 1000. 2-4 You will change your previously created customer master information and review results to check the audit trail of any changes made to master data records. ## refers to your group number in the class. Second. What fields have been changed according to the report? 2-4-3 Select the all changes icon. number of payments and average days in arrears for customers. continue by creating company specific records for company code 1000. This will track the amount. Their VAT registration number is DE177777779.sapeducation. The partner function should be VD. Make the necessary change. for use in company code 1000. Next assign your vendor the language key that your course is being taught in. in the search term field. and payment terms ZB00 and payment methods S. You will always be able to search for vendors using this field. Save the data when all information has been entered. Use the region field to record this information.2-3-5 Create a vendor. 2-4-1 First. group##. Make sure the indicator on the company code portion of the master record complies with the requirement. company code 1000. After client information is complete. Save your vendor master record once you have entered and verified all information.co.

you will be able to proceed with further processing steps. 3-1-3 Execute a payment selection run to pay your vendor for the newly created invoice. and AR Topic: Accounting Transactions in the GL. Charge the expense to the office supplies account 476000. Choose the payment method S for Scheck/Check. Record your document number.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. individual transactions need to be demonstrated. AP. 3-1-5 Schedule your proposal to run by selecting Proposal (have the program start immediately). 3-1 Perform the following tasks to gain a better understanding of automatic payment processing. Save the changes to your master data. Run the automatic payment program for payables and post an invoice to your customer. To monitor the progress of the payment program while it is executing. click on the status icon on the toolbar. The tax code will be V0. and AR • Automatic payment processing • Customer invoice In order to create balance sheets and income statements.co.Exercises Unit: Accounting Transactions in the GL. AP. 3-1-4 Create the parameters for the selection run.com . cost center 2100. 3-1-1 The vendor master record must be updated to include the valid payment methods for VEND-##. The payment method field is located in the automatic payment transactions section of the Company Code Data. 3-1-2 Create an invoice for VEND-## in the amount of 1000. by selecting Parameters from the toolbar. When you receive a message that the program is finished.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 14-57 Visit: www. Back date the invoice’s document and posting dates to yesterday’s date. Make sure the payment terms for your vendor are ZB01.

3-2-1 Enter an invoice for your customer. again selecting the start immediately option. A document has been created at this point recording your payment transaction.co.sapeducation. The credit (PK 50) should be booked to revenue account 800200. Record your invoice number. dated 6 months in the past (both document date and posting date) for 50 000 EUR in company code 1000. 3-1-7 Select the payment run option off the toolbar. © SAP AG TERP10 14-58 Visit: www. This will post the document. Proceed through any tax warnings you might receive.3-1-6 Display your proposed run by selecting Edit → Proposal → Display Proposal.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . what account was it charged to? 3-2 Answer the following questions or perform requested tasks to gain a better understanding of daily transactions. Refresh the status button in the toolbar until you receive the message that posting orders are generated and completed 3-1-8 View the payment transaction by displaying the cleared actives for today for your vendor and record the payment document. CUST-##. 3-1-9 Was your discount taken into account? If so.

000.sapeducation. buildings such as this have a useful life of 50 years. Make certain you use the correct payment terms R001. Once the master record is created. 4-2-1 Post the asset acquisition completely. you can now post an acquisition posting from your vendor for the cost of the building. • Create and post to an Asset Your first task is to create an asset master record for a new office building in Hamburg.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. In Germany.Exercises Unit: Fixed Asset Accounting Topic: Fixed Asset Master Data and Transactions At the conclusion of these exercises. © SAP AG TERP10 14-59 Visit: www. The office building is worth 1.com .co. 4-2 IDES will purchase the office building from a real estate agency. The date of the invoice and posting is today.000 EUR. an asset master record has to be created in asset class 1100 (buildings) with the description Office Building Hamburg ##. vendor Agency##. that is. This agency has already done business with IDES and thus the vendor master record already exists. Input tax of 10% (1I) is in addition to the net amount. 4-1-1 Assign the building to your cost center CC## and business area BA##. you will be able to: • Explain how the SAP system can meet basic financial processing requirements of a Fixed Asset environment. 4-1 IDES is to purchase an office building for the plant in Hamburg (1000). Use transaction type 100 (external asset acquisition). Payment terms come from three installment payments. not including the tax of 10%. Before it can be capitalized. post the acquisition and the amount payable to the vendor in one document. Write down the asset number.

What are the planned and posted depreciation values for the current year? © SAP AG TERP10 14-60 Visit: www.sapeducation.com . 4-2-3 Use the asset explorer to check the values of the new asset in depreciation area 01 (book depreciation). Display the document in the document overview.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Select Depreciation area 01 (book depreciation).4-2-2 Review the document details.co.

first execute the compact document journal and finally. it runs financial statements showing an actual/actual comparison for the previous period. 5-1 Create the compact document journal to display the documents created up to this point in the class.co. execute a balance sheet.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 5-1-1 Create the compact document journal for company code 1000 and the current week. © SAP AG TERP10 14-61 Visit: www. Use financial statement version INT. you will be able to: • Describe the process of preparing financial statements In order to demonstrate the preparation of financial reports. Fill in your user ID as a dynamic selection.com .sapeducation. 5-2-1 Create financial statements for company code 1000 using an actual/actual comparison for the previous period. 5-2 When IDES closes its books. Create the report first for the entire company code and then for your business area BA##.Exercises Unit: Prepare Financial Statements Topic: Prepare Financial Statements At the conclusion of these exercises.

1-1-1 A Group Company is the legal unit of consolidation to which company codes are assigned.sapeducation.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 1-1-3 A Business Area is the organizational entity for which balance sheets as well as profit & loss statements can be executed across company codes covering a company’s main areas of operation. - © SAP AG TERP10 14-62 Visit: www.Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting: Solutions Unit: Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting Topic: Organizational Structures 1-1 Fill in the blanks or answer the questions below to test your knowledge of R/3 structure.com . 1-1-2 A Company Code is the smallest organizational unit for which a complete self-contained set of books can be executed.

A field can be set to Suppressed.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Solutions Unit: Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting Topic: Master Data 2-1 Answer the following questions to gain a better understanding of account groups. changing or displaying master records. Required.sapeducation. 2-1-1 Is it mandatory to have account groups for G/L master data? YES 2-1-2 What is the purpose of G/L account groups? Account Groups classify G/L accounts into user defined segments They determine the number range interval the account must be in They determine the status of fields on the screen when creating.co. 113100 Chart of Account INT Account Group Account Text Liquid Funds Accts Deutsche Bank G/L Account No.com . 2-1-3 Display the following 2 general ledger accounts residing in chart of accounts INT and fill in the requested information. or Displayed. Optional. Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records → Individual Processing → In Chart of Accounts G/L Account No. 476000 Chart of Account INT General GL Accts Office Supplies © SAP AG TERP10 14-63 Visit: www.

then Select Customizing of the Local Layout→ Options → Expert Tab. Enter 110100 for the Group Account Number.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 2-2-1 Create a new general ledger account for cash in chart of accounts INT. answer the following questions or perform requested tasks.sapeducation. Select Show keys in all drop down lists and also select Sort items by keys. It will be used for payroll cash. Select OK. Enter Short and Long Text of “Payroll Cash”.com . It should be a balance sheet account and should be included in the account group Liquid Funds Accounts. it is not valid for posting in any company code until the company code portion of the G/L account master is created. Selectthe SAVE icon to save the account in the Chart of Accounts. then select the create icon (piece of paper) above the tab layout Choose “Cash Liquid Funds Accounts” from the pull down list in the account group field. Note the number of your new general ledger account. 2-2-2 What needs to be done to make this account available for posting? Since this account has only been created in the Chart of Accounts.2-2 In order to gain a better understanding of general ledger master records. Put a check mark in the Balance Sheet Account field by clicking on it. CONS is the group chart of accounts for INT.co. Use account number 1137## for your new account where ## refers to the number of your group. therefore assign the new account to group account number 110100 in CONS. Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records → Individual Processing → In Chart of Accounts Enter account number 1137## Enter Chart of Accounts INT. © SAP AG TERP10 14-64 Visit: www. Note: if you do not see ‘Cash’.

Do not concern yourself with the rest of the Bank/Financial details for the time being. Proceed by any warning.com . Use the account number 4043## for your new account.). 2-2-4 Create a new general ledger account for recycling expense in chart of accounts INT. then hit the create icon (piece of paper) above the tab layout Select the box for Line Item Display Enter the Sort Key 002.sapeducation. Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records → Individual Processing → In Chart of Accounts Enter account number 4043## Enter Chart of Accounts INT. therefore. Enter Functional Area 0400 in the Detailed Control for PL statement accounts field group Enter Short & Long Text of Recycling Expense Enter 312600 for the Group Account Number.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Select the SAVE icon to save the account in the Chart of Accounts. Since the account is a bank account we want bank-related fields to display when using this account. then select the create icon (piece of paper above the tab layout) Select the Account Group “SAKO General G/L accounts” from the drop down list in the account group field. Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records → Individual Processing → In Company Code Enter account number 1137## Enter company code 1000. We will be closing out the balance of this account to retained earnings account 900000 at year-end. Note the message provided by R/3 that your account has been created. Make sure the account is tagged Relevant to cash flow. The sort criteria when displaying the line items should be by document number and fiscal year (sort key 002). Since it is an expense account. Enter Field Status Group G005 (Create/Bank/Interest tab) Select the box for Relevant to Cash Flow (Create/Bank/Interest tab) Select the SAVE icon to save the account in company code 1000. It will be mapped to the group chart of accounts CONS using account number 312600 (other misc. The account will be managed in EUR. For organizational purposes attach this account to account group SAKO. Note the number of your new general ledger account. assign the account to field status group G005. Select the P&L statement account type “X INT 9000000” from the drop down list.2-2-3 Create the account for use in company code 1000. Line item display for the new account is required. which is the local currency for company code 1000. make sure to attach the account to a P&L account statement type. © SAP AG TERP10 14-65 Visit: www.

com . hit the Other Languages icon (second icon to the right of the 1st Line field Enter the text for your account in the space provided. For cash management purposes assign the account to commitment item 1423. Hit the green arrow to exit the screen editor. Enter Field Status Group G033 (Create/Bank/Interest tab) Enter the Commitment item 1423 (Create/Bank/Interest tab) Select SAVE icon to save the account in company code 1000.co. Management wants to keep track of the additional costs of the new program.2-2-5 Make the new recycling account available for use in company code 1000. Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records → Individual Processing → In Chart of Accounts Enter account number 4043## Enter Chart of Accounts INT. The tax category should be set to input tax. 2-2-6 The recycling account is being added to support a state mandated recycling effort. If you want other languages. Therefore assign the account to field status group G033. If more room is needed hit the Editor icon to the right of the 1st Line field which will take you to a full screen editor. The sort criteria when displaying the line items should be by document number and fiscal year (sort key 002).sapeducation. Since the account is an expense account we want expense type fields to display when processing documents using this account. Flag the field. Save the changes made to the account. Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records → Individual Processing → In Company Code Enter account number 4043## Enter company code 1000.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Note the message provided by R/3 that your account has been created. Add informational text to the new account master indicating the purpose of the new recycling account. “Posting without tax allowed”. then hit the create icon (piece of paper) above the tab layout Tax Category “-” Posting without tax allowed “√ ” Select the box for Line Item Display Enter the Sort Key 002. The language for your message should be EN. Make sure to save your work. then hit the change icon (pencil) above the tab layout Select the Information tab Select the Account Assignment Info Line by placing an X in the first box. “-”. © SAP AG TERP10 14-66 Visit: www. Line item display for the new account is required.

You will always be able to search for customers using this field. After client information is complete. postal code 68944. The customer’s address is Haupstrasse 100. Heidelberg. Assign your customer to release group 0100.com . CUST-##. Their VAT registration number is DE188888889. and payment terms such that purchases will be due immediately (ZB00). You will be using this customer for testing later in the course. 2-3-1 Create a customer. Germany. the account would need to be created in the chart CAUS as well as in company code 3000. The release approval group is used to classify customers and vendors. Enter CUST-## in the customer field Enter 1000 for the company code Select Enter to Continue Name . 2-3 In order to gain a better understanding of the customer and/or vendor master record(s). Use reconciliation account 140000 to tie the customer to the general ledger. Assign your customer to account group KUNA in order to permit an external number assignment. continue by creating company specific records for company code 1000. Since company code 3000 uses chart of accounts CAUS.Be creative and enter a unique name Enter Group ## in the search term field Street Address is Haupstrasse 100 Postal Code is 68944 City is Heidelberg Country is DE Region is 08 Enter the language key that equates to the language the course is delivered in.sapeducation.2-2-7 What would need to be done to create this account for use in company code 3000? Remember company code 3000 uses chart of accounts CAUS. ## refers to your group number in the class. then select Enter to continue to the Address screen. First fill in the client level data by creating a unique name for your customer. This field is located on the accounting information screen of the company code data section. answer the following questions or perform requested tasks. Choose the Control data tab © SAP AG TERP10 14-67 Visit: www. in the search term field. Assign your customer the language key your course is being taught in. This is located in the state of Baden Wuerttemberg. for use in company code 1000.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Master Records → Create Enter Account Group “KUNA General Customers”. Input your group number. Save the data when all information has been entered. group##.

com . sales organization 1000. Enter 0 in the Tax field on the billing document tab. Tax classification is found at the bottom of the billing screen. create the sales views of the master record for your customer. you will need to update those fields with information about your customer (be creative). VAT registration # is DE188888889 (if necessary). Your customer will be placing orders in sales organization 1000. There is a similar set up in CUST-99. Be sure to save your customer master record once you have finished all entries. distribution channel 12 and division 00 to simplify your task. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Master Records → Maintain Centrally → Create Enter Customer: CUST-## Company Code: 1000 Sales Organization: 1000 Distribution Channel: 12 Division: 00 Enter Reference Data Customer: CUST-99 Company Code: 1000 Sales Organization: 1000 Distribution Channel: 12 Division: 00 Hit enter to proceed to next screens to view the data contained in the Sales & Distribution portion of the Customer Master. Since the annual sales and number of employees is different. Verify that all partner relationships are referencing your own customer. Make sure the Tax Classification is set to 1 indicating the customer is liable for taxes.co. © SAP AG TERP10 14-68 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Vat registration number is DE188888889 Choose the Company Code data button Enter 140000 in the reconciliation account in the Account Management tab. therefore reference CUST-99 in CC 1000.sapeducation. Then select the Payment transactions tab Enter ZB00 in the payment terms Now SAVE by selecting the diskette icon on the top icon bar 2-3-2 Since a customer order will typically be placed in the Sales & Distribution module. distribution channel 12 and division 00.

(Partner functions tab) SP – Sold to Party BP – Bill to Party PY – Payer SH – Ship to Party CUST-## CUST-## CUST-## CUST-## 2-3-4 What is the sales district of your customer? (Sales tab) DE0015. Input your group number. Enter planning group A4 for use in cash management. and payment terms ZB00 and payment methods S. SAVE your customer now! 2-3-5 Create a vendor. Next assign your vendor the language key that your course is being taught in. C and U. The vendor’s address is Bahnhofstrasse 29000 in Hockenheim Germany 68766. You will always be able to search for vendors using this field. After client information is complete. VEND-##. continue by creating company specific records for company code 1000.2-3-3 List the business partners for your customer. Assign the vendor to account group LIEF in order to permit an external number assignment. Save the data when all information has been entered.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Use the region field to record this information. This is located in the state of Baden Wuerttemberg. © SAP AG TERP10 14-69 Visit: www. ## refers to your group number in the class. in the search term field.com .sapeducation. Their VAT registration number is DE177777779.co. group##. Use reconciliation account 160000 to tie the vendor to the general ledger. You will be using this vendor to test procurement of materials later in the course. Create a unique name for your vendor. First fill in the client level data. for use in company code 1000.

com . then hit enter to continue to address screen. create the purchasing view of the master record for your vendor by referencing VEND-99.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Hit enter to proceed to the next screen. Enter ZB00 in the payment terms. Enter 160000 in the reconciliation account and A4 for the cash management group. Enter S.sapeducation. company code 1000. Name . 2-3-6 Since the purchasing organization will be responsible for handling the initial creation of purchase orders. Purchasing Organization 1000. Proceed through the remaining screen and save the data when prompted to do so. Change the salesperson and phone number to reflect correct information of the new vendor. Save your vendor master record once you have entered and verified all information. The partner function should be VD. then hit enter to continue. Vat registration number is DE177777779.Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Master Record → Create Enter VEND-## in the vendor field Enter 1000 for the company code Enter Account Group LIEF. then hit enter twice to continue. and the partner number Vend-##. © SAP AG TERP10 14-70 Visit: www.Be creative and enter a unique name Enter Group ## in the search term field Street Address is Bahnhofstrasse 29000 Postal code is 68766 City is Hockenheim Country is DE Region is 08 Enter the language key that equates to the language the course is delivered in. U and C for payment methods then hit enter to proceed.co. Create a partner relationship on the partner function screen.

sapeducation.Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Master Records → Maintain Centrally → Create Enter Vendor: VEND-## Company Code: 1000 Purchasing Organization: 1000 Enter Reference Data Vendor: VEND-99 Company Code: 1000 Purchasing Organization: 1000 Hit enter to proceed to next screens to view the data contained in the Partner functions screen of the Vendor Master. Make the necessary change. 2-4-1 First. This will track the amount.com . Make sure the indicator on the company code portion of the master record complies with the requirement.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Master Records → Change On the Customer Change Initial Screen for Accounting: Enter your customer number. CUST-## Enter company code 1000. © SAP AG TERP10 14-71 Visit: www.co. CUST-##. Save the data by choosing the SAVE icon. Second. there was an error in creating your customer. it has been decided after the original creation of customers that all customers should be set up to record payment history. The Vendor Partner should be: VD Vendor VEND-##. Be sure to save all your work. 2-4 You will change your previously created customer master information and review results to check the audit trail of any changes made to master data records. The correct address should be Haupstrasse 150. and then hit enter to get to the master record Make sure you are on the Address tab The address change will be made on the Address Screen. The Record Payment History change will be made on the Payment Transaction Screen of the company code section (hit the Company code button) of the master record. number of payments and average days in arrears for customers.

2-4-2 Display the changes for CUST-##. © SAP AG TERP10 14-72 Visit: www. Date.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. What additional details are available? Date. Then double click on the changed fields. New and Old. What fields have been changed according to the report? Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Master Records → Display Changes On the Customer Account Changes Initial Screen: Enter your customer number. User who made the change.sapeducation.co. Field from/to. Changed fields: Indicator: Record Payment History Street and House Number 2-4-3 Select the all changes icon.com . Field. then hit enter to continue. Time. CUST-## Enter company code 1000.

Solutions Unit: Accounting Transactions in the GL. Charge the expense to the office supplies account 476000. and AR 3-1 Perform the following tasks to gain a better understanding of automatic payment processing.co. 3-1-1 The vendor master record must be updated to include the valid payment methods for VEND-##.sapeducation. Back date the invoice’s document and posting dates to yesterday’s date. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry → Invoice © SAP AG TERP10 14-73 Visit: www. cost center 2100. The tax code will be V0. and AR Topic: Accounting Transactions in the GL. AP. Save the changes to your master data. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Master Records → Change Change Vendor Initial Screen Vendor: VEND-## Company Code: 1000 Address: X (General Data) Payment Transactions: X (Company Code Data) Make sure your vendor address fields are completed. Record your document number.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 3-1-2 Create an invoice for VEND-## in the amount of 1000.com . The payment method field is located in the automatic payment transactions section of the Company Code Data. Make sure that method S is included in the payment transactions area of the company code data. including city and postal code as the check program is looking for this kind of information. Choose the payment method S for Scheck/Check. Make sure the payment terms for your vendor are ZB01. AP.

co. 3-1-4 Create the parameters for the selection run. To monitor the progress of the payment program while it is executing. you will be able to proceed with further processing steps.com . The identification should be GR##. When you receive a message that the program is finished. © SAP AG TERP10 14-74 Visit: www. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Periodic Processing → Payments Payment processing is one of the periodic processing options within accounts payable. by selecting Parameters from the toolbar. Only include VEND-##. payment method S. then save the data.sapeducation. Hit enter to proceed. The run date should be today’s date. The next posting date will be 1 month from today.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 3-1-3 Execute a payment selection run to pay your vendor for the newly created invoice. The run should include company code 1000. 3-1-6 Schedule your proposal to run by selecting Proposal (have the program start immediately).Document Header Information: Vendor: Vend-## Post Date and document date: Yesterday’s date Company Code: 1000 Amount: 1000 Tax Code: V0 (zero) Currency: EUR First Line Item G/L acct: 476000 Debit should default to the D/C field Amount: 1000 Cost Center: 2100 Tax Code: should default to V0 from above Post the document by choosing the Post icon or choosing the menu path: Document → Post A unique document number will be assigned. Do not attempt to choose today’s date from the possible entries list. click on the status icon on the toolbar. Type in today’s date.

You could make changes at this point by choosing Edit → Proposal → Edit.3-1-6 Display your proposed run by selecting Edit → Proposal → Display Proposal. Refresh the status button in the toolbar until you receive the message that posting orders are generated and completed 3-1-8 View the payment transaction by displaying the cleared actives for today for your vendor and record the payment document. This will post the document. 3-1-7 Select the payment run option off the toolbar. 3-1-9 Was your discount taken into account? If so. what account was it charged to? The discount should be charged to account 276000 Discount Received R/3 provides various output options for the payment program after the selection has been run and the journal entry posted.sapeducation. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Account → Display/change Line Items Display Vendor Line Items Initial Screen Vendor VEND-## 1000 Company Code Choose All Items. The final step in the process would be to print the checks. Hit enter to proceed. The method chosen relates to individual business requirements and country customs. In our example the payment method was S for Scheck/Check.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 3-2 Answer the following questions or perform requested tasks to gain a better understanding of daily transactions. A document has been created at this point recording your payment transaction.co. Choose the document with the document type of ZP and look at the overview.com . again selecting the start immediately option. but we will accept the proposal and continue. We will not include this step in our testing. © SAP AG TERP10 14-75 Visit: www.

Record your invoice number.3-2-1 Enter an invoice for your customer. dated 6 months in the past (both document date and posting date) for 50 000 EUR in company code 1000. The credit (PK 50) should be booked to revenue account 800200.sapeducation. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Document Entry → Invoice Document Header Information: Customer: Cust-## Doc Date: 6 months in the past Post Date: 6 months in the past Company Code: 1000 Amount: 50000 Tax Code: A0 (zero) Currency: EUR First Line Item G/L acct: 800200 Credit should default to the D/C field Amount: 50000 Tax Code: should default to A0 from above Post the document by choosing the Post icon or choosing the menu path: Document → Post A unique document number will be assigned. CUST-##.co.com . © SAP AG TERP10 14-76 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Proceed through any tax warnings you might receive.

Value BA## CC## 1000 Value Office Building Hamburg ## © SAP AG TERP10 14-77 Visit: www.com . Write down the asset number. Write down the asset number. Before it can be capitalized.sapeducation. 4-1-1 Assign the building to your cost center CC## and business area BA##. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Fixed Assets → Asset → Create → Asset Field Name Asset Class Company Code Number of similar assets Value 1100 (buildings) 1000 1 Choose Master data.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Field Name Business area Cost center Plant Choose Save. buildings such as this have a useful life of 50 years. Field Name Description Select Time Dependent tab. In Germany.Solutions Unit: Fixed Asset Accounting Topic: Fixed Asset Master Data and Transactions 4-1 IDES is to purchase an office building for the plant in Hamburg (1000).co. an asset master record has to be created in asset class 1100 (buildings) with the description Office Building Hamburg ##.

Value 1.co. This agency has already done business with IDES and thus the vendor master record already exists. vendor Agency##.sapeducation.000. Make certain you use the correct payment terms R001. that is.000 EUR. not including the tax of 10%.100. Payment terms come from three installment payments. The date of the invoice and posting is today. Field Name Amount Tax amount Tax code Payment terms Posting key (PstKy) Account Transaction type Choose Continue.4-2 IDES will purchase the office building from a real estate agency. Input tax of 10% (1I) is in addition to the net amount. Accounting → Financial Accounting → Fixed Assets → Posting → Acquisition → External Acquisition → With Vendor Field Name Document date/posting date Posting key (PstKy) Account Value Today’s date 31 Agency## Choose Enter. Use transaction type 100 (external asset acquisition).000 100.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. The office building is worth 1. post the acquisition and the amount payable to the vendor in one document. 4-2-1 Post the asset acquisition completely.000 1I (input tax training 10%) R001 70 Your office building asset 100 © SAP AG TERP10 14-78 Visit: www.

Accounting → Financial Accounting → Fixed Assets → Asset → Asset Explorer Field Name Company code Asset Value 1000 Your office building asset Value * 1I Today’s date Select Depreciation area 01 (book depreciation).AP subsidiary ledger (3) 154000 – general ledger 4-2-3 Use the asset explorer to check the values of the new asset in depreciation area 01 (book depreciation). Select the Posted Values tab. The posted depreciation is still zero since the depreciation is posted by a depreciation run that has not occurred yet.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Field Name Amount Tax code Reference date Choose Post. View the document details using Document → Display Which three accounts were posted to in this document and to which ledgers do they belong? The document is posted to accounts in the following ledgers: (1) your asset .co.sapeducation. What are the planned and posted depreciation values for the current year? (a) The planned depreciation is 50. Write down the asset number.com .Confirm warning about changing the payment terms by choosing Enter. NOTE: do not exit this screen before proceeding to the next exercise 4-2-2 Review the document details.000 EUR.asset subsidiary ledger (2) Agency## . (b) Return to the SAP Easy Access menu by typing /N in the command field. Display the document in the document overview. © SAP AG TERP10 14-79 Visit: www.

Return to the SAP Easy Access menu by typing /N in the command field. 5-2 When IDES closes its books. Fill in your user ID in the User Name field.co. © SAP AG TERP10 14-80 Visit: www. 5-2-1 Create financial statements for company code 1000 using an actual/actual comparison for the previous period. Use financial statement version INT. it runs financial statements showing an actual/actual comparison for the previous period. struc Fiscal year (period) Period (per.com . 5-1-1 Create the compact document journal for company code 1000 and the current week.nr Value 1000 INT Current fiscal year Last period Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Choose Execute.sapeducation. Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Information System → General Ledger Reports → Balance Sheet/Profit and Loss Statement/Cash Flow → General → Actual/Actual Comparisons → Periodic Actual/Actual Comparison Field Name Company code FIS annual rep. Fill in your user ID as a dynamic selection. Eval) Choose Execute.Solutions Unit: Prepare Financial Statements Topic: Prepare Financial Statements 5-1 Create the compact document journal to display the documents created up to this point in the class. Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Information System → General Ledger Reports → Document → General → Compact Document Journal → SAP Minimal Variant Field Name Company code Posting date Value 1000 Current period Choose the Dynamic selections icon at the top of the screen. Create the report first for the entire company code and then for your business area BA##.

With your cursor on an account.sapeducation. Answer “No” when asked if you want to save the data upon exiting the report. Return to the SAP Easy Access menu by typing /N in the command field.com . Open up more folders and select an amount.The financial report for the last period compared to the same period of the previous year is displayed. from the menu. Re-run the report using the same data but just for your business area BA##. Return to the selection screen. choose Go to → Line Items to drill down to the line items for the account. © SAP AG TERP10 14-81 Visit: www. Open the Commercial Balance Sheet folder under the Financial Statement Items column if it is not already open. You can drill down to the transaction figures of the accounts in the financial statement.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

10. 9. When a document is posted. When a transaction is posted in FI. a number range is assigned to that document. and ______________ to include in the automatic payment run. 2. When a purchase order is created. This number comes from a number range assigned to the _____________ in the header of the document. 11. Determine whether this statement is true or false. For postings to recur on a regular basis. A legal entity is represented by a ___________________in SAP. Determine whether this statement is true or false.sapeducation. 3. 5.co. the _______________________ can be used to generate the necessary documents. 7. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 6. a financial document is also created. 8.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. 4. it automatically appears on the balance sheet.Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting: Test Your Knowledge 1. The parameters for the payment program define the ________________. Determine whether this statement is true or false. The __________________________________ determines the structure of a balance sheet and income statement as far as which accounts map to which line items on the report. Reconciliation accounts can be posted to directly. 12.com . ______________. Key business segments are represented by ___________________ in SAP. © SAP AG TERP10 14-82 Visit: www. A document consists of two parts: a ____________ and ______________. The ____________________ has a range of numbers assigned to it and controls the screen layout of the company code segment of a GL account. More than one company code is assigned to a controlling area.

What are the various acquisitions and retirements that can be posted in Asset Accounting? What is the purpose of the asset explorer? 15. 17. © SAP AG TERP10 14-83 Visit: www. When a short pay for an incoming payment is processed used the partial payment method. 18. A transaction type tells us where the posting is placed on the _________________________.co.13. the invoice being partially paid is cleared and a new open item in the amount of the payment difference is created. and a __________________. 16.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. an accounting document that debits the _________________ and credits _________________ is automatically created. 14.com . When the billing document is created in Sales and Distribution. Determine whether this statement is true or false. A sales area consists of a ___________________. a ____________________.

com . Answer: Financial statement version 25. Answer: Header and line items. A document consists of two parts: a ____________ and ______________.sapeducation. The __________________________________ determines the structure of a balance sheet and income statement as far as which accounts map to which line items on the report. Key business segments are represented by ___________________ in SAP. Answer: Document type © SAP AG TERP10 14-84 Visit: www. the company codes must have the same operating chart of accounts and fiscal year variant. a number range is assigned to that document. 24. When a document is posted.Organizational Structures and Master Data in Accounting: Answers 19. Answer: Business area 21. More than one company code is assigned to a controlling area. This number comes from a number range assigned to the _____________ in the header of the document. The ____________________ has a range of numbers assigned to it and controls the screen layout of the company code segment of a GL account.co. Reconciliation accounts can be posted to directly.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Answer: True. Answer: Company code 20. Answer: Account group 23. A legal entity is represented by a ___________________in SAP. 26. In order for this to occur. Answer: False – You can post to a reconciliation account only through a subledger account. 22. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

© SAP AG TERP10 14-85 Visit: www. For postings to recur on a regular basis. the _______________________ can be used to generate the necessary documents. When a short pay for an incoming payment is processed used the partial payment method. ______________.com . A sales area consists of a ___________________. and ______________ to include in the automatic payment run. it automatically appears on the balance sheet.27. and invoices 30. Determine whether this statement is true or false. When a transaction is posted in FI. and a __________________. a ____________________.sapeducation. Answer: Company code. The parameters for the payment program define the ________________. a financial document is also created. but not when the purchase order is created. Answer: Sales organization. the posting will appear at the end of the financial statement in a category called Accounts not assigned. distribution channel. Answer: True – The account must be assigned to an appropriate line item in the financial statement version used when running the balance sheet. Answer: Recurring entry program 29. Answer: Customer and revenue 34. Determine whether this statement is true or false. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 32.co. the invoice being partially paid is cleared and a new open item in the amount of the payment difference is created. vendors. Answer: False – This statement pertains to a residual item. A transaction type tells us where the posting is placed on the _________________________. Answer: False – A financial document is created when goods are received and when the invoice is received. 31. 28.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. When the billing document is created in Sales and Distribution. and division 33. Answer: Asset history sheet. Otherwise. an accounting document that debits the _________________ and credits _________________ is automatically created. When a purchase order is created.

but without reference to a purchase order. 36. the offsetting entry is made to a GL clearing account.co. (2) to a vendor.com . posted amounts. and (3) via MM by creating a purchase order.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 14-86 Visit: www. and depreciation parameters.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. What are the various acquisitions and retirements that can be posted in Asset Accounting? Answer: (1) Without a vendor or purchase order. posted and planned depreciation. What is the purpose of the asset explorer? Answer: The asset explorer gives a clear overview of the activity for an asset per depreciation area and fiscal year for planned values. posted transactions.35.

Management Accounting Contents: Organizational Structures and Master Data Cost Center Accounting Internal Orders Profit Center Accounting Profitability Analysis Product Costing Reconciliation Ledger Optional: Activity Based Costing  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-1 Visit: www.co.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .

and Human Resources Perform cost analysis using different Management Accounting tools  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-2 Visit: www. Sales and Distribution. Materials Management.Management Accounting: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.sapeducation. Project Systems.co. you will be able to: Define the organizational structures and master data used in Management Accounting Explain the functions of the different Controlling components Identify the other mySAP ERP processes that post data to Management Accounting Explain the purpose of the Reconciliation Ledger Identify the integration points between Financial Accounting. Production Planning.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.com .Management Accounting: Course Overview Diagram TERP10 Course Overview ERP Basics ERP SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Sales Order Management Material Planning Manufacturing Execution Procurement Cycle Inventory and Warehouse Management Lifecycle Data Management Program and Project Management Enterprise Asset Management Human Capital Management Financial Accounting Management Accounting Strategic Enterprise Management  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-3 Visit: www.sapeducation.

Therefore. monitoring. and controlling costs allow your enterprise to achieve profitability and growth.sapeducation.co.Management Accounting: Business Scenario Planning. to proactively monitor business performance. you need to understand the functions of the different Management Accounting components.com .  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-4 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

etc.co. finance & accounting. manufacturing. banks. sales.com . There are also many varied information requirements for users inside the organization. Accounting information of this type would typically be prepared according to standards issued by a governing regulatory agency. External parties requiring accounting information would include regulatory agencies. including all levels of management. © SAP AG TERP10 15-5 Visit: www.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Accounting information of this type is frequently prepared in a format unique to the organization's requirements rather than according to any standard. and insurance companies.Standards Versus Flexibility Management Accounting Management Accounting Cost Accounting Various Valuations Flexibility Financial Accounting IAS GAAP GOB Tax Audit Financial Accounting Financial Statements Legal Requirements Standards  SAP AG 2004 All businesses have requirements to provide accounting information for users both external and internal to the organization. This helps to ensure that operating results are accounted for and reported so that the information is comparable from one enterprise to the next. marketing.

when possible.com .Sheet CO PC P/L CO PCA Profit Center Statement CO Overhead Costs Controlling OM Cost Centers Product Cost Controlling PS PP Production Order MM Sales Order SD HR Internal Order Project CO Cost Element CEL Accounting What costs?  SAP AG 2004 Where? For what? In which area? How profitable? Controlling (CO) is assigned the task of recording all business-related expenses and revenues in detail. in certain cases.Views of Management Accounting CO PA Profitability Analysis Bal. The Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) is used for both company planning and to display the business success. When you install the Profit Center Accounting (CO-PCA). © SAP AG TERP10 15-6 Visit: www.co. their sales revenues) and settles these in FI or in the profitability and sales accounting.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. assign a specific Cost Center to every object for which costs and revenues are incurred in your system. personnel costs). Management Accounting consists of: The Cost Element Accounting (CO-OM-CEL) provides information about what type these cost or revenues are (e. Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC) assimilates the costs for the creation of goods and services (and. allocating them further on a cause-effect basis. in order to provide more exact information about the utilization of costs and assets within the company.sapeducation. Overhead Costs Controlling (CO-OM) focuses on assimilating costs that cannot be directly assigned to the goods and services of a company and.g.

In the different business-related processes such as Purchase to Pay (purchase settlement).co. it is necessary to display external and internal quantity and value flows in a differentiated way. Plan to Product (process from the planning to the internal added value) and Order to Cash (sales).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.Integrated Value Flows in mySAP ERP Financials CO PA Profitability Analysis Bal.Sheet CO PC P/L CO PCA Profit Center Statement CO Overhead Costs Controlling OM Cost Centers Product Cost Controlling PS PP Production Order Project $ Internal Order MM Sales Order SD HR Activity Allocation Process Costs CO Cost Element CEL Accounting FI FI AP Vendor Cost Type Expense Accounts FI AA Assets Assets Accounts FI GL P/L Revenue Types Revenue Accounts FI AR Customer Bal. Between the different accounting components. the costs and services quantity flows are displayed that are necessary for efficient accounting.com .Sheet Puchasing  SAP AG 2004 Manufacturing & Services Sales Order Mgt. © SAP AG TERP10 15-7 Visit: www.

sapeducation.Organizational Structures and Master Data: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. Describe the master data utilized by management accounting.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-8 Visit: www.com . Explain the integration between the financial accounting and management accounting organizational structures. you will be able to: Describe the various organizational units used by the management accounting.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

the balance sheets required by the legislator as well as the P/L statement are compiled.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Organizational Structures in Financials CO PA Global Enterprise Operating Concern Controlling Area Profit Center CO Europe North America FI Germany France USA Company Code IAS/GAAP/Ger.com . It can assign several controlling areas to every profitability area in order to analyze these jointly. for the manufacture or sale of products. Business areas can also be cross-company code. Several warehouse locations can be assigned to the plants for the different warehouse storage of products or materials. Several company codes can be assigned to a controlling area. A Controlling Area represents a closed system for the purposes of cost accounting. This enables cross-company code Controlling. The Plant represents a logistically closed organizational unit. The profitability analysis (CO-PA) is carried out within the Operating Concern. Business Areas can be used to group strategic business fields and to report in the form of nontestable P&L statements and balance sheets. they cannot apply to objects in other controlling areas.sapeducation. the sales organization is an organizational unit of SD-Sales. plants are assigned to company codes.co. It represents the central organizational unit in the R/3 components Materials Management and Production Planning. © SAP AG TERP10 15-9 Visit: www. for example. HGB Business areas MM PP SD Hamburg Dresden New York Dallas Plant Warehouse  SAP AG 2004 The Controlling Area is the basic organizational unit in Controlling. Balance sheets and P&L statements are prepared at company code level in order to correspond to legal Reporting requirements. A purchasing organization is an organizational unit of MM-Purchasing. Allocations can only be executed within a controlling area. The company code is an independent Accounting entity. When defining organizational structures. from this. The operating concern is an organizational unit that depicts the structure of external market segments for the company. The General Ledger is managed at company code level and.

All expense accounts are grouped in one class (class 4) and all revenue accounts (class 8).co. This ensures that all postings to this type of expense account always arrive in CO at the same time. revenues 2 5 Primary cost elements Secondary cost elements 6 Secondar y cost elements Revenue elements Management Accounting/Controlling Profit Center Accounting  SAP AG 2004 The chart of accounts is created in Financial Accounting. Expense accounts to which costs are posted for cost accounting purposes must also be created as cost elements in Management Accounting. Secondary cost elements are defined only in CO and are used for internal CO allocations (such as assessments or settlements).nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.G/L Accounts and Cost Elements Example: International Chart of Accounts Financial Accounting 0 1 Current assets and shortterm capital Financial Accounting 4 7 Semifinished products and finished products 2 3 8 9 NonMaterial Expense operatinventory accounts ing costs. Secondary cost elements do not have any corresponding G/L accounts in FI.sapeducation. revenues Revenue/ Closing inventory change/ current internal activity 1 Current assets and shortterm capital 3 Material Noninventory operating costs. © SAP AG TERP10 15-10 Visit: www.com .

com .co.Cost Centers and Activity Types Invoices Personnel cost Depreciation … Cost Center Cost Center Activity Type Fixed/variable prices Order Order Order  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-11 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation.

com .co. profit centers. . You can also transfer statistical key figures values from the Logistics Information System (LIS). © SAP AG TERP10 15-12 Visit: www. etc. as well as for analysis purposes (e. Type 2 = Totals Can be linked to Logistics Information System (LIS) Periods Type 01 Type 02 1 20 1300 2 20 1355 3 . You can post both plan and actual values for statistical key figures. This is accomplished by linking a key figure from LIS to a statistical key figure in Cost Center Accounting. This is useful for statistical key figures that tend to remain constant over time (such as the number of employees).Statistical Key Figures A measurable quantity that can be assigned to Cost Centers. This is preferable for statistical key figures whose values tend to change each period (such as kilowatt hours of electricity consumption). 12 20 1275 20 1325 Employees Counter no. You define a statistical key figure as a fixed value or a totals value: The fixed value is carried over from the period in which it is posted to all subsequent periods of the same fiscal year. Business Processes and Profit Centers Used as an allocation base (“Tracing Factor”) in overhead cost allocations Two categories: Type 1 = Fixed. Activity Types.g.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. or processes. to calculate the rent cost per employee). internal orders. number of employees in the Transportation cost center who perform vehicle repairs. minutes of long-distance phone calls. such as distribution or assessment.sapeducation. Overhead Orders. You need enter a new posting only when the value changes.  SAP AG 2004 Statistical key figures define some measurable value applicable to cost centers. The totals value is not transferred to the following period but must be entered for each individual period. You can use statistical key figures as an allocation base (or “tracing factor” in CO terminology) for periodic allocation transactions. . Examples could include total number of employees in a cost center.

or to monitor revenues not affecting the organization's core business (such as miscellaneous revenues).com . and can be grouped into four general categories: Overhead orders: Used to monitor overhead costs incurred for a particular purpose. such as building a storage facility. such as conducting a trade fair. Investment orders: Used to monitor costs incurred in the production of a fixed asset. or tracking costs for maintenance and repair work.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 15-13 Visit: www. monitoring. Internal orders provide capabilities for planning. within a controlling area.co.Internal Orders FI MM CO Internal Orders Overhead Cost Orders Investment Orders Accrual Orders Orders with Revenues Revenue Order Prof.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Accrual orders: Used to offset postings of accrued costs (costs calculated in CO) to cost centers. Internal orders may be used for a variety of purposes. in some cases revenues. and allocation of costs. Segmt Sales Order Billing Element Orders with Revs For Any Receiver  SAP AG 2004 An Internal Order is an extremely flexible CO tool that can be used for a wide variety of purposes to track costs and. Segmt Costs Cost Accounting Functions G/L Account Prof. Segmt Cost Center Project G/L Account Cost Center Assets Project Prof. so that both costs and revenues can be tracked. Orders with revenue: Used to replace the cost accounting parts of SD customer orders if SD is not being used.

Profit Center Accounting (PCA) allows you to calculate internal measurements of profitability. In these cases. profitability segments. then. When Profit Center Accounting is active. This specifies where the revenue or cost will reside in CO. reflects the success of a given profit center at meeting the profitability goal for which it was given responsibility. Dividing your company up into profit centers allows you to analyze areas of responsibility and to delegate responsibility to decentralized units. sales). thus treating them as "companies within the company". offices or production sites) or function (production. Whenever there are postings within CO (allocations) which move revenues and/or costs between objects with different profit center assignments. in order to ensure that ECPCA has complete data. © SAP AG TERP10 15-14 Visit: www. The EC-PCA module keeps track of all internal value flows. the various controlling objects are linked or assigned to the profit center identified in that field. internal orders. the system assigns a dummy profit center to the posting. geographical factors (regions. Account Assignment Logic in Controlling: When Controlling is active in R/3. Examples of real account assignment objects are cost centers. Business Process Sales Order Cost Object Profit Center Production Order Material Asset Internal Order. These costs can subsequently be moved to the correct profit centers. each posting to a revenue or expense account that has been set up as a cost element in CO requires an account assignment object.co. etc. production orders. Profit Center Accounting will be updated. divisions). This causes the system to generate a statistical posting (additional posting) in EC-PCA to that profit center whenever there is a debit or credit posting to the object. Sometimes a profit center cannot be determined automatically by the system during a transaction. EC-PCA lets you set up your profit centers according to product (product lines. Project  SAP AG 2004 A profit center is a management-oriented organizational unit used for internal controlling purposes. Profitability Segments Cost Center.com .Profit Center Accounting – An Internal View The goal of Profit Center Accounting is to measure the profitability of areas of responsibility within the organization. Note that profit centers are not real account assignment objects! The master records of controlling objects contain a profit center field.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. This internal view of profitability.

regions. . 15-15 Visit: www.co. Examples of characteristics are divisions. during a posting. products. Characteristic values answer the question: “What values can I have for the characteristics?”. discounts. Characteristics answer the question: “About what aspect do I want to report?”. Examples of characteristic values are Region south. and customers. and cost of sales. Region North. PRODUCT GRP Value Fields Revenues Sales. Values North Prod1 Electronics Cust1 Wholesale Bavaria Miller REGION S N W Food Bicy. © SAP AG TERP10 C G US R T P. the affected market segment called the profitability segment. Electr. discounts and returns Cost of goods sold 800 100 650 Revenue Sales. The profitability segment is generated automatically. Grp Federal Land Sales Rep.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Profitability Segment Characteristics Sales Region Product Product Group Customer Cust. surcharges. Value fields answer the question: “Which key figures do I want to track and analyze?”.com .sapeducation. Examples of value fields include gross sales. discounts and returns Cost of goods sold Profitability Segment  SAP AG 2004 The system uses the combination of characteristic values to automatically create.

Organizational Structures and Master Data: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the various organizational units used by the management accounting function.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .co. Explain the integration between the financial accounting and management accounting organizational structures.sapeducation.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-16 Visit: www. Describe the master data utilized by management accounting.

co. Explain the various methods posting to and allocating from cost centers.com .Processes in Cost Center Accounting At the conclusion of this topic.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-17 Visit: www. Define the various methods of planning against cost centers and the differences between them.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.sapeducation. Describe the typical planning steps for cost centers. you will be able to: Define the role of the cost center standard hierarchy and the various uses of cost centers.

Cost centers can be set up according to different design approaches. Use cost centers for differentiated assignment of overhead costs to organizational activities based on utilization of the relevant areas (cost determination function) and for differentiated controlling of costs arising in an organization (cost controlling function). geographic location and/or area of responsibility. As costs are incurred. spatial. Cost centers can be defined according to several different design approaches. but is a vital step for utilizing the other controlling components. These costs could include payroll costs. settlement-related. 2100 Finance & Admin. rent and utility costs. and/or responsibility-related standpoints.Standard hierarchy represents all Cost Centers per Controlling area H1 IDES Europe H2000 UK H1010 Corporate H1000 Germany H1200 Finance & Administration H1120 Corporate Services H1210 Admin. H2300 Spain H1200 Sales & Marketing H1220 Human Resource 2200 Human Resources H2100 Portugal H1400 Technical Department H1230 Purchasing 2300 Purchasing H1110 Executive Board 1110 Executive Board 1200 Canteen 1000 Corporate Services 1210 Telephone 1220 Motor Pool 1230 Power  SAP AG 2004 The cost center is an organizational unit in a controlling area representing a clearly delimited location where costs occur.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. activity-related. The cost center accounting component (CO-OM-CCA) tracks where costs occur in your organization.com . But whichever approach is selected. it should be consistent throughout the enterprise. they are assigned or posted to the appropriate cost center.co. activities or services provided. A typical approach could be for an enterprise to define a cost center for each low-level organizational unit that has responsibility for managing costs.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 15-18 Visit: www. or any other costs relevant to a given cost center. including: functional requirements. The posting and assignment of costs to cost centers not only makes managerial accounting possible. allocation criteria. You can make organizational divisions on the basis of functional. The cost center is an organizational unit in a controlling area.

in cases of automatic price calculation. Within the framework of distributions and assessments. on the basis of the planned costs. As the activity amount is evaluated with this price. © SAP AG TERP10 15-19 Visit: www. amounts or statistical key figures) predefined by the user. As a rule. planning is based on absorption costing.g. W-house Server Prod.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. as the planned activity amounts can influence planned costs. The activity type planning is an important step in Cost Center planning. i. The amount of activities can be determined either manually or be transferred from other modules.sapeducation. It is the aim of Cost Center Planning to calculate planning costs to define deviations later and to prepare the allocation to cost bearers. PP Planned Quantities Personnel Costs Planning Planned Depreciation Planned Calculatory Costs Formula Planning Manual Cost Element Planning CO PC $ Pres. for each Cost Center.e. costs that were planned on one Cost Center can be allocated according to keys (such as percentages. Planned values (such as planned personnel costs and planned depreciation) can also be transferred automatically to the Cost Centers from Human Resources HR and Assets Accounting (FI-AA). that is. such as formula planning. such as Production Planning (PP). The price per Cost Center/activity type is entered manually or. you try to allocate all costs in the overheads area to the cost bearers in a company using different procedures. Therefore.co. The delimitation process means that calculatory costs can also be charged to the Cost Centers. as well as the sender and receiver relationships are usually defined only once. Both fixed and variable costs can be planned for each area of responsibility. $ $ Planned Quantities/ Prices Overhead Costs Surcharges Transfer to Results $ CO Cost Element CEL Planning CO PA Planning to simulate internal cost flow and value creation  SAP AG 2004 The Cost Center Planning can be done manually or with the help of automatic procedures. a combined quantity and value flow is the result of the allocation of an activity.Cost Center Planning Process CO OM Overhead Costs Controlling HR FI AA Cost center structure H1 Admin. Sales Plan Allocations (e. the closing of the cost center planning also shapes price determination for the activities of the cost centers. assessment) Planned Activity Allocations Maint Cons. The advantage of this procedure is that it is easy to manage: the keys.

There is no binding sequence for the order of planning steps in Cost Center planning.co.As an alternative to activity allocations. in order to guarantee a logical process that fulfils your requirements. These procedures are also prepared in the plan and executed later in Actual. Maybe you would like to adjust this sequence to the situation in your company. The Cost Centers are then each credited with the allocated amount.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. SAP recommends. the Cost Centers can also be credited with the help of overhead rates or assessments.sapeducation. that certain general rules be observed. © SAP AG TERP10 15-20 Visit: www.com . however.

You can use the results of this plan to make adjustments to the original sales plan. If the plan cannot be met. Planned costs from HR and Assets can be transferred to cost center planning. as well as additional activity planning for Overhead Cost Controlling. sales quantity planning can be accomplished in Profitability Analysis.co. Plan activity prices are then calculated. The calculated plan activity prices go to Product Cost Planning. Cost planning is performed for cost centers and internal orders. alongside the forecasted revenues. additional resources must be obtained or the sales plan must be changed.com . the plan activity quantities are created on the basis of scheduled quantities from SOP. © SAP AG TERP10 15-21 Visit: www. The costs of goods manufactured that were calculated on the basis of the sales plan are then transferred to CO-PA. which then initiate the complete integrated planning process again. Similarly.sapeducation. which estimates the production costs of the planned products by using bills of material and routings. The activity requirements can then be created in SOP or Long Term Requirements Planning (LTP) and transferred as scheduled activities to cost center planning. to create a profit plan. A capacity-based comparison of plan quantities with production resources then takes place in SOP.Integrated Planning Process in mySAP ERP Strategic Procedure Planned Requirements Sales Planning Profit Planning Sales Template Routing Bill of Material Cost of Goods Manufactured / Sold Material Cost Estimate Production Planning Cost Center Planning Activity Input Quantity Process Input Quantity  SAP AG 2004 Business Process Activity Price Process Price In the Sales Information System (SIS). These costs are used. In cost center planning.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. the company can plan sales quantities at product or product group level for the following year. The sales plans can be compared with one another so that a single forecast can be transferred to Sales and Operations Planning (SOP).

that expense can be posted to CO as a cost if: (1) a primary cost element has been created in CO that corresponds to the expense account used in the FI journal entry. Note that there is no corresponding credit entry in the CO document. When a primary cost is initially posted into CO. As a result.sapeducation. and the receiving object is debited for the same amount.Posting from Financial Accounting to a Cost Center FI Cost origin: Cost center XY Income statement account ~~ CO Balance sheet account ~~ Controlling Object: Cost Center Cost Element (420000) Amount Cost Center Debit under a cost element  SAP AG 2004 When a journal entry is created in FI that includes an expense line item. the FI document debited a P&L account and credited a Balance Sheet account. This CO document has its own unique number and contains the following details: (1) controlling object posted to.) © SAP AG TERP10 15-22 Visit: www. it is treated as a one-sided journal entry. It is possible to drill down in either document to link to the other. a controlling document is also created. Each document has a unique document number. and (3) the amount In the above example. When a cost is moved from one controlling object to another. and (2) a valid cost center is referenced in the FI line item. such as from one cost center to another. When an FI document is created that posts to an expense (or revenue) account having a corresponding cost element.com . two separate documents are created: both an FI document as well as a CO document.co. The CO document debited the controlling object (using the corresponding primary cost element of the same number). unlike a traditional balanced financial accounting journal entry.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. (Note that as any subsequent cost movements occur within CO. the transactions creating these cost flows are balanced entries. (2) the cost element used. the sending object is credited. and a valid controlling object (such as a cost center) is identified for the expense line item.

From the aspect of the cost center. A movement type is an identification key which has important control functions in Inventory Management. The cost center is debited with the value of the goods issued using a primary cost element. this type of transaction is called material consumption. such as updating stock and consumption accounts.co. An example could be parts issued to an R & D cost center for constructing a product prototype. © SAP AG TERP10 15-23 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com . A goods issue to a cost center creates an FI transaction that debits a material consumption expense account and credits a material stock (inventory) account. you must enter a movement type to differentiate between the various categories of goods movements.sapeducation. When you enter a goods issue in the system.Posting from Materials Management to a Cost Center MM Cost origin: Cost center XY Material issued from stock FI Cost origin: Cost center XY Material consumption (400000) ~~ CO Material stock ~~ Controlling Object: Cost Center Cost Element (420000) Amount Cost Center Debit under a cost element  SAP AG 2004 Goods issue transactions posted in the Material Management component can be assigned to a cost center.

Program Program Program Order Order Order Sales Order  SAP AG 2004 Direct activity allocation deals with the measurement and allocation of a quantity of activity type units produced by a cost center. Direct activity allocation credits the sender cost center and debits the receiver object. Debits and credits use a secondary cost element (category = 43). project. Note that only a cost center can be the sender on an activity allocation.CC 10 3 5 Produktion KService Project 1 Cost Center. The receiver can be any real controlling object. To enter a direct activity allocation.sapeducation. the type of service performed (activity type). and the quantity of service provided. such as a cost center. order.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co. © SAP AG TERP10 15-24 Visit: www. A direct activity allocation is documented by creating line items from the perspectives of both sender and receiver. the object receiving the service (receiver). The allocation is valued by multiplying the quantity of activity produced by the planned activity price.Direct Activity Allocation Manufacturing 10 h IT-services Program ming 3h Administration 5h Activity Allocation xxxxxxx ……… ……… activity PrgH PrgH PrgH quantity Rec. you record the cost center providing the service (sender cost center). and so on.

The same principle applies to Periodic Repostings. Material Costs = (40/400) * 3000 = 300 Wages Costs = (40/400) * 4000 = 400 © SAP AG TERP10 15-25 Visit: www.sapeducation.com .Periodic Allocations with Sender/Receiver Relationships Sending Cost Center “Energy" Costs to be allocated: Material Wages 3000 4000 Tracing factor: M² Floor Space Receiving Cost Center “Administration" M² Floor Space: 40 Allocated Costs: Material 300 Wages 400 Examples for periodic allocation techniques: Periodic Reposting Assessment Distribution Indirect Activity Allocation Template Allocation  SAP AG 2004 Receiving Cost Center “Production" M² Floor Space: 360 Allocated Costs: Material 2700 Wages 3600 This is an example of a Sender-Receiver relationship within an Allocation Cycle. “Administration” is allocated costs of. in this case a Statistical Key Figure representing the Number of M² Floor Space that each Receiving Cost Center occupies). This allocation will be done using an appropriate Tracing Factor (a user-defined key for determining cost and quantity assignments in periodic allocations. Distributions and Assessments. The allocation cycle uses this information to determine the costs to be allocated to each Receiving Cost Center as follows: Receiving Cost Center “Administration” occupies 40 M² Floor Space Receiving Cost Center “Production” occupies 360 M² Floor Space Total number of M² Floor Space is 400 Therefore. Here. the sending Cost Center has costs to allocate to the receiving Cost Centers.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.

All costs allocated in an assessment are classified on the receiver(s) with these assessment cost elements. © SAP AG TERP10 15-26 Visit: www. Other rules are also available. Indirect Activity Allocation or Template Allocation.612000 2. Alternatively. In the example above. Line items are recorded for the sender and receiver sides in order to document the allocations in detail.Motor Pool 631000 +1.000.sapeducation. Each segment of an assessment cycle is assigned an assessment cost element (secondary cost element category 42).co.com . Similarly to a distribution. An assessment can be reversed and repeated as often as desired. Similar periodic allocations are: Distribution.- Employees 50 stat KF 3200 .Cafeteria 420000 6.000.000. KF 1000 . internal orders.∑ 9. an assessment updates the partner in the totals record. The allocation structure can be stored during segment maintenance. The original cost elements are not displayed on the receivers.000. depending on your requirements.000.631000 -9.000.Marketing 631000 +5.000. You can assign individual cost elements. an assessment allocation is useful when the breakdown of costs is unimportant to the receiver. You can restrict the allowed receiver types in Customizing. The receivers on an assessment can be other cost centers. the allocation rule uses statistical key figures to determine the allocation amount for each receiver. cost element groups or intervals to an assessment cost element.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. you can use an allocation structure to define which cost elements are to be allocated under which assessment cost elements. WBS elements. therefore. or business processes.000.Corporate Services 631000 +3. Periodic Reposting. Primary and secondary costs are allocated at period-end closing according to rules defined in the assessment cycle.Example for a periodic Allocation: Assessment 420000 Direct Labor January 416100 Electricity 612000 Maintenance 3100 . cost objects.416100 1.Assessment (Cafeteria) Allocation Rule: Statistical key figure (Employees) Employees 30 stat. Only cost centers or business processes may serve as senders in an assessment allocation.- An Assessment is designed for the allocation of primary and secondary costs from a sender cost center to receiver controlling objects. SAP AG 2004 Employees 10 stat KF 1220 .

Describe the typical planning steps for cost centers. Explain the various methods posting to and allocating from cost centers.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.co.com . Define the various methods of planning against cost centers and the differences between them.sapeducation.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-27 Visit: www.Cost Center Accounting: Topic Summary You are now able to: Define the role of the cost center standard hierarchy and the various uses of cost centers.

co.com . you will be able to: Describe the typical planning steps for internal orders.Internal Order: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Explain the various methods posting to and allocating from internal orders.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-28 Visit: www.

co. An order can be real or statistical (informational postings only). If it is a statistical posting.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .Posting to an Internal Order FI Cost origin: Cost center XY Income statement account ~~ CO Balance sheet account ~~ Controlling Object: Internal Order Order Order Internal Order Debit under a cost element Cost Element (420000) Amount  SAP AG 2004 An internal order is a bucket that allows a better view of costs that could not be itemized in detail in a cost center.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 15-29 Visit: www. the cost object that the internal order is attached to would receive the real posting.

Options: Cost element specific via settlement cost element Settlement rule to all cost elements or differentiated based on origin layout Distribution: %/amount/ equivalence number Based on settlement hierarchy  SAP AG 2004 Internal orders are usually used as an interim collector of costs and an aid to the planning. etc.. profitability segments. Settlement may occur at the end of each period. Examples of possible settlement receivers include cost centers. or may be split to multiple receivers.sapeducation. © SAP AG TERP10 15-30 Visit: www. Settlement can be structured quite flexibly with the use of the many available settlement options. An order settlement can be made to numerous different types of receivers. It is another form of periodic cost allocation. Segment G/L Account Asset Customer Order With Cost Collector . When the task is complete. It may specify that all of the costs on the order are settled to a single receiver. the costs have to be passed on to their final destination (cost center. monitoring.). and G/L accounts. A settlement rule must be defined for each order. fixed assets.com . depending on the type of order and its business purpose. . other orders. or at the end of the order's life. as long as the receivers are defined as valid in customizing and no impending system restrictions (such as locks) prevent settlement.. . and reporting processes. profitability segment. This rule is defined in the order master record.Order Settlement Orders Settlement Debits % Credits Order Balance Possible Settlement Receivers Cost Center Order Project Profit. . projects. This process is called "settlement". fixed asset.co.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

Internal Order: Topic Summary You are now able to: Describe the typical planning steps for internal orders.co.sapeducation.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.com .  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-31 Visit: www. Explain the various methods posting to and allocating from internal orders.

Define the purpose of allocations in profit center accounting. Explain how balance sheet items relate to profit centers.co. you will be able to: Explain how profit centers are a part of integrated planning.sapeducation.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-32 Visit: www.Profit Center Accounting: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.

000 50. Profit center planning involves two steps.Integrated Planning in Profit Center Accounting Profitability Analysis Projects Networks PC Profit Center Plan Sales Discounts Cost of Sales Marketing Costs Administration Costs …. the planning data is transferred to the profit centers from cost centers. 100. profitability analysis. During the planning process.co.000 15. and product cost planning. internal orders.com . Profit centers illustrate particularly well the integrated nature of business planning because the planning data is essentially generated by other applications and supplemented/modified in profit centers. The planning data can then be modified directly in the profit centers.000 10.sapeducation. You can use different plan versions to account for changes during the planning process or to enable different planning scenarios to be used for a given time frame.000 5. First.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.000 MRP/SOP t Internal Order Cost Center Business Process  SAP AG 2004 Profit center planning is an integral part of overall business planning. the individual planning areas are combined into an integrated planning network. © SAP AG TERP10 15-33 Visit: www. Profit center planning is part of short-term planning that covers one fiscal year.

You can also calculate additional key figures. You can transfer the following balance sheet items to profit centers: Fixed assets (acquisition costs and accumulated depreciation) Material stocks (raw materials. the profit center manager is responsible not only for the operating results.co. can also be used as investment centers.Balance Sheet Items in Profit Center Accounting EC-PCA Assets Work in Process Inventory Values Down Payments Online Financial Accounting Assets Work in Process Inventory Values Down Payments Receivables Payables  SAP AG 2004 If you assign balance sheet items to profit centers. Profit centers. therefore.com .nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. and finished products) Work in process Payables and receivables © SAP AG TERP10 15-34 Visit: www. for example. such as return on investment. but also for its fixed assets.sapeducation. semi finished products.

Explain how balance sheet items relate to profit centers.co.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-35 Visit: www.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail.Profit Center Accounting: Topic Summary You are now able to: Explain how profit centers are a part of integrated planning. Define the purpose of allocations in profit center accounting.com .sapeducation.

Profitability Analysis: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.com . Define the function of period-end closing for profitability analysis.sapeducation. Explain the role of planning in CO-PA. Explain how to use the drilldown report capability in CO-PA.  SAP AG 2004 © SAP AG TERP10 15-36 Visit: www.co. you will be able to: Define the purpose of profitability analysis.nr Contact for Buying any SAP Module Materials: sapmaterials4u@gmail. Describe postings to a profitability segment.

etc.co. and any defined measures of profitability. geographic areas. The objective of CO-PA is to support sales.g. For example. Cost of Sales. you will have broad flexibility to choose whichever characteristics are relevant for defining your company's market segments. you can define which types of revenue and expense/cost categories should be used to determine a value for gross margin according to your company's requirements. Distribution Channel Billing Document in Sales Order Management  SAP AG 2004 Profitability Analysis in Management Accounting Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) enables you to analyze profits and contribution margins for market segments of your company. and corporate-wide planning and decision-making. Here again. Product. product management. For example. customers. product groups. Each unique combination of characteristic values (e. sales of product A to customer Y) defines a profitability segment. calculated according to their individual requirements. using an external view from a market-oriented perspective. sales management vs. customer groups. CO-PA provides a multidimensi